STORET  USER  HANDBOOK
                  THE
             RIGHT ANSWERS
                 FOR
             STORET USERS
               VOLUME 2
 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
        WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
                      HANDBOOK ORGANIZATION
STORZT is a computerized data base system maintained  by  the  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA) for the STOrage and
RETrieval of data relating to the quality of the waterways within
and contiguous to the United States.  This STORET User Handbook
serves as the primary written source  for both general and
detailed information on the concent and capabilities  of  t'hi-s
system, and was prepared to help STORET users learn and  utilize
its many features.

The STORET User Handbook is divided by b.lue  tabbed sheets  into
parts, which are  further divided into chapters, 'and into sect,ions
within chapters.  Parts include  an OVERVIEW  (which provide^  a '"
general introduction to the development, content, and us.e  of the
STORET system), and a separate part for each of  the pri.nciple
files within STORET, such as the Water Quality File and  the
Municipal Waste Inventory File.

The STORET User Assistance Section of the Monitoring  and Data'
Support Division, Office of Water and Hazardous  Materials  at EPA
Headquarters in Washington, D.C., maintains  this Handbook,  as
well as a list of individuals who have been  provided  with  a  copy
of the document.-  Handbook users should use  the  change-of-address'
cards  to notify STORET User Assistance of any change  in  their
address or phone  number.   Initial releases of new material,  as
well as updates to  existing documentation, are distributed
automatically  to  individuals who appear on the  list of  Handbook
owners.

Following this Handbook Organization  page  is a page titled
'Record of Handbook Updates'.  Users  are encouraged to utilize
this page to record all changes  made  to their copy of the
Handbook, thereby providing for  later reference  an up-to-date
status of their Handbook.  Following  the  'Record of Handbook
Updates' page  is  a  set of pre-addressed, pre-stamped  Error
Discovery forms provided as a convenient vehicle oy which
Handbook users can  advise STORET User Assistance of any  ejrrors  or
other  appropriate comments relative  to the content ..of the
Handbook.

We hope  that you  find  this Handbook  useful,  and  that.it  helps you
learn  and utilize STORET efficiently  and cost^effecti-vely."'"Your
comments and suggestions on how  to  further  improve  th.e -H'aridJsdbk
to better serve your needs are always welcome.  •-.For'-.further
information  on  this Handbook, please  contact STORET ..User
Assistance  in  Washington, D.C. on  (202) 426-7792.
                                           STORET User' Assistance

-------
                   RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES
Updates to the STORET User Handbook will be  issued periodically
to revise or expand the Handbook information.  Handbook  updates
will be distributed to all Handbook users-of-record.   Users  are
urged tp_ integrate all updates into their Handbook immediately
upon re'c'eipt, and to record all such changes to  this  Record  of
Handbook Updates form.  This record will serve as a reference  to
determine the updated status of the Handbook.  Each update will
be transmitted by a cover letter which will  date and  number  the
update, and which will provide a summary of  the  changes
documented by the update.  These cover letters should be placed
behind this Record of Handbook Updates page  for  later reference.
The availability of all updates will be contained  in
HELP d;ata set named HANDBOOK., and will be advertised
computer center periodical SIGNON.
                                                      the  STORET
                                                      in EPA ' s
 UPDATE
 NO.
          DATE OF
          UPDATE
 HIGHLIGHTS  OF  UPDATE
HANDBOOK UPDATED
                               BY
        DATE
 '. 4
          i-eo  //
          Jun  77
          Jan 79

          Apr 79


          May 79
          Jul 79
Overview,  0V
Handbook  Coyer,  front  matter
Sections  1-4  and 6,  WQ-RET
Appendices, WQ-RET  and WQ
Data  Entry, WQ-DE
Introduction.,  WQ-NTRO
File  Structure,  WQ-FS
Remark  codes  WQ-DE,  WQ-RET
New keyword STCNTY,  WQ-RET
Sections  5 and 7, WQ-RET
Appendices F  and G,  WQ
Tabs: 0V,  WQ,  APPENDICES
Flow  Data File,  FL
Handbook  Covers,  Volume 2
Tab:  WQ-RET,  Cont
Appendix  7, WQ-RET
Second  Edition of Basic
Retrieval
documentation: Sections 1,
2,  3, 4,  and  6 and
Appendices 1,  2,  3,  4, 5,
and 6 of  Chapter WQ-RET;
'Appendices A,  B,  C,  D, and
,-E  of  Part--WQ.
                                      11
                                                       Revised  7/79

-------
RECORD OF HANDBOOK UPDATES, Continued
 UPDAT:
 NO. .
DATE OF
UPDATE
HIGHLIGHTS OF UPDATE
HANDBOOK UPDATED.
                             3Y
         DATE
i  5
NOV 79
Appendix J, Part WQ
Parts EF and FK
Index to Part WQ
                              111
                                              Issued "11/79

-------
PART




COMMENTS
CHAPTER





SECTION





NAME
PAGE





ERROR

!
i

:
ORGANIZATION PHONE
3
EPA H«, F~*> 7500-22 (4-77)
 STORE! USER HANDBOOK ERROR
 DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION





PART





CHAPTER





SECTION




COMMENTS
NAME
PACE




ERROR





ORGANIZATION PHONE
EPA Mq Form 7500-22 (4-77)
STORET USER HANDBOOK ERROR
DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION
PART




CHAPTER




SECTION




COMMENTS
NAME
PAGE




ERROR





ORGANIZATION PHONE
EPA Hq Farm 7500.22(4-77)
STORET USER HANDBOOK ERROR
DISCOVERY NOTIFICATION

-------
            UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION  AGENCY
         WASHINGTON, O.C. 20*60
           OFFIC IAL BUSINESS
     PSNAL.TY FOP PRIVATE USE J300
   AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
=OSTACe AND FEES =A.C
  U.5- ENVIRONMENTAL
  PROTECTION AGENCY

       E = »-33!
                                    L' S  Environmental Protection  Aeencv
                                    Office of Wafer and Hazardous  Materials
                                    Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH-553/
                                    -in I \1. St.. S.'.V.
                                    Washington. P.C  20-160
            UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL = ROTECTION  AGENCY
         WASHINGTON. O.C. 20460
     . j E AS; - EES = a-:
           OFCIC IAL BUSINESS
     PENALLY "OR PRIVATE USE $300
    AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
                                   U.S  F.nvirontnental Protection Agencv
                                   Office of Water and Hazardous Materials
                                   Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH-553)
                                   401 M. St.. S.'.V.
                                   Washington.  D.C.  20460
            UNITED STATES
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
        ' WASHINGTON. O.C. 20460
           OFFICIAL 3U3INES3
     PENALTY POR PRIVATE USE 1300
   AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID
  U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL
  PROTECTION AOENCY
        EP A-333
                                   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                                   Office of Water and Hazardous Materials
                                   Monitoring and Data Support Division (WH~553)
                                   401 M. St.. S.W.
                                   Washington, D.C. 20460

-------
                                                                o
                                                                <
         STORET USER HANDBOOK
                 PART
                  0V
               OVERVIEW
 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
        WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
            STORET USER HANDBOOK
                   PART 0V

                  OVERVIEW
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides
an overview of the development, content, and
capabilities of the STORET water quality data
base system and describes several of the uses
made of this system by those concerned and
involved with the abatement and control of
water pollution.
    U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
   OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
           WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS


Chapter                     Subject                        Page

 OV-1          INTRODUCTION                                1- 1

 OV-2          FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY       2- 1
               2.1  Highlights of America's Water
                    Quality Legislation                    2- 1
               2.2  The Charter of EPA                     2- 1
               2.3  Public Law 92-500                      2- 2
               2.4  STORET and PL 92-500                   2- 3

 OV-3          STORET:  ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND
               OPERATION                                   3- 1
               3.1  A History of STORET                    3- 1
               3.2  What STORET Is                         3-2
               3.3  STORET and the Computer                3- 3

 OV-4          THE WATER QUALITY FILE                      4- 1
               4.1  Introduction                           4- 1
               4.2  What Is The Water Quality File?        4- 1
               4.3  The Data in the WQF                    4- 1
               4.4  Who Collects and Uses WQF Data?        4- 3
               4.5  WQF Data Entry Procedures              4- 3
               4.6  WQF Output Alternatives                4- 4

 OV-5          USES MADE OF STORET                         5- 1
               5.1  Introduction                           5- 1
               5.2  Progress Reporting/Water Quality File  5- 2
               5.3  Standards and Criteria/Water Quality
                    File                                   5- 3
               5.4  Toxic Substances/Water Quality File    5- 4
               5.5  Basin Planning/Water Quality File      5- 5
               5.6  Research/Water Quality File            5- 6
               5.7  Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
                    Inventory File                         5- 8
               5.8  Biological Data Summaries/Fish
                    Kill File                              5- 9
               5.9  Award Summaries/Contract Awards File   5-10

 OV-6          SUPPORT OF STORET USERS                     6- 1
               6.1  How to Become a STORET User            6- 1
               6.2  STORET User Support Services           6- 2
               6.3  Regional STORET Representatives        6- 6
                               0V

-------
ITORET USER HANDBOOK
      PART 0V




     OVERVIEW
   CHAPTER OV-1




   INTRODUCTION
          0V

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              OV-1

                          INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook provides an overview of the
development, content, functions, and capabilities of the STORET
water quality data base system, and describes some of the popular
uses made today of this system by those concerned and involved
with the abatement and control of water pollution.

This part was not intended to be a detailed reference document.
For detailed, technical information on STORET, please reference
the other parts of this Handbook—tabbed WQ for the Water Quality
File, MW for the Municipal Waste Inventory File, and so forth.
They contain complete, detailed information on data input
procedures, retrieval options, program and keyword
specifications, and other specific technical information of
particular interest to a STORET user.  For information on the
availability of one or more of these parts, please contact STORET
User Assistance in Washington, D.C.
                              1-1

-------
            STORET USER HANDBOOK
                   PART 0V

                  OVERVIEW
                CHAPTER OV-2

    FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
    This chapter highlights the principal
    Federal legislation enacted by our
    Government to restore and maintain
    the quality of our Nation's waters.
              CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section               Subject               Page

  2.1      Highlights of America's Water
           Quality Legislation               2-1
  2.2      The Charter of EPA                2-1
  2.3      Public Law 92-500                 2-2
  2.4      STORET and PL 92-500              2-3
                     0V

-------
2.1
                              CHAPTER
                               OV-2

               FEDERAL LEGISLATION AND WATER QUALITY
HIGHLIGHTS OF  AMERICA'S WATER QUALITY  LEGISLATION
Our Nation's  legislative efforts  to restore and maintain the
quality of  its waters date back  to  the late 1800s when  Congress
passed the  River and Harbor Act  of  1886, and the Refuse Act of
1899.  This latter law required  states,  through the  U.S.  Army
Corps of Engineers, to obtain permits for discharges  into the
Nation'.s waters.  Since this beginning,  almost a hundred years
ago, a number of other laws and  amendments to existing  laws
relating to water quality have been enacted, administered over
the years by  a number of different  government organizations.  One
good example  would be the Federal Water  Pollution Control Act
Amendments  of 1956 (PL-660), which  authorizes the Federal
government  to award grants to municipalities to help  finance
construction  of sewage treatment  facilities.  The evolution of
these legislative endeavors culminated in the creation, in 1970,
of the Environmental Protection  Agency,  and the enactment, in
1972, of the  Water Pollution Control Act Amendments  of  1972, the
most complete and extensive water pollution control  program ever
enacted to  clean up our Country's waterways.
2.2
THE CHARTER  OF EPA
To protect  and enhance our Nation's environment today  and for
future generations to the maximum extent possible  under  the laws
enacted  by  Congress—that is  the  charter of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.   EPA's mandate is  to  mount an
integrated,  coordinated attack  on environmental pollution in
cooperation with state and local  governments, private  and public
groups,  individuals, and educational institutions.
                      Title 3-THE PRESIDENT
                      Reorganization Plan No. 3 of 1970
              Prepared by the President and transmitted to the Rrnate. and the Howe
               of Repretentatwet in Congrett aniemblfd, July 9, 1970 pursuant to
               the provisions of chapter 9 of title 6 of t/tf. United Statei Code.1

               ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION  AGENCY
               SECTION 1. Ettablithment of Agency, (s) There is hereby established
              the Environmental Protection Agency, hereinafter referred to as tho
              -Agency."
                                2-1

-------
      EPA vas created  because of increasing public and  governmental
      awareness and  concern about the  dangers to the health and welfare
      of Americans caused by pollution.   Established in December 1970
      as an independent agency pursuant  to the Government's
      Reorganization Plan No. 3 of  1970,  EPA brought together, in a
      single Federal agency, many environmental protection programs
      previously carried out by more than a dozen different departments
      and organizations within the  Government.  EPA's responsibilities
      encompass a range of environmental  concerns including air
      pollution, solid waste management,  pesticides, noise pollution,
      radiation, and of course, water  pollution.  As an independent
      regulatory agency,-EPA has no conflicting obligation to promote
      agriculture, commerce, or industry.  It has only  one mission—to
      protect and enhance our environment.

      The next section describes Public  Law 92-500, one of the most
      comprehensive  pieces of legislation ever enacted  to contend with
      water pollution  within the United  States.  EPA is the
      administrator  of this law.
SS
D
W
X
2.3
PUBLIC LAW  92-500
      Our Nation's  current program  to  prevent, reduce,  and eliminate
      water pollution  is carried out under the Federal  Water Pollution
      Control Act Amendments of 1972,  a public law enacted in October
      1972 by the Second Session of the 92nd Congress.   Known as PL 92-
      500, this Federal law built upon and improved  the water pollution
      control program  initiated by  Congress in 1948  and amended
      periodically  in  the '50s and  '60s.  The stated objective of
      Congress in enacting this law was to restore and  maintain the
      chemical, physical, and biological integrity of the Nation's
      waters—in other words, to clean up, once and  for all, our
      rivers, lakes and streams.
                             Public Law 92-500
                            92nd Congress, S. 2770
                              October 18, 1972
                                                      86 STAT. 816
                        To amend the Federal Water Pollution Control Art.

                   Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
                  l.'nited Statet of America in Congrens assembled, That this Act may be federal Water
                  cited as the "Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of Pollution Con-
                  1972"                                 tpol Act Amend-
                   SEC. 2. The Federal Water Pollution Control Act is amended to read 70"£*a£f ^j2'
                  as follows:                               84 Stat! 91.'
                                                      33 USC 1151
                                                      not e •
                                      2-2

-------
PL 92-500 proclaimed two goals for the Nation:  to achieve,
wherever attainable by July 1983, an interim level of water
quality which provides for the protection and propagation of
fish, shellfish, and wildlife, and which provides for recreation
in and on the water; and to eliminate totally, by 1985, the
discharge of any and all pollutants into navigable waters.

To achieve these national goals, as well as other provisions and
policies as set forth in the legislation, the law provided for
the collection and dissemination of basic water quality data by
EPA in cooperation with other Federal departments and agencies,
and with public or private institutions and organizations
concerned with water pollution control and abatement.  STORET,
EPA's computerized water quality data base system, has amply
demonstrated its utility to help organizations fulfill their
obligations under this law.

The following section briefly describes some of the ways STORET
is used to satisfy the requirements of the different sections or
titles of PL 92-500.
2.4       STORET and PL 92-500

PL 92-500 is the most comprehensive National program ever enacted
by our country to prevent, reduce, and eventually eliminate water
pollution within the United States.  This law sets forth
guidelines for the control of industrial and municipal water
pollution, expands water standards, establishes a new system of
permits for discharges into the Nation's waters, and creates a
stringent enforcement machinery and heavy penalties for
violators.  The following paragraphs briefly describe some of the
roles that STORET can play in helping government agencies achieve
the requirements established by the various provisions of PL 92-
500.
Title I—Research and Related Programs

          Section 104 of this Title is frequently cited as a
          legislative basis for STORET because of its directives
          to operate a national water quality surveillance
          system, to render technical services, and to collect
          and disseminate water quality data.  Other sections of
          Title I outline requirements which are today being
          fulfilled, if in part, by use of STORET.  An example
          would be the EPA Grosse lie Laboratory's Research
          Program to improve the water quality of the Great Lakes
          as set forth under Section 108.
                              2-3

-------
Title II—Grants for Construction of Treatment Plants

          The purpose of this Title is to require and to assist
          the development and implementation of waste treatment
          management plans and practices.  STORET serves as an
          integral part of this planning and review process.
          STORET provides quantitative data upon which
          projections can be based concerning stream waste load
          capacities and incipient overloading, and consequently
          helps answer where and when waste treatment facilities
          should be constructed.  STORET Ihelps to determine the
          efficiency of the operation and maintenance of
          treatment works constructed with grants as compared to
          the efficiency planned at the time the grant was made
          (Section 210).  Further, STORET contributes in the
          preparation of areawide water quality management plans
          within a river basin as required by Congress under
          Section 208.
Title III—Standards and Enforcement

          This Title is concerned primarily with determining
          reasonable standards that will assure timely progress
          toward the attainment of the 1983 and 1985 water
          quality goals, and toward establishment of procedures
          for enforcement of these standards.  A number of STORET
          report programs help states trace their progress of
          water quality improvement efforts, as required by
          Section 303.  Also, STORET has become an indispensable
          source of information in the preparation of reports on
          the condition of the Nation's water quality (Sections
          305a and 305b).


Title IV—Permits and Licenses

          The Law establishes a new system of permits for
          discharges into the Nation's waters, replacing the 1899
          Refuse Act permit program.  No discharge of any
          pollutant from any point source is allowed without a
          permit, a legal document which establishes the limits
          of allowable discharges.  Permits are granted to
          individual dischargers only after they show that their
          effluents will not contaminate a waterway in excess of
          established water quality standards, or will not lower
          its existing quality.  Data within STORET can be
          analyzed to assure compliance with these provisions,
          and to identify sources of effluent violations.
                              2-4

-------
Over 80 percent of all current use of STORET is directly related
to implementing the various Sections of PL 92-500.  Obviously,
STORET plays a vital and active role in the operational aspects
of our Nation's water pollution control programs.


The following chapters trace the evolution of the STORET system,
and further describe some of the many ways it is utilized to
achieve the objectives and requirements of PL 92-500.
                              2-5

-------
              STORET USER HANDBOOK
                     PART 0V

                    OVERVIEW
                  CHAPTER OV-3

STORET:  ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
     This chapter provides a brief history of
     the development of the STORET system,
     along with a description of the system
     itself.
                CHAPTER CONTENTS
  Section               Subject               Page

    3.1      A History of STORET               3-1
    3.2      What STORET Is                    3-2
    3.3      STORET and The Computer           3-3
                        0V

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              OV-3

        STORET:  ITS EVOLUTION, DEFINITION, AND OPERATION
3.1       A HISTORY OF STORET

Prior to the 1960s, water quality data collected by local, state,
and Federal agencies could not be easily presented in uniform
format.  (A very likely factor contributing to this situation was
the lack of a sophisticated computer capability.)   More often
than not, an organization that secured data for one particular
study or requirement gave little thought to the possible reuse of
the information by others.  Consequently, most data reports were
of limited use, and required costly and time consuming extraction
and analysis in order to be applied to situations other than
those of first concern.

But this situation soon changed as water pollution control
personnel became increasingly aware of the importance of sound
data handling and processing systems.  The basic STORET concept
for the storage and retrieval of water quality data evolved from
ideas brought together in a brief informal conference held in
August 1961 in the Basic Data Branch, Division of Water Supply
and Pollution Control, of the U.S. Public Health Service.  This
concept established a single coding structure for water quality
data which allowed the data to be stored in a computer and
ultimately made available for others to use.  When initially
implemented on a Public Health Service Honeywell computer in
Cincinnati in 1964, the system contained data on approximately
140 sampling locations.

As the number of stations grew, the need to handle the rapidly
expanding volume of data and number of users more efficiently
became clearly evident.  Then, in 1966, an Executive Order
transferred the jurisdiction of water pollution control from the
U.S. Public Health Service to the Federal Water Pollution Control
Administration within the Department of the Interior.  (This
organization was later renamed the Federal Water Quality
Administration.)  With this agency realignment, the system was
moved from the tape-oriented Honeywell system to a random access
IBM system operated and maintained by the Department of the
Interior.  In 1968, users were able, for the first time, to use
modern medium-speed card reading terminals to communicate with
the central STORET system from terminals located in each of EPA's
regional offices.

The STORET system was improved in many other ways over this
period of time.  The original retrieval method, which selected
stations based upon their River Mile Indices, a hydrologic coding
scheme, was expanded to allow retrievals by latitude and
longitude.  New reporting and analytical tools were implemented
as well as less complex input procedures.

                              3-1

-------
Various display capabilities were added including the plotting
and microfilming of outputs.  Systems and programs were developed
to provide information and reporting procedures on municipal and
industrial waste treatment practices, sewage plant construction,
and fish kills.

About the time the Federal Water Quality Administration was
folded into a totally independent agency (EPA), the STORET system
began to exceed the capabilities of the Interior data center.
So, in 1969, the STORET system was placed on a commercial time-
sharing system.  This move greatly expanded the accessibility of
the STORET data base (via convenient low-speed keyboard type
terminals) to state and local agencies everywhere.

The advent of PL 92-500 in 1972 dramatically increased the need
for the capabilities provided by STORET.  The amount of data
stored within the system continues to expand, as does its
versatility to provide the information needed by its users.
Thus, more than ever before, STORET is fulfilling a vital role
for those individuals and organizations concerned with the
control and improvement of our Nation's water quality.


3.2       WHAT STORET IS

STORET is an acronym used to identify the computerized data base
system maintained by EPA for the STOrage and RETrieval of data
relating to the quality of the waterways within and contiguous to
the United States.  The system encompasses not only the
centralized data base of water quality data, but also the
associated software for storing and retrieving data on water
quality, water quality standards, point sources of pollution,
pollution-caused fish kills, waste abatement needs,
implementation schedules, and many other water quality related
items.  The system is used by Federal, state, and local water
quality agencies to solve such problems as defining the causes
and effects of water pollution, measuring compliance with water
quality standards, checking the status of waste treatment plant
needs, and determining pollution trends.

A Collection of Programs

          To input, retrieve, and analyze STORET data, users are
          provided with a collection of related computer programs
          and program elements which are activated or executed by
          commands or control cards entered by users from their
          computer terminals.  The original programs of the
          system were developed for the storage, retrieval, and
          analysis of water quality data.  The Water Quality File
          (WQF) is currently the most widely used of the STORET
          files, and is described further in the following
          chapter.
                              3-2

-------
          As the STORET system grew, additional programs were
          added for the storing and retrieving of other types of
          data.  Data files within this group include the
          Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill File, the
          Contract Awards File, and others.
A Central Repository
          Water quality data is very expensive to collect, and it
          has long been recognized that this data should not
          simply be collected for a one-time use, but rather that
          the data should be available, whenever possible, for
          subsequent use by people and purposes other than those
          initially responsible for the data collection.
          Multiple use of data can lead to tremendous savings,
          over the long run, if the data is available when and
          where it is needed, and in the right format.
          Furthermore, if the data is stored properly, it can be
          reused at a later time to evaluate changes and trends.
          STORET serves as a central repository for all water
          quality and related data collected by EPA and many
          other contributing agencies and organizations.  States
          and other organizations can use the data for their own
          local pollution abatement efforts, while those
          concerned with national programs can review the data in
          broader perspectives.  The pooling of data into a
          central data base contributes significantly to the
          value of the data base through the benefits of multiple
          use and sharing of data.


An Analytical Tool

          By itself, water quality data has limited usefulness.
          In order to convert data to information, the data must
          be statistically analyzed and reviewed, bearing in mind
          the nature of the problem under attack, the kind of
          information relevant to a solution, and the special
          characteristics of the data being used.  STORET,
          therefore, in addition to being a repository of water
          quality data, also provides extensive analytical
          software to aid users in converting raw data to
          meaningful information.  The standard and customized
          retrieval programs which make up this collection of
          analytical software are described in detail within
          other parts of this Handbook.


3.3       STORET AND THE COMPUTER

The utilization of computer technology has been an integral part
of the design, growth, and use of the STORET system, tracing back
to the initial development of the system in the early 1960s.  The
first system on which STORET was implemented was a tape-oriented

                              3-3

-------
Honeywell computer located at the Public Health Service offices
in Cincinnati, Ohio.  Use of this system was totally in the batch
mode, i.e., all input and output was performed by computer
operators physically located at the computer facility.
Individuals located outside the Cincinnati area had no
alternative but to phone or mail in their data and/or requests
for processing.  After a batch run was performed, the results
were then mailed back to the requestor.

Today, the STORET system runs on a large-scale, third generation
IBM computer system which can easily accommodate the many
observations of water quality data available in the system, and
which can support a large number of users who are simultaneously
utilizing the system from remote terminals located in their
offices.  The computer system is offered by a commercial time-
sharing service company whose primary business is to provide
remote processing services to its subscribers or clients.
Typically, commercial computer service organizations are very
quick to integrate the latest hardware components and software
releases into their user-available services, thereby passing on
to the users the benefits of the latest available computer
technology.  STORET is updated and modified to take advantage of
these advances in computer technology.
                               3-4

-------
            STORET USER HANDBOOK
                   PART 0V

                  OVERVIEW
                CHAPTER OV-4

           THE WATER QUALITY FILE
      This chapter presents a general
      description of STORET's Water
      Quality File:  what it is,  what
      data it contains, who uses  the
      data, and how the data can  be
      retrieved.
              CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section               Subject

  4.1      Introduction
  4.2      What is the Water Quality File?
  4.3      The Data in the WQF
  4.4      Who Collects and Uses WQF Data?
  4.5      WQF Data Entry Procedures
  4.6      WQF Output Alternatives
                       0V

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              OV-4

                     THE WATER QUALITY FILE
4.1
INTRODUCTION
The Water Quality File is the largest file within STORET in terms
of amount of data stored.  Due to the size of the WQF relative to
the other STORET files, and due to the extensive use made of its
data, the WQF is described in somewhat more detail in this
OVERVIEW.  Other parts of this Handbook describe each of STORET's
files in considerable detail.
4.2
WHAT IS THE WATER QUALITY FILE?
The WQF is a collection of data relating to the quality of the
waterways within and contiguous to the United States.  This data
is gathered by a process called water quality monitoring whereby
samples are taken of water from streams, rivers, lakes, and other
bodies of water.  These samples are then analyzed within a
laboratory to determine the presence, and if present the amount,
of pollutants and other particulates within the samples.  The
findings of these analyses are stored as data in the WQF.
4.3
THE DATA IN THE WQF
The information within the WQF consists of two basic types of
data: station data, which describes and categorizes the
geographical location of where a sample has been taken; and
parametric data, which describes the conditions under which a
sample was taken (such as date, time, and depth) as well as the
results of the sample analyses.

The number of unique collection points, or stations, in the WQF has
grown significantly over the years, from about 150 in 1964 to over
200,000 in 1976.  The shadings of
the map reflect the relative con-
centrations of these sampling
stations across the United
States.  Station data may
include the following types of
station description information:
a unique station identification
number; the latitude and
longitude of a station's location;
the state and county codes iden-
tifying the station's political
location; a River Mile Index
identifying the station's hydrologic
                              4-1

-------
location; the major and minor  river  basins  in which the station
is located; as well as other station identification codes and
descriptive information.

Some 1800 unique water quality parameters  are defined within
STORET.  Approximately 80  percent  of the 40 million individual
observations available within  the  system pertain to approximately
200 of these parameters which  are  grouped  into the general
categories shown in the table  below.   A single observation
represents a measurement of a  single parameter at a specific
location, or station, at a specific  point  in time.
          PRIOR TO 1966

      ^| 1966-1970

      I   11971-1975
                       PARAMETER GROUPS
                               4-2

-------
4.4       WHO COLLECTS AND USES WOF DATA?

Many individuals and organizations actively participate in the
collection, storage, retrieval, and analysis of the data in the
WQF.  Information is gathered through cooperative programs
involving EPA, state water pollution control authorities, and
other governmental agencies covering over 3.5 million miles of
rivers and streams, the Great Lakes, and coastal areas.  Federal,
state, and local water quality control agencies utilize the WQF
to define the causes and effects of water pollution, to measure
compliance with water quality standards, and to determine
pollution trends.  Many states utilize the WQF to help comply
with the reporting requirements of PL 92-500.  The U.S.
Geological Survey, the U.S. Forest Service, the U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers, the Bureau of Reclamation, and the Tennessee Valley
Authority all utilize STORET's WQF in their water quality
monitoring efforts.


4.5       WQF DATA ENTRY PROCEDURES

Data may be entered into the Water Quality File via several
methods.  These include keypunching data on cards and
transmitting the data via a medium-speed card reading terminal,
and entering data directly via a low-speed keyboard terminal.

Station data is screened by STORET to insure its validity for the
locations being specified.  Edit checking is automatically
performed by the system on approximately 200 of the most
frequently sampled water quality parameters to preclude the
storing of erroneous values.

Once entered and permanently stored in the system, users may
change or delete any incorrect data, using the same procedures
available to input data.
                              4-3

-------
4.6
WQF OUTPUT ALTERNATIVES
The array of representative reports
pictured here exemplifies the ver-
satility of STORET and its water
quality data to help users prepare
a myriad of detailed, summary, or
exception reports relative to
their specific areas or locations
of interest.  Data reported can
reflect the latest, most current
information available, or it can
draw upon the historical depth of
the data, going back as far as
the '50s.  Most users obtain
their reports from small portable
computer terminals conveniently
located in or near their offices.

Output alternatives include tabular
listings of data values, statistical
summaries of parameter values, and
a number of plotting techniques,
including line printer or precision
plots of sample values or statisti-
cal analyses.  Plotting capabilities
also include station location plots
which readily illustrate monitoring coverage over a selected
geographical area.  Violations to established water quality
standards, on an individual or summary basis, may be reported.

In addition to printed and plotted output, output may also be
placed on tape or disk for subsequent use by user-written
programs or by other application software.

Station selection options are extensive.  An area of interest can
be defined by a set of latitude/longitude coordinates (thereby
describing a polygon enclosing the desired area), or by state,
county, or basin designations.  One or more individual stations
can be selected by specifying their station identification
numbers.  And stations may be chosen based upon  the presence or
absence of one or more specific parameters, or on prescribed
values of the designated parameters.

Users can write their own programs to perform specific analyses
or to present their data in any desired format.  Additional
output alternatives are anticipated as the capabilities of the
WQF retrieval programs are expanded and enhanced.
                              4-4

-------
                 STORET USER HANDBOOK
                        PART 0V

                       OVERVIEW
                     CHAPTER OV-5

                  USES MADE OF STORET
           This chapter highlights a number
           of uses made today of the STORET
           system.
                   CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section                    Subject                     Page

  5.1       Introduction                               5- 1
  5.2       Progress Reporting/Water Quality Pile      5- 2
  5.3       Standards and Criteria/Water Quality File  5- 3
  5.4       Toxic Substances/Water Quality File        5- 4
  5.5       Basin Planning/Water Quality File          5- 5
  5.6       Research/Water Quality File                5- 6
  5.7       Waste Facilities/Municipal Waste
            Inventory File                             5- 8
  5.8       Biological Data Summaries/Fish Kill File   5- 9
  5.9       Award Summaries/Contract Awards File       5-10
                           0V

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              OV-5

                       USES MADE OF STORET
5.1       INTRODUCTION

STORET is utilized by a variety of governmental agencies and
other organizations to achieve numerous objectives relating to
water quality assessment and management.  New uses are conceived
every day to solve new problems or to perform different analyses
of data in light of changing or emerging water quality
situations.

In addition to the several examples portrayed on the remaining
paqes of this chapter, STORET can be used to do any of the
following:

          To detect changes in pollutants that could change
          ambient criteria/standards.

          To help promote water quality programs by
          substantiating the effectiveness of other similar
          programs.

          To help justify budget requests for water quality
          programs.

          To help cut sampling costs by coordinating efforts with
          other organizations.

          To provide a repository for data collection efforts.

          To help identify where monitoring efforts are needed,
          thereby determining where funds need to be allocated.

          To help design overall programs based upon the
          successes of others.

          To help complete water quality management basin plans.

          To help prepare fact sheets required for permit
          processing.

          To detect changes in pollutants that could change
          existing permits.

The following sections of this chapter describe in more detail
several specific uses made of four of STORET's files:  the Water
Quality File, the Municipal Waste Inventory File, the Fish Kill
File, and the Contract Awards File.
                              5-1

-------
5.2
PROGRESS REPORTING/WATER QUALITY  FILE
Under Section 305(b)  of  PL  92-500,  states are required to submit
annual reports  to EPA and Congress  on the pollution of the
states! waters—its  nature,  extent, recommendations for control,
and the cost of these controls.   STORET is the primary way many
sta,tes have found to perform data analyses for these reports.

One of the most valuable methods of reporting and analyzing water
quality for 305(b) reports  is the time series analysis.  STORET
is ideally suited for presenting several years of data for
comparison.  A  good  example  is the  graph shown below from a
recent State of Michigan report.  From this report, the State
concluded that  overall water quality was improving on the Raisin
River near Monroe, Michigan.

Another effective evaluation technique is a 'before and after1
analysis.  EPA's Region  VIII office used STORET to evaluate a
sewage treatment plant on Fountain  Creek below Colorado Springs
which was activated  in late  1972.  The data in STORET collected
prior and subsequent to  the  implementation of the new plant were
compared.  The  number of violations for dissolved oxygen had
dr.opped from 53 percent  to  7 percent, for dissolved solids from
59 percent to 33 percent, for BOD from 85 percent to 73 percent,
and for fecal coliform from  89 percent to 58 percent.  Similar
improvement occurred and was demonstrated when a sewage treatment
plant was built in the Fargo, North Dakota area.

These examples  show  the  applicability of using the data in STORET
to demonstrate  progress  either from an overall point of view or
from the viewpoint of a  single effort.  As practices become more
sophisticated,  these reports should begin to reflect such things
as the effects  of non-point  sources, and the pollution of ground-
waters.
                        RAISIN RIVER AT MONROE
           x
           UJ
           Q
           O

           o:
           UJ
   100.-

    90.-

    80.

    70.

    60.-

    50.

    40.

    30.

    20^

    10.
                                            STN = 580046
                  THE LINE OF BEST FIT SHOWS IMPROVING WATER QUALITY
                  OVER TIME — AS MEASURED BY THE WATER QUALITY INDEX
                69    70    71    72    73    74
                         'TIME OF OBSERVATION


                               5-2
                                               75
                                                    76

-------
5.3
STANDARDS AND CRITERIA/WATER QUALITY FILE
Under PL 92-500, the states have established specific water
quality standards for all navigable waterways which  must  be  met
in order for the water to be used for  its  intended purposes,
consistent with the 1983 goals of water quality.  Once  standards
have been established by states in accordance with national
criteria, it is necessary to monitor the effect of water
pollution abatement and control activities  relative  to  those
criteria.  A number of STORET report programs can be used such  as
the ones pictured below, to trace the  progress of water quality
improvement efforts.  These reports were generated by the
execution of the WQF retrieval program STAND.
               VIOLATIONS SUMMARY
                                                    VIOLATIONS WITH
                                                      SUPPORTING
                                                      PARAMETERS
                   VIOLATIONS LIST
                               5-3

-------
5.4
TOXIC SUBSTANCES/WATER QUALITY FILE
Although many  substances are potentially toxic  to  aquatic life
and other organisms  when present in sufficient  concentration for
a sufficient period  of time, the term toxic substances  generally
refers to those  substances which are dangerous  even  in  very low
concentration—substances such as meicury, cadmium,  and
toxaphene.  To protect the public health and welfare, EPA is
empowered to restrain discharges of any new pollutants  which
present an  imminent  and substantial endangerment to  the health or
livelihood  of  the  public.  In addition, EPA places special
emphasis on the  control of toxics through its discharge permit
program.

All toxic substances for which water quality analyses have been
performed are  defined within STORET, and the system  can easily
accommodate the  inclusion of additional substances upon their
discovery.  Reports  such as the one shown below (from a Council
on Environmental Quality Report) can be readily obtained from
STORET data to demonstrate the presence or absence of toxic
substances  in  any  body of water for which data  are available.
            DDT Levels in U.S. Surface Waters, 1970-74
            = 1.8
            a
            S  I
            S 1bU
            I 4-
            3. 0.6 [—
            I0-4
            yi
            1 0.2
                   -Raw data
                          2-yeai moving average
              0
              1970
                     1971      1972

                  • Ei:.iiumTviii,j! P'otrCliOn AjwdCv. STORE!
                          1973
                                 1974
                                         1975
                               5-4

-------
5.5
BASIN PLANNING/WATER QUALITY FILE
A river basin is the area drained by a single river and its
tributaries.  A water quality management basin plan is a
management document that identifies the water quality problems of
a particular basin or portion of a basin and sets forth an
effective remedial program to alleviate those problems.  Overall
basin needs and priorities are assessed, actions scheduled, and
the necessary coordination with concerned organizations planned.

The needs and priorities are based largely upon water quality
data and the analysis of this data.  For example, fecal coliform
bacteria is a common indicator of pollution problems in areas
affected by major municipal/industrial activity.  A profile plot
of coliform along a stretch of a river using STORET's MSP
(Multiple Station Plot) program can quickly ascertain the
presence of a bacterial source and the extent of a pollution
problem as shown in the printout below.

The development of an effective planning process is crucial to
effective water quality management.  This is particularly true
for river basin planning as required under various sections of PL
92-500.  River basin plans are primarily the responsibility of
the states, and the law delineates the rather extensive amount of
information that must be provided.
                              5-5

-------
5.6       RESEARCH/WATER QUALITY FILE

In order to achieve our national objective of having water that
is clean enough both for recreational activity and for the
protection of fish and wildlife, numerous research and
development efforts have been initiated to acquire a thorough
understanding of the complex and variable biological systems that
characterize our waterways.  Research tells us what a specific
level of a specific pollutant does to humans, animals, and crops.
It establishes thresholds at which we might expect adverse
effects from environmental pollutants alone or in combination.
(And from these thresholds, criteria for water quality standards
can be established.)  It provides the basic scientific knowledge
we need to safeguard the public health and to balance the
benefits of a specific product against its environmental risks.

A representative effort is that of the EPA Grosse lie
Laboratory's Research Program to improve the water quality of the
Great Lakes.  This Lab is involved with a number of other
agencies in developing the scientific information needed to
assess the effectiveness of implemented programs on Great Lakes
water quality, to form the basis for needed control actions, and
to develop the scientific information needed to support the
Canadian/U.S. Agreement for the Great Lakes.  Over a dozen U.S.
and Canadian agencies, universities, and joint commissions are
participating in this extensive program launched in 1972.

Since this is an on-going international program involving both
water quality management and research, it is essential that all
data gathered on the water quality of the Great Lakes be readily
accessible by all investigators.  Accordingly, all participants
are required to enter all collected data into STORET, thereby
greatly expediting the use and analysis of the information
through sharing of data.  This significant multi-organizational
research program not only illustrates the value of STORET in
research-oriented endeavors, but also it demonstrates how the use
of an accepted central system can foster cooperation among a
group of organizations sharing common interests.
                              5-6

-------
CHLOROPHYLL IN LAKE ONTARIO
      ;--U r "* Niagara River
      •     HI
The above contour map,  which  shows  the chlorophyll levels in Lake
Ontario during  1972  and 1973,  illustrates the type of graphic
display that can be  obtained  from STORET via a plotting option of
the WQF retrieval program  MSP  (Multiple Station Plot).
                               5-7

-------
5.7
WASTE FACILITIES/MUNICIPAL WASTE INVENTORY FILE
Data on municipal waste sources and disposal systems are critical
to the planning and execution of pollution abatement and control
programs at all levels of government.  It is essential that these
data be current in order to provide accurate input to the
preparation of basin plans, annual budgets, and annual reports
(such as EPA's Cost of Clean Water report) to perform periodic
assessments of the effectiveness of control/abatement measures,
and to monitor the degrees of compliance with standards.  The
Municipal Waste Inventory File serves as the repository for this
data in STORET, and includes data from all communities and/or
municipal waste facilities, including those privately owned,
within the United States.

The presence of this File in STORET makes the data readily
available to all agencies and individuals having water quality
responsibilities.  Reports such as the inventory of municipal
waste facilities within the State of Delaware, a portion of which
is shown below, which lists a number of characteristics of each
facility within the State, are easily obtainable.

COMMUNITY NAME
AND
COUNTY
NEW CASTLE CO PWD
S2810001511
NEW CASTLE
003
NEWPORT
5283000011
HE* CASTLE
003
RED LION
DRAGON RUN TRAIL PRK
5620000011
NEW CASTLE
003
ftEHOBOTH BEACH
57200000111
SUSSEX
00 5
SEAfORD
60SOOU00111
SUSSEX
005
SELBYVILLE
61600000111
SUSSEX
005
SMYRNA
62700000111
KENT
001
LCCATO OlST-PHASE 1
640UOOOU111
SUSSEX
005
BASIN
YR BG
YR RV
02/08
02/06
o2/oa
X
X
o /
9
9
0 /
9
9
0 /ll
X
02/Od
X
-
STORET SYSTEM
STATE OP DELAWARE (10)
DISCHARGE TO
REMARKS
DELAWARE RIVER

DELAWARE RIVER

DRAGON RUN CREEK

LEWES- KEHOBETH CANAL

NANTICOKE RIVER
WILL GO TO SEC EVEN
W/OUT REG SYS
BUNTINGS BRANCH

SMYRNA RIVER
MURDERKILL R. (FUTURE)

CANAL IN FUTURE
302 PEAK SEASON
POP
CENSUS
X
• 1180
1366
X"
X
1614
5537
1005
1099
4243
X
FLO MGO
DESIGN
-
-
.120
X
.880
X
.420
.500
-
TYPE
DES. BOD
NONE
SERVED
204
X
X
SECONDARY
X
210

S
E
W
S


S
B
S


DATA
MG/L (BOO)
UNTREATIDISCHG



131
157
X





87
97
X


NEEDS
TREATMENT
GRANTS
21
SEE WILMINGTON
00
SEE WILMINGTON
AC N PC WL
37 10 13
CM EGC ORH W BC
6,0.
47 10
G SC C EC DCRH BC
1.24,
38 10
SC LO ECG
34,34,
5H CM EGC DRH BO
22 IB

                              5-8

-------
5.8
BIOLOGICAL DATA SUMMARIES/FISH KILL  FILE
The STORET Fish Kill File  provides  nationwide information on
major pollution-caused  fish  kills which result from a variety of
industrial, municipal,  agricultural,  and transportation-related
operations.  A fish kill is  usually first noticed by a fisherman,
camper, or sportsman who,  as an  interested and concerned private
citizen, reports the kill  to a state official.  In most
instances, the state agency  sends trained specialists to
investigate and identify the size and cause of the kill.  These
specialists sometimes request the help of Environmental
Protection Agency  field personnel to assist in on-site
investigations, or to make laboratory analyses of dead fish
tissue samples.  When water  pollution is determined to be the
cause of the kill, the  state submits a report, using the form
shown below, to the Environmental Protection Agency.  Information
from these reports is entered into  the Fish Kill File, which
contains fish kill data back to  1960, and from which fish kill
summary reports, such as the one shown for the State of Florida,
are easily obtained.
• AlHIMtTON. B.C. 294M
REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED FISH KILL
.LOC T,0«« L-..0... 	 ,^L«-,.(,.,-,

ATIOM1
~~] *QltO*t(P.*llcttHt. Ht>
r>i«T,u«M
3M«,,«MA,.A«.I.....
— L*SI UQUOM, 0* 'C(D
LOT 0»C**TIOMI
~J HMOUN4 OF f OUI'MIMT
	 M>0 CMTAINEM
[J] CHCulCMLt
•— ' WtEDfWDuCtl
[j TEITILIS
IT] °I-**'
B'*IL O '""" ~^ ***" °*
.,».. rj *•• " *°*T

FOR OWP USE ONLY

G"«"" n«"T LJ "»<"»•»
^J *[TDOICUU
|_j lUltEft AND »L*ITK»
C. MUMIC PAL O»ERA>
TIONS
Q it *[**(€ »VJUM
[71 •*»«« 011P91M.
[3 iwiuumt POOL
[2] »**•/ Public S*r*lt*l
Q «ST CMTML
GCOOTWCT,*, riu-.»«
n °™":
                                         thftmfl attchftft.
                                    ACPORTING OFFICIAL
                                   INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion foM e
                                         • d(* tog 11 h*r.
                                                          •ttpU or ttp« toni


Mrl
FLORIDA
UPLANO CA TAVEFNIER 1
LA TriOhOTOSASSA TriONOTOSASSA
BEEOV Cfl W DISNEV UOHLO
POND LACHUA CO
LAKE CHARLOTTE POPKA
LAKE DtNTUN VON PARK
L-D CANAL CLLE GLADE
ED MCELVtM PC 8LOUNTSTOWN
LAKE HIBISCUS DCBAfly
LAKC HIBISCUS DCBARY
LAKE EVANS DCLTONA
TROUT CB DUVAL CO
CANAL FT LAUDERDALE
ST JOHNS H GENEVA
ATTAPULCUS CR HAVANA
PD-CORBETT CAMP INDIANTOWri
MONCRIEP CM JACKSONVILLE
LAKE JACKSON NEANANSVILLE
LAXE FRANCIS LA E PLACID
I-URKLV CR NA CLEKNV
TUKKEV CP MA CLENNV 1
HARCO IS GOLK Pi) NA LES
SPRUCE CP N£ SMYRNA BCH
LAKE rfEIR OKLAriAiiA
LAKE dELDONA ORLANDO
LT ECtiLCiCriTCrtEt: OxLANOO
LANE LUCE MM ORLANDO
LAKE COPE LAND UfllANDO
LAKE BARTON ORLANDO
LAKE LANCASTER ORLANDO
LAKE JESSUP UVIEOO
ST JOHNS R P4LATK*
LAKE CEORlJi: PALM BEACH
TROUT CR ST JOHNS CO
PEARL K SENINOLE CO
LAKE OWtNS U .1*1 1 L LA
MOLKES Ch VEHNON'



OD rr co

OJ 7]
06 Tj
25 7]
11 73
13 73
07 74
2S 74
08 74
04 74
04 74
11 74
OS 74
17 74
2 74
1 74
1 74
J 74
3 74
6 74
0 74
6 74
1 74
0 74
! 74
2 74
t 74
8 74
1 74
* 74
8 74
1 74
3 74
2 74
1 74
H 74
29 74
IS 74
09 74
21 74



DE tCAME

10
17
74
99
00
00
00
90
00
00
so
S3
SO
70
SO
IS
75
20
70
<0
SO
luO





1001 - J -
70% - S,C 0 4 B19A 3
81% 44 1 -
2S» 13 4 1SOA 3
It - 1,3 0 3 1A
0 1 )A
1001 - - 4 -
ISO 4 1A
SO 4 IN
lUt - 1,000 2 1A
1.000 2 fcA
600 4 10A
260 4 3A
200 4
loot - -
91,121 2 I9A
SOI - 1 ,000 3ri
100 4 in
47% - fl,S77 H
SOI - 60 A
100% - S33 M
US 4 H
301 - 215 4 M
50%
7S% - 42.6S3 2 4M
25% - ISO IDA
250 4
- 4 1A
UUI - - -
00 1 - - -
001 - - 9
oot - - -
HOt - B.UGC 3
loot - ISO 4 SH
301 - 1,000 3 SA
40t - 100 4
23 4
SOt - 2S.OOO 2 In
1,460 2 S6A
275 4 In
IB


R

[
24
j
-

I
"
                               5-9

-------
5.9
AWARD SUMMARIES/CONTRACT AWARDS FILE
A major element of the 1956 Federal Water Pollution Control Act
was the establishment of the construction grant program which
authorized the Federal Government to award grants to
municipalities to help finance construction of sewage treatment
facilities.  Although this initial legislation authorized a
modest $50 million per year in grant funds, appropriations for
grant money rose substantially in the late '60s, reaching $1
billion for fiscal year 1971.  The construction grant program was
significantly enhanced and expanded with the enactment in 1972 of
PL 92-500, which authorized EPA to make grants totaling $18
billion to the states for construction of new municipal treatment
facilities.

STORET's Contract Awards File helps interested individuals and
organizations to track the progress of the thousands of contracts
awarded by municipalities for sewage facilities construction, to
gather statistics on the nature of these awards, and to quantify
any patterns or trends in the contract award activity.  Awards
dating back to 1952 are contained in the file.  The report shown
below, which used data from this File, lists information on each
sewage facility construction award granted by the State of
Montana in 1975.
CONTRACT AWARDS LISTING
ST
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
CITYI
36360
15490
76140
45720
09900
09900
21240
3870U
38100
38700
406UO
39780
39780
39780
39780
39780
39780
49710
50300
66310
83450
83950
07740
07740
07740
07740
CO! BASIN
013 0901
015 0901
019 0903
029 1302
031 0901
031 0901
035 0901
041 0901
041 0901
041 0901
041 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
049 0901
051 0901
053 1301
073 0901
099 0901
101 0901
111 0902
111 0902
111 0902
111 0902
STATE OF HOHTANA
» LOCATION I DEN.
GREAT FALLS
CHOTEAU COUNTY
SCOBEY
KALISPELL
BOZEMAN
BOZEHAN
CUT BANK
HAVRE
HAVRE
HAVRE
KILL COUNT*
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
HELENA
LIBERTY COUNTY
LINCOLN COUNTY
PONDERA COUNTY
TETON COUNTY
TOOLE COUNTY
BILLINGS
3ILLINGS
BILLINGS
BILLINGS
YR
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
HO DA
10 08
01 03
06 09
06 10
05 21
12 11
02 03
06 17
06 17
07 22
07 11
02 24
05 15
05 15
09 16
10 15
10 17
01 03
03 27
01 03
01 03
01 03
03 03
03 03
12 11
12 11
0 TYPE
4 6300
1 5200
2 9100
2 0110
2 0100
4 7100
1 5200
2 3300 •
2 4100
3 7400
3 7100
1 0100
2 9100
2 0000
3 7400
4 7100
4 0100
1 5200
1 0000
1 5200
1 5200
1 5200
1 5200
1 1300
4 7100
4 0010
$ VALUE SRC
4.351
528
76
314
49
41
590
483
289
152
38
78
112
56
265
112
199
528
284
528
528
528
8,068
3,759
53
62
,322 1
,954 1
,063 1
.371 1
,723 1
,869 1
,656 1
,954 ,1
,185 1
,156 1
,300 1
,419 1
,830 H
,415 1
,678 ,1
,611 1
,774 -1
,954 1
.330 1
,954 1
,954 1
.954 1
.000 1
,285 1
,978 1
,002 1
CONTR-R V
SLETTEN
KIEWIT
L t S
UTILITY
LONG
SCHflID
COP
FALLS
SrIULAND
MCNEIL
MCNEIL
MCNEIL
HELENA
HELENA
LOCKREM
LOCKREM
DUGDALE
KIEUIT
ZOOK
KIEWIT
KIEWIT
.KIEWIT
WEYHER
SHAWNEE
LEARY
LEARY
PAGE
2
CO TYPE PSG GROUPI
REPL ADDN 7
HATR COMB 4
WIS LINES 2
SDRN REPR 5
STORM DRN 5
COLL SEW 5
WATR COMB 3
DIST LINE 5
PUMP STAT 5
SEW COMB 5
COLL SEW 5
STORM ORN 5
WtS LINES 5
STORM SEW 5
SEW COMB 5
COLL SEW 5
STORM DRN 5
WATR COMB 3
STORM SEW 5
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 4
WATR COMB 7
TRNS LINE 7
COLL SEW 7
STRM REPR 7
10
01
06
06
05
12
02
06
06
07
07
02
05
OS
09
10
10
01
03
01
01
01
03
03
12
12

DODGE!
1815880
1812488
1816760
1816795
1816687
1817698
1815810
1816764
1816764
1816896
1816896
1816176
1816669
1816669
1816852
1817385
1817385
1812488
1816131
1812488
1812488
1812488
1811696
1811696
1817648
1817648
                               5-10

-------
                 STORET USER HANDBOOK
                        PART 0V

                       OVERVIEW
                     CHAPTER OV-6

                SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
       This chapter describes the many helpful
       user assistance services that are made
       available by EPA to all STORET users.
                   CHAPTER CONTENTS
Section              Subject

  6.1     How to Become a STORET User             6-1
  6.2     STORET User Support Services            6-2
  6.3     Regional STORET Representatives         6-6
                        0V

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              OV-6

                     SUPPORT OF STORET USERS
6.1       HOW TO BECOME A STORET USER

Representatives from state agencies and from other Federal,
interstate, and local government agencies may become users of
STORET.  Anyone interested in becoming a user of the system
should initially contact his or her EPA Regional STORET
Representative.  The names, addresses, and phone numbers of these
individuals are listed elsewhere in this chapter.

The Regional STORET Representative can advise as to what
monitoring activities are currently underway within the new .
user's area of interest; he can provide information on the amount
and type of water quality data already present in the system that
might be of interest to the user; and often, he can identify
other users within the region who are pursuing an effort like or
similar to that being considered by the potential user.  Further,
these representatives can provide helpful information about the
STORET system itself, and how its features and capabilities can
best be applied to benefit the user.  Each region has its own
procedures with respect to its community of STORET users,
including how new users are placed on the system, and how they
are supported.  However, the following guidelines should be
generally applicable as outlined below.

State Agencies

          Once it is determined that the individual is to be
          granted access to STORET, the Regional STORET
          Representative will make the necessary arrangements to
          obtain an account number which will enable the user to
          access the computer system on which STORET resides.  He
          will discuss the alternatives available for funding the
          state's use of STORET, including the arrangement of a
          suitable suballowance whereby EPA reimburses the state
          for its use of STORET up to the value of the
          suballowance.  (Should a state exceed its allotted
          suballowance, it will need either to reimburse EPA or
          to contract directly with the computer services vendor
          for any additional computer usage charges incurred over
          the suballowance.)  He will also contact STORET User
          Assistance in EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C. who
          will provide the user with whatever STORET
          documentation and training is deemed appropriate.

          If the state agency representative is establishing a
          new monitoring network, a new STORET agency code will
          need to be established which uniquely identifies the
                              6-1

-------
          user's monitoring network to STORET.   The potential
          state user should have an estimate of the amount of
          activity that will be made of STORET (the amount of
          data to be stored, the number of system accesses per
          month, and the amount and type of retrieval activity,
          for example)  so that necessary cost estimates and
          budgetary provisions can be made based upon the
          anticipated usage.


Federal, Interstate, and Local Agencies

          Upon contacting the Regional STORET Representative,
          individuals from these agencies will be advised of two
          alternatives for paying for their use of STORET.  They
          may establish an interagency agreement for the transfer
          of funds  (where the agency reimburses EPA for its
          STORET usage), or they may contract directly with the
          computer service organization supplying the time-
          sharing service.  If contracting directly, the vendor
          will obtain the necessary authorizations from EPA
          allowing the new user to access STORET.  Requests for
          assistance, documentation, and training are normally
          directed to the regional user assistance contacts;
          however, these requests are frequently routed to STORET
          User Assistance in Washington, D.C.

All users, whether state or others, are expected to provide for
their own computer terminals and terminal supplies.


6.2       STORET USER SUPPORT SERVICES

To effectively and efficiently utilize a system as large and
comprehensive as STORET, the user community must have a
responsive support organization to which it can turn for
assistance and guidance on an as-needed basis.   The Data
Processing and User Assistance Branch, Monitoring and Data
Support Division  (MDSD) of EPA's Office of Water and Hazardous
Materials in Washington, D.C. has this responsibility, and
provides operational and assistance support to the STORET system
and its users.

Assistance by Phone

          STORET User Assistance personnel in EPA Headquarters,
          Washington, D.C. are available by phone from 8 am to 5
          pm Eastern Time, Monday through Friday, to answer
          questions on all aspects of the STORET system.
          Assistance is not normally available on weekends or on
          Federal holidays.
                              6-2

-------
          STORET User Assistance may be contacted for questions
          pertaining to STORET's computer system and its
          communications, to the use of the vendor's terminal
          command language, and to making arrangements for such
          things as tapes and output delivery.   Although this
          group may occasionally refer a caller to the computer
          services vendor or to someone within another
          organization, it is very interested in keeping in
          frequent touch with users, so that it may be kept
          abreast of the questions and problems being experienced
          in the field.

          All policy decisions, with the exception of national
          STORET policies, are made at the regional level under
          the direction of the Regional Point of Contact.
          Questions regarding such matters as individual
          suballowances  (the funding process by which states are
          given money by their EPA Region for the use of STORET)
          and requests for programming or conversions should
          properly be directed to the appropriate Regional STORET
          Representative.  The names of these individuals are
          provided elsewhere in this chapter.

          Users are invited to contact STORET User Assistance to
          determine the availability of other support-related
          services, such as the availability of toll-free 800
          telephone numbers to be used to request assistance, or
          information on how to route messages to STORET User
          Assistance via the user's terminal.
Training Seminars
          The available training on STORET consists of two
          seminars:  a three-day Basic STORET Seminar and a two-
          day Advanced STORET Seminar.  Appropriate STORET
          documentation and associated materials are provided
          with the seminars which are usually given in each
          region at least annually.  A minimum attendance of 12
          is required to hold a seminar, with a maximum of 24 due
          to terminal limitations.

          The Basic seminar assumes no knowledge of STORET and
          little or no knowledge of a time-sharing terminal
          command language.  Topics covered include an
          introduction to STORET and its concepts; an
          introduction to the terminal command language currently
          in use, and associated terminal procedures; data
          storage techniques; basic retrieval techniques; helpful
          on-line data sets; how to submit jobs to, and retrieve
          output from, the STORET computer system; and others.

          The Advanced seminar discusses advanced retrieval
          options, machine readable output options, and related
                              6-3

-------
          internal logic of the STORET system software.
          Prerequisites include the completion of the Basic
          STORET Seminar, and at least six months experience as
          an active STORET user.

          Certificates of course completion are issued upon
          successful completion of the seminars.

          STORET User Assistance attempts to fulfill all training
          requests from the state agencies whenever possible,  and
          will,  on occasion, provide training for groups smaller
          than 12 people if considered critical for state
          programs.  It also maintains a list of  users who have
          expressed an interest in receiving training, and
          frequently conducts special seminars to accommodate
          those unable to obtain training via the normal
          schedules.  Information on the current  training seminar
          schedule can be obtained by calling STORET User
          Assistance or by listing the appropriate STORET HELP
          data set.
Documentation
          A great deal of information pertaining to the use of
          STORET is maintained on-line in the form of helpful
          data sets which users can access from their terminals.
          An index HELP data set is available which briefly
          describes all of the data sets placed on the system for
          the purpose of assisting users in some aspect of the
          system.

          The STORET User Handbook is the primary document
          containing complete information on how to utilize the
          STORET system.  This material is rather extensive in
          size, and is prepared for inclusion in the special 3"
          18-ring loose-leaf binders provided by STORET User
          Assistance.  The major division of this Handbook is a
          part, and includes an OVERVIEW part and one part for
          each of the files within the STORET system.  A listing
          of the appropriate STORET HELP data set provides an up-
          to-date status on the availability of all parts,
          chapters, and sections of the Handbook, along with any
          revisions thereto.

          STORET User Assistance publishes a periodical as
          described elsewhere in this section.  The availability
          of all new or revised documents and HELP files are
          announced in this publication.

          STORET User Assistance maintains a list of Handbook
          owners, which is used as a mailing list for all
          updates, periodicals, memos, and other items that are
          periodically distributed to all STORET users-of-record.
                              6-4

-------
          Users are welcome to contact STORET User Assistance to
          verify their presence on this list and the accuracy of
          their mailing address.
Interagency Panel
          The STORET Interagency Panel was established in
          December 1974 to recommend policies,  priorities, and
          approaches to be followed in managing the STORET
          system.  In addition to representatives from EPA's
          Offices of Water and Hazardous Materials, Planning and
          Management, and Research and Development, the panel is
          comprised of selected regions and states, the Council
          on Environmentaal Quality, the Office of Management and
          Budget, and other Federal agencies,  including the U.S.
          Geological Survey, the National Academy of Sciences,
          and the National Oceanic Atmospheric  Administration.
          The panel meets twice yearly to provide an opportunity
          for members to review STORET current  activities and
          future plans, and to keep abreast of, and participate
          in, STORET management and policy decisions.
Annual STORET Users Meeting
          The annual users meeting provides an opportunity for
          STORET users from around the country to discuss and
          exchange ideas on their uses of the STORET system.  The
          three-day agenda includes presentations on the status
          of the system, on planned future capabilities, and on
          methods to use the system efficiently and cost-
          effectively.  Individual users present papers on their
          uses of STORET.  The forum provides an excellent
          opportunity for the exchange of information between
          water quality managers, and provides exposure between
          state managers and EPA representatives that otherwise
          would be impossible to attain.  The interaction between
          users is invaluable in solving common problems, in
          creating an awareness of the system's capabilities, and
          in achieving uniform data quality.
User Periodical
          STORET User Assistance publishes, and distributes to
          all users-of-record on a quarterly basis, a user
          periodical titled STOR ET CETERA.  This publication is
          dedicated to news about the STORET system, and
          regularly features such items as information on new
          system enhancements, system usage reminders, retrieval
          hints, references to helpful on-line STORET data sets,
          and announcements of other noteworthy STORET-related
          happenings.  The document also provides an opportunity
          for STORET User Assistance to solicit users on their
          opinions about selected STORET items-of-interest, such
                              6-5

-------
          as a request for feedback on the preferred manner of
          implementing a desired system enhancement.  STORET
          users are encouraged to contribute topics for inclusion
          in the publication.
6.3       REGIONAL STORET REPRESENTATIVES

EPA Regional STORET representatives have been assigned for each
of the ten regions.  The individuals listed under the Points of
Contact column have the responsibility, within their respective
region, for establishing and implementing STORET policies, for
determining which data should and should not be stored, who
should or should not be using the system, and what their usage
allowances should be.  The individuals listed under the Regional
STORET Representatives column can provide direct assistance on
questions pertaining to the use of STORET programs and other
technically-oriented matters.
                              6-6

-------
 Region

Region I
Region II
Region III
Region IV
Region V
Region VI
        Points of Contact

Walter M. Newman, Chief
Systems Analysis Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Boston, Massachusetts  02203
(617) 223-5885

Herbert Barrack, Director
Management Division
Environmental Protection Agency
26 Federal Plaza
New York, New York  10007
(212) 264-2520

Larry Miller, Chief
Water Quality Monitoring Office
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
Curtis Building
6th and Walnut Streets
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania  19106
(215) 597-9823

John Marlar, Chief
Technical Support Branch
Environmental Protection Agency
1421 Peachtree Street, N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia  30309
(404) 526-3012    (FTS) 285-3012

Christopher Timm, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
230 S. Dearborn Street
Chicago, Illinois  60604
(312) 353-6738

David White, Chief
Technical & Administration Systems
Branch
1201 Elm Street
First International Building
Dallas, Texas  75270
(214) 749-3761
Regional STORET
Representatives

Martin Fraser
(617) 223-5885
Jack Sweeney
(212) 264-0388
(FTS) 264-9850
Ted Standish
(215) 597-8046
Dan Barber
(404) 526-5989
(FTS) 285-5989
Stuart Ross
(312) 353-2061
Dave White
(214) 749-3761
                               6-7

-------
Region VII
Region VIII
Region IX
Region X
Walter Robohn, Federal Regional
Council Representative
Environmental Protection Agency
1735 Baltimore Avenue
Kansas City, Missouri  64108
(816) 374-5495   (FTS) 758-5429

Keith Schwab, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1860 Lincoln Street
Suite 900
Denver, Colorado  80203
(303) 837-4935   (FTS) 327-4935

Clyde filler, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
100 California Street
San Francisco, California  94111
(415) 556-7858

Dr. Gary O'Neal, Director
Surveillance & Analysis Division
Environmental Protection Agency
1290 6th Avenue
Seattle, Washington  98101
(206) 422-1193   (FTS) 399-1295
Dennis Degner
(816) 374-2018
(FTS) 758-2018
Thomas Entzminger
(303) 837-2226
(FTS) 327-2226
 William Lewis
 (415) 556-7550
 Ray Peterson
 (206) 399-1580
 (FTS) 399-1580
Although these representatives, and their addresses and phone
numbers, were current as of the date of publication of this
OVERVIEW, they may change from time to time.  Any changes to this
information can be obtained by calling STORET User Assistance.
Unless noted otherwise, the FTS telephone numbers are identical
to the public numbers shown.
                              6-8

-------
                                                                o
         STORET  USER HANDBOOK
                PART WQ
          WATER QUALITY FILE
  This part of the STORET User Handbook
  describes the Water Quality File,
  the largest data file within the
  STORET system.  All aspects of the
  WQF are covered in detail,  including
  how to enter and retrieve data from
  computer terminals.
 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER AND HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
        WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460
                  WQ

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapters

WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TERM
Subject

Introduction
File Structure
Water Quality Data Entry
Water Quality Retrieval
Terminal Procedures
Tab

WQ-NTRO
WQ-FS
WQ-DE
WQ-RET
WQ-TERM
Appendices
    A
    B

    C
    D
    E
    F
    G

    H
    I
    J
Subject                          Page
A WQF Glossary                   A-l
STORET Parameters and Parameter
Codes                            B-l
State and County Codes           C-l
Basin Codes                      D-l
Sampling Sites Within Sewage
Treatment Plants                 E-l
STORET Station Type Codes        F-l
Storing, Processing, and         G-l
Retrieving Intensive Survey
Data
User Supplied Edits              H-l
Quality Assurance Codes          1-1
Indicating Data Value            J-l
Significance
                                     WQ
                                 Revised  5/79

-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
                                                         O
       PART WQ                                            |
 WATER QUALITY FILE                                      Z

                                                         30
                                                         O
       CHAPTER
       WQ-NTRO
    INTRODUCTION
        WQ-NTRO                  APRIL  1981

-------
                             CHAPTER
                             WQ-NTRO

                          INTRODUCTION
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes the Water Quality
File (WQF), one of several files within the STORET system.  The
WQF is the largest of the STORET files in terms of the amount of
data in the file, and it is the most frequently used STORET file.
This part describes all aspects of the WQF:  how data is stored
into the file; how data is retrieved from the file; how the
system is utilized within a remote computer terminal (keyboard
and card reader) environment; and other items of information
necessary to the effective and efficient usage of the file.

The WQF part is divided into chapters, which are further divided
into sections, and into subsections within sections.  To
facilitate locating a particular chapter or section, chapter
divider pages are light brown, section divider pages are light
grey.   The part also has several supplementary appendices and an
index, whose divider pages are light brown.  As with the part
designations, mnemonic (such as WQ-NTRO) rather than numeric
identifiers are used to identify chapters within the WQF part.

Chapter WQ-FS, File Structure, describes the structure of the
STORET Water Quality File, including the data base organization
and the layout and content of the records within the data base.
The program logic employed by STORET in processing user storage
and retrieval requests is outlined.

Chapter WQ-DE, Water Quality Data Entry, describes the procedures
and methods available to store, change, and delete station
location and parameter data in the WQF.

Chapter WQ-RET, Water Quality Retrieval, describes the retrieval
capabilities provided by STORET.  The process of building a
retrieval request is described and general descriptions of each
retrieval program are given, along with detailed descriptions of
the retrieval keywords and programs that can be used to structure
a retrieval request.  Retrieval examples illustrate the effect of
various keywords and keyword combinations on retrieval output.

Chapter WQ-TERM, Terminal Procedures, describes the procedures
used to access the computer system on which STORET resides, and
how data are entered and retrieved within a computer terminal
(both low-speed keyboard-type and medium-speed card-reading-type)
environment.
                              WQ-NTRO                  APRIL  1981

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS



Sections                     Subject                       Page


    1        Introduction                                   1-1

    2        The Hierarchical Structure of WQF Data         2-1

    3        The Programs and Files Used in Processing      3-1
             WQF Data

    4        Storing Data into the WQF                      4-1

    5        Retrieving Data from the WQF                   5-1
                              WQ-FS

-------
SECTION 1:  INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this chapter is to present an overview of the
Water Quality File programs, and data file structures, a-nd to
describe how they are utilized in the day-to-day activities of
storing and retrieving data.   WQF processing programs and data
files are introduced and defined, and a number of flow diagrams
are presented which illustrate the relationships between these
programs and files.

The content of this chapter was not designed to provide internal
logic flows of the programs,  nor to describe byte-by-byte layouts
of the various data files used by the programs.  Rather, this
chapter was designed to provide enough detail necessary to
acquaint users with an overview of how user-written retrieval and
storage requests interface with WQF programs and files.  It is
presumed that the reader of this chapter is an experienced user
of the STORET system.

Section 2 describes the hierarchical structure of STORET water
quality data in relation to the data files in which they are
placed.  Section 3 defines the various programs and files which
make up the WQF.  The remaining two sections describe the general
flow of storing and retrieving WQF data.

Other chapters of this WQ Part describe the processes of storing
and retrieving WQF data in greater detail.
                              WQ-FS
                                1-1

-------
SECTION 2:  THE HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE OF- WQF DATA.

The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions,
and other agencies and organizations are an essential aspect of
our Nation's program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate water
pollution.  The findings of these monitoring activities  (i.e.,
the amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored  in
the Water Quality File, the largest of STCRET's files.   This
section describes the monitoring process in general,  the types of
data that are stored in the WQF, and how these data are  stored i.r\
the WQF.

2.1  THE MONITORING PROCESS

          Monitoring strategies are developed by  individual
          states, with guidance by EPA, to fulfill their own
          particular water quality objectives.   A great  deal  of
          thought and planning goes into defining the area  to  be
          covered, and in establishing the purpose to be
          achieved.  Once defined by planners,  the network  is
          then defined to STORET by the assignment of an agency
          code which is unique to all other networks  defined  in
          STORET.

          Part of the monitoring network scrategy is  the
          determination of the number and location of sites tc be
          included within the network.  It is mcs" important  that
          these sites be located properly so that they present an
          accurate picture- of the water quality for the  area  of
          interest.  These monitoring sites are referred to as
          stations in STORET, and -each station within an agency
          is assigned up to four owner-specified  unique  'to the
          agency) station codes.  The first station code, which
          is required, is called the Primary Station  Code.  The
          remaining three optional codes are called Secondary
          Station Codes, and may be used as aliases for  the
          station.

          Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for  a network
          is the determination of what needs to be sampled  at  the
          monitoring sites, over what time frame, and at what
          sampling frequency.  Over 1800 unique parameters  are
          defined within STORET, and the planners decide which
          parameters are to be measured 'in accordance with  the
          overall monitoring strategy.

          Two basic types of samples are taken from water:  a  crab-
          sample and.a composite sample.  A grab  sample  is  an
          individual water quality sample collected at a specific
          point  in time; composite samples are combinations of
          individual samples obtained at intervals over  a period
          of time.  These may be several grab samples spanning a


                              WQ-FS
                                2-1

-------
          24-hour period where all grabs are placed in a single
          container,  or a series of samples taken at equal
          distances across a stream section.  Analysis of these
          samples for water quality data may be performed in the
          field or within a laboratory.   STORE! provides a means
          to store information on any type of water sample,  from
          a simple grab to a sophisticated composite sample.

          Each agency has escablished its own procedures for
          coding the- results of the water sample analyses onto
          sheets or forms used to prepare the data in machine
          readable form, such as on punched cards.  At this point
          the data is ready .to be stored into the WQF.
2.2  THE DATA IN THE WQF
          The information within the WQF consists of two basic
          types of data:   station location data, which describes
          and categorizes the geographical location of where a
          sample was taken.;   and parametric data, which describes
          the conditions under which a sample was taken (such as
          date, time,  and depth) as well as the results of the
          sample analyses.
2.2.1  STATION LOCATION DATA
          Water quality data measurement stations are located on
          essentially all of the Nation's rivers, lakes, streams,
          and other waterways;  over 200,000 unique collection
          points are defined within STORET.  The .physical
          location of a station can be identified or referenced
          by any or all of the ways listed and described below:

               agency code and station code identifiers
               hydrologic references
               latitude and longitude coordinates
               state, county, basin, or other area
               designations

          AGENCY/STATION CODES

          Every station is located within a specific monitoring
          network which is identified by an agency code and which
          is unique to all other agency codes defined within
          STORET.  Each station is assigned a primary station
          code, and, optionally, up to three secondary station
          codes, or aliases.  Whenever parametric data is being
          stored, changed, or deleted, the appropriate agency and
          station codes must be referenced.  Similarly, data for
          one or more agencies and/or stations can be retrieved
          by these codes.
                              WQ-FS
                               2-2

-------
          HYDROLOGIC REFERENCES

          A  hydrologic index  (or  river mile index)  is a numerical
          code  which identifies the location of a point on a
          defined river system by defining the distance of the
          point from,  and its hydrologic relationship to,  the
          mouth of  the river  system..   A complete hydrologic index
          is composed of the  following codes:   a major oasin
          code; a minor basin code; a terminal stream number
          which defines a stream  in the minor basin;  mileages
          which define the distances  between and to confluences
          in the river system;  and an index which identifies the
          stream level on which the point is located.

          LATITUDE  AND LONGITUDE  COORDINATES

          Many  stations, particularly those on open waters such
          as oceans, lakes,  bays,  and estuaries, cannot always be
          easily located using hydrologic indices.   A station's
          location  can also be pinpointed by the conventional
          geographical coordinates of latitude and longitude,
          expressed in degrees, minutes, seconds, and tenths of a
          second.

          AREA  DESIGNATIONS

          Stations  can also be identified with respect to the
          state, county, and  major/minor/subbasin in which they
          are physically located..  Another area designation with
          which stations can  be retrieved is the 208 area
          corresponding to the designated state areawide waste
         .treatment management area as defined under
          of PL 92-500.
2.2.2  PARAMETRIC DATA
          Once a station has been identified to STORET and stored
          ,n the system, parametric data obtained at that station
          :an be stored in the system.

          :he selection of parameters that are sampled at a
          station is a function of the monitoring strategy and
          )ther requirements established by the agency
          •esponsible for the station.   Regardless of which
          sarameters are sampled, certain information may be
          Jefined for each parameter value that is to be stored
          within the WQF.  The following list summarizes this
          .nformation:
                              WQ-FS
                               2-3

-------
               the  location  (primary  or  secondary station
               code)  where  the  sample was taken  (required^
               the  date  (month,  day,  year)  the sample
                was collected  (required)
               the  time  (hour,  minute)  the  sample was
                collected  (optional)
               the  depth  (in feet  or  meters)  at  which
                the sample  was  taken  (optional)
               the  value  (amount)  of  the parameter found
                within the  sample  (required),  and
               the  specification of one  or  more  remark
                codes which  further describe  the
                conditions  under which the  sample was
                taken (optional).

          Only  one  set of analytical  results  (one data record1
          may be stored  under  a  single parameter code-date-time-
          depth-location  combination, which is unique to every
        .  other parameter value  record stored within the WQF.

          Analytical  results (values) are associated with
          standard  5-digit  STORE!  parameter codes.  A complete
          list  of these  codes,  in  various sort orders, can  be
          obtained  by following  the  instructions given in
          Appendix  B:  STORET  Parameters and  Parameter Codes.
          These parameter codes  define the  method by which  an
          analysis  was performed,  as  well as  the form and units
          of measurement  in which  the results were recorded or
          stored.

2.3  HOW WATER  QUALITY DATA IS STORED IN THE  WQF

          Figure 2-1  gives  a schematic representation of how
          station location  and parametric data are stored within
          the WQF.

          As shown  in the schematic,  all data for a specific
          station is associated  with  that station.  Within  the
          system, data for  a particular station is linked with
          other data for  that  station by a  series of record
          pointers.  Data elements are chained according to date
          and time  (schematically  strung along a time-variable
          clothesline),  and according to depth within time.
          Associated with each unique date/time/depth entry
          within STORET are a  variable number of sample values,
          stored in increasing parameter code order.  Only  one
          value may be stored  for  any unique
          station/date/time/depth/parameter-code record.  New
          records are stored,  and  appropriately chained, in their
          proper date/time and parameter code sequence.
                              WQ-FS
                               2-4

-------




STATION 3
RMI
LAT/UONG
STATE. CITY.
SA5IN. ANO
AREA COOES


O

x^^x-*
^/>1
/











~~lll 1


A
C
E i
N •
C
Y !

X
Y
z

i
d




STATION A (
RMI (
LATSUONG /
STATE. CITY, (
3ASIN, ANO )
AREA COOES (
/— Date ^— Date / — Date
/— Time X- Time /- Time
/— Depth ,/• Depth /- 0«oth
%-^ ./•- Composite Data /- Composite Data /— • Comoosite Data
•^ s^ \— Parameter code, j— Parameter code.

Ul
0
O
u


2
35
«f
,u
c
O
z

'
Remark code. Value
— Parameter code.
Remark code, Value
Remark code, Value

r Parameter coda,
. 	 	 , Remark cod*. Value
Remark cod*, Valu*

— Parameter code.
Remark code. Value





r



— Parameter code,
Remark code, Va'ue




r ^
^
— Parameter coda, ' ^TI^I"
Remark code. Value * ' c

— Parameter code,
Remark coda. Value









'

^^.••^^•il^^l^—^
•^^••^^^^^^•••i*
                    FIGURE 2-1

      CLOTHESLINE ANALOGY OF THE STORAGE OF
STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA WITHIN THE WQF
                       WQ-FS
                        2-5

-------
SECTION 3:  THE PROGRAMS AND FILES USED  IN PROCESSING  WQF  DATA

This section presents a brief description of each of the1
individual data files which collectively make up the Water
Quality File; it also describes the processing programs which are
invoked when users request that data be  stored or retrieved.
Summary listings of these data files and programs,  by  function,
are shown in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.  The data  files are  listed  in
Figure 3-1 according to their use as an  index, transient,  or  data
base file; the programs are listed in Figure 3-2 according  to
their use in a storage or retrieval operation.  All are described
below.  The remaining two sections of this chapter  discuss  the
interaction of these files and programs  in more detail.
                              TRANSIENT fILES
                            FIGURE  3-1

                     DATA  FILES  WITHIN  THE  WQF
                               WQ-FS
                                3-1

-------
3.1  DATA FILES WITHIN THE WQF

          For purposes of explanation,  these files have been
          grouped into three basic categories:   index files,
          which are used to locate requested stations,- transient
          files, which are created as an intermediate step before
          data is permanently stored or retrieved; and the data
          base file/ which contains the station and parametric
          data which make up the WQF.  Each of  these files is
          described in turn below.

3.1.1  INDEX FILES

          Depending upon the station selection  keywords specified
          within a retrieval request, or depending upon the
          storage requests specified within a storage deck, one
          or more of these index files will be  utilized to locate
          specific stations referenced by the retrieval keywords
          or storage instructions.

          Each record within most of these index files contains
          one or two fields which point to the  exact location of
          data within the WQF.  These fields are the computer
          sequence number (CSN) field and the relative station
          position  (RSP) field.  Whenever a station is added to
          the WQF,  it is assigned the next available CSN which
          will uniquely  identify the station from all other
          stations within the system.  (CSNs of stations deleted
          are permanently retired; they are not reassigned to
          subsequent new stations.)  The RSP points to the
          beginning location  in the WQF data base of the station
         .location and parametric data associated with the
          corresponding.  CSN .  As the STORET system processes a
          retrieval request,  it references various index files
          depending upon the  set of station identification
keywords specified within the
point to the locations of the
interest.
                                        request, which  in turn
                                        water quality data of
          LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE FILE  (LATF)

          This  index file contains one 18-byte fixed-length
          record for each primary and  secondary station code
          stored in the WQF, stored  in an  increasing  longitude
          within latitude order.  The  key  consists of the
          latitude coordinate concatenated with the longitude
          coordinate .
Latitude/Longitude      State
Coordinates             Code
                                   RSP
                                                     CSN
                              WQ-FS
                                3-2

-------
STATE AND COUNTY FILE ;STCOF:

This index file contains one 16-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored in the WQF,  stored in ascending state, and
county within state,  sequence.   Station codes are
stored in random order within county codes.

The file also contains a record for each station
according to its location within a
major/minor/subbasin.  Station codes 'are stored in
random order within subbasin codes.
  State/County Code             RS?       CSN
  Major/Minor/Subbasin Codes    RS?       CSN
AGENCY/STATION FILE  IAS?)

This index file contains one 33-byte fixed-length
record for each primary and secondary station code
stored within the system.  The records are stored in
ascending alphanumeric station number sequence within
agency code.  (Due to this ordering scheme, the primary
and secondary station codes for a particular station
within an agency may not necessarily be grouped
together.)
  Agency/Station Codes    State    RS?     CSN
                          Code
                    WQ-FS
                      3-3

-------
MASTER STATION FILE (MSF)

This index file contains one 195-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
system, stored in ascending alphanumeric sequence
within agency code.  (The MSF serves as a backup to the
other index files by containing all other station
location keys, such as state and county codes, latitude
and longitude, RMI index and mile levels, agency code,
basin codes,  and station type.)
Primary
Station Code
Other Station RSP CSN
location codes
RIVER MILE INDEX FILE (RMIF)

This index file contains one 112-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code stored within the
WQF.  Each record contains the station's RMI
information which includes the major and minor terminal
basin codes and the terminal stream number, the set of
12 mile and level indexes, and the corresponding CS.N'
and RSP.  Records are stored in a downstream to
upstream sequence (i.e., in an increasing  river mile
index sequence).  River mile indexes of stations
located on tributaries are stored within the respective
main stem, beginning with the tributary closest to the
terminal stream.
  RMI Key
Other RMI
information
RSP
CSN
                    WQ-FS
                      3-4

-------
AREA FILE (AREAFLE;

This index file contains one variable length record for
each state designated areawide waste treatment
management area defined within Section 208 of Public
Law 92-500.   (The STORE! help data set named
SEC203.AREAS contains a listing of all 2C3 areas
defined within the WQF.)  Each record contains the
latitude/longitude polygon which bounds the named 2C3
area.   An AREA retrieval is converted to a polygon
retrieval using this cross-reference file.
  Area Name                 Polygon
RELATIVE STATION POINTER FILE (RSPF)

This index file contains one 22-byte fixed-length
record for each primary station code that has ever be=
stored within the WQF.  Records are stored in ascendi:
numerical CSN sequence.  The values within the RS?
fields point to the locations of station identificati:
data on the water quality data base file.
  CSN   RS?'    State      Station Code     Type
MASK LIBRARY FILE (MASK;

This 'index file contains one 12,500-oyte fixed-length
record for each station mask created and stored within
the WQF.  Each bit position within this record
corresponds to a single station.  Masks have been
created for each STORET parameter which identify the
attribute 'parameter nnn is present at this station'
for all stations on the system.  Users may also create
their own masks via the NOPAR program.
Mask
Key
B
it
Matri
X
                    WQ-FS
                      3-5

-------
3.1.2  TRANSIENT FILES
          The transient files are intermediate files which are
          created on a temporary basis by the retrieval and
          storage programs.   These files are described below.

          KITS FILE

          This transient file is created by the RETRIV program
          and contains one record for each station that fulfills
          the specified station selection and station restriction
          criteria established by the station identification
          keywords within the retrieval request.  The file is
          also utilized by RETRIV (by a program module other than
          the one that created the file) during its processing of
          the data selection keywords specified in the retrieval.
          Records within the file are fixed-length, and contain
          three fields of information:  a record code, an agency
          code, and a station code.

          MOD FILES

          These temporary files are created whenever a storage
          request is processed by the programs EDIT3, GDIP,
          DIPMS, or WQGSTOR.  Their records contain syntax-error-
          free station location and parametric data which is to
          be added, changed, or deleted from the WQF.  Each
          record contains the date,  agency and station codes, and
          up to ten values per sample.  These files serve as
          input to the UPDATE program  (run over a weekend by
          STORET  personnel) which performs the user's requested
          data storage transactions on  the STORET data base  and
          index files.

          FURTHER COMPUTATIONAL FILE  (FCF)

          Further Computational Files  (FCFs) are files created by
          the RET program which contain normal RET retrieval
          output  (i.e., raw data values which have not been
          manipulated  in any way by the WQF analysis programs)
          that can ultimately be used  as  input  to user-written
          programs.  An FCF can have  a  variety of formats,
          depending upon user requirements and  the amount of
          information  needed.  FCF records can  be up  to 305
          characters  in length, and can  include parameter heading
          records, station heading records, data records, and
          delimiter records.  Layouts  of  the different FCFs,
          their records, and the fields within  these  records, are
          described in detail in the  description of  the advanced
          RET program.
                              WQ-FS
                                3-6

-------
          ERROR FILE

          This temporary file is created whenever a storage
          request is processed by the programs EDIT3,  GDI?,
          DIPMS,  or WQGSTOR.   The file contains one record for
          each error discovered in the processing of the storage
          request.   Information contained in each record includes
          agency and station identification codes,  the parameter
          code in error, and an error number corresponding to the
          error found.   This file is in turn processed by the
          ERROR program.
3.1/3  DATA BASE FILE
          The WQF detail data base contains all the station
          identification and parametric data that is available
          for retrieval by the WQF retrieval programs.   The data
          base resides on multiple IBM 3330 Model II Disk Storage
          units,  all of which are on-line during normal system
          availability hours.  Data for any particular station is
          purposely scattered over several disk packs,  to improve
          access availability and efficiency.  Information on any
          given station includes a header record and
          approximately 14-variable length data records.   The
          header record contains a station's relative station
          position (RSP) which is pointed to by the HITS file and
          the RSPF file, the station's CSN, the date range of
          data stored with the station along with other check
          information, and a pointer to the first data record.
          There is a data record for each element of station
          identification information (i.e., there is one record
          that contains only RMI data, another that contains only
          latitude/longitude data, and so on), followed by
          records that contain the parameter codes, values, and
          remarks stored for the station.  The records containing
          station identification information are relatively
          short,  while records containing parametric data can be
          as long as 2000 to 2500 characters.  All data records
          for a given station are chained.
                              WQ-FS
                               3-7

-------
3.2  PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA

          For purposes of explanation, these programs have been
          grouped according to their use in either a storage or
          retrieval operation as shown in Figure 3-2.  A brief
          description of each program is given below.  Sections
          and 5 discuss the interactions of these programs with
          WQF files.
          STORAGE                          RETRIEVAL

          DISTRIBUTE                       SCAN

          EDITS                            RETRIV

          GDIP

          DIPMS

          WQGSTOR

          RANGCHK

          ERROR

          UPDATE



                           FIGURE 3-2

                PROGRAMS USED TO PROCESS WQF DATA



3.2.1  STORAGE PROGRAMS

          DISTRIBUTE

          The DISTRIBUTE program is essentially a control program
          which is invoked by the procedure STWQJ.  Its function
          is to read the control statement entered by the user
          which defines the type of storage procedure to be
          initiated (i.e., 701, ?02, ?03, ?04), and to return the
          proper return code which will call the appropriate
          storage processing program.  The program is not
          returned to after it passes control  to either EDITS,
          GDIP, DIPMS, or WQGSTOR.
                              WQ-FS
                               3-8

-------
EDITB

The EDITB program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?C1 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes both station location data and
parametric data, whether adding, deleting, or changing
data.  Input to the program consists of fixed-field,
standard card input.  All fields are checked for
syntax, with errors written to the ERROR file.  Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or MOD
file, as appropriate.  EDITB can process both grab  and
composite data.

GDIP

The GDIP program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response  to
a ?02 typ'e of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data.  Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format.  All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file.  Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges.  "---
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
                                                 rrors
DIPMS

The DIPMS program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?03 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes only new parametric data.  Input
to the program consists of cards in a variable or free-
form format.  All fields are checked for syntax, with
errors written to the ERROR file.  Data passing the
edit checks are passed to the RANGCHK program which
checks parameter values for acceptable ranges.  Errors
are written to the ERROR file; values which are
acceptable are written to the MOD file.
                    WQ-FS
                     3-9

-------
WQGSTOR

The WQGSTOR program is called by DISTRIBUTE in response
to a ?04 type of storage procedure initiated by a user.
The program processes parametric data (whether adding,
deleting, or changing data), and it can also process
both grab and composite data.  Input to the program  is
in a variable or free-form format,  and consists of AC
and SC cards.  All fields are checked for syntax
errors, with errors written to the ERROR file.  Data
passing these edit checks are written to the MOD file.
The program passes all parameter values to the RANGCHK
program, where they are checked for acceptable ranges,
before they are written to either the ERROR file or  MOD
file, as appropriate.

RANGCHK

This program is called by DISTRIBUTE whenever
parametric data are being stored in the WQF.   It
performs an edit check against parameter values being
stored to assure that they fall within an acceptable
range pre-established for the parameters, and stored  as
tables within the program.  Appendix B to this Part  of
the Handbook lists the highest and lowest acceptable
values that have been established for approximately  18C
parameter codes.

ERROR

This program is called by DISTRIBUTE to obtain a
listing of errors generated during a data storage
request.  The program lists the errors written onto  the
ERROR  file by the EDITS, GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR
programs.  This program may be invoked by the user to
obtain a listing of errors generated during an UPDATE.

UPDATE

The UPDATE program is the program that actually updates
the WQF data base.   It is run each weekend by STORET
personnel, and processes the data written to  the MOD
file by the storage programs during the previous week.
The program performs additional edit checks on the data
being  stored, changed, or deleted.  It groups all of
the data into groups of deletes, additions, and changes
before sorting the transactions into agency/station
order.   It first updates all appropriate  index files,
then updates the detail file.
                    WQ-FS
                    3-10

-------
2.2  RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS

        SCAN
        This program performs a syntax check on all records
        within a retrieval request prior to the time the
        retrieval request is passed to RETRIV.  It is the first
        program initiated as a result of executing the STORET
        RET command.  The program checks for proper keyword
        spelling, formatting, and punctuation, and for proper
        keyword and keyword/value combinations.  The program
        generates a listing of errors found, and if none are
        detected, it passes the retrieval request to RETRIV for
        continued processing.

        RETRIV

        The RETRIV program is the primary program involved with
        the processing of a retrieval request.  It takes
        control once the retrieval has successfully passed the
        syntax check performed by the SCAN program, and it
        remains in control until analysis functions are
        required, which are performed by routines inherent
        within the statistical analysis retrieval programs.
        RETRIV consists of several modules each of which
        processes a specific set of retrieval request keywords,
        as described in more detail in Section 5.
                            WQ-FS
                            3-11

-------
SECTION 4:  STORING DATA INTO THE WQF

This section provides an overview of the process of storing data
into the WQF.  The structure of a typical storage request  is
described, as are the several types of storage procedures  that
can be invoked by a storage request.  The interactions between
WQF files and WQF storage programs are illustrated and described,
as are the various edit and error checks that are performed by
the storage procedures.  (Chapter WQ-DE of this Water Quality
File Part presents a detailed discussion of the data storage
capability, and how it is utilized to store and maintain water
quality station location and parametric data within the WQF.)

4.i  THE STRUCTURE OF A STORAGE REQUEST

          A WQF storage request is composed of a set of 80-
          character records (either punched cards or lines of
          information within a data set) which defines what
          information  is to be processed, and what is to be done
          with the information, i.e., is it to be initially
          stored, or used to change, be added to, or delete
          previously stored information.  The majority of  these
          records, or  cards, are of a fixed-field format,  with
          specific information being coded in specific fields,
          including card type .codes which identify the card and
          its contents to the STORET system.  Certain storage
          request cards relate only to station location
          information, while others relate only to parametric
          data.

          There are nine different types of cards that can be
          used, in differing combinations, to code station
          location data.  (And station location data can be
          entered into the WQF only via these particular cards.)
          The names, codes, and corresponding functions of these
          cards are listed in Figure 4-1.

          Other card types are used to code parametric data,  and
          include P cards, D cards, and 6 cards.  (Chapter WQ-DE
          describes these cards, and the fields within the cards,
          in greater detail.)

          Parametric data may not be stored in the same UPDATE
          run that a new station is defined and stored in  the
          WQF.   It is  generally more prudent to first assure  that
          a  station has been stored successfully and correctly
          before  storing parametric data associated with the
          station.
                               WQ-FS
                                4-1

-------
CARD NAME
            CARD  CODE
O.SPECIFY
Agency Card                     A

Station Type Card               T


Station Card                    S

Latitude/Longitude Card         0

RMI Card                        1

RMI Card                        2

Major/Minor Basin Card          3
Location Description Card       4


Descriptive Paragraph Card      5
                         general  information
                          common  to a set of stations
                         a code depicting the
                          characteristics of one or
                          more stations
                         information specific to
                          a single station
                         geographical coordinates of
                          a station's location
                         hydrologic' indices '.river ~lie
                          indices) of a station
                         continuation of information
                          on card 1
                         basin location information
                         additional information
                          identifying a station's
                          location
                         textual  information
                          describing station activity
                           FIGURE 4-1

        CARDS USED TO STORE STATION LOCATION INFORMATION
4.2  TYPES OF STORAGE PROCEDURES

          There are four procedures available to the STORET user
          to initiate different storage operations.  These are
          known as ?01, ?02, ?03, or ?04 storage procedures which
          correspond to the way they are invoked via a keyboard
          terminal.  The uses or functions of these storage
          procedure methods are summarized in Figure 4-2.
          The ?01
          employs
          be used
          station
          the onl
          change,
          card and a
          agency and
          applicable
          Figure 4-2
          for a
          cards
  storage procedure (or fixed field procedure'
  a fixed-field or standard card format,  and can
  to either add new,  change old, or delete old
  location data and/or parametric data.   (This is
   storage procedure  which can be used to store,
  or delete station location data.)  An agency
     station card will be coded to identify the
     stations involved.  This procedure is also
     to all four types of samples listed in
       The cards used to code the parametric data
?01 storage procedure are called parametric data
or 6 cards.
                              WQ-FS
                               4-2

-------

FUNCTION/USE
storing new station location data
changing station location data
deletina station location data
i "
i
storing new parametric data
changing parametric data
deleting parametric data
simple grab sample
grab sample with time
composite sample with dates
composite sample with all data
STORAGE
701
yes
yes
yes


yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
702
no
no
no


yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
PROCEDURE
703
no
no
no


yes
no
no
yes
yes .
yes
no
704
!
no
no
no


yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
                    FIGURE 4-2

PERMISSIBLE CODING PROCEDURES AS A FUNCTION OF USE
   The 702 storage procedure (or decimal input procedure)
   employs a variable or free-form card format, and can be
   used only to store parameter values, and only to store
   values sampled at a number of stations taken at
   different times, dates,  and depths  (single station
   storage).   The ?02 procedure is not used to change or
   delete parametric data,  nor can it  be used to store
   composite samples with date, time,  and sampling
   conditions identified.  The cards used to code this
   procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
   and D cards (and their respective continuation cards if
   needed).
   The 703 storage procedure  (another form of the decimal
   input procedure) also employs a variable or free-form
   card format, and also can  be used only to store
   parameter values.  This procedure is used to store
   samples taken at identical, as opposed to different,
   times,  dates, and depths (multiple station storage).
   The 703 procedure is not used to change or delete
   previously stored parameter data, nor is it used to
   store composite samples wich date, time, and sampling
   conditions identified.  The cards used to code this
   procedure are an agency card, and one or more P cards
   and D cards  (and their respective continuation cards  if
   needed).
                       WQ-FS
                        4-3

-------
          The ?G4  storage procedure (or WQGSTOR)  employs a
          variable or free-form format, and can be used either to
          store,  change,  or delete parametric data.   It also can
          be used  with all four types of samples.   The cards used
          to code  this procedure are an agency card (using either
          a fixed-format  or a variable format', and one or more
          SC cards.

          Each of  these procedures invokes the execution of a
          specific program which processes the requested storage
          procedure,  as described and illustrated in the
          paragraphs  below.

4.3  ENTERING DATA INTO THE WQF

          Figure 4-3  portrays the flow of a typical STORET
          storage  request through the STORET processing programs
          that are invoked when a storage request is entered into
          the STORET  system.   It also illustrates the various
          files that  are created as a result of the processing
          performed.

          Processing  of a user's storage request is a two-phase
          operation.   It begins with the execution of the
          procedure named STWQJ, which calls the DISTRIBUTE
          program, which reads the user input files and which
          calls the appropriate program required to process the
          specified storage procedure.  These programs (EDITB,
          GDIP, DIPMS, and WQGSTOR) process the specified storage
          request, perform a variety of error checking and field
          editing  routines, create both an ERROR file and a MOD
          file, and if the storage request involves parametric
          data, pass  control to the range check program.  Only
          those storage request records which pass the various
          editing  and error checking routines are written to the
          MOD file; all others are written to the ERROR file.

          Errors written to the ERROR file are available to the
          user who submitted the storage request, and after
          correction, the storage deck can be resubmitted, and
          placed on the MOD file, as described below.

          Throughout  the week, all users' edited and
          syntactically-correct storage requests are collected on
          the MOD file; this data  is not permanently stored
          during  the  week  in the STORET data base as a direct
          result of users' storage requests.  The second phase of
          the process of storing user water quality data occurs
          over the weekend when STORET User Assistance personnel
          run the STORET UPDATE program.  UPDATE reads the data
          in the MOD  file, performs other edit checks on the data
          being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the


                              WQ-FS
                               4-4

-------
    STORE!  index  and detail data base files.  Storage
    requests  which fail the UPDATE edits (e.g., a request
    to  delete a station not previously stored';, are  called
    secondary errors and are written to the ERROR file,
    which  users can access on Monday following the weekend
    update.
 CAflO
 DECKS  | '

	V
              EXEC
              STWJJ
 uSEfl ,

 fiues ;      |
                     FIGURE 4-3

            THE FLOW OF A STORAGE REQUEST
                        WQ-FS
                         4-5

-------
SECTION 5:  RETRIEVING DATA FROM THE WQF

This section provides an overview of the process of retrieving
data from the WQF.  The structure of a retrieval request is
described, as is the logic that should be applied in building a
retrieval request in order to obtain only that data actually of
interest.  Several diagrams are explained which illustrate the
interactions between WQF files and WQF retrieval programs.
(Chapter WQ-RET of this Water Quality File Part presents a
detailed discussion of the retrieval capability, and how it is
utilized to obtain the water quality station location and
parameter data of interest.)

5.1  THE STRUCTURE OF A RETRIEVAL REQUEST

          A WQF retrieval request is composed of one or more
          instructions which define what information is to be
          retrieved, and how the information is to be presented.
          (These  instructions are entered into the STORET system
          as 80-column punched cards or as lines of information
          of a data set via a keyboard terminal.)  An instruction
          is composed of a keyword — an English word, letter, or
          expression which generally depicts^ the function that
          the keyword performs — and, in most instances, an
          associated value which assigns a specific quantity or
          other  'value' to the keyword.  Thus the keyword and
          value  instruction is the basic element of the STORET
          WQF retrieval language, and valid combinations of these
          instructions make up a retrieval request.  One keyword,
          the 'PGM=program-name,' keyword, must appear as the
          first keyword in any retrieval request,, and it
          specifies which retrieval program is to be executed by
          the STORET system.

          Structuring a retrieval request is a relatively
          straight-forward process, involving the consideration
          of each of the six basic steps shown in Figure 5-1, and.
          the selection of those keywords (relevant to each step':'
          which will result in the desired data.  (Chapter WQ-RET
          describes this process in more detail, as well as the
          keywords that may be specified in any retrieval
          request.)
                              WQ-FS
                                5-1

-------
STEP
APPLICAS-LE  KEYWOR
                       SELEC-"
                    APPROPRIATE
                 RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
                       STATE
                      PURPOSE
                    OF RETRIEVAL
                      IDENTIFY
                     STATION (S)
                    OF INTEREST
                      IDENTIFY
                  PARAMETRIC DATA
                    OF INTEREST
                       SELECT
                  PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
                      KEYWORDS
                       SELECT
                    PRINT CONTROL
                       DESIRED
                   X^SUEMIT\
                   (     .FOP    )
                   \?ROCE.CSING/
       PGM
       ? rjp. P
   P,2D,UC,ANC,.
  SORT,SCALE,OR,
                    FIGURE  5-1

           BUILDING A RETRIEVAL  REQUEST
                       WQ-FS
                        5-2

-------
5.2  TYPES OF RETRIEVALS
          There are thirteen programs available to the STORET
          user to retrieve station and parametric data from the
          WQF.  Some programs are appropriate to those whose
          interests are geographically oriented, while others are
          suited to users who are more interested in one or more
          water quality parameters,  regardless of their specific
          geographical location.   In addition to the information
          stored from a user's own station,  a STORET user can
          also retrieve data on stations other than his own,
          depending upon the user's area of  interest or concern.

          The following list summarizes the  primary function of
          these retrieval programs and the types of information
          they provide.

          STATION INFORMATION ONLY

          program-name          primary function

              STA               produces a listing of all primary
                                and secondary station codes
                                associated with one or more
                                agency codes.

              INDEX              prints station header information
                                for each station retrieved.

             NOPAR              tests selected stations for the
                                satisfaction of certain
                                user-specified sampling criteria.

              LOG               plots a map identifying station
                                locations.

          INVENTORY OF PARAMETERS SAMPLED

          program-name          primary function

              INVENT             produce summary listings about
              INV120             all parameters sampled at
                                selected stations.  INVENT
                                utilizes a 132-character print
                                line, INV120 utilizes a
                                120-character print line.
                              WQ-FS
                               5-3

-------
LISTINGS OF ACTUAL SAMPLE VALUES
program-name

    RET
   PUNCH
                      primary function

                      obtains tabular listings of actual
                      sample values (i.e.,  raw data
                      values which have not been
                      manipulated in any way by the WQF
                      analysis programs) for selected
                      stations.

                      punches selected parametric data
                      onto 80-column cards.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF RAW DATA
                      primary function

                      compares the stored values of
                      selected water quality parameters
                      against a set(s) of user-specified
                      values or criteria.

                      performs a variety of user-specified
                      statistical calculations on the
                      values of requested parameters
                      sampled at selected stations.

                      extracts correlation and regression
                      information from selected parametric
                      data.

                      performs a variety of statistical
                      computations on the values of
                      selected parameters, and produces
                      graphic displays of the calculated
                      results as a function of the
                      stations selected.

                      retrieves user-specified parametric
                      data, and plots the values of each
                      selected parameter for each selected
                      station as a function of time.
The output that may be requested varies according to
the retrieval program, and includes printouts, punched
cards, plots, and machine-readable output located on
disk or magnetic tape.
program-name

   STAND
   MEAN
    REG
    MSP
   PLOT
                    WQ-FS
                     5-4

-------
5.3  THE FLOW 0? A RETRIEVAL REQUEST THROUGH RETRIV

          Figure 5-2 portrays the flow of a typical STORET
          retrieval request through the STORET processing
          programs that are invoked when a retrieval request is
          entered into the STORET system.  Although all retrieval
          programs do not adhere to this general flow, the
          majority do.  Those programs that bypass RETRIV, such
          as INVENT and STA, in effect perform their own RETRIV
          functions internally.

          The RETRIV program is the primary program involved in
          processing retrieval requests.  It takes control once a
          retrieval request has successfully passed the syntax
          check performed by the program SCAN, and it remains  in
          control until analysis functions are required, which
          are performed by routines inherent within the
          statistical analysis retrieval programs.  RETRIV reads
          all general retrieval keywords specified in the
          retrieval request (and as documented in Section 4 of
          the WQ-RET chapter.'; it reads the appropriate WQF index
          files to locate the data sought; it creates a HITS
          file; and after obtaining the requested data from the
          STORET data base, it generates the requested output.
          The following paragraphs describe the functions of the
          three components of RETRIV  'SEC i, SEC G, and SEC 2   in
          more detai 1.

          The program module SEC 1 reads the station
          identification keywords, and searches the appropriate
          WQF index files for those station entries which satisfy
          the user-specified station selection and station
          restriction criteria.  (This process includes the
          resolution of any masks specified within the retrieval
          request.)  SEC 1  then creates a' retrieval HITS file
          which contains a pointer to each station within STORET
          that satisfies the specified selection and restriction
          criteria.  SEC 1 also prints a message indicating the
          number of stations found, and produces a listing of  all
          control  information available to the program during
          this phase of execution.  This control information is
          often helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel for
          diagnostic purposes.

          Program module SEC G is executed only if the AGGR data
          selection keyword is specified in the retrieval
          request.  If this keyword is specified, SEC G sorts  the
          HITS file according to the AGGR criteria, and appends
          the numerical value of the AGGR keyword to each record
          within the HITS file.
                              WQ-FS
                                5-5

-------
*0. STATIONS.
OTMER CONTROL
INFORMATION
  REPORT
  OF
  OATA
  SATISFYING
  SELECTION
  CRITERIA
  OTHER
  TEMPORARY
  FILES
  IFCF, OTHERS1
                                    ANALYSIS
                                    FUNCTIONS
                                      Of
                                    REQUESTED
                                    RETRIEVAL
                                                 S RETRIEVAL
:^STRUC7lCNS TO
^ETBiV


1
] STATION IDENTIFICATION
| 
-------
          Program module SEC 2  reads the HITS file created by SEC
          1  or SEC G,  it .searches the STORE! data base for those
          stations referenced by the HITS file,  and it compares
          the raw data found with the data selection keywords
          specified in the retrieval request.  It then produces
          the output as requested via the print  control keywords
          specified in the retrieval,  printing and/or writing to
          other temporary files those data that  passed the
          selection criteria.

          Processing of the retrieval request is then either
          concluded or passed to the appropriate analysis
          function of the requested program if any statistical
          analysis processing is to be performed.  Complete
          descriptions of the data files used and created by
          these program-specific analysis functions are described
          within the WQ-RET chapter.

5.4  IDENTIFYING STATIONS WITHIN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST

          Station identification keywords are divided into two
          groups: station selector keywords, or  selectors, and
          station restriction keywords,  or restrictors.   'These
          keywords are listed and described in Section 4 of the
          WQ-RET chapter.)  At least one selector must be
          included in a retrieval request, or no stations - and
          therefore no data - will be selected oy the retrieva.
          request.  Optionally, one or more restrictors may be
          included within the retrieval  whose function is to
          further screen the selected stations.

          Station selection keywords employ OR selection  logic,
          while station restrictor keywords employ AND selection
          logic.  Normally, only a single selector should be
          specified in any single retrieval request.  Should more
          than one selector be specified, however, caution must
          be exercised, as the prevailing OR  logic results in the
          retrieval of all stations which satisfy all sets of
          criteria as defined by the selectors,  which could
          easily result in the inadvertent selection of one or
          more stations a multiple number of  times.  For  example,
          if a retrieval contained both a state selector  keyword
          (STC/ and a polygon selector keyword  ;LT,L;, stations
          located within any part of the state overlapped by  the
          polygon  (area B/ would be retrieved twice, alone witn
                              WQ-FS
                               5-7

-------
all other stations within the remaijuo.gva.re.as, of the
polygon (area A) and the state (area C).  'Such
duplicated data more than likely would not have been
intended,  would result in increased computer processing
costs, and surely would introduce analysis
incongrui ties.
The AND logic employed by the restrictors has  the
effect of limiting or narrowing the number of  stations
retrieved.  Using the polygon/state example above,  the
specification of the LT,L keywords and the ST  keyword
(a restrictor which restricts the selection of stations
to the state indicated) would result  in the retrieval
of stations located only in area B.   The retrieval
would contain no duplication of stations, and
significantly fewer total number of stations.

The sequence by which RETRIV processes station
identification keywords is illustrated by the  path
drawn in  the diagram below. ' Selector keywords are
processed independently of each other: stations  found
as a result of the first selector are ANDed with all of
the restrictor keywords specified in  the retrieval,
with the  surviving stations written to the HITS  file;
subsequent selectors are similarly processed  in  the
order specified within the retrieval  request.
                                            RESTRICTORS
                    WQ-FS
                      5-8

-------
In addition to the selection, concept illustrated above,
there is another guideline that should be understood
and followed when deciding which stations should be
specified via selectors,  and which should be specified
by restrictors.   Since the system first retrieves those
stations specified by the station selector keyword,  and
then narrows or  reduces those stations via the station
restrictor keyword,  the criteria that would expectedly
find the fewer number of  stations should always be
identified by the station selector keyword.  For
example,- if a user were interested in the stations
within one state of  an agency whose station network
encompassed several  states,the STC and U keywords
should be used.   However,  if it were known that an
agency didn't have too many  stations, but that they
were spread over a wide multi-state area, the A, S and
ST keywords would probably result in the more efficient
retrieval.  By following  this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A, S, and ST specified,
users will structure a more  efficient retrieval since
less data will be retrieved, thereby minimizing the
cost of the retrieval.
                    WQ-FS
                     5-9

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
         PART WQ                                           O
   WATER QUALITY FILE                                      ^
                                                           m
         CHAPTER
          WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
           WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sections
   1
   2
   3
   4

Appendices
   1
   2
           Subject
The Monitoring Process
Ways to Identify Stations
Coding Station Location Data
Coding Parametric Data

           Subject
Index of Available HELP Files
Record Layouts — Station Location
Data Storage Cards
Data Entry Error Messages
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1

Page
Al-1
A2-1

A3-1
                              WQ-DE
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
The purpose of this WQ-DE chapter is to describe, both in general
terms and in detail, the procedures and methods available to
store, change, and delete station location and parametric data in
the STORET Water Quality File (WQF).

This chapter is divided into several sections and supporting
appendices, as outlined in the Table of Contents.  Sections one
and two are somewhat general in content, and present,
respectively, a description of the water quality monitoring
process, and a discussion on the different ways that the identity
and location of a station can be described.  Sections three and
four are detailed in content, and describe the various procedures
which can be used to store, change, and delete station and
parametric data in the WQF.  The information in the appendices
relates specifically to Data Entry and complements the
information provided in the appendices to the WQF part.
                               WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
         PART WQ
   WATER QUALITY FILE
         CHAPTER
          WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
         SECTION                                           O

 THE MONITORING PROCESS                                    i
          WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981

-------
SECTION 1:   THE MONITORING PROCESS

The monitoring activities conducted by the states, EPA regions,
and other agencies are an essential aspect of our Nation's
program to prevent, reduce, and eliminate water pollution.  The
findings of these monitoring activities (i.e., the types and
amounts of pollutants found in water samples) are stored in the
STORET Water Quality File.  The following paragraphs describe the
monitoring process as it relates to the WQF, from establishing a
network to entering data in STORET.

ESTABLISHING A NETWORK (AGENCY)

          Monitoring strategies are developed by individual
          states and other agencies, with guidance by EPA, to
          fulfill their water quality objectives.  A great deal
          of thought and planning goes into defining the area to
          be covered, and in establishing the purposes to be
          achieved.  Once defined by the planners, the network is
          then defined to the WQF by the assignment of an agency
          code (established at EPA Headquarters in cooperation
          with the agency responsible for the network) which is
          unique to all other networks defined in STORET.

DEFINING MONITORING SITES (STATIONS)

          Part of the monitoring network strategy is the
          determination of the number and location of sites to be
          included in the network, so that they present an
          accurate picture of the water quality for the area of
          interest.  These monitoring sites are referred to as
          stations in STORET, and each station within an agency
          is assigned a unique (to the agency) primary station
          code.

SAMPLING STRATEGY

          Another aspect of the monitoring strategy for the
          network is the determination of the parameters to be
          sampled at the monitoring sites, the sampling time
          frame, and the sampling frequency.  Water quality
          managers decide which of STORET's 5000 parameters are
          to be measured in accordance with the overall
          monitoring strategy.

TYPES OF SAMPLES

          Two basic types of water samples may be taken:  a grab
          sample and a composite sample.  A grab sample is an
          individual water quality sample collected at a specific
          point in time; composite samples are combinations of
          individual samples obtained at  intervals over a period


                               WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981
                                1-1

-------
          of time or distance.  For example, a composite sample
          may consist of several grab samples spanning a 24-hour
          period where all grabs are placed in a single
          container, or a series of samples taken at equal
          distances across a stream section.  Analysis of these
          samples may be performed in the field or within a
          laboratory.  STORET provides a means to store data from
          both simple grab and sophisticated composite water
          samples.

CODING ANALYSIS FOR ENTRY INTO STORET

          Each agency establishes its own procedures for coding
          the results of the sample analyses onto sheets or forms
          which are used to prepare the data so it can be read by
          the computer from punched cards or a low-speed terminal
          data set.  At this point the data are ready to be
          stored in the WQF, as described in detail in subsequent
          sections of this chapter.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              1-2

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
         PART WQ
   WATER QUALITY FILE
         CHAPTER
          WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
         SECTION                                           O
            2                                              —
WAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS                                  Z
                                                           ro
           WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
SECTION 2:  WAYS TO IDENTIFY STATIONS

The term station refers to a specific location, or collection
point, where water quality data are sampled.  STORET's more than
500,000 stations are located on essentially all of the Nation's
rivers, lakes, streams, and other waterways.  In order to
identify a station so that it can be stored and later retrieved,
the station must be adequately and correctly described.

2.1  IDENTIFYING STATIONS

          A station can be identified by any or all of the
          following ways, which are briefly discussed in the
          paragraphs that follow.  Items which are mandatory for
          storing a station in STORET are denoted by an asterisk
          (*) in the listing below.

              *      agency code and primary station code
                     secondary station codes (station aliases)
                     hydrologic references
              *      latitude and longitude coordinates
              *      state and county codes
              *      station type
                     station depth
              *      location description
                     descriptive text
              *      major/minor/subbasin codes

          AGENCY AND STATION CODES

          Every station is located within a specific monitoring
          network which is identified by an agency code that is
          unique to all other agency codes defined within STORET.
          Each station is assigned a primary station code, and,
          optionally, up to three secondary station codes, or
          aliases.  Agency codes are established at EPA
          Headquarters.

          HYDROLOGIC REFERENCES

          A hydrologic index (or river mile index) is a numerical
          code which identifies the location of a point (station)
          on a defined river system by defining the distance of
          the point from, and its hydrologic relationship to,  the
          mouth of the river system.  A complete hydrologic index
          for a station is composed of the following codes:  a
          terminal major basin code; a terminal minor basin code;
          a terminal stream index, which defines the direction
          and level of stream flow; mileages which define the
          distances between and to confluences in the river
          system; and a code which identifies the stream level on
          which the point is located.


                               WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981
                                2-1

-------
          LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE COORDINATES

          Many stations,  particularly those on open waters such
          as oceans,  lakes,  bays,  and estuaries,  cannot always be
          easily located  using hydrologic indices.   A station's
          location can also be pinpointed by the  conventional
          geographical coordinates of latitude and longitude, in
          degrees, minutes,  seconds,  and tenths of a second.
          Latitude and longitude coordinates must be stored with
          each new STORET station.

          POLITICAL DESIGNATIONS

          Stations must also be identified with respect to the
          state and county in which they are physically located.
          The standard code designations for all  states and
          counties within the United States as established by the
          National Bureau of Standards are listed in Appendix C
          to this part of the STORET Handbook.

          STATION TYPE

          Every station must be described by a code or codes
          which depicts the station's characteristics, such as
          where the station monitors water (for example, in the
          open sea, in a  lake, or from a well or  a pipe).

          STATION DEPTH

          The total depth of the station may be stored to further
          describe the station.  This information is particularly
          valuable for lake stations.

          LOCATION DESCRIPTION

          Every station must be described by its location or
          landmark name.

          DESCRIPTIVE TEXT

          A station may be described by a detailed narrative.

          MAJOR/MINOR/SUB BASINS

          Every station is associated with an EPA major and minor
          river basin, and optionally a subbasin.

          Information which describes a station's location
          typically does not change.   When a station is initially
          identified to STORET, all information asterisked in the
          listing above must be stored, along with as much of the
          other information as is known.  The more information
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              2-2

-------
          about a station that is stored within STORET, the
          greater the flexibility in how that station and its
          parametric data can be identified and subsequently
          retrieved.
2.2  TERMINOLOGY USED
          The station location information described above can be
          entered into the WQF as 80-column punched cards using a
          card reading terminal,  or as lines of information
          within a data set using a keyboard-type terminal.  (A
          data set is a collection of logically-related data
          records residing within a computer system and
          accessible to users via remote terminals.)  For all
          intents and purposes, an 80-column card and a line of
          information within a data set are equivalent entities
          to the STORET system.  (Similarly, a deck of cards and
          an entire data set are also equivalent.)  To simplify
          the descriptions of the WQF coding requirements, all
          records of information are referred to as cards within
          this chapter.  A collection of station location records
          (information) is referred to as a station location
          storage deck, and an individual record is referred to
          as a station location storage card.
                               WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981
                                2-3

-------
2.3  CARDS USED TO CODE STATION LOCATION DATA

          The process of coding station location data encompasses
          not only the initial storing of these data into the
          WQF, but also any subsequent changes, corrections, and
          deletions made to the data.  There are nine different
          types of cards that can be used, in differing
          combinations, to code station location data.   (Station
          location data can be entered into the WQF only via
          these particular cards.)  The names, codes, and primary
          functions of these cards are as follows:
          Card Name             	

          Agency card                A

          Station Type card          T

          Station card               S

          Latitude/Longitude card    0

          RMI card                   }\

          RMI card                   2
          Major/Minor Basin card     3

          Location Description card  4

          Descriptive Paragraph      5
            card(s)
   Card Code      Used to Specify

            the agency responsible
              for a set of stations
            the characteristics of
              one or more stations
            station codes specific to
              each station
            geographical coordinates of a
              station's location
            hydrologic indices (river mile
              indices) of a station
            continuation of RMI card 1
            the basins in which the
              station is located
            brief text describing
              a station's location
            textual information
              describing station activity
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
 2-4

-------
     These cards are specified  in varying combinations
     according to the storage function  (initial store,
     change, or deletion) to be performed.  The valid
     combinations are described in detail in Section 3.  A
     typical sequence of  these  cards within a station
     location storage deck to establish a new station would
     be as follows:
                     L
                          /DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH CARD5
               LOCATION DESCRIPTION CARD  4
           L
                     MAJOR/MINOR BASIN CARD   3
                      RMI CARD  2
    L
                           RMI CARD   1
LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD  0
L
       STATION CARD  S
       STATION TYPE CARD  T
        AGENCY CARD  A
     A copy of  the  coding sheet used  to  code each of  these
     nine station location storage  cards for new station
     storage  is provided  in Appendix  2 of  this  chapter.
                          WQ-DE
                            2-5
                                         APRIL 1981

-------
    STORET USER HANDBOOK
            PART
             WQ
     WATER QUALITY FILE
           CHAPTER
            WQ-DE
  WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
                                                              V)
                                                              m
                                                              o
           SECTION                                            5
              3                                               2
CODING STATION LOCATION DATA                                  <•»
             WQ-DE                   APRIL  1981

-------
SECTION 3:  CODING STATION LOCATION DATA

This section describes, in detail, each of the nine cards used
for coding station location data, and it also describes which
cards (and which fields within the cards) are required to perform
initial station storage, station changes, and station deletion
functions, as follows:  Subsection 3.1 presents, in one location,
the formats of the station location storage cards; Subsection 3.2
describes how to combine and code these cards to initially store
station location data; Subsection 3.3 describes how these cards
are used to change previously stored station location data; and
Subsection 3.4 describes how to delete station location data from
the WQF.

3.1  FORMATS OF STATION LOCATION STORAGE CARDS

          This subsection describes in detail each of the station
          location storage cards (including each field within the
          cards) that are used to store, change, and delete
          station location data within the WQF.  These
          descriptions are presented on the following pages in a
          sequence that parallels their logical use and
          application.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                                3-1

-------
The Agency Card (A Card); Required

The agency card is used to specify general information which
relates to the user/agency associated with a network of stations,
This card must be provided for any storage operation involving
station location data, whether an initial storage, change, or
deletion operation, and must precede the station and other cards
which further define the operation to ;be performed.  Asterisked
(*) items are mandatory for new station storage.
                                 AOtNCT CMD (A CAU»
columns 1-8
columns 9-12

columns 13-15
column 16

columns 17-24
Agency Code

The one-to-eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible for
collecting and entering data into, the WQF.
Entries £re to be left-justified, leaving
unused columns blank.

Blank

Unlock After

This field is used to indicate the number of
calendar days (beginning from the sampling
date as opposed to the data storage date)
the parametric data are to be locked  (i.e.,
unavailable for retrieval by individuals
other than those authorized by the owners of
the data) after which time the data will be
unlocked automatically.  Any numerical value
up to 360 is valid.  Unused columns need not
be zero-filled.  Default value is zero.

Blank

Unlocking Key

A one-to-eight alpna-numeric code, which
must be accurately specified before any
information can be stored for the respective
stations.  This unlocking key serves  as a
safeguard against unauthorized storage of
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-2

-------
columns 25-61
columns 62-73

columns 74-77  *
columns 78-79
column 80
data.  Entries must be left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.

Name of Individual Storing Data

The name, location, telephone number, or
other information relevant to the individual
responsible for the storage of station
location information should be entered here.
The information within the field is not
stored in the WQF, but is printed on primary
error listings to facilitate user tracking
of jobs.

Blank

Lock After

The sampling date (in the format yymm) after
which data cannot be retrieved unless the
unlocking key is provided.  If a Lock After
date is not desired, code this field as
9999.  This field must be completed, and
each column must be filled with a numerical
value.

Control Code

This control code is a two-character
alphabetic value which varies according to
the storage operation being performed, i.e.,
storing a new station, or changing or
deleting previously-stored data on the
agency card or on the station type card.
The acceptable values are described in
detail in subsequent subsections.

Card Type Code

Code with the letter A.
                              WQ-DE
                                3-3
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
The Station Type Card  (T Card);  Required

The station type card  is used to denote one or more  codes  which
depict a valid type  description  of one or more stations.   The
STORET help data set named STATION.TYPE provides a complete
listing of the acceptable station types.  Asterisked items are
mandatory for new  station storage.
                                 STATION TYPf CAIO (T CAID)
                           A STRING Of VAIID COMBINATIONS OF STATION ITPt CODCS SEPARATED BV SLASHES
columns 1-78
column  79

column  80
Station Type  Information

A string of one or  more alpha-numeric codes,
separated by  slashes  (/),  which denotes
valid combinations  of  acceptable station
types.  Entries are to be  left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the letter  T.
APRIL  1981
        WQ-DE
         3-4

-------
The Station Card  (S Card); Required

The station card  is used to specify  station  identification
information specific to a single  station  associated with the
user/agency designated on the  agency (A)  card.   This card must be
provided for any  data entry operation  involving  station location
information, whether an initial storage,  change,  or deletion
operation.  Asterisked items are  mandatory for new station
storage.
                                  STATION CAIO (S CAID)
                                            STATION ALIASES
                                 1) SECONDARY SI At ION COW
                                            }> SECONDARY STATION CODE
                                                                        c cm-

                                                                        coot
columns 1-3
columns 4-18
columns 19-33

columns 34-45,
        46-57,
    and 58-67
Sort No.

The individual cards included within a
storage deck can be assigned a sequence
number for the purpose of collectively
identifying all cards which relate  to the
storage deck.  Completing this field is
optional, as the information is not stored
in the WQF.  Sort number may be any alpha-
numeric value.

Primary Station Code

The one-to-fifteen alpha-numeric primary
station code which uniquely identifies the
station in the monitoring network specified
by the preceding agency card.  Entries are
to be left-justified, leaving unused columns
blank.

Blank

Secondary Station Codes

These fields are used to specify up to three
alpha-numeric secondary station codes  (or
station aliases) associated with a
particular station.  Secondary codes are
established for the purposes of cross-
referencing stations for cooperative
monitoring, and of facilitating the
retrieval process.  Any or all of these
fields may be left blank, but if completed,
                               WQ-DE
                                 3-5
                                   APRIL 1981

-------
columns 68-69  *
columns 70-72  *
columns 73-77

columns 78-79  *
column 80
they must be left-justified, leaving unused
columns blank.  All secondary station codes
and all primary station codes assigned to
stations within an agency must be unique
within the agency, i.e., an alias for a
station may not be the same as any other
primary or secondary station code
established for any station within the
agency.

State Code

The two-digit numerical Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS) state code.  A
complete listing of these codes is provided
in Appendix C.

County Code

The three-digit numerical FIPS code
identifying the county or county equivalent,
A complete listing of these codes is
provided in Appendix C.

Blank

Control Code

This control code is a two-character
alphabetic value which varies according to
the station storage operation being
performed, i.e., storing a new station, or
changing or deleting a previously-stored
station.  The acceptable values are
described in detail in subsequent
subsections.

Card Type Code

Code with the letter S.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-6

-------
The Latitude/Longitude Card  (Header Card  0); Required

The primary purpose of the latitude/longitude  card  is  to  store
the latitude and longitude coordinates which  identify  a station's
geographical location.  Asterisked  items  are mandatory for  new
station storage.
                               uunun/iONomwi oum IHUMI cum tl
columns 1-3
columns 4-6

columns 7-13
columns  14-21
columns  22-27
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF.  Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Blank

Latitude

The latitude of the station expressed in
degrees (dd), minutes (mm), and seconds
(sss).  All columns must be completed with
numerical values, including leading zeros if
required.  Seconds may be specified to the
nearest tenth of a second.  The format of
this field, then, is ddmmsss, with no
embedded decimals.

Longitude

The longitude of the station expressed in
degrees (ddd), minutes (mm), and seconds
(sss).  All columns must be completed with
numerical values, including leading zeros if
required.  Seconds may be specified to the
nearest tenth of a second.  The format of
this field, then, is dddmmsss, with no
embedded decimals.

Blank
                               WQ-DE
                                 3-7
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
column  28
PC (Precision Code)
                     A one-digit numerical value, from one to
                     eight,  which denotes the degree of precision
                     associated with the coded latitude and
                     longitude values specified in columns 7-21.
                     If not  completed, the value of this field
                     defaults to 4.  The allowable codes denote
                     the following precisions:
                                 precision
                            one tenth second
                            one second,
                            ten seconds
                            thirty seconds
                                        precision
                                       one minute
                                       ten minutes
                                       thirty minutes
                                       one degree
column  29
columns 30-32
columns 33-79

column 80      *
D  (Depth)

The unit of measurement in which station and
sample depths are recorded is identified by
the code F (for feet) or M (for meters).  If
not completed, the value of this field
defaults to F.

Total Station Depth

A one to three digit numerical value
indicating the depth of the water at the
station location, in terms of the unit
specified in column 29.  (This is not a
sampling depth.)  Leading zeros must be
coded.  If not completed, the value of this
field defaults to 000.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the numoer 0.
NOTE:     Within the United States, the number of degrees
          longitude is always greater than the number of degrees
          latitude.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-8

-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 1); Optional

A hydrologic, or river mile, index  (RMI)  is a numerical code
which identifies the location of a  point  on a defined river
system by defining its distance from, and hydrologic relationship
to, the mouth of the river system.  The index is composed of a
major and minor basin code, a terminal stream number, and other
codes which  identify the direction  of flow, stream level, and
mileage references which allow data points to be precisely
located.  This card, and the Header Card  2 card if necessary, are
used to store a station's RMI, and  must be completed if
retrievals are to be made by river  mile indices.  These two
cards, if completed, are placed after the latitude/longitude card
within the storage deck.  Asterisked items are mandatory if this
card is used to store station location information.
                                 (Ml CMO (HIADfl CAID 1)
SOB I
. 1


I flfiftti 1
• - *
II
i - ?
' •


HI
srefAM
no
o io|n - i]

|
1
IIVEL 1 -.US
n - i«





lEVtl 1 INDEX
JO - »




1
UVil7.LIS
M - 11






LEVEL 3
31 - 34





LlVtL 3
MI11S
37 - 11





IEVEI *
INDEX
41 - .)




lEVtl 4
WILES
u - W



1
LEVEL I
INDEX
»l - M




LEVEL S
MltlS
» - J»





LEVEL 6
INDEX
•0 - *3



IEVEI 6
MILES
M - 4*
111
IEVEI 7
INDEX

1


IEVEI 1
MILES




IAST
LEVEL
USED
7' n



« M
'« '
columns 1-3
columns 4-6

columns 7-8
columns 9-10
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF.  Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Blank

Term Maj Basin (Terminal Major Basin)

The two-digit numerical code identifying the
terminal major basin with which the river is
associated.  (A terminal major basin is the
basin where the river loses its hydrological
identification, and is not necessarily the
same major basin in which a sampling station
is located.)  A leading zero must be coded.
Refer to the EPA Regional office for the
terminal basin codes for the rivers you are
monitoring.

Term Min Basin (Terminal Minor Basin)

The two-digit numerical code identifying the
terminal minor basin with which the river is
associated.  (A terminal minor basin is not
necessarily the same minor basin in which a
                              WQ-DE
                                3-9
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
columns 11-13  *
columns 14-19  *
columns 20-76
columns 77-78  *
column 79

column 80
sampling station is located.)  A leading
zero must be coded.  Refer to the EPA
Regional office for the terminal basin codes
for the rivers you are monitoring.

Term Stream No. (Terminal Stream Number)

The one-to-three digit terminal stream
number within the terminal minor basin with
which the river is associated.  Leading
zeros must be coded.

Level 1 Miles

The distance, in hundredths of a mile, from
the zero mile point of the terminal stream
to the point of confluence of the first
tributary entering the mainstem of the
river.  Leading and trailing zeros must be
specified, if required, so that each column
in the field has an entry.

Level Indices/Level Miles

These columns are used in pairs to indicate
a station's location on a river with respect
to its river's hydrologic index.  Use as
many pairs of level-indices/level-miles as
required.  If more than seven levels are
required to define a station's hydrologic
location, specify the additional levels on
the River Mile Index Card 2  (Header Card 2).
All values specified must be numerical;
leading zeros must be provided.  If a
particular level is coded, its corresponding
mileage must also be coded.  Unused pairs of
level-indices/level-miles fields are left
blank.

Last Level Used

The value of the station's last (highest)
stream level is coded to designate the
station's hydrologic index,  a numerical
value from 1 to 12.  This value must
correspond to the last level coded on this
card, or on the Header Card  2, if provided.
A leading zero must be coded.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the number 1.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-10

-------
The River Mile Index Card (Header Card 2); Optional

This card is used in conjunction with the Header Card  1  if more
than seven levels of stream indices must be provided to  identify
a station's hydrologic location.  Up to five more levels  (from
levels eight to twelve) may be specified via this card.   If
provided, this card must follow the River Mile Index Card  (Header
Card 1).  This card is not required if a station's hydrologic
index can be defined in seven levels or less.  Asterisked  items
are mandatory if this card is used to store station location
information.
                                 tW CAID (HIADEI CAM 1)

NO













}
S

, z
'

,
"

z
5



























1




















[
















MULES
1






rvf
IN


XX





WllfS
1







IN

I
EX





B


MILES
j





III





in





•,:|





| |





II





| |



columns 1-3
columns 4-6

columns 7-13   *
columns 14-53  *
columns 54-79

column  80       *
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF.  Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Blank

Term Maj Basin, Term Min Basin, Term Stream No.

These fields are coded identically as coded
on Header Card 1.

Level Indices/Level Miles

These columns are used to indicate a
station's hydrologic index if more than
seven levels are required.  Use as many
pairs of level-indices/level-miles as
necessary.  If a particular level is coded,
its corresponding mileage value must also be
coded.  All values specified must be
numeric; leading zeros must be coded.
Unused pairs of level-indices/level-miles
fields are to be left blank.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the number 2.
                              WQ-DE
                                3-11
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
The Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3); Required

This card is used to store as part of the station location data
the major and minor river basin names and codes in which a
station is physically located.  A complete listing of codes
established by the Environmental Protection Agency is provided in
Appendix D.  Asterisked items are mandatory for new station
storage.
                              MAJOI/MINO* BASIN CAIO (MIAMI CAftD 3)
SOIM
NO


SIAIlON 1OCATION MAJOB BAilN NAMf

1











1








STATION LOCATION MINOR BASIN NAME
1* - »'


























1





1





ftA
«0W,


SIN C0p«
Miiw
n fi


S«b


IHIanti
mw. >
columns 1-3
columns 4-27
columns 28-67  *
columns 68-69  *
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck.
Completing this field is optional, as the
information is not stored in the WQF.  Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Station Location Major Basin Name

The name of the major river basin in which
the station is physically located.  The
field should be left-justified, and embedded
blanks and hyphens are permissible.  The
name must correspond to the major basin code
entered in columns 68-69 of this card.

Station Location Minor Basin Name

The name of the minor river basin in which
the station is physically located.  The
field is left-justified, and embedded blanks
and hyphens are permitted.  The name must
correspond to the minor basin code entered
in columns 70-71 of this card.

Major Basin Code !

A two-digit numerical code identifying the
major river basin in which the station is
physically located.  This code should
correspond to the name of the basin provided
in columns 4-27 of this card.  A leading
zero must be coded.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-12

-------
columns 70-71
columns 72-73
columns 74-79

column  80     *
Minor Basin Code

A two-digit numerical code identifying the
minor river basin in which the station is
physically located.   This code should
correspond to the name of the basin provided
in columns 28-67 of this card.  A leading
zero must be coded.

Sub Basin Code

A two-digit numerical code identifying the
sub basin in which the station is located.
A leading zero must be specified.  If a sub
basin designation is not specified, the
system will generate zeros for this field.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the number 3.
NOTE:     Listings of the major and minor basin codes are
          contained within Appendix D to this part.  They can
          also be obtained by listing the STORET help data set
          named BASIN.CODES.  Since sub basin coding is performed
          at the state level, the applicable state office should
          be contacted for information on sub basin codes.
                              WQ-DE
                               3-13
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
The Location Description Card  (Header  Card  4);  Required

This card is used to store descriptive station  header information
as part of the station location  data.   Asterisked items are
mandatory for new station storage.
                              LOCATION OfSCIIPTtON CARD (MIAMI CAftD 4)
                    lOCATlON Or SITE LANDMARK NAMES. HC
columns 1-3
columns 4-51
columns 52-79

column  80      *
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign  a  sequence
number to the cards within a storage  deck.
Completing this field is optional,  as the
information is not stored in the  WQF.   Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Location of site:  Landmark names,  etc.

An alpha-numeric description (up  to 48
characters in length) of the station's
actual location, such as the alphabetic name
of the river on which the station is  located
and other descriptive information which
would be informative to pinpoint  the
station.  Embedded blanks are permissible.
The field is to be left-justified.

Blank

Card Type Code

Code with the number 4.
APRIL  1981
        WQ-DE
         3-14

-------
Descriptive Paragraph Cards  (Header Card  5);  Optional

A maximum of 15 of these cards may be  used  to store a  narrative
which describes the station  in detail.  This  information is
stored as the station descriptive paragraph,  which  can be printed
on a retrieval output at the  user's option.   Each card contains
up to 72 alpha-numeric characters of descriptive information.
These cards are placed last  in a station  location storage deck.
Asterisked items are mandatory if this card is used to store
station location information.
                              Docnravi MUOUVH CAIM (MUDU CMC
                                   DC&CRIT1ON (7->l>
SOtl NO Illlanil
columns 1-3
columns 4-6

columns 7-78   *
column  79
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to the cards within a storage deck..
Completing this field is optional, as  the
information is not stored in the WQF.  Sort
number may be any alpha-numeric value.

Blank

Description

Up to 72 alpha-numeric characters of
descriptive information can be specified on
a single 5 card, and continued onto a
subsequent 5 card, for up to a total of
fifteen 5 cards.  Embedded blanks and  other
special characters, such as punctuation
marks, are permissible.  Each 5 card
corresponds to a single line of information
within the descriptive paragraph.

Line Position Code

A single alpha-numeric value which denotes
the relative position of the line of
descriptive information (coded in columns  7-
78) within the descriptive paragraph.  This
field must be completed with one of the
following codes:
                               WQ-DE
                                3-15
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
column  80
                             relative line
                               position
                                  1
                                  2
                                  3
                                  4
                                  5
                                  6
                                  7
                                  8
Card Type Code

Code with the number 5
                                 relative line
                         code      position
                           8           9
                           9          10
                           J          1 1
                           K          12
                           L          13
                           M          14
                           N          15
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         3-16

-------
3.2  STORING A NEW STATION
          In order to successfully enter a new station into the
          WQF, certain information about the station must be
          known and coded on the appropriate station location
          data storage cards which are described in the preceding
          subsection and which are shown in Appendix 2.  Failure
          to provide all of the required information will result
          in an unsuccessful storage of the station.

          As a general rule, STORET users should provide as much
          information as possible in addition to the required
          information to describe a station's location.  The more
          information that is stored, the more flexibility there
          is in retrieving data stored with that station, not
          only by the user storing the data, but also by other
          users who may have an interest in data other than their
          own.

          EPA's processing of users' storage requests is a two-
          phase operation.  The first phase is invoked when users
          submit their requests to add, change, or delete WQF
          data, whether station location or parametric data.
          These requests are processed by the appropriate STORET
          input processing programs which perform a variety of
          error checking and field editing routines.  Those
          storage requests which pass the data editing process
          are written to a special STORET file, called the MOD
          file, to await further processing.  Any errors which
          were detected during this first phase are made
          available to the user.

          Throughout any given week, all users' edited and
          syntactically correct storage requests are collected on
          the MOD file.  These data are not permanently stored in
          the WQF during the week.  The second phase of the
          process of storing user water quality data occurs over
          the weekend when STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE
          program.  This program reads the data accumulated in
          the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
          being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
          WQF.  Storage requests which fail the UPDATE edit
          checks (e.g., a request to delete a station not
          previously stored) generate secondary errors which are
          also made available to the user.

          Parametric data may not be stored in the same run that
          a new station is defined and stored in the WQF.  It is
          generally more prudent to first assure that a station
          has been stored successfully and correctly before
          storing parametric data associated with the station.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               3-17

-------
          Upon initially storing a station into the WQF,  the
          STORET system automatically appends three items of
          information to the station location data stored with
          the station:  (1)  the date the station was stored in the
          WQF;  (2)  the station's archive class, which denotes
          whether a station's data are on-line or in disk-
          mountable status;  and (3) the names of the state and
          county in which the station is located.  This
          additional information appears in the station header
          information printed at the top of retrieval outputs.

          Each station data storage deck consists of two control
          cards (a 7START card and a ?01 card) and an appropriate
          set of station location storage cards as described
          below.

          The following station location storage cards (and
          fields within those cards) are mandatory or optional as
          shown below when storing a new station into the WQF.
          Users are reminded that the coding of these cards is
          described in the previous subsection.

          Required Cards          Optional Cards

          A   Agency Card         1   RMI Card
          T   Station Type Card   2   RMI Card
          S   Station Card        5   Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
          0   Lat/Long Card
          3   Maj/Min Basin Card
          4   Location Description
                Card

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns      field                remarks
           1-8      agency code
          17-24     unlocking key
          74-77     lock after
          78-79     control code        must be blank
            80      card type code      must be an A

          It is strongly recommended that columns 25-61
          be completed as this information is often
          helpful to STORET User Assistance personnel
          when attempting to assist a user with
          storage questions or problems.

          Required Fields - T Card

          columns      field                remarks
           1-78     station type code
            80      card type code      must be a T
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              3-18

-------
          Required Fields - S Card
          columns      field
           4-18     primary station code
          68-69     state code
          70-72     county code
          78-79     control code
           80       card type code

          Required Fields - 0 Card
          columns
           7-13
          14-21
            28
            29
          30-32
            80
   field
latitude
longitude
precision code
depth units
total depth
card type code
                        remarks
                    must be NS
                    must be an S
    remarks
          Required Fields - 3 Card

          columns      field
           4-27     station location
                      major basin name
          28-67     station location
                      minor basin name
          68-69     major basin code
          70-71     minor basin code
            80      card type code

          Required Fields - 4 Card

          columns      field
           4-51     location of site
            80      card type code
defaults to 4
defaults to F
defaults to 000
must be a zero
                        remarks
                    must be a 3
                        remarks

                    must be a 4
3.3  CHANGING STATION LOCATION INFORMATION

          There are many situations that may necessitate the
          modification,  change,  or correction of one or more
          items of station location information that have been
          stored previously,  such as the need to change an
          unlocking date, or to provide additional station
          location information not known when the station was
          stored initially.   This subsection defines the types of
          changes that can be made to station location
          information already stored, along with the coding
          required to effect the changes.
                              WQ-DE
                               3-19
                                   APRIL 1981

-------
3.3.1   CHANGING AGENCY CARD INFORMATION (A CARD)

          The only fields on the Agency Card which may be changed
          by a user are the lock after field and the unlock after
          field.  Agency codes and their associated unlocking
          keys can be changed only by STORET User Assistance and
          necessitates a special maintenance run executed over a
          weekend.  Whenever an unlock after or lock after field
          is being changed, changes to other station location
          information cannot be made in the same update cycle.

          The lock after date (columns 74-77 of the A card) is
          the date after which data cannot be retrieved unless
          the unlocking key is provided.  The field may need to
          be changed if data were initially locked and are now to
          be released for retrieval purposes.  To change a lock
          after or unlock after date, code the following:

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card - one for each station whose data
                                 are to be unlocked.

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8      agency code
          13-15     unlock after        replaces stored date
          17-24     unlocking key
          74-77     lock after          replaces stored date
          78-79     control code        must be CD
           80       card type code      must be an A

NOTE:      If the unlock after field is to be changed, the lock
          after field may be left blank, and vice versa.

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18   primary station code   left-justified
            80    card type code         must be an S
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              3-20

-------
3.3.2  CHANGING STATION TYPE INFORMATION (T CARD)

          Any station type code previously stored applies to one
          or more stations within an agency code.  A station type
          code is changed by coding a new T card whose
          information will completely replace the old station
          type coding.  The T card is followed by one or more S
          cards which identify which stations are to have their
          station type codes changed.  The STORET help data set
          named STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station
          types.

          To change a station type, code the following:

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          T     Station Type Card
          S     Station Card - one for each station whose station
                                 type codes are to be changed

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8      agency code
          17-24     unlocking key
          78-79     control code        must be CT
           80       card type code      must be an A

          Required Fields - T Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-78     string of station   this string replaces the
                      type codes          old string
                      separated by
                      slashes
            80      card type code      must be a T

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18     primary station code
            80      card type code      must be an S
NOTE:     Changes to T card information cannot be made in the
          same update cycle in which changes are made to other
          station storage cards.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               3-21

-------
3.3.3  CHANGING STATION CARD INFORMATION (S CARD)

          Secondary station codes and/or state/county codes may
          be changed by the user.  Primary station codes may not
          be changed by the user, but may be changed by STORET
          User Assistance at the request of the user.  Changes to
          fields on the S card may be made by entering the
          control code CX in columns 78-79 of the S card, and by
          coding the replacement values in the appropriate
          fields.  Fields which are to remain as presently stored
          in STORET may be either left blank or coded at the
          choice of the user.  If a field is to be deleted (and a
          replacement value is not to be provided), an X must be
          coded in the first position of that field.

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8      agency code
          17-24     unlocking key
            80      card type code       must be an A

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18   primary station code   left-justified
          78-79   control code           must be CX
           80     card type code         must be an S

          Optional Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
          34-45   secondary station code   The fields to be changed
          46-57   secondary station code     must be coded with the
          58-67   secondary station code     replacement value.  Re-
          68-69   state code                 maining optional fields
          70-72   county code                may be coded or left blank
                                             An X must be coded in the
                                             first position of any sec-
                                             ondary station code field
                                             in order to be deleted.

NOTE:     The state/county code  (columns 68-72) is treated as one
          field.  Thus, if the county code is to be replaced but
          the state code is to remain as stored (or vice versa),
          the entire field (columns 68-72) must be recoded.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              3-22

-------
3.3.4  CHANGING LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD INFORMATION (0 CARD)

          Any station location data stored via the 0 card can be
          changed by the user.  Changes to fields on the 0 card
          may be made by entering the control code CX in columns
          78-79 of the preceding S card, along with the new 0
          card field(s) coded in their usual columns.  Data
          unchanged on the 0 card must be recoded.  (Data on the
          0 card may only be changed; no data may be deleted.)

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card
          0     Latitude/Longitude Card
          Required Fields - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
            80
           field
          agency code
          unlocking key
          card type code
          Required Fields - S Card
          columns
           4-18
          78-79
            80
           field
                     remarks
                    must be an A
                     remarks
          primary station code
          control code        must be CX
          card type code

Required Fields - 0 Card

columns
            80
 field
card type code
          Optional Fields - 0 Card

          columns    field
           7-21     latitude/longitude
            28      precision code
            29      depth
          30-32     total depth
                    must be an S
 remarks
must be a zero
                               remarks
                              The fields to be
                                changed may be
                                coded with the
                                replacement value.
                                Remaining fields which are
                                not to be changed must be
                                recoded.
NOTE:     The data on the latitude/longitude card are  treated as
          one field.  Thus,  if any part of the field  (columns 7-
          32) is to be replaced, the entire field must be
          recoded.
                              WQ-DE
                                3-23
                                             APRIL  1981

-------
3.3.5  CHANGING RMI INFORMATION (1  and 2 CARDS)

          All station location data stored via the 1  and 2 cards
          may be changed by the user.   Changes to fields on these
          cards may be made by entering the control code CX in
          columns 78-79 of the preceding S card,  and by
          reentering all the 1 and 2 card information, including
          the fields to be changed.  Entries on the 1  and 2 cards
          are treated as a single field; therefore any change
          made to fields on either card requires repeating all
          RMI information.

          These same procedures apply if RMI is being added to a
          previously stored station which did not have RMI data
          provided at the time the station was initially stored.

          The following cards and fields are required to change
          RMI data:

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card
          1     RMI Card
          2     RMI card - only if more than 7 levels are defined

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8      agency code
          17-24     unlocking key
            80      card type code      must be an A

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18     primary station code
          78-79     control code        must be CX
            80      card type code      must be an S

          Required Fields - 1 Card

          columns    field               remarks
           7-78   all fields            Replacement fields
                                          as well as the
                                          remaining RMI
                                          fields must be
                                          f i11ed in.

           80    card type code         must be a 1
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              3-24

-------
          Required Fields - 2 Card

          columns    field               remarks
          7-53   all fields.  This     Replacement fields as
                   card is not           well as the remaining
                   required if the       RMI fields must be
                   hydrologic index      filled in.
                   is defined in
                   seven levels or
                   less.
          80     card type code        must be a 2
NOTE:     The data on the RMI cards are treated as single fields,
          Thus, if any part of a field on a card is to be
          replaced, then the entire card must be recoded.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               3-25

-------
3.3.6  CHANGING MAJOR/MINOR BASIN INFORMATION (3 CARD)
          All station location data stored via the 3 card may be
          changed by the user.  Changes to the 3 card information
          are made by coding CX in the control code field
          (columns 78-79) of the preceding S card, along with the
          new 3 card field(s) coded in their usual columns.
          Fields left blank on the card are not affected by the
          change.

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card          ;
          3     Major/Minor Basin Card
          Required Fields - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
            80
 field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
          Required Fields - S Card
          columns
           4-18
          78-79
            80
 field
             remarks
            must be an A
             remarks
primary station code
control code        must be CX
card type code      must be an S
          Required Fields - 3 Card
          columns
 field
           80       card type code

          Optional Fields - 3 Card
          columns
           4-27

          28-67

          68-73
 field
station
  major
station
  minor
location
  codes
location
basin name
location
basin name
 basin
             remarks
            must be a 3
 remarks
The fields to be
  changed or added must
  be coded. The fields
  not to change may be
  either specified or left
  blank.
APRIL  1981
         WQ-DE
          3-26

-------
3.3.7  CHANGING LOCATION DESCRIPTION INFORMATION (4 CARD)

          The station location information stored via the 4 card
          may be changed by the user.  Changes to the 4 card may
          be made by coding CX in the control code field of the
          preceding S card, along with the new location of site
          data coded in columns 4-51 of the 4 card.

          The same procedures apply if location description data
          are being added to a previously stored station which
          did not have location description data provided at the
          time the station was initially stored.

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card
          4     Location Description Card
          Required Fields - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
            80
   field
  agency code
  unlocking key
  card type code
          Required Fields - S Card
          columns
           4-18
          78-79
            80
   field
  remarks
 must be an A
  remarks
  primary station code
  control code        must be CX
  card type code      must be an S
          Required Fields - 4 Card
          columns
           4-51
   field
station location
  information
            80
card type code
  remarks
The information to
  be changed or added
  must be coded, as
  the entire field
  replaces whatever
  information was
  previously stored.

must be a 4
                              WQ-DE
                               3-27
                                     APRIL 1981

-------
3.3.8  CHANGING DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH INFORMATION (5 CARD)
          All station location information stored via the 5 card
          may be changed by the user.  Changes to the 5 card may
          be made by coding CX in the control code field of the
          preceding S card, along with the new 5 card field(s)
          coded in their usual columns.  Any number of 5 cards
          can be changed in this manner.

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card
          5     Descriptive Paragraph Cards
          Required Fields - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
            80
 field
agency code
unlocking key
card type code
          Required Fields - S Card
          columns
           4-18
          78-79
            80
 field
 remarks
must be an A
 remarks
primary station code
control code        must be CX
card type code      must be an S
          Required Fields - 5 Card
          columns
           7-78
            79

            80
 field
description
line position
  code
card type code
 remarks
The information to be
  changed or added must be
  coded, as the entire field
  replaces whatever information
  was previously stored.
identifies the line of data
  which is to be replaced.
must be a 5
APRIL 1981
         WQ-DE
          3-28

-------
3.4  DELETING A STATION OR SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA

          The STORET system allows users to delete stations that
          have been stored previously (including all parametric
          data stored with those stations), or to delete certain
          station location data either for an entire card or on a
          field-by-field basis.

3.4.1  DELETING A STATION AND ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH IT

          To delete a station and all data stored with the
          station, both station location data and parametric
          data, code the following:

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card

          Required Fields - A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8       agency code
          17-24      unlocking key
            80       card type code    must be an A

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18   primary station code  station to be deleted from WQF
          78-79   control code          must be DS
            80    card type code        must be an S

3.4.2  DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA

          The station location data that may be selectively
          deleted from STORET includes the following fields
          and/or cards:

                     card       information that can be deleted

                       S        secondary station codes
                       1        all data on card
                       2        all data on card
                       5        all data on card
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               3-29

-------
          To delete station location data,  code the following
          cards:

          Required Cards

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card

          Required Fields - ,A Card

          columns    field               remarks
           1-8       agency code
          17-24      unlocking key
            80       card type code    must be an A

          Required Fields - S Card

          columns    field               remarks
           4-18   primary station code
          78-79   control code         must be CX
           80     card type code       must be an S

          Optional Cards

          1      RMI Card 1
          2      RMI Card 2
          5      Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
          The placement of an X in column 7 of a 1,  2, or 5 card
          deletes the entire card.  The placement of an X in
          column 34, 46, or 58 of an S card will delete that
          secondary station code.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              3-30

-------
3.5  EXAMPLES OF CODING STATION  LOCATION  DATA

          This subsection presents  several  examples of the
          required coding necessary to  store,  change,  or delete
          station location data  from the  WQF,  using the station
          location storage cards described  in this section.

3.5.1  STORING A NEW STATION

          Store a new station  for agency  14AGNFS9, whose primary
          code is ABC987.  The station  also has two aliases:
          123456 and WYZQ.  The  latitude  and longitude of this
          station located in Gogebic County, (FIPS 053) Michigan
          (FIPS 26) are 46 degrees, 14  minutes, and 31.2 seconds
          and 89 degrees, 21 minutes and  48.2 seconds,
          respectively, to a precision  of one tenth second.  The
          station depth is 10  feet, and the station is located in
          the Platte minor river basin  (code 17) within the Lake
          Michigan major river basin (code  08).  The station is
          located on the Onowagon River (at point C on the map
          below), at the Main  Street bridge, 10 miles north of
          the Fairchild Reservoir.   The coding to store this
          information is shown on the next  page.
                                        STREAM LEVEL

                                  023J00020 *- INDEX NUMBER
                   08  MAJOR BASIN
                   1.7  MINOR BASIN
                                  LAKE
TERMINAL
 STREAM
 NUMBER
                               WQ-DE
                                3-31
             APRIL 1981

-------
01         2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

? START
14AGNFS9        SECRET  NAME OF USER                                    9999  A
AMBNT/STREAM                                                                  T
   ABC987                        123456      XYZQ                 26053     NSS
      461431208921482      1F010                                              0
      08170020133410000500038160001003116001002348                          04 1
   LAKE MICHIGAN           PLATTE                                 081700      3
   ONOWAGON RIVER                                                             4
      RIVER IS SAMPLED FROM BRIDGE ON MAIN STREET AT CENTER ON DOWNSTREAM SIDE05
      SAMPLING POINT IS 10 MILES NORTH OF THE FAIRCHILD RESERVOIR             15
      AVERAGE FLOW IS 430 CFS                                                25

0        1         2         3         4          5         6         7         8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981                        WQ-DE
                                    3-32

-------
3.5.2  CHANGING AND DELETING SELECTED STATION LOCATION DATA

           Make the following changes and deletions to the data
           stored in the preceding  example.

           - Change the level 4 miles on the RMI  card to 30.34
             miles.

           - Change the latitude to 46 degrees,  15  minutes, and
             32.0 seconds,  and change the station depth to 20  feet.

           - Change the station type to AMBNT/LAKE.

           - Delete the secondary station code 123456.
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ? START
  1 4AGNFS9       SECRET                                                   A
     ABC987                      X                                       CXS
        08170020133410000500038160001003116001003034                       04 1
        461532008921482     1F020                                          0

  0       1        2        3        4        5        6        7         8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ?START
  701
  14AGNFS9       SECRET                                                 CTA
  AMBNT/LAKE                                                              T
     ABC987                                                               S

  0        1        2        3        4        5        6        7         8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
           Note that  changing data  on either the  0  or 1 card
           requires the entire card to be recoded.   The X in
           column 34  of the S card  deletes the secondary station
           code 123456.   Note also  that a change  to T card
           information  cannot be made in a run in which other
           station location data are changed; a separate run must
           be made in the following update cycle.
                                WQ-DE                      APRIL  1981
                                 3-33

-------
3.5.3  DELETING ALL  DATA ASSOCIATED WITH A  STATION

           The following example  deletes station ABC987  stored in
           a previous example.  All data associated with the
           station, both station  location and parametric,  will be
           deleted.
  01         2        3        45        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  7START
  14AGNFS9       SECRET                                                   A
     ABC987                                                             DSS

  0       1         2        3        4        5        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL  1981                      WQ-DE
                                 3-34

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
          PART
           WQ
   WATER QUALITY FILE
         CHAPTER
          WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
                                                           V)
                                                           m
                                                           o
         SECTION
            4
 CODING PARAMETRIC DATA
           WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
SECTION 4:  CODING PARAMETRIC DATA

The purpose of this section is to describe how parametric data
are coded for entry to the WQF.  The section details each of the
cards used for coding parametric data, and also describes which
cards, and which fields within those cards, are required to
perform initial parametric data storage, change, and delete
functions.

4.1  DEFINING SAMPLE INFORMATION

          The selection of parameters that are sampled at a
          station is a function of the monitoring strategy and
          other requirements established by the agency
          responsible for the station.  Regardless of which
          parameters are sampled, certain information may be
          defined for each sample that is to be stored within the
          WQF.  The following list summarizes the sample
          information which may be stored in the WQF.  Some of
          the information is mandatory for data storage, and some
          is optional.  (These differences are noted later in the
          section.)

           - the location (primary or secondary station code)
               where the sample was taken
           - the date (year, month, day) the sample was
               collected
           - the time (hour, minute) the sample was collected
           - the depth (in feet or meters) at which the sample was
               taken
           - the values (amounts) of the sample parameters
           - the specification of one or more remark codes which
               further describe the conditions under which.the
               sample was taken
           - and for composite samples, the composite type and
               value indicators

          Analytical results are stored as data records in the
          WQF, one record for each sample.  New data records are
          created each time a date, time, or depth changes.  For
          example, assume a sample is stored containing values of
          three parameters for February 10, 1981 at 2:00.  If
          three additional parameters are stored for the same
          date and time they will become part of the original
          record which will now contain values of six parameters.
          If, however, the three additional parameters have a
          date and time of February 10, 1981 at 3:00, a new
          record will be created for the three parameters.

          The maximum number of parameter values which can be
          stored per sample per week is 250, a rather large
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                                4-1

-------
          number,  which should not impose any restrictions on
          normal data storage activity.

          Analytical results (parameter  values or amounts) are
          associated with standard 5-digit STORET parameter
          codes.  Lists of these codes can be obtained by
          following the instructions given in Appendix B:
          Parameters and Parameter Codes.  These parameter codes
          define the method by which an  analysis was performed
          and the form and units in which the results were
          recorded.

          Users are cautioned that the codes they specify are the
          correct codes, i.e., that the  codes correspond to the
          actual analytical method employed.  (Some codes are
          similar but distinctly different, e.g., 00070
          Turbidity-Jackson Candle and 00075 Turbidity-Hellige;
          other parameters may be analyzed in several forms,
          e.g., metals which can be reported in total, dissolved,
          or suspended forms; and others which may be reported by
          a laboratory in units other than those required for
          storage in STORET.)


4.1.1   TERMINOLOGY USED

          The information described in this section can be
          entered into the WQF as 80-cqlumn punched cards using a
          card-reading terminal, or as lines of information
          within a data set using a keyboard-type terminal.  (A
          data set is a collection of logically-related data
          records residing within a computer system and
          accessible to users via remote terminals.)  An 80-
          column card and a line of information within a data set
          are equivalent entities to the STORET system.
          Similarly, a deck of cards and an entire data set are
          also equivalent.  To simplify  the descriptions of the
          coding requirements for the coding of parametric data,
          all records of information are referred to as cards
          within this section.  A collection of parameter data
          cards is referred to as a parametric data storage deck,
          and an individual record is referred to as a parametric
          data card.

4.1.2  USE OF STATION LOCATION AND BEGINNING CONTROL CARDS

          Depending upon the way the parametric data are being
          coded, two station location storage cards — the Agency
          card  (A card) and, in some cases, a Station card (S
          card) — are used to identify  the agency and station to
          which the parametric data belong.  Each parametric data
          storage deck begins with two control cards: a 7START


APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-2

-------
          card, and a ?0n card, where n is a number from one to
          four, which denotes the type of storage procedure used.
          These beginning control cards are then followed by an
          agency card as described below.

4.1.3  USE OF THE AGENCY CARD (A CARD)

          As with any data entry operation involving either
          station location or parametric data, the agency to
          which the station and/or parametric data are related
          must be specified.  An unlocking key must also be
          specified in order to prevent unauthorized data entry.
          The agency card, as described in Section 3, is used to
          provide this information when storing parametric data.

          The following fields of an A card are to be coded when
          storing parametric data by any of the storage
          procedures described below.
columns 1-8
columns 9-16

columns 17-24
columns 25-60
Agency Code

The one-to-eight character agency code
assigned to the agency responsible for
collecting and entering data into the WQF.
Entries are to be left-justified, leaving
unused columns blank.

Blank

Unlocking Key

A one-to-eight character alpha-numeric code,
which must be accurately specified before any
information can be stored for the respective
stations.  This unlocking key serves as a
safeguard against unauthorized; storage of
data.  Entries must be left-justified,
leaving unused columns blank.

Name of Individual Storing Data

The name, location, telephone number, or
other information relevant to the individual
responsible .for the storage of station
location information should be entered here.
The information within the field is not
stored in the WQF, but is printed on primary
error listings to facilitate user tracking
of jobs.
                              WQ-DE
                                4-3
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
column 61
column 62
columns 63-77
Date Check

This field is used primarily for correcting
or changing previously-stored parametric
data, for instance, data that may have been
stored incorrectly prior to the time that
date edit checking was performed
automatically by the STORET system.
Completing this field with the letter B
specifies that no date and/or time checking
are to be performed automatically by the
system.  If date checking is to be
performed, leave this column blank.

Depth Unit

This field is used to specify the unit of
measurement in which the sample depths are
recorded.  Either F (for feet) or M (for
meters) may be specified.  If not completed,
the value for this field defaults to F,
feet.

Blank
columns 78-79        Control Code

                     This field is to be left blank for all
                     parametric data storage operations.

column 80            Card Type Code

                     Code with the letter A.

          A free-format agency card may be substituted for the A
          card when using the WQGSTOR (?04) storage procedure.
          Its coding is described later in this section.

4.1.4  CARDS USED TO STORE, CHANGE, AND DELETE PARAMETRIC DATA

          In addition to the agency and station cards, there are
          several other cards which are used solely to input,
          change, or delete parametric data.  These include
          Parameter or P Cards, Data or D cards, Parametric Data
          or 6 Cards, and the AC and SC cards used in ?04 storage
          procedures.  Each of these cards is described in detail
          in subsequent subsections.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-4

-------
4.1.5  WAYS TO CODE PARAMETRIC DATA

          There are four ways that parametric data may be coded
          for entry to the WQF.   These are known as types ?01,
          ?02, ?03, and ?04 and each numbered procedure serves to
          call the proper STORET edit program to perform against
          the data.  The uses or functions of these storage
          procedure methods are summarized in the following
          table, and are further described in the paragraphs and
          subsections that follow:
                     FUNCTION/USE
STORAGE PROCEDURE
?01  ?02  ?03  ?04
             storing new parametric data
             changing parametric data
             deleting parametric data

                Sample Types

             grab sample with date
             grab sample with date and time
             composite sample with
              beginning and ending dates
             sophisticated composite
              sample with dates, times, and
              conditions
yes  yes  yes  yes
yes   no   no  yes
yes   no   no  yes
yes  yes  yes  yes
yes  yes  yes  yes
yes  yes  yes  yes
yes
no
no  yes
          The ?01 type of storage procedure  (or fixed-form
          procedure) employs a fixed-field or standard card
          format, and can be used to either  add new, change old,
          or delete old parameter values.  An agency card and
          station card must be coded to  identify the agency and
          stations involved.  This procedure is also applicable
          to all four types of samples shown in the table above.

          The Decimal Input (DIP) procedure  types ?02 and ?03
          allow keypunching of free-form data cards directly from
          tables or reports.

          The ?02 procedure is used when the same 30 or fewer
          parameters are measured at all stations in the storage
          deck but collection times, dates,  and depths differ.
          The cards -used to code this procedure are a 7START
          card, a ?02 card, an Agency card (A card), one or more
          P cards (30 parameters per P card  and one P
          continuation card) which identify  the parameters to be
                              WQ-DE
                                4-5
          APRIL 1981

-------
          stored, and as many D cards as necessary to identify
          the sampling stations, dates, times, depths, and
          values.  The procedure may be used only to add new
          samples or additional parameters to existing samples.
          Coding additional P and D cards provides for the
          storage of an unlimited number of samples.

          The ?03 storage procedure is used to store a set of
          parameters taken at the same dates, times, and depths
          for different stations.  The cards used to code this
          procedure are a 7START card, a ?03 card, an Agency card
          (A card), one or more P cards which identify the
          stations, and as many D cards as necessary to identify
          the parameters, dates, times, depths and values.  The
          procedure may be used only to add new samples or to add
          additional parameters to existing samples.  Coding
          additional P and D cards provides for the storage of an
          unlimited number of samples.

          The ?04 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR) employs a
          variable or free-form card format, and can be used
          either to store, change, or delete parametric data.  It
          also can be used with all four types of samples shown
          in the table above.  The cards used to code this
          procedure are a 7START card, a ?04 card, an agency card
          (using either a fixed-format or a variable format), and
          one or more SC cards which identify the stations,
          dates, times, depths, parameters, and values.  Coding
          for the variable format agency card .is described in the
          next subsection.
4.1.6  THE UPDATE PROCESS
          The processing of users' storage requests is a two-
          phase operation.  The first phase is invoked when users
          submit their requests to add, change, or delete WQF
          data, whether station location or parametric data.
          These requests are processed by the appropriate STORET
          input processing programs which perform a variety of
          error checking and field editing routines.  Those
          storage requests which pass the data editing process
          are written to a special STORET file, called the MOD
          file, to await further processing.  Any errors which
          were detected during this first phase are made
          available to the user.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-6

-------
Throughout any given week, all users' edited and
syntactically correct storage requests are collected on
the MOD file.  These data are not permanently stored .in
the WQF during the week.  The second phase of the
process of storing user water quality data occurs over
the weekend when STORET personnel run the STORET UPDATE
program.  This program reads the data accumulated in
the MOD file, performs other edit checks on the data
being stored, changed, or deleted, and then updates the
WQF.  Storage requests which fail the UPDATE edit
checks  (e.g., a request to delete a date value not
previously stored) generate secondary errors which are
also made available to the user.
                    WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                      4-7

-------
4.2  STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA

          This subsection describes in detail each of the
     "    -different parametric data storage cards, and each field
          within these cards, that are used to store parametric
          data within the WQF.  In any given operation, only
          those parametric data storage cards may be used that
          apply to the storage procedure used (i.e., ?01, ?02,
          ?03, or ?04).

          All four storage procedures ;may be used to add new data
          to the WQF.  They are presented in order of complexity
          of usage and increasing capability from easier to more
          difficult, starting with ?02 and progressing to ?03,
          ?04, and lastly ?01.

4.2.1  SINGLE STATION DIP INPUT (Type ?02)

          Cards Used:

                     ?START
                     ?02
                     A Card
                     P Card(s)
                     D Card(s)

          The single station decimal input procedure (DIP) is
          used when the same set of parameters was sampled at a
          number of stations, but the samples were taken at
          different dates, times, and depths.  Up to 30
          parameters can be stored by a single P card and one
          continuation card.  (If more than 30 parameters are to
          be stored, then multiple P cards - and continuation
          cards - must be coded.)  The P card is used to identify
          the specific parameters whose values are to be stored.
          The parameter values are coded on one or more Data
          cards (D cards) which follow the P cards.

          The format of the P card used for single station input
          via the ?02 procedure is as follows:
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-8

-------
The Parameter Card (P Card), Single Station DIP Format
columns 1-4
column 5
column  6
columns 7-76
Card Type Code

A letter P enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a parameter
card.  Enter a comma in the column after
this field.  Thus, this four-column field is
coded:  'P',

Depth Indicator

This one-character field is to contain
either a blank or one of the following
alphabetic characters which indicates the
type of depth at which the sample was taken:

Blank - regular depth of sample measured from
          the surface
    B - the depth to the bottom of the water
          column
    V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
          from the surface to the depth recorded
    P - a pore sample which consists of the
          water extracted from a core sample
    D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
          using a sediment sampler such as an
          Ekman or a Peterson dredge
    C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
          core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
          Wilding sampler

The STORET help data set named
SAMPLE.IDENTITY lists all codes used to
identify water quality samples.

Sample Depth

If sample depths are to be coded on the
following data cards, code the letter D;
otherwise leave the field blank.

Parameter Codes

This field is used to code from one to
fourteen 5-digit water quality parameter
codes.  Each code specified must be five
digits in length, i.e., leading zeros must
be specified.  The codes must not be
separated by commas or blanks.  A complete
list of the parameter codes defined within
STORET is referenced within Appendix B.
                              WQ-DE
                                4-9
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
columns 77-79        Blank

column  80           Continuation Code
                     If more than fourteen parameters are to be
                     specified, code the letter C in this column,
                     and code the additional parameters on a
                     continuation card.
Continuation Card
          A single continuation card may contain from one to
          sixteen additional five-digit parameter codes, for a
          total of thirty parameter codes.  Coding begins in
          column one, proceeding to column 80 if necessary.  As
          with the P card, individual codes must not be separated
          by commas.  If more than 30 parameters are to be
          specified, additional P and continuation cards may be
          used following the data cards (D cards) for the first
          30 parameters.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-10

-------
The Data Card (D Card), Single Station DIP Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Sequence Number

The leading field of the data (D) card may
contain a sequence or card sorting number.
The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by numerical digits.  The
entire number including the dollar sign must
be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma.  Completing this field
is optional, as the information is not
stored in the WQF; if not used, proceed to
field 2.

Card Type Code

A letter D enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a data
card.  If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column one.  Enter a
comma in the column after this field.  Thus
this four-column field is coded:   'D',

Station Code

This field must be coded with an alpha-
numeric primary or secondary station code
enclosed in single quotation marks.  If
sequence numbers are not used, this field
begins in column 5.

Date-Time

This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken, according to
the type of sampling method used, as
follows:

  1) For grab samples with no time
     information, this field is to contain
     a six-digit value:  the first two
     digits are to contain the year; the
     third and fourth digits the month; and
     the fifth and sixth digits the day of
     the month.

  2) For grab samples with time indicated,
     this field is to contain a ten-digit
     value:  the first two digits are to
     contain the year; the third and fourth
                              WQ-DE
                               4-11
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
                          digits the month; the fifth and sixth
                          digits the day of the month; and the
                          last four digits the time, expressed
                          in terms of a 24-hour clock.

                       3) For composite samples with beginning
                          and ending dates indicated, this field
                          is to contain a twelve-digit value:
                          the first six digits are to contain
                          the beginning year, month, and day;
                          and the next six digits the ending
                          year, month, and day.

                     This field must contain no embedded blanks,
                     and leading zeros must be coded.  This field
                     is concluded with a comma.
field 5              Sample Depth
                     If a D was coded in column 6 of the
                     preceding P card, sample depth is coded in
                     this field.

                     Depth units are assumed to be those
                     indicated on the immediately preceding
                     agency (A) card.  This field is concluded by
                     a comma.

                     If a D was indicated on the previous P card
                     but no depth exists, code only a comma, and
                     proceed to field six.

                     If a sample has been stored with a depth
                     value, all samples having the same date and
                     time must have a numerical value coded for
                     depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
                     000, not as blanks.
field 6              Parameter Values
                     The remainder of the data card may be coded
                     with parameter values in the order the
                     parameters were specified on the preceding P
                     card.  Parameter values are separated by
                     commas.  If a value is not available for a
                     parameter, the corresponding field is coded
                     with a comma.

                     If a remark code is to be associated with a
                     parameter value, the remark code must
                     immediately precede the parameter value,
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-12

-------
e.g.,  K5.2.  Remark codes are defined in
Table 4-2 located within this section.

Parameter values may be designated via
either fixed point or floating point
numerical notation.  The general expression
for the format of the data field is:

           .XXXXXXX ESPP

where
  1) The designation .XXXXXXX represents
     a fixed point number or the mantissa of a
     floating point number which may include
     from one to seven numerical digits plus
     a decimal point.  The decimal point may
     occur in any position or be omitted.
     When floating point notation is used,
     the decimal point is assumed to be
     immediately to the left of the first
     numerical digit or the position indicated.

  2) The blank constitutes an exponent
     separator.  Its use is optional.

  3) The designation S indicates the sign of
     the exponent.  It may be coded plus  (+),
     minus (-), or left blank.  A plus
     code will cause the decimal point to be
     moved to the right, a minus code will
     cause it to be moved to the left, and
     a blank code will maintain the
     indicated position.  Use of the
     exponent sign (E) is optional.  If
     a code is not provided the exponent  is
     assumed to be positive.

  4) The designation PP represents the value
     of the exponent.  Two numerical digits
     must be coded if floating point
     notation is used.  This code controls
     the extent of movement of the decimal
     point from the indicated position.

Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and
98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
respectively.
         WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
          4-13

-------
field 7              Delimiter
                     The last parameter value specified must be
                     followed by a comma.
Continuation Card
          If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
          single D card, a continuation card may be used.  The
          last character coded on the D card must be a comma; a
          parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
          continuation card.  The continuation card has no
          special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
          begin in column one, and proceed as above.  The last
          character that must be coded on a continuation card is
          a comma.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-14

-------
4.2.1.1   EXAMPLES OF  STORING NEW  PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE SINGLE
          STATION DIP  INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?02)

           Store the following parametric data  for agency 14AGNFS9
           for the indicated existing stations  utilizing the
           single station DIP input  procedure.   The parameter
           codes are:  95 for conductivity; 10 for temperature;  400
           for pH; 410 for alkilinity;  31505 for coliforms; 940
           for chloride; 75 for turbidity; 900  for hardness; 300
           for dissolved oxygen; 945 for sulphate; 620 for
           nitrate; 435 for acidity;  305 for biological oxygen
           demand; 1045 for iron;  550 for oil;  and 650 for
           phosphate.
  STATION
  NUMBER   DATE
  205090
  205090
  205090
1/7/80
3/8/80
5/20/80
  STATION
  NUMBER   DATE
  108130
  108130
5/3/80
5/21/80
TIME

 9:00

13:00

DEPTH
TYPE

BOTTOM
BOTTOM
DEPTH    COND  TEMP   Ph   ALK  COLIFORMS

20       210   6.2    7.4  110  43,000,000
35       	   10.1   7.6  	       10,000
         250   14.8   	   98       3,7E04
                  DEPTH
                  VALUE   CL
             TURB  HARD  DO   S04   N03
  20    <15  <250   120   9.8  25    <.85
  20    >8   	   >130  8.7  20    0.92
  STATION
  NUMBER  DATE
      TIME
  M350J1   4/1/80 4p.m.
  M350J1   3/6/80   	
    ACID ALK BOD CL  DO  HARD IRON   QLL P04 S04

                                          .41 32
               8   105  2.4 17 9.8  110
               6   100—15	105
                       15.02 95
                       	50
  01         2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ?START
  702
  14AGNFS9       SECRET                                                  A
  'P', D0009500010004000041031505
  'D','205090',8001070900,20,210,6.2,7.4,110,43000000,
  'D','205090',800308,35,,10.1,7.6,,!0000,
  'D1,'205090',8005201300,,250,14.8,,98,3.7E04,
  'P',80009400007500900003000094500620
  'D','108130',800503,20,K15,K250,120,9.8,25,K.85,
  'D','108130',800521,20,L8,,LI 30,8.7,20,.92,
  'P',  00435004100030500940003000090001045005500065000945
  'D','M350J1',8004011600,8,105,2.4,17,9.8,110,15.02,
  95,.41,32,
  'D','M350J1',800306,6,100,,15,,105,,50,,,

  0        1         23        4        5        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                 WQ-DE
                                  4-15
                                               APRIL 1981

-------
4.2.2  MULTIPLE STATION DIP INPUT (Type ?03)

          Cards Used:

                     ?START
                     ?03
                     A Card
                     P Card(s)
                     D Card(s)

          The multiple station decimal input procedure (DIP) is
          used when the same set of parameters were sampled at a
          number of stations at identical times, dates, and
          depths.  Up to 20 stations can be specified by a single
          P card and three continuation cards.  (If data for more
          than 20 stations are to be stored, then multiple P
          cards — and continuation cards — must be coded
          following the data cards for the first 20 stations.)
          The parameter codes and dates and times are coded on
          one or more D cards which follow the P cards.

          The formats of the cards used for multiple station
          input via the ?03 storage procedure are as follows:
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-16

-------
The Parameter Card (P Card), Multiple Station DIP Format
columns  1-4
columns  5-19,
        20-34,
        35-49,
        50-64,
    and 65-79
column 80
Continuation Card
Card Type Code

A letter P enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a parameter
card.  Enter a comma in the column after
this field.  Thus, this four-column field is
coded:  'P1,

Station Codes

These fields are used to specify up to five
alpha-numeric station codes for the parameter
values to be stored.  Either primary or
secondary station codes may be specified.
The codes must be left-justified, with
unused columns in each fifteen column field
left blank.  (A station code can begin only
in columns 5, 20, 35, 50, or 65.)  The
station codes are not to be separated by
commas.

Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator

If more than five station codes are
required, code the letter C in this column,
and code the additional station codes on one
or more continuation cards.  If five or less
station codes are required, and depth values
are being stored, code the letter D.
Otherwise, leave blank.
          Up to three continuation cards may be used to specify
          up to a total of 20 station codes for which parameter
          values are to be stored.
columns  1-4

columns  5-79
column 80
Blank

Station Codes

Complete these columns as described above
for the P card.

Continuation Code or Depth Storage Indicator

Code the letter C if another continuation
card is to be coded.  If depth values will
be stored, code the letter D.
                              WQ-DE
                               4-17
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
The Data Card (D Card), Multiple Station DIP Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Sequence Number

The leading field of the data (D) card may
contain a sequence or card sorting number.
The sequence number is composed of a dollar
sign ($) followed by numerical digits.  The
entire number including the dollar sign must
be enclosed in single quotation marks
followed by a comma.  Completing this field
is optional; if not used, proceed to field
2.

Card Type Code   ;

A letter D enclosed within single quotation
marks identifies this card to be a data
card.  If sequence numbers are not used,
this field can begin in column one.  Enter a
comma in the column after this field.  Thus
this field is coded:  'D1,

Parameter Code

This field is used to code the five-digit
parameter code with which the parameter
values coded on this, and on following data
cards, for the same date, time, and stations
are associated.  Leading zeros must be coded
to complete the five digit field.  The field
is followed by a comma.  A complete list of
the parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B.

Date-Time

This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken at all of the
stations indicated on the preceding P cards.
This field is coded according to the type of
sampling method used, as follows:

  1) For grab samples with no time
     information, this field is to contain
     a six-digit value:  the first two
     digits are to contain the year; the
     third and fourth digits the month; and
     the fifth and sixth digits the day of
     the month.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-18

-------
                       2) For grab samples with time indicated,
                          this field is to contain a ten-digit
                          value:  the first two digits are to
                          contain the year; the third and fourth
                          digits the month; the fifth and sixth
                          digits the day of the month; and the
                          last four digits the time, expressed
                          in terms of a 24-hour clock.

                       3) For composite samples with beginning
                          and ending dates indicated, this field
                          is to contain a twelve-digit value:
                          the first six digits are to contain
                          the beginning year, month, and day;
                          and the next six digits the ending
                          year, month, and day.

                     This field must contain no embedded blanks,
                     and leading zeros must be coded.  This field
                     is concluded with a comma.
field 5              Depth
                     This field is applicable only if a D was
                     coded in column 80 of the last P or P
                     continuation card, indicating that sample
                     depths are being specified.  If this is not
                     the case, proceed to field 6.

                     The depth at which the sample was taken is
                     expressed in the format:
                       D  [M]
XXX,   where M and B, V, P, D, and
      C are all optional, but where
      only one value within each
      pair of brackets may be
      specified, and where XXX is
      the depth.
                     The permissible values for this field are:

                         B - the depth to the bottom of the water
                               column
                         V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
                               from the surface to the depth recorded
                         P - a pore sample which consists of the
                               water extracted from a core sample
                         D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
                               using a sediment sampler such as an
                               Ekman or a Peterson dredge
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                               4-19

-------
                         C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
                               core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
                               Wilding sampler

                     All values specified will be in feet unless
                     the value includes an M which indicates the
                     values are in meters.

                     This field is followed by a comma.

                     If a sample has been stored with a depth
                     value, all samples having the same date and
                     time must have a numerical value coded for
                     depth, i.e.,  surface depths must be coded as
                     000, not as blanks.
field 6              Parameter Values
                     The remainder of the data card may be coded
                     with parameter values in the station-by-
                     station order specified on the preceding P
                     card(s).  Parameter values are separated by
                     commas.  If a value is not available for a
                     parameter,  the corresponding field is coded
                     with a comma.

                     Parameter values may be designated via
                     either fixed point or floating point
                     numerical notation.  The general expression
                     for the format of the data field is:

                                .XXXXXXX ESPP

                     where
                       1)  The designation .XXXXXXX represents a
                           fixed point number or the mantissa of a
                           floating point number which may include
                           from one to seven digits plus a decimal
                           point.  The decimal point may occur in
                           any position or be omitted.  When floating
                           point notation is used, the decimal
                           point is assumed to be immediately to
                           the left of the first numerical digit
                           or the position indicated.

                       2)  The blank constitutes an exponent
                           separator.  Its use is optional.

                       3)  The designation S indicates the sign of
                           the exponent.  It may be coded plus (+),
                           minus (-), or left blank.  A plus code
                           will cause the decimal point to be moved
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-20

-------
field 7
Continuation Card
      to the right, a minus code will cause
      it to be moved to the left, and a blank
      code will maintain the indicated
      position.  Use of the exponent (E) sign
      is optional.  If a code is not
      provided the exponent is assumed to
      be positive.

  4)  The designation PP represents the value
      of the exponent.  Two numerical digits
      must be coded if floating point
      notation is used.  This code controls
      the extent of movement of the decimal
      point from the indicated position.

If a remark code is to be associated with a
parameter value, the remark code must
immediately precede the value, e.g., K5.2.
Remark codes are defined in Table 4-2
located within this section.

Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l.OE-01, and
98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
respectively.

Delimiter

The last parameter value specified must be
followed by a comma.
          If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
          single D card, a continuation card may be used.  The
          last character coded on the D card must be a comma; a
          parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
          continuation card.  The continuation card has no
          special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
          begin in column one, and proceed as above.  The last
          character that must be coded on a continuation card is
          a comma.
                              WQ-DE
                               4-21
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
4.2.2.1   EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE MULTIPLE
         STATION DIP INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE ?03)

          Store the following parametric data sampled in 1980 for
          the indicated existing stations of agency 14AGNFS9
          utilizing the multiple station DIP input procedure.
          Nitrate mg/1 is parameter code 620; DO mg/1 is code
          300; and Total P04 mg/1 is code 650.
                                M075
               Stations

          M076   M077   M078
Parameter:  Nitrate mg/1
M079

Date
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21

Time
1300
-
-
-
—
Parameter:
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
1300
-
-
—
-
Parameter:
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
1300
-
-
—
Depth
Value
10
10
15
1
—
DO mg/1
10
10
15
1
-
Total P04
10
0
15
1
Depth
Type
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
—

Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore
-
mg/1
Regular
Regular
Bottom
Pore


.2
.1
.2
.2
.2

10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
10.3

.01
<.01
.04
.03


.2
. 1
.2
. 1
.2

10.9
10.8
-
10.8
10.6

.01
<.01
.02
.02

Values
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2

10.9
11.2
-
10.9
10.9

<.01
<.01
.43
.05


.2
.2
. 1
. 1
.2

11 .0
11 .2
10.9
10.6
10.7

<.01
<.01
.19
.02


.2
.2
. 1
.2
.2

11.1
11.2
1 1 .0
10.8
10.8

.01
.02
.33
.02
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
 4-22

-------
01         2345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

?START
703
14AGNFS9        SECRET                                                         A
'P',M075           M076           M077           M078           M079           D
'D1,00620,8007171300,0010,.2,.2,.2,.2,.2,
'D',00620,800718,0010,.!,.!,.2,.2,.2,
1D',00620,800719,DB015,.2/.2,.2,.1,.1,
'D1,00620,800720,DP001,.2, .1, .2, .1, .2,
'D',00620,800721,.2,.2,.2,.2,.2,
'D1,00300,8007171300,0010,10.8,10.9,10.9,11,11 .1,
'D1,00300,800718,0010,10.8,10.8,11.2,11.2,11.2,
'D1,00300,800719,08015,10.5,,,10.9,11.0,
1D1,00300,800720,DP001,10.6,10.8,10.9,10. 6,10. 8,
'D1,00300,800721,10.3,10.6,10.9,10.7,10. 8,
'D',00650,8007171300,0010,.01,.01,K.01,K.01,.01,
1D',00650,800718,0000,K.01,K.01,K.01,K.01, .02,
'D1,00650,800719,08015,.04,.02,.43, . 1 9, . 33,
'D1,00650,800720,DP001,.03,.02,.05,.02,.02,

0         I         2         3         4         5         6         7         8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                   WQ-DE                         APRIL 1981
                                     4-23

-------
4.2.3  WQGSTOR INPUT (Type ?04)

          Cards Used:

                     7START
                     ?04
                     AC Card or A Card
                     SC Card

          The variable format input procedure utilizes an AC
          agency card (or a standard A card) and an SC storage
          card.  These cards may be used to code the values of
          parameters sampled under varying sampling methods and
          conditions, including a simple grab sample, a grab
          sample with time identified, a composite sample with
          beginning and ending dates, and a composite sample with
          dates, times, and sampling conditions identified.  Up
          to 100 parameter codes and associated values can be
          stored for any given sample.

          Data items appearing in and after column four of the AC
          and SC cards are coded in free form format, with commas
          — and no intervening blanks — separating the fields.
          A comma must be coded after the last field on the card.

          The formats of the cards used for WQGSTOR input via the
          ?04 storage procedure are as follows:
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-24

-------
The Agency Card (AC Card), Free-form Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
field 5
Card Type Code

The letters AC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.

A=agency-code,

The one-to-eight alpha-numeric agency code,
beginning in column 4, followed by a comma.

UK=unlocking-key,

Unlocking-key is the one-to-eight alpha-
numeric code assigned to the user storing
the data, which must be accurately specified
before any information can be stored for the
respective stations.  This field is to be
followed by a comma.

USER=user-name,

User-name is a one-to-fifty-four alpha-
numeric description of the user storing
data, including his or her name, location,
agency, telephone number, and any other
relevant information.  Embedded blanks are
permitted.  This field is to be followed by
a comma.

Validity check (NDC)

This field is used primarily for correcting
or changing previously-stored parametric
data, for instance, data that may have been
stored incorrectly prior to the time that
data edit checking was performed
automatically by the STORET system.  The
letters NDC may be coded to indicate that
the date fields are not to be checked for
validity.  If a validity check is to be
performed, this field is not to be coded.
If coded, the field is to be followed by a
comma.
                              WQ-DE
                               4-25
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
The Storage Card (SC Card)

This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded
in a ?04 WQGSTOR storage procedure:  the station code, dates,
depths, parameters and parameter values, and other pertinent
information.  All fields are separated by commas.  This card
follows either the AC agency card or the standard A card.

If more than one data card is required to record all data for a
given sample, the data may be coded on the card up to column 80.
Remaining data are then coded on a second card, and as many other
continuation cards, as required.  Up to 100 parameters and
associated values can be specified in one set of SC and
continuation cards.

The length and content of the fields on the SC card are variable,
and depend upon storage requirements, the manner in which
parameter values were recorded, and other such variables.  The
fields of the SC card must be arranged and coded in the following
sequence:
field 1
field 2
field 3
Card Type Code

The letters SC must be coded in columns 1 and
2, followed by a comma in column 3.

Station Code

This field must be coded with an alpha-
numeric primary or secondary station code to
which the information on the card pertains.
This code is to be followed by a comma.

Beginning Date and Time

The date on which the sample was taken, or
in the case of a composite sample, the
beginning date the sample was collected.
The date must be in the format:

     yymmddtttt, where yy is the year, mm the
     month, dd the day, and tttt the time in
     hours and minutes, expressed in terms
     of a 24-hour clock.  Time is optional.

The field is to be followed by a comma.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-26

-------
field 4              Ending Date and Time
                     This field is coded only for composite data,
                     and is of the format yymmddtttt as described
                     above, followed by a comma.
field 5              Depth
                     The depth at which the sample was taken is
                     expressed in the format
                       D  [M]
XXX,  where M and B,  V, P, D, and
      C are all optional, but where
      only one value within each
      pair of brackets may be
      specified, and where XXX is
      the depth.
                     The permissible values for this field are:

                         B - the depth to the bottom of the water
                               column
                         V - a vertically-integrated sample taken
                               from the surface to the depth recorded
                         P - a pore sample which consists of the
                               water extracted from a core sample
                         D - a sediment sample taken at the bottom
                               using a sediment sampler such as an
                               Ekman or a Peterson dredge
                         C - a core sample taken at bottom using a
                               core sampler such as a Phlegar or a
                               Wilding sampler

                     All values specified will be in feet unless
                     the value includes an M which indicates the
                     values are in meters.

                     If a sample has been stored with a depth
                     value, all samples having the same date and
                     time must have a numerical value coded for
                     depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
                     000, not as blanks.

                     This field is to be followed by a comma.
                              WQ-DE                     APRIL  1981
                                4-27

-------
field 6              Composite Value Type

                     This field is used only with sophisticated
                     composite data, and is used to indicate the
                     composite value type.   One of the following
                     values may be specified:

                          A     indicates an average sample
                          H     indicates a maximum value
                          L     indicates a minimum value
                       N or #   indicates the number of
                                 observations within the sample
                          S     indicates a standard deviation
                          U     indicates a sum of squares
                          V     indicates a variance
                          C     indicates coefficient or error
                          X     indicates a coefficient of
                                 variance
                          E     indicates skewness
                          F     indicates kurtosis
                          Z     indicates the number of samples
                                 in the composite that exceeds
                                 established limits
                          %     indicates precision
                          $     indicates accuracy
                          B     when none of the above apply

                     If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma.

field 7              Space/Time Composite

                     This field is used only with sophisticated
                     composite data, and indicates whether the
                     sample was collected over a period of time
                     or space, or both.  One of the following
                     values may be specified:

                          S     indicates space
                          T     indicates time
                          B     indicates both space and time

                     If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma,
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-28

-------
field 8              Sample Type
                     This field is used only with sophisticated
                     composite data, and indicates what type of
                     sample was collected.  One of the following
                     values may be specified:

                          C     indicates the samples were
                                 collected continuously
                          G     indicates the samples are
                                 individual grab samples, but
                                 that the actual number are not
                                 to be reported
                          GNxx  xx is a two-digit number depicting
                                 the number of individual grab
                                 samples in the collection
                          B     blank, when none of the above apply

                     If coded, the field is to be followed by a comma,
                     For sophisticated composite samples, fields
                     6, 7, and 8 must all be accounted for.
field 9              Parameter Code
                     This field is used to specify the parameter
                     code whose value is to be stored.  The field
                     is coded in the format

                          PXXXXX   which stores the parameter
                                   XXXXX with the next field
                                   (data item) as its value.
                                   Leading zeros need not be
                                   coded.

                     As many pairs of this field and the next
                     field may be coded as required.  A comma
                     must follow each parameter code specified.
                     A complete list of the STORET parameter
                     codes is referenced within Appendix B.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                               4-29

-------
field 10             Parameter Value
                     This field is used to specify the value to
                     be stored for the parameter code specified
                     in the preceding field.  If a remark code is
                     used,  it must be the last character in the
                     value.  Remark codes are defined in Table
                     4-2 located within this section.

                     Parameter values may be designated via
                     either fixed point or floating point
                     numerical notation.  The general expression
                     for the format of the data field is:

                                .XXXXXXX ESPP

                     where
                       1)  The designation .XXXXXXX represents
                           a fixed point number or the mantissa of
                           a floating point number which may include
                           from one to seven digits plus a decimal
                           point.  The decimal point may occur in
                           any position or be omitted.  When
                           floating point notation is used the
                           decimal point is assumed to be
                           immediately to the left of the first
                           numerical digit or the position
                           indicated.

                       2)  The blank constitutes an exponent
                           separator.  Its use is optional.

                       3)  The designation S indicates the sign of
                           the exponent.  It may be coded plus ( + ),
                           minus (-), or left blank.  A plus code
                           will cause the decimal point to be
                           moved to the right, a minus code will
                           cause it to be moved to the left, and
                           a blank will maintain the indicated
                           position.  Use of the exponent sign (E)
                           is optional.,  If a code is not provided
                           the exponent is assumed to be positive.

                       4)  The designation PP represents the value
                           of the exponent.  Two numerical digits
                           must be coded if floating point notation
                           is used.  This code controls the extent
                           of movement of the decimal point from
                           the indicated position.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-30

-------
                     Correct codes for the numbers 5, 7.5, 0.1,
                     and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or l'.OE-01, and
                     98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or 9.85E+04,
                     respectively.

                     As many pairs of this field and the
                     preceding field may be coded as required.

                     A comma must follow each value specified.

Continuation Card

          If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
          single SC card, a continuation card may be used.  The
          last character coded on the SC card must be a comma, as
          a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
          continuation card.  The continuation card has no
          special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
          begin in column one, and proceed as above.  The last
          character that must be coded on a continuation card is
          a comma.

Abbreviated SC Card

          When coding multiple SC cards within a single storage
          run for identical stations, dates, times, and depths
          (fields 2 through 5), a '$' may be coded in their
          stead, which automatically assumes that the values of
          these fields are as specified in the preceding fully-
          coded SC card.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                               4-31

-------
4.2.3.1   EXAMPLE  OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING  THE
          WQGSTOR  'INPUT PROCEDURE  (TYPE ?04)

           Store the following 1980  parametric data for station
           M075, agency 14AGNFS9,  using the WQGSTOR storage
           procedure.  The  18 July sample was  a bottom  sample, and
           the  19  July sample was  a  core sample.  All depths are
           in feet.   The  values listed for 20  July were average
           and  high  composite sample values, respectively, and
           both were space  composites of individual grab samples.
DATE
17 July
18 July
19 July
20 July
20 July
TIME
_
2 pm
-
1 2-4 pm
1 2-4 pm
DEPTH
100
200
1
100
100
P=620
.2
.1
.2
.2
4
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
15
P=650
.01
<.01
.04
.02
3
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ?START
  ?04
  AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER STORING DATA,
  SC,M075,800717,D100,P620,.2,P300,10.8,P650,.01,
  SC,M075,8007181400,DB200,P620,.1,P300,10.8,P650,.OIK,
  SC,M075,800719,DC001,P620,.2,P300,10.5,P650,.04,
  SC,M075,8007201200,8007201600,0100,A,S,G,P620,.2,P300,10.6,P650,.02,
  SC,$,H,S,G,P620,4,P300,15,P650,3,

  0        1        2        3        4        5        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
 4-32

-------
4.2.4  FIXFORM INPUT (Type ?01)

          Cards Used:

                     ?START
                     ?01
                     A Card
                     S Card
                     Parametric Data Card(s) (6 Card)

          The fixform input procedure is used to code parametric
          data via a standard input procedure utilizing a fixed-
          field card format.  The 6 card is used to code the
          values of parameters sampled under varying sampling
          methods and conditions, including a simple grab sample,
          a grab sample with time identified, a composite sample
          with beginning and ending dates,  and a composite sample
          with dates, times, and sampling conditions identified.
          Up to five parameter codes and associated values can be
          coded on a single card.

          The 6 card is used whenever parametric data are stored,
          changed, or deleted via the ?01 procedure as described
          in this section.  An agency card (A card) and a station
          card (S card) precede these parametric data cards in a
          parametric data storage deck.

          The format of the parametric data card is as follows:
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                               4-33

-------
The Parametric Data Card (6 Card)

columns 1-3          Sort No.
columns 4-6
columns 7-18
This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to each of the parametric data cards.
Any alpha-numeric value may be specified;
leading zeros must be provided.  Completing
this field is optional as the  information is
not stored within the WQF.

Sample Depth

This field is used to store the depth at
which the sample was taken.  The system will
assume the units specified on the preceding
A card.  If sample depth is not be to
recorded, this field may be left blank.

If a sample has been stored with a depth
value, all samples having the same date and
time must have a numerical value coded for
depth, i.e., surface depths must be coded as
000, 'not as blanks.

Date-Time
                  i
This field is used to code the date (year,
month, and day), and optionally the time,
that the samples were taken, according to
the type of sampling method used, as
follows:

  1) For grab samples with no time
     information, this field is to contain a
     six-digit value:  columns 7 and 8 are
     to contain the year; columns 9 and 10
     the month; and columns 11 and 12 the
     day of the month.  Columns 13-18 are to
     be left blank.

  2) For grab samples with time indicated,
     this field is to contain a ten-digit
     value:  columns 7-12 are to contain the
     collection date as defined in 1) above;
     and columns 13-16 the time, expressed
     in terms of a 24-hour clock.  Columns
     17 and 18 are to be left blank.

  3) For composite samples with beginning
     and ending dates indicated, this field
     is to contain a 12-digit value:
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-34

-------
columns 19-23,
        31-35,
        43-47,
        55-59,
    and 67-71
columns 24-27,
        36-39,
        48-51,
        60-63,
    and 72-75
columns 28-29,
        40-41,
        52-53,
        64-65,
    and 76-77
     columns 7-12 are to contain the
     beginning year, month, and day; and
     columns 13-18 are to contain the ending
     year,  month, and day.

  4) For composite samples with beginning
     and ending dates, times, and sampling
     conditions identified, this field is
     extended through column 30 as described
     in detail in Table 4-1 below.  In this
     case,  the coding of parameter values
     must begin in column 31, as opposed to
     column 19, as described below.

Parameter Code

These fields are used to specify the five-
digit codes of the parameters being coded.
All codes must be numeric and leading zeros
must be coded.  A complete list of the
parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B.

Parameter Value

These four-digit fields are used to specify
the values associated with the parameter
codes specified in the preceding five fields.
The first non-zero digit of the parameter
value is to be placed in the left-most
column of the field, regardless of the
magnitude of the value, with unused columns
to the right zero-filled.   (For instance,
values of 0.006, 0.6 and 60 would all be
coded as 6000.)

Exponent

The location of the decimal point in the
parameter value field is assumed to lie
just to the left of the first significant
digit and the exponent field is used to
denote its proper placement.  The numeric
values coded in this field place the
decimal point  in its proper location, as
follows:

The left column of this field is used to
specify the direction of movement of the
decimal point.  A code of 0  (zero)  indicates
that the decimal point is either correct  in
its assumed position, or is to be moved to
                              WQ-DE
                               4-35
                                  APRIL  1981

-------
columns 30,
        42,
        54,,
        66,
    and 78
column  79
column  80
the left; a code of 1  (one) indicates that
the decimal point is to be moved to the
right for correct decimal placement.

The right column of this field is used to
control the extent of movement of the
decimal point, i.e., the value indicates the
number of positions the decimal is to be
moved.  Any numeric code (0-9) is valid.
(For instance, the correct exponent codes
for the parameter values of 0.006, 0.6, and
60 are, respectively,  02, 00, and 12.)

Remark Code

These fields are used to assign a one-
character alphabetic remark code to further
define the parameter values.  The standard
STORET remark codes and their corresponding
definitions are given in Table 4-2 below.
This field is optional and may be left blank.

Depth Indicator

Code this field with a blank or one of the
following one-digit depth indicator codes:

    1     the depth to the bottom of the
            water column
    2     a vertically-integrated sample
            taken from the surface to the
            depth recorded
    3     a pore sample which consists of the
            water extracted from a core sample
    4     a sediment sample taken at the
            bottom using a sediment sampler
            such as an Ekman or a Peterson
            dredge
    5     a core sample taken at bottom using
            a core sampler such as a Phlegar
            or a Wilding sampler
  Blank   regular depth of sample measured
            from the surface

The STORET help data set named SAMPLE.IDENTITY
lists all codes used to identify water
quality samples.

Card Type Code

Code with the number 6.
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-36

-------
                          TABLE 4-1
                   COMPOSITE SAMPLE CODING
             COLUMNS 7-30:  PARAMETRIC DATA CARD
columns 7-12
columns 13-16
column  17
column 18
     Ending year,  month,  and day of the composite
     sample,  in the format yymmdd.

     Ending hour and minute of the composite
     sample,  expressed in terms of a 24-hour
     clock.

     S - space composite

     T - time composite

     B - samples that are both space and time
           composites

     A - Computed average value of several
           individual samples or average value of
           a continuous record.

     H - Maximum value of several individual
           samples or the maximum value of a
           continuous record.

     L - Minimum value of several individual
           samples or the minimum value of a
           continuous record.

     S - Standard Deviation

     U - Sum of Squares

     V - Variance

     C - Coefficient of Error

     X - Coefficient of Variance

N or # - The number of observations within the
         sample.

     E - Skewness

     F - Kurtosis

     Z - The number of samples in the composite
           that exceeds established limits.
                            WQ-DE
                             4-37
                                       APRIL 1981

-------
TABLE 4-1, Continued
  columns 19-23
  column  24

  columns 25-28



  columns 29-30
    % - Precision

    $ - Accuracy

Blank - If none of the above apply

    Beginning date of a composite sample.  The
    date will be shown with 5 digits by recording
    the last digit only of the year, followed by a
    two-digit month, followed by the two-digit day.

    Code with the letter C in all cases.

    Beginning hour and minute of a composite
    sample, expressed in terms of a 24-hour
    clock.

    Cb - (Where b is a blank) for samples
           collected continuously.

    Gb - Composite sample made up of individual
           grab samples where the number of grab
           samples is not to be reported.

    NN - (Where NN is a two-digit number such as
           04 or 12) used to report the number of
           grab samples comprising a composite
           sample.

    bb - Both columns can be left blank.
APRIL 1981
            WQ-DE
             4-38

-------
                       TABLE 4-2
                     REMARK CODES
A    Value reported is the mean of two or more determinations.
B    Results based upon colony counts outside the acceptable
       range.
C    Value cculated.
D    Indicates field measurement.
E    Indicates extra samples taken at composite stations.
F    In the case of species, F indicates female sex.
G    Value reported is the maximum of two or more determinations,
H    Value based on field kit determination; results may
       not be accurate.
J    Estimated value; value not accurate.
K    Actual value is known to be less than value given.
L    Actual value is known to be greater than value given.
M    Presence of material verified but not quantified.  In
       the case of temperature or oxygen reduction potential,
       M indicates a negative value.  In the case of species,
       M indicates male sex.
N    Presumptive evidence of presence of material.
0    Sampled, but analysis lost or not performed.
S    Laboratory test.
T    Value reported is less than criteria of detection.
U    Indicates material was analyzed for but not detected.
       In the case of species, U indicates undetermined sex.
W    Value observed is less than lowest value reportable
       under "T" code.
X    Value is a quasi vertically-integrated sample.
                         WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                          4-39

-------
4.2.4.1   EXAMPLE OF STORING NEW PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
          FIXFORM INPUT PROCEDURE (TYPE  ?01 )

           Store the following  1980 parametric data  for station
           M075, agency 14AGNFS9, using  the FIXFORM  storage
           procedure.   The samples were  taken at a depth of 100
           feet.  The four samples shown  below represent,
           respectively, a simple grab sample, a bottom grab with
           time, a  vertically-integrated composite with  dates only,
           and a composite with dates,  times, and  sampling
           conditions of time  (T) and  computed average value  (A).
DATE TIME
17 Jul
18 Jul 1430
19 Jul
21 Jul 1100
DATE TIME
•H •->
- -
20 Jul
22 Jul 1200
P=620
.2
. 1
.2
.2
P=300
10.8
10.8
10.5
10.6
P=650
.01
<.01
.04
.02
  01        2        3        45         6         7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
  ?START
14AGNFS9       SECRET
   M075
   100800717      00620200000 00300108012
   1008007181430  00620100000 00300108012
   10080071980072000620200000 00300105012
   1008007221200TA00721C1100  00620200000
                                        00650100001
                                        00650100001K
                                        00650400001
                                        00300106012 00650200001
                                        A
                                        S
                                        6
                                        16
                                        26
                                        6
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
APRIL 1981
WQ-DE
 4-40

-------
4.3  CHANGING PARAMETRIC DATA ALREADY STORED

          There are many situations that may necessitate the
          modification or change of one or more items of
          parametric data that have been stored previously, such
          as to correct a coding error which resulted in the
          storing of an erroneous value, or to add or change a
          remark code associated with the value previously
          stored.  This subsection defines the two ways that
          parametric data can be changed, and which parametric
          data cards and fields are required to effect changes.
          The two ways are via the ?01 and ?04 storage
          procedures.

          Following the descriptions of the two methods available
          to change previously stored parametric data is an
          example illustrating the coding needed to make changes
          according to the procedure described.  The examples
          change data already stored for parameters 10, 310, and
          400 sampled in 1980 for the stations shown within
          agency 14AGNFS9.
STATION
070001
070002
070003
DATE
15 Jul
1 Jun
2-3 Aug
TIME
^
1400
—
P=10
^
-
20
P=310
0.3
0.2
~
P=400
0.5
-
—
                              WQ-DE
                               4-41
APRIL 1981

-------
4.3.1   CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
       ?04 (WQGSTOR) PROCEDURE

          This procedure may be used for all four types of
          samples.   Refer to Subsections 3.1 and 4.2.3 for a
          detailed description of the fields of the A, AC, and SC
          cards.

          Required Cards
          7START
          ?04
          A or AC
          SC
  Agency Card
  Storage Card
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
          25-60
            61
            62
          78-79
            80
   field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
          Fields Used - AC Card
          field I
             1
             2
             3
             4
             5
     field name
     card type code
     agency code
     unlocking key
     user name
     validity check
 remarks
 required
 required
 optional but desired field
 coding a letter B inhibits
   date checking; otherwise
   leave blank
 required
 must be blank
 must be an A
 remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC to inhibit date
  checking, otherwise leave
  blank
APRIL 1981
           WQ-DE
            4-42

-------
          Fields Used - SC Card
          field  I
              1
              2
              3
              4
              5
              6
              8

              9
             10
field name
card type code
station code
beginning date
ending date

depth
composite value type

space/time

sample type

parameter code
parameter  value
   remarks
SC followed  by a comma
required
required
required  if  originally
  stored  for composite data
required  if  originally stored
required  if  originally stored
  for composite data
required  only if originally
  stored  for composite data
required  only if originally
  stored  for composite data
required; specified in
  the format PCXXXXX, where
  the C indicates a change
  for parameter code XXXXX
  (leading zeros need not be
  coded). As many pairs of
  this field and the next
  field may  be coded as
  required.
required;  specify
  the new value for
  the parameter code
  specified  in the preceding
  field.  If  changing a remark
  code, it must be the last
  character  in the value.
4.3.1.1  EXAMPLE OF CHANGING  PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA
         USING THE ?04 (WQGSTOR)  PROCEDURE
  01        2345678
  1234567890T234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901 234567890

  7START
  ?04
  AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
  SC,070001,800715,PC310,.3,PC400, .5,
  SC,070002,8006011400,PC310, .2,
  SC,070003,800802,800803,PCI 0,20,

  0       1        2        3         4        5        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                WQ-DE
                                 4-43
                                  APRIL 1981

-------
4.3.2  CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA USING THE
       ?01  (FIXFORM) PROCEDURE

          This procedure can be used to change data associated
          with any type of sample.  Refer to Subsection 3.1 for a
          detailed description of the fields of the A and S
          cards.

          Required Cards

          7START

          A     Agency Card
          S     Station Card
          6     Parametric Data Card
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
          25-60
            61
            62
          78-79
            80
   field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
date check
depth unit
control code
card type code
          Fields Used - S Card
          columns
   field
           1-3    sort no.
           4-18   primary station code
          34-45   secondary station code

            80    card type code

          Fields Used - 6 Card
          columns
           1-3
           4-6
   field
sort no.
sample depth
           7-18   date-time

          19-23   parameter code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
optional; coding a letter
  B inhibits date checking;
  otherwise leave blank
required
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
optional
either a primary or
secondary station code must
  be coded
must be an S
remarks
optional
required if depth was
  originally stored for the
  sample
required as originally
  stored with the sample
code the parameter whose
  value is to be changed
APRIL 1981
           WQ-DE
            4-44

-------
          24-27


          28-29
   parameter value
   exponent
            30

          31-78


            79
   remark code

   parameter  information


   card type  code
             80
   card type  code
code the new  value to be
  stored with the preceding
  parameter code
code the appropriate exponent
  information for the preceding
  parameter value as
  described in the parametric
  data card description under
  fixform  input.
code the new  remark, if
  applicable
repeat, as required, as
  described above for columns
  19-30
code the letter C, which
  specifies that data for all
  parameters  coded (and also
  data for all parameters coded
  on following continuation
  cards) will be stored in place
  of existing data.  For
  changing parametric data
  which are associated with a
  sample that has a depth other
  than regular depth (e.g.,
  core, pore, or dredge), code
  the appropriate depth
  indicator code in column 79,
  and code a  C, instead of a 6,
  in column 80.
must be a  6
4.3.2.1  EXAMPLE OF CHANGING PREVIOUSLY STORED PARAMETRIC DATA
         USING THE ?01 (FIXFORM)  PROCEDURE
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
  ? START
SECRET  NAME OF USER

  00310300000 00400500000
  1 4AGNFS9
     070001
       800715
     007002
       8006011400  00310200000
     007003
       80080280080300010200012
                          A
                          S
                         C6
                          S
                         C6
                          S
                         C6
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                               WQ-DE
                                 4-45
                                          APRIL  1981

-------
4.4  DELETING PARAMETRIC DATA ALREADY STORED

          The STORET system allows users to delete parametric
          data that has been previously stored.  Alj. parametric
          data for a station may be deleted, or selected samples
          or selected parameters within a sample may be deleted.

          Following the descriptions of the several ways
          available to delete previously stored parametric and/or
          station data is an example illustrating the coding
          needed to effect the deletions according to the
          procedure described.  The examples delete data and/or
          stations already stored for parameters 310 and 400
          sampled at station 070001 within agency 14AGNFS9 on
          July 15, 1980.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                              4-46

-------
4.4.1  DELETING  BOTH STATION LOCATION AND PARAMETRIC DATA

          An A card and a S card, with  control code DS specified,
          are the only cards needed  to  delete all station
          location data and parametric  data stored for a specific
          primary station code.  The indicated station is totally
          removed from the WQF.  Refer  to Subsection 3.1 for  a
          detailed description of the fields of the A and S
          cards.

          Required Cards

          ?START
          ?01
          A Card
          S Card
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
            1-8
          17-24
          25-60
          78-79
             80
      field
    agency code
    unlocking key
    user's name
    control code
    card type code
          Fields Used - S Card
           columns
      field
            4-18   primary station code
           78-79   control code
             80    card type code
   remarks
required
required
optional, but  desired field
must be blank
must be an A
   remarks
station to  be  deleted from WQF
must be DS
must be an  S
4.4.1.1  EXAMPLE OF DELETING BOTH STATION LOCATION AND
         PARAMETRIC DATA
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
  7START
  1 4AGNFS9
     070001
SECRET  NAME OF USER
                             A
                           DSS
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                               WQ-DE
                                 4-47
                                          APRIL 1981

-------
4.4.2  DELETING ALL PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY STORED WITH A
       STATION

          An A card and an S card, with control code DD
          specified, are the only cards needed to delete all
          parametric data previously stored with a station.
          Refer to Subsection 3.1 for a detailed description of
          the fields of the A and S cards.

          Required Cards

          7START
          ?01
          A Card
          S Card
          Fields Used - A Card

          columns    field
           1-8    agency code
          17-24   unlocking key
          25-60   user's name

          78-79   control code
            80    card type code

          Fields Used - S Card
          columns
           4-18

          78-79
           80
  field
primary
  station code
control code
card type code
                       remarks
                       required
                       required
                       optional, but desired
                         field
                       must be blank
                       must be an A
remarks
required

must be DD
must be an S
          Users are cautioned that when storing replacement data
          for deleted data in the same run, the station reference
          number must be the same, i.e., a station's data may not
          be deleted using the primary station code and re-stored
          using a secondary station code.
APRIL  1981
          WQ-DE
           4-48

-------
4.4.2.1   EXAMPLE OF  DELETING ALL  PARAMETRIC DATA PREVIOUSLY
          STORED WITH A STATION
 01         2345678
 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

 ? START
  14AGNFS9       SECRET  NAME OF USER                                        A
    070001                                                                DOS

  0        1         2        3         4        5         6         7         8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                   WQ-DE                       APRIL 1981
                                    4-49

-------
4.4.3  DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE
          Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the
          ?04 procedure as described below.  Refer to Subsection
          4.2.3 for a description of the AC and SC cards.

          Required Cards

          ?START
          ?04
          AC or A Card
          SC Card
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
          25-61
          78-79
           80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
          Fields Used - AC Card
          field I
             1
             2
             3
             4
             5
  field name
  card type code
  agency code
  unlocking key
  user's name
  validity check
          Fields Used - SC Card
          field |
             1
             2
             3
             4

             5
             6

             7

             8

             9
  field name
  card type code
  station code
  beginning date
  ending date
  depth
  composite value type

  space/time

  sample type

  delete code
 remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
 remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
code NDC when the date fields
  of the following SC storage
  cards are not to be checked
  for validity; otherwise
  leave blank.
        remarks
     SC followed by a comma
     required
     required
     required if originally
       stored for composite data
     required if originally stored
     required if originally stored
       for composite data
     required only if originally
       stored for composite data
     required only if originally
       stored for composite data
     code DEL,
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-50

-------
4.4.3.1   EXAMPLE  OF DELETING ENTIRE  SAMPLES USING  THE
          ?04 PROCEDURE
  01         2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ?START
  ?04
  AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
  SC,070001,780715,DEL,

  0        1         2         3         4         5        6         7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                   WQ-DE                       APRIL 1981
                                    4-51

-------
4.4.4  DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE
          Entire samples can be deleted from a station using the
          ?01 procedure as described below.  Refer to Subsection
          3.1 for a description of the A and S cards.

          Required Cards

          ?START
          ?01
          A Card
          S Card
          Parametric Data Card (6 card)
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
          25-60
          78-79
           80
field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
          Fields Used - S Card
          columns
           4-18
           80
field
station code
card type code
remarks
required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
remarks
either a primary or
  secondary station code
  must be coded
must be an S
          Fields Used - Parametric Data Card
columns
1-3
4-6
field
sort no.
sample depth
remarks
optiona
require
           7-18
date-time
          19-21
           80
delete code
card type code
  original sample
required, both beginning
  and ending dates must be
  coded if regular composite
  samples are to be deleted.
  If a sophisticated sample
  is to be deleted, only the
  ending date need be
  specified.
code DEL
must be a 6
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-52

-------
4.4.4.1   EXAMPLE OF DELETING ENTIRE SAMPLES  USING THE
          ?01  PROCEDURE
  01         2345678
  1 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 2345678901 234567890

  ? START
  14AGNFS9       SECRET  NAME OF USER                                         A
     070001                                                                   S
        800715      DEL                                                       6

  0        1         2         3         4         5         6        7         8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                   WQ-DE                        APRIL  1981
                                    4-53

-------
4.4.5  DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?04
       PROCEDURE

          Parameter values can be deleted from a station on a
          selected basis using the ?04 procedure.  Refer to
          Subsection 4.2.3 for a description of the AC and SC
          cards.

          Required Cards

          7START
          ?04
          A or AC Card
          SC Card
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns
           1-8
          17-24
          25-61
          78-79
            80
   field
agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
   remarks
   required
   required
   optional, but
   must be blank
   must be an A
desired field
          Fields Used - AC Card
          field I
             1
             2
             3
             4
     field name
   card type code
   agency code
   unlocking key
   user's name
   remarks
AC followed by a comma
required
required
optional, but desired field
APRIL 1981
           WQ-DE
            4-54

-------
          Fields Used - SC Card
          field  I
              1
              2
              3
              4

              5

              6

              7

              8

              9
  field name
card type  code
station code
beginning  date
ending date

depth

composite  value type

space/time

sample type

parameter  code
     remarks
SC followed by a comma
required
required
required only for
  composite data
required if originally
  stored
required only for
  composite data
required only for
  composite data
required only for
  composite data
required:  PDxxxxx format
  deletes  the parameter
  value associated with
  parameter xxxxx for the
  specified station-time-
  date-depth  combination.
  (Leading zeros need not
  be specified.)
4.4.5.1  EXAMPLE OF DELETING  SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING
         THE ?04 PROCEDURE
  01         2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890

  ?START
  ?04
  AC,A=14AGNFS9,UK=SECRET,USER=NAME OF USER,
  SC,070001,800715,PD310,PD400,

  0       1         2        3        4        5        6        7        8
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                                WQ-DE
                                 4-55
                                    APRIL  1981

-------
4.4.6  DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES USING THE ?01
       PROCEDURE

          Parameter values can be deleted from a station on a
          selected basis also by using the ?01 procedure.  Refer
          to Subsections 3.1  and 4.2.4 for complete descriptions
          of the A, S, and 6  cards.

          To delete an individual parameter for a given sample,
          the parametric data card is coded as if data were being
          stored except that  a D is coded in the left hand column
          of the value field  which corresponds to the parameter
          to be deleted.  Numerical values in other fields of the
          same card are treated as valid data and stored.
          Replacement values  for the deleted parameter may be
          coded on the same or subsequent 6 cards.  The cards and
          fields that are to  be coded are described below.

          Required Cards

          7START
          ?01
          A Card
          S Card
          Parametric Data Card (6 card)
          Fields Used - A Card
          columns

            1-8
           17-24
           25-60
           78-79
            80
field

agency code
unlocking key
user's name
control code
card type code
          Fields Used - S Card

          columns    field
            4-18     station code
             80      card type code
remarks

required
required
optional, but desired field
must be blank
must be an A
                      remarks
                      either a primary or
                        secondary station code
                        must be coded
                      must be an S
APRIL 1981
        WQ-DE
         4-56

-------
          Fields  Used - Parametric Data  Card
          columns
             4-6

             7-18
            31-35,
            43-47,
            55-59,
        and 67-71

            36-39,
            48-51,
            60-63,
        and 72-75

              80
      field
      sample depth

      date-time
             19-23     parameter code
            24-27     parameter value
      parameter  code
      parameter  value
      card  type code
remarks
required  if  stored with
  original sample
required; both  beginning
  and ending dates must be
  coded if composite samples
  are to  be  deleted.
code the  five-digit para-
  meter whose value is to be
  deleted.
code a D  in  the left-most
  position of the field to
  delete  the preceding
  parameter  code
repeat, as required, as
  described  above for
  columns 19-23
repeat, as  required, as
  described above for
  columns 24-27
must be  a  6
4.4.6.1  EXAMPLE  OF DELETING SELECTED PARAMETER VALUES  USING
         THE  ?01  PROCEDURE
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
  ?START
  701
  14AGNFS9
    070001
SECRET  NAME OF USER

  00310D     00400D
                         A
                         S
                         6
  01        2345678
  12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
                               WQ-DE
                                 4-57
                                          APRIL  1981

-------
    STORET USER HANDBOOK
           PART WQ
     WATER QUALITY FILE
           CHAPTER
            WQ-DE
  WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
          APPENDIX                                          g
              1                                              O
INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES                               O
                                                            m
                                                            V)
            WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
APPENDIX 1:   INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES

A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by
STORET User Assistance.  These data sets are available on-line
and can be listed at any time by simply entering the appropriate
commands from a low-speed keyboard type terminal.  They also may
be printed at an RJE terminal.

The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.INDEX provides a
listing of the names of all currently available help data sets.
This data set also gives the date each data set was added or last
changed.  STORET users should occasionally list this data set,
and scan the date column for any help data sets added or changed
since they last reviewed the index.  (A listing of the help data
set names can be obtained at a keyboard terminal by issuing the
TSO command LISTC LEVEL(STORET).)

The STORET help data set named STORET.HELP.PRNTHELP contains the
job control language necessary to produce a listing of the names
of STORET help data sets at a user's RJE terminal.
                               WQ-DE                   APRIL  1981
                               Al-1

-------
       STORET USER HANDBOOK
              PART WQ
        WATER QUALITY FILE
              CHAPTER
               WQ-DE
     WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
             APPENDIX
                 2
          RECORD LAYOUTS
STATION LOCATION DATA STORAGE CARDS
                WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
                                                                                        STORET WATER QUAUTY FILE - STATION  LOCATION STORAGE
 1234567
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   80
                                                                                                               AGENCY CARD (A CARD)
      AGENCY CODE
       ll.i-Jl Ju\lifyi
                UNLOCK
                 AFTER
                 liluy\t
               I] -  li
UNLOCKING KEY
 i Left Justify I
                INDIVIDUAL STORING DATA: NAME, LOCATION. AGENCY, TELEPHONE
                          I Optional Comment* - will not he \t»rvd)
                                                                                                                                                     CON-
                                                                                                                                                     TROL
                                                                                                                                                     CODE
                                                                                                            STATION TYPE CARD (T CARD)
                                                                                        A STRING OF VAUD COMBINATIONS OF STATION TYPE CODES SEPARATED BY SLASHES
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 ', T
                                                                                                              STATION CARD (S CARD)
  SORT
   NO.
PRIMARY STATION CODE
    (Left Juttify)
                                                                                                                                                  STATION ALIASES
                                                                                                           (H SECONDARY STATION CODE
                                                                                                                   iLtfi Justify)
                                                                                                                          <2) SECONDARY STATION CODE
                                                                                                                                 I Left Justify t
                                                                                                                              13) SECONDARY  STATION
                                                                                                                                CODE (Left Justify)
                                                                                                                                                                                        CON-
                                                                                                                                                                                        TROL
                                                                                                                                                                                        CODE

                                                                                                     LATITUDE/LONGITUDE CARD (HEADER CARD 0)
                         LATITUDE
                        
-------
123456789 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 53 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43144
                                                                                        58 59 6()61
                                                  DESCRIPTIVE PARAGRAPH CARDS (HEADER CARD 5)
                                                          DESCRIPTION (7-78)
     Ill/unit
                                                                                                                         9 5
                                                                                                                          I 5
                 TT
                                                                                                                35
                                                                                                                         55
             II
                                                                                                                         7 5
                                                                                                                         85
SORT NO.
1  - 3
                TIT
         TTTTTTTTnT
H
mr
                                                         III  Mill
EPA Form 7500-24 (6-77)

-------
 STORET USER HANDBOOK
         PART  WQ
   WATER QUALITY FILE
         CHAPTER
          WQ-DE
WATER QUALITY DATA ENTRY
        APPENDIX
            3
       DATA ENTRY
     ERROR MESSAGES
            WQ-DE                   APRIL 1981

-------
APPENDIX 3:  DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES

This appendix describes the error messages that are generated as
a result of an inaccurate or improper attempt to store, change,
or delete station and/or parametric data within the WQF.  The
descriptions are presented in error message number sequence, and
give the format of the message itself, followed by a brief
explanation of the error message, and where possible, a suggested
corrective action to be taken.   (A few of these messages are
informational in content and do  not depict an error condition.)


                    DATA ENTRY ERROR MESSAGES
01        INVALID TYPE OF STATION

          A required station type (T) card is missing from the
          deck being used to store a new station.  Include this
          card in your storage deck and resubmit.  The STORET
          help data set named STATION.TYPE provides a complete
          listing of the acceptable station types and their
          codes.

02        UNLOCKING CODE IS BLANK

          The unlocking key field (columns 17-24) of the agency
          (A) card was found to be blank.  This code must be
          provided for all storage operations.  Enter the proper
          unlocking key, left-justified, and resubmit the storage
          cards.

03        AGENCY CODE IS BLANK

          The agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A)
          card was found to be blank.  This code must be provided
          for all storage operations.  Enter the proper agency
          code, left-justified, and resubmit the storage cards.

04        DATE CODE INVALID

          The lock-after field (columns 74-77) of the agency  (A)
          card was checked for a numeric value, and one or more
          blanks and/or alphabetic characters were found.  This
          field must be completed on all new station storage
          operations, even if a lock-after date is not desired.
          Correct the improperly-completed field (keying 9999  if
          no lock-after date is desired) and resubmit the storage
          cards.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL  1981
                               A3-1

-------
05
INVALID CONTROL CODE
06
07
08
A value other than CD, CT (A card) or NS, DD, DS, CX (S
card) or a blank value (either A or S card) was found
in the control code field (columns 78-79) of either the
Agency (A) or Station (S) card.  One of the above
values must be specified.  Correct the control code
field and resubmit the storage cards.

ILLEGAL CARD FOR CT OR CD AGENCY CARD

One or more invalid types of storage cards were
detected after the agency (A) card.  Only a station
type (T) card and a station (S) card are valid after an
agency card having a CD or CT coded in the control code
field, columns 78-79.  Check for proper deck set-up or
for mis-coded card type codes (in column 80), correct,
and resubmit the storage cards.

CARD TYPE ORDER OR INVALID CARD TYPE

One or more cards in the storage deck are out of order
and/or have improper codes in the card code field,
column 80.  Check for proper deck set-up or for mis-
coded card type codes and resubmit the corrected
storage deck.

LAT/LONG ERROR

The latitude and longitude fields (columns 7-21) of the
latitude/longitude (0) card either contain one or more
embedded blanks and/or alphabetic characters, contain
values which fall outside an acceptable
latitude/longitude range, or contain both.  All columns
must be completed with numeric values, including
leading zeros if required, and the values must fall
within the following ranges:

latitude
longitude
DEGREES
>0, <90
<180
MINUTES
<60
<60
SECONDS
<600
<600
          Correct the improperly-specified latitude/longitude
          values, and resubmit the storage deck.
APRIL 1981
                   WQ-DE
                   A3-2

-------
09        INVALID MILEAGE AND INDEX CODE

          One or more of the level-miles fields (columns 14-76 of
          the 1 card, or columns 14-53 of the 2 card) of the RMI
          cards contain embedded blanks and/or alphabetic
          characters.  All completed fields must contain only
          numeric values, including leading zeros if required.
          (Unused level-index/level-mile field pairs are to be
          left blank.)  Correct the improperly-specified
          mileage/index values, and resubmit the storage cards
          for that station.

10        SUPERFLUOUS 2 CARD

          At least one pair of level-index/level-mile fields in
          the preceding RMI card (Header Card 1) was blank,
          therefore the detected RMI card (Header Card 2) is
          unnecessary.  No action required.

11        MILEAGE BLANK

          An RMI card (either Header Card 1 or Header Card 2) has
          a level-index coded without a corresponding level-
          mileage.  Enter the required level-mile value,
          including leading zeros if needed, and resubmit the
          storage cards for that station.

12        NO PRIMARY STATION CODE

          The primary station code field (columns 4-18) of a
          station (S) card is blank.  This field must be
          completed with an alpha-numeric value, left-justified,
          leaving unused columns blank.  Enter the proper primary
          station code and resubmit the storage cards for that
          station.

13        CARD 4 MISSING

          A Location Description Card (Header Card 4) was not
          found after a Major/Minor Basin Card (Header Card 3).
          Provide the appropriate 4 card, and resubmit the
          storage cards for that station.

14        INVALID COL 79

          The line position code field (column 79) of a
          Descriptive Paragraph Card (Header Card 5) contains an
          improper value, i.e., a value other than 0 through 9,
          or J through N.  Correct this improperly-specified code
          and resubmit the storage cards for the station.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               A3-3

-------
15        This error message is no longer in use;

16        DATE ERROR

          An invalid date or time was detected in  a parametric
          data storage card.  No information was stored for the
          sample.   The error could have resulted from a blank or
          alphabetic character being entered in the date time
          field (all entries must be numeric with  leading zeros
          specified, if required), or from the specification of
          an invalid date such as a 14th month, or a date
          sometime in the future (a sampling date  must be either
          the current or an earlier date).  For a  ?01 storage
          procedure, correct columns 7-18 of the parametric data
          card.  For ?02 and ?03 storage procedures, correct
          field number 4 of the appropriate data (D) card.   For a
          ?04 storage procedure, correct field number 3 of the
          appropriate SC storage card.   Resubmit the sample.

17        DEPTH ERROR

          An invalid value was specified for the depth of the
          sample.   No information was stored for the sample.
          Sample depth values must be numeric, and must not
          contain embedded blanks or alphabetic characters.
          Check the depth field for a mispunch (columns 4-6 of
          the parametric data card for a ?01 storage procedure,
          field 5 of the data D card for ?02 and ?03 storage
          procedures, and field 5 of the SC storage card for a
          ?04 storage procedure).  Correct and resubmit.

18        DATA VALUE ERROR

          An invalid entry was detected in a parameter code field
          or an exponent field of a parametric data storage card.
          Parameter codes must be numeric, with leading zeros
          specified, if required.  The two-digit exponent field
          also must be numeric:  the left digit must be either a
          1  or a 2, the right digit may be any digit (0-9).  For
          a ?01 storage procedure, check the appropriate fields
          of the parametric data card (columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-
          47, 55-59, and 67-71 for parameter codes; columns 28-
          29, 40-41, 52-53, 64-65, and 76-77 for exponents).  For
          a ?02 storage procedure, check the parameter codes in
          columns 7-76 of the P card (and the codes entered in
          any P continuation cards, if coded), and check the
          exponent values in the parameter values field (field
          six) of the data  (D) card (and of the exponents entered
          in any D continuation cards,  if coded).   For a ?03
          storage procedure, check the parameter code field
          (field 3) and the parameter value field (field 5) of
          the data  (D) card (and any D continuation cards,  if


APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-4

-------
          coded).   For a ?04 storage procedure, check the
          parameter code field (field 10) and the parameter value
          field (field 11)  of the SC storage card (and any SC
          continuation cards, if coded).  Correct the improperly-
          coded entry and resubmit the data storage cards.

19        VALID S CARD MISSING FOR REQUESTED CHANGE

          The card shown was rejected due to an improperly-coded
          or missing station (S) card.  No information for the
          station was stored or changed.  The presence of a
          latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0), a Major/Minor
          Basin Card (Header Card 3), or a Location Description
          Card (Header Card 4) indicates that station location
          information is being stored or changed, but that either
          the required S card was omitted or a required control
          code was miscoded.  Check for the S card and for an NS
          or CX control code in columns 78-79.  Correct and
          resubmit.

20        This error message is no longer in use.

21        INVALID UNLOCKING KEY

          An invalid unlocking key was detected in columns 17-24
          of the agency (A) card.  This value must match the
          unlocking key established by the owner of the agency.
          Correct the improperly-specified entry, and resubmit
          the A card and all storage cards associated with the A
          card.

22        DIFFERENT COMPOSITE DATES - OLD DATA

          A discrepancy was detected between the beginning and
          ending dates coded on the data cards being stored and
          the corresponding dates already stored for the sample.

          Check the appropriate date field for an improper entry.
          (For a ?01 storage procedure, columns 7-18 of the
          parametric data card; for ?02 and ?03 storage
          procedures, the date-time field of the data (D) card;
          and for a ?04 storage procedure, the beginning or
          sampling date and time field of the storage (SC) card.)

23        DATA DELETED

          A deletion was performed as requested.  No action
          required.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               A3-5

-------
24        TOO MANY NEW PLUS OLD PARAMETERS

          An attempt was made to store more than 250 parameters
          for a single sample for a given date and time.   The
          number of parameters within the storage run,  when added
          to the number of parameters already stored for the
          sample, exceeded the system limit of 250.   None of the
          parameters within this storage run were stored.  Reduce
          the total number of parameters to 250 or less and
          resubmit.

25        NO VALUE TO BE DELETED

          An attempt was made to delete parametric data that do
          not exist as identified in the deletion request.  No
          action was taken.  Check the appropriate identifying
          information (station code, date, time, depth, parameter
          code), correct, and resubmit if necessary.

26        DUPLICATE PAR

          An attempt was made to store parametric data that
          already exist in the system. ; Check date,  time, depth,
          station number, and parameter code for correctness and
          resubmit if necessary.

27        This error message is no longer in use.

28        DUPLICATE DESCRIPTIVE HEADER INFORMATION

          An attempt was made to store a line of descriptive
          paragraph information (via a Descriptive Paragraph Card
          - Header Card 5) that is already stored for the
          specified station.  The duplicate line was not stored.
          Check the appropriate 5 cards, and correct and resubmit
          if necessary.

29        STATION NOT IN SYSTEM

          An attempt was made to delete all parametric data for a
          station not yet stored in the system.  No data were
          deleted.  Check columns 4-18 of the station  (S) card
          and columns 1-8 of the agency (A) card for the proper
          codes.  Correct and resubmit.

30        TOO MANY NEW PARAMETERS FOR DATE

          An attempt has been made to store more than 250
          parameters for a single sample for a given date and
          time.  The number of parameters specified within the
          storage run may not exceed the system limit of 250.
          None of the parameters within ,the storage run were


APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-6

-------
          stored.   Reduce the number of parameters to 250 or less
          and resubmit.

31         This error message is no longer in use.

32         DUPLICATE NEW PARAMETERS

          Two or more data cards within the storage run were
          detected that contain identical parametric information
          for the same station, date, and time.  Only one of any
          such duplicated card was stored.  No corrective action
          is required unless the duplication was caused by a
          coding error,  rather than by an inadvertent repetition
          of a data card.

33         This error message is no longer in use.

34         DUPLICATE NEW STATION

          An attempt was made to store a station that is already
          stored for the specified agency.  (This is a secondary
          error message generated by the UPDATE program.)  Check
          the S card for a mis-specified primary station code, or
          the agency (A) card for a mis-specified agency code.
          Correct and resubmit if necessary.

35         This error message is no longer in use.

36         DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE

          An attempt was made to store a secondary station code
          that is identical to a primary station code already
          stored for the specified agency.  All primary and
          secondary station codes defined within an agency must
          be unique.  No information for the duplicate station
          was stored.  Check the S card for a mis-specified
          secondary station code, or the A card for a mis-
          specified agency code.  Correct and resubmit if
          necessary.

37         DUPLICATE PRIMARY STATION CODE

          An attempt was made to store a primary station code
          identical to a primary station code already stored for
          the specified agency. (This is a primary error message
          generated by one of the editing programs.)  All primary
          station codes associated with an agency code must be
          unique.   No information for the duplicate station was
          stored.   Check the S card for a mis-specified primary
          station code,  or the A card for a mis-specified agency
          code.  Correct and resubmit if necessary.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               A3-7

-------
38        NO MATCHING STATION

          An attempt was made to change station location
          information for a station that had not been previously
          stored for the specified agency.   No information was
          stored or changed.   Check the S card for a mis-
          specified station code,  or the A card for a mis-
          specified agency code.  If the station and agency codes
          are correct, resubmit the station card and store the
          information as a new station (by specifying NS in
          columns 78-79 of the S card).

39        MISALIGNMENT

          An invalid field length was detected in the beginning
          or sampling date and time field (field 3) or in the
          ending date and time field (field 4) of a SC storage
          card entered as part of a ?04 storage procedure.  Valid
          entries for these fields are either six or ten digits
          in length, and must be all numeric, with leading zeros
          specified if required.  Data were not stored.  Correct
          the improperly-specified date/time value and resubmit.

40        NO DATA TO BE DELETED FOR DATE

          An attempt was made to delete all existing parametric
          data for a particular sample date that does not exist
          in the system as identified in the deletion request.
          No action was taken.  Check the appropriate identifying
          information (station code, agency code, date), correct,
          and resubmit if necessary.

41        DELETED ALL DATA FOR STATION

          A deletion of all parametric data stored for the
          specified station was performed as requested.  No
          parametric data, for any date, remains for the station.
          No action required.

42        ATTEMPT MADE TO DELETE STATION - STATION NOT FOUND

          An attempt was made to delete a station that does not
          exist in the system as identified in the deletion
          request.  No action was taken.  Check the primary
          station code field  (columns 4-18) of the station (S)
          card, and the agency code field (columns 1-8) of the
          agency (A) card.  Correct and resubmit if necessary.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-8

-------
43        DUPLICATE SECONDARY STATION CODE

          An attempt was made to store a secondary station code
          that is identical to another secondary station code
          already stored for the specified agency.  All station
          codes must be unique within an agency code.  No
          information for the duplicate station was stored.
          Check the secondary station code fields (columns 34-45,
          46-57, and 58-67) of the station (S) card, and the
          agency code field (columns 1-8) of the agency (A) card
          for the mis-specified code, correct, and resubmit if
          necessary.

44        DUPLICATE NEW STATIONS - ONLY ONE STORED

          An attempt was made to store two stations having
          identical station codes.  All station codes must be
          unique within an agency code.  The first station
          encountered was stored during the final storage run.
          Submit a station inventory retrieval to determine which
          station was stored.  Check the primary station code
          field (columns 4-18) of the station (S) card for
          miscoding, correct, and resubmit if necessary.

45        PARAMETER COUNTING ERROR

          An unequal number of parameter codes and corresponding
          parameter values were detected in a ?02 DIP storage
          procedure, i.e., the number of parameter codes
          specified in columns 7-76 of the P card (and in the P
          continuation cards, if present) was either less than or
          greater than the number of parameter values specified
          in field 6 of the D card (and in the D continuation
          cards, if present).  No information was stored for the
          sample.  Check the appropriate cards for the
          omitted/extraneous codes/values, correct, and resubmit.

46        This error message is no longer in use.

47        INVALID REMARK

          An invalid remark code was specified in a data card.
          No information (either remarks or values) was stored
          for the sample.  Check the following fields for the
          mis-specified alphabetic code:  for a ?01 storage
          procedure, columns 30, 42, 54, 66, and 78 of the
          parametric data card; for ?02 and ?03 storage
          procedures, the last position of the parameter values
          within field 6 of the data D card; and for a ?04
          storage procedure, the last position within field 11 of
          the SC storage card.  Correct and resubmit.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                               A3-9

-------
48        ACTUAL AND BLANK DEPTH

          A storage transaction was encountered that lacks a
          sampling depth value, while all other samples being
          stored do have sampling depth values.  The sample
          lacking a depth value was not stored; the samples
          having depth values were stored.  Check columns 4-6 of
          the parametric data card (for a ?01 storage procedure),
          column 6 of the P card and field 5 of the D card (for a
          ?02 storage procedure), column 80 of the last P card
          and field 5 of the D card (for a ?03 storage
          procedure), and field 5 of the SC card (for a ?04
          storage procedure).  Correct and resubmit.

49        TRANSACTIONS WITH DIFFERENT COMPOSITE DATE

          A discrepancy was detected between the beginning and
          ending dates of sophisticated composites coded on the
          data cards being stored and the corresponding dates
          already stored for the sample.

          Check the appropriate date field for an improper entry.
          (For a ?01 storage procedure, columns 7-18 of the
          parametric data card; and for a ?04 storage procedure,
          the beginning or sampling date and time field of the
          storage (SC) card.)  For a sophisticated composite, if
          the ending dates are the same, the beginning dates must
          also be the same.

          The sample with the latest final date was rejected.  No
          further action is required unless the composite data
          stored were incorrect.

50        YEAR LESS THAN 32

          A date check of a data card detected a year earlier
          than 1932 (or no year at all).  Check the date-time
          field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of the parametric data
          card (for a ?01 storage procedure); the date-time field
          (field 4) of the data (D) card  (for ?02 and ?03 storage
          procedures); and the beginning or sampling date and
          time field  (field 3) of the SC card (for a ?04 storage
          procedure).  Correct the date and resubmit.

          If the year specified was intentional, code a B in the
          date check field (column 61) of the agency (A) card (or
          NDC on the AC card for ?04) which specifies that no
          date checking is to be performed by the system.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-10

-------
51         DATE GREATER THAN DATE OF RUN

          An attempt was made to store data having a sampling
          date greater than (or after) the storage date.   A
          sampling date must be either the current or an earlier
          date.

          Check the date-time field (columns 7-8 or 13-14) of the
          parametric data card (for a ?01  storage procedure); the
          date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
          and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
          sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
          (for a ?04 storage procedure).   Correct the date and
          resubmit.

52        MONTH EITHER GREATER THAN 12 OR 0

          An invalid value was detected in a month field of a
          data storage card.  Values must be numeric, from 01 to
          12, with leading zeros specified, if required.   Check
          the date-time field (columns 9-10 or 15-16) of the
          parametric data card (for a ?01  storage procedure); the
          date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
          and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
          sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
          (for a ?04 storage procedure).   Correct the date and
          resubmit.

53        DAY EITHER GREATER THAN 31 OR 0

          An invalid value was detected in a day field of a data
          storage card.  Values must be numeric, from 01  to 31,
          with leading zeros specified if required.  Check the
          date-time field (columns 11-12 or 17-18) of the
          parametric data card (for a ?01  storage procedure); the
          date-time field (field 4) of the data (D) card (for ?02
          and ?03 storage procedures); and the beginning or
          sampling date and time field (field 3) of the SC card
          (for a ?04 storage procedure).   Correct the date and
          resubmit.

54        FIRST CARD OF RUN NOT AN A CARD - NO CARDS STORED

          The first card within the storage deck was not an
          agency (A) card.  No information was stored.  Insert a
          proper A card in front of the station and data cards to
          be stored and resubmit the entire run.

55        This error message is no longer in use.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-1 1

-------
56        NEW USER CODE

          This message is printed whenever a new agency code is
          successfully stored in the system by a special run
          performed by STORET User Assistance.  No action is
          required.

57        STATION NOT PRESENTLY IN SYSTEM/*DATA CARD*/

          Parametric data was stored for a station not yet stored
          within the system.   If the station is not stored before
          the weekend update, the parametric data will not be
          stored.

58        STATION NOT IN SYSTEM

          An attempt was made to change station location
          information for a station not yet in the system.  No
          station information was changed.  A station must be
          stored in the system before it can be changed or
          deleted.  Check columns 4-18 of the station (S) card
          and columns 1-8 of the agency (A) card for the proper
          codes.  Correct and resubmit.  If the station is to be
          stored over the coming weekend, the information may be
          changed next week.

59        NO CARDS IN INPUT FILE

          An attempt to store data was made but no data were
          found in the input stream.  The data could have been
          placed incorrectly within the job stream, or an
          incorrect or empty data set referenced.  Examine the
          input stream, correct, and resubmit.

60        CONTROL CODE NO LONGER VALID - CHANGED TO CX

          In an attempt to change station header information, an
          invalid control code was specified  in columns 78 and 79
          of the S card.  The control code for this operation is
          CX.  Correct the S card and resubmit.

61        INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION ON DATA CARD

          Insufficient information was provided on the SC card
          for a ?04 storage procedure.  Information required
          includes station code, date and time, and appropriate
          parameter data.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-12

-------
62        CARD AFTER "A" CARD NOT DATA CARD - REST NOT STORED

          An SC storage card was not found immediately after the
          agency card (either the fixed format A card or the
          variable format AC card),  as required with a ?04
          storage procedure.  No information was stored.  Check
          the card following the agency card for a mispunch in
          the card type code field,  columns 1-2 (AC card) or 80
          (A card),  or provide the required SC cards.  Resubmit
          the run.

63        ERROR IN PARAMETER CODE

          A parameter code field contains a blank or alphabetic
          character.  Parameter codes must be numeric, with
          leading zeros specified, if required.  The parameter
          and its corresponding values were not stored.  Check
          the appropriate parameter code fields:  columns 19-23,
          31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71 of the parametric data
          card (for a ?01 storage procedure); columns 7-76 of the
          P control card (for a ?02 storage procedure); field 3
          of the D data card (for a ?03 storage procedure); and
          field 9 of the SC card (for a ?04 storage procedure).
          Correct and resubmit.

64        NO PARAMETER FOR VALUE

          A parameter code was not specified for a corresponding
          parameter value that was coded on a parametric data
          card.  No information for the sample was stored.  Check
          the parameter code field (columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47,
          55-59, and 67-71) of the data card used in the ?01
          storage procedure.  Correct and resubmit.

65        TOO MANY FIELDS FOR DATA CARD SET - ALLOWED MAX=100

          Up to 100 parameters and associated values can be
          specified in one set of SC and SC continuation cards in
          a ?04 storage procedure.  No information was stored for
          the sample.  Ascertain the number of parameter
          codes/values in excess of this limitation, divide the
          data into sets of SC storage cards having less than 100
          parameters, and resubmit the data as multiple runs.

66        This error message is no longer in use.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-13

-------
67        INSUFFICIENT OR INVALID COMPOSITE INFORMATION

          Information required to store composite data was not
          specified or was improperly specified.   No information
          was stored for the sample.   Both field 6 (composite
          value type), field 7 (space/time composite)  and field 8
          (sample type) of the SC card must be completed when
          storing composite data via a ?04 storage procedure.
          Also, only certain values are permitted for each of
          these fields.  Check these fields for an omission or an
          improper value.  Correct and resubmit.

68        STATION NOT STORED - LAT/LONG MISSING

          The latitude and longitude coordinates of the station
          being stored were not specified.  This station location
          information is required in order to store a new station
          into the WQF.  The station was not stored.  Check for
          the presence of the required latitude/longitude card
          (Header Card 0), or for the completion of columns 7-21
          of that card.  Provide the required information, and
          resubmit the station location deck.

69        EITHER LAT/LONG OR STATE/COUNTY CODE IS INCORRECT

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates and/or
          state and county codes are initially stored or changed,
          a check is performed to verify that the location
          defined by the coordinates does in fact lie within the
          state/county boundaries specified.  The station was not
          stored, or no existing station location information was
          changed.  Check the validity of the coordinates
          specified in columns 7-21 of the latitude/longitude
          card (Header Card 0) with the state/county codes
          specified in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, or
          already stored in the system.  Correct and resubmit.

70        NEW AGENCY CODES MUST BE STORED BY HEADQUARTERS

          An attempt was made to store a new agency code into the
          WQF, a procedure which can be performed only by STORET
          User Assistance personnel in EPA headquarters.  Please
          contact this staff for assistance.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-14

-------
71         LAT/LONG NO LONGER STORED AS PRIMARY STATION

          An attempt was made to store a station via a 0 card
          using the station's latitude and longitude coordinates
          as the station's primary station code, a practice which
          is no longer allowed.   The station was not stored.
          Resubmit the station location information but include
          an S card to provide the appropriate primary and
          secondary station code information.

72         PRIMARY STATION NOT CODED - STATION NOT STORED

          An attempt was made to store a station without
          specifying the station's primary station code; either
          the station (S) Card was not submitted, or the primary
          station code field (columns 4-18) of the S card was
          blank.  The station was not stored.  Check the station
          location storage deck for the omission.  Correct and
          resubmit.

73         STATION HAS BEEN ARCHIVED - STORAGE NOT PERMITTED

          Information cannot be stored for the referenced station
          code, as the station has been archived and is no longer
          accessible via normal storage procedures.  Contact
          STORET User Assistance personnel at EPA Headquarters
          for assistance.

74         'R1 CARD MUST BE PRECEDED BY AN  'A1 OR 'R' CARD

          In order to transfer a station stored in the WQF to an
          archive class, a special Archive Card (or R card) must
          be used.  An R card can follow only a fixed format
          agency (A) card or another R card.  Examine the storage
          deck for proper card sequence.  Correct and resubmit.

75         This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

76         This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.                                         I

77         This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

78         This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-15

-------
79        This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.   Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

80        LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN STATE/COUNTY BOUNDARY

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
          initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
          to verify that  the location defined by the coordinates
          does in fact lie within the political boundary
          specified.  The coordinates specified in this run via
          the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
          within the state/county specified in columns 68-72 of
          the station (S) card, and consequently were not stored.
          Correct the invalid coordinate value(s) and resubmit.

81        LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GREAT LAKE BOUNDARY

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
          initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
          to verify that  the location defined by the coordinates
          does in fact lie within the political boundary
          specified.  The coordinates specified in this run via
          the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
          within the boundary of the Great Lakes as specified in
          columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and consequently
          were not stored.  Check the coordinate values
          specified, correct, and resubmit.  Call STORET User
          Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
          assistance be necessary.

82        LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN ATLANTIC OCEAN BOUNDARY

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
          initially stored or are changed, a check is performed
          to verify that  the location defined by the coordinates
          does in fact lie within the political boundary
          specified.  The coordinates specified in this run via
          the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
          within the boundary of the Atlantic Ocean as specified
          in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
          consequently were not stored.   Check the coordinate
          values specified, correct, and resubmit.  Call STORET
          User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
          assistance be necessary.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-16

-------
83        LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN PACIFIC OCEAN BOUNDARY

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
          initially stored or are changed,  a check is performed
          to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
          does in fact lie within the political boundary
          specified.   The coordinates specified in this run via
          the latitude/longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
          within the boundary of the Pacific Ocean as specified
          in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
          consequently were not stored.   Check the coordinate
          values specified, correct, and resubmit.  Call STORET
          User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
          assistance be necessary.

84        LAT/LONG NOT WITHIN GULF OF MEXICO BOUNDARY

          Whenever latitude and longitude coordinates are
          initially stored or are changed,  a check is performed
          to verify that the location defined by the coordinates
          does in fact lie within the political boundary
          specified.   The coordinates specified in this run via
          the latitude/ longitude card (Header Card 0) do not lie
          within the boundary of the Gulf of Mexico as specified
          in columns 68-72 of the station (S) card, and
          consequently were not stored.   Check the coordinate
          values specified, correct, and resubmit.  Call STORET
          User Assistance at EPA Headquarters should further
          assistance be necessary.

85        This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

86        This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

87        ALPHANUMERIC VALUES MUST BE 5 CHARACTERS OR LESS

          The values for certain 84000-series parameter codes
          used in the storage of data may contain alpha-numeric
          data, but they must be five characters or less in
          length.  No information was stored or changed.  Check
          the appropriate parameters and parameter values
          (columns 31-41, 43-53, 55-65,  and 67-77 of the
          parametric data card for a ?01 storage procedure, or
          field-9 of the SC card for a ?04 storage procedure),
          correct, and resubmit.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-17

-------
88        INVALID FARM BYPASS FIELD

          An invalid bypass-code was specified for the FARM
          subparameter on the EXEC statement.   The job was not
          run.   Users may request a bypass code from STORET User
          Assistance to store values for parameters or
          latitude/longitude coordinates which are legitimate but
          which do not meet STORET range check criteria.

89        This  error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.   Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

90        This  error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.   Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

91        TIME>2400 NOT ALLOWED

          An invalid time value was specified in a date-time
          field.   No information was stored for the sample.  Time
          values are based upon the military 24-hour time system;
          acceptable hour values range from 1  to 24, minute
          values from 0 to 60.  Check the appropriate date-time
          fields:  columns 7-28 of a parametric data card for a
          ?01 storage procedure; field 4 of data card for a ?02
          or ?03 storage procedure; and fields 3 and 4 of an SC
          card  for a ?04 storage procedure.  Correct and
          resubmit.

92        PREVIOUS ERROR - LOOKING FOR AGENCY OR 'SC'  CARD

          The ?04 type storage procedure allows the entry of an
          SC,$  as a coding shortcut and assumes the station code,
          dates,  times, and depths from the preceding SC card.
          This  message indicates that an error was detected in
          the previous SC card which contained the station code,
          date, and time references.  The SC,$ card (and
          subsequent SC,$ cards) will be ignored.  Error checking
          will  resume with the next agency card (either a fixed
          format A card or a variable format AC card)  or SC card,
          whichever occurs first within the deck.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-18

-------
93        BASIN CODE ERROR

          A syntactically-incorrect basin code was detected in
          the basin code fields of the major/minor basin card
          (Header Card 3).  No information was stored for the
          station.  Check columns 68-73 of the 3 card which must
          consist of a string of six digits.   Alphabetic
          characters and blanks are invalid,  and leading zeros
          must be coded if required.  If a subbasin code is not
          appropriate, the last two positions of this field may
          be blank.

94        This error message pertains only to the storage of
          effluent data.  Refer to the Effluent Data part of the
          Handbook.

95        NO ERRORS

          This message prints whenever no syntax-related errors
          were detected within a request to initially store,
          change, or delete station location information.  No
          action is required.  The requested transactions will be
          processed with the weekly update, and if no logical
          errors are detected, will be permanently stored in the
          WQF as requested.

96        END OF RUN

          The printing of this message indicates that the storage
          run did in fact process successfully to completion.
          This message appears immediately after any and all
          error messages, or if none are found, appears at the
          end of the run's printout.  No action is required.

97        STATION DELETED

          Both station location and parametric data for the
          specified station were deleted as requested via the DS
          value in the control code field of the station card.
          No information pertaining to the station remains in the
          system.  No action required.

98        STATION CANNOT BE DELETED AND ADDED IN SAME RUN

          An attempt was made to both delete and add station
          location information to a station in the same run,
          which is invalid.  No information was stored or deleted
          for the station.  Station location information can be
          changed or deleted only after the station has been
          successfully stored into the WQF over a weekend by EPA
          Headquarters personnel.  Delete and then re-store the
          station in subsequent weeks via separate runs.


                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-19

-------
99        T CARD INFORMATION
          This is an information-only message, which indicates
          that the T card as printed was processed.  No action is
          required.
100       NO LEVEL 1  CODE
          An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
          type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
          One, and only one, level 1  code is required.  No
          information was stored for the station.  Check the
          string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
          columns 1-78 of the T card.  The STORET help data set
          named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
          codes defined within STORET,  as does Appendix F to the
          WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct and resubmit.

101        NO LEVEL 2 CODE

          An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
          type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
          One, and only one, level 2 code is required.  No
          information was stored for the station.  Check the
          string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
          columns 1-78 of the T card.  The STORET help data set
          named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
          codes defined within STORET,  as does Appendix F to the
          WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct and resubmit.

102       NO LEVEL 3 CODE FOR PIPE

          An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
          type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
          If PIPE was specified as a level 1 code, then one, and
          only one, level 3 code must be specified.  No
          information was stored for the station.  Check the
          string of alpha-numeric station type codes specified in
          columns 1-78 of the T card.  The STORET help data set
          named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
          codes defined within STORET,  as does Appendix F to the
          WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct and resubmit.

103       NO LEVEL 4 CODE FOR PIPE

          An inconsistent or insufficient combination of station
          type codes was specified on the station type (T) card.
          If PIPE was specified as a level 1 code, and if a level
          3 code was specified, then one, and only one, level 4
          code must be specified.  No information was stored for
          the station.  Check the string of alpha-numeric station
          type codes specified in columns 1-78 of the T card.


APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-20

-------
          The STORET help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a
          list of all station type codes defined within STORET,
          as does Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook.
          Correct and resubmit.

104       MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 1 CODE

          More than one level 1 station type code was specified
          in the station type (T) card.  One, and only one, level
          1  code must be specified when storing a station in
          STORET.  The station was not stored.  The STORET help
          data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
          station type codes defined within STORET, as does
          Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct
          the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.

105       MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 2 CODE

          More than one level 2 station type code was specified
          in the station type (T) card.  One, and only one, level
          2  code must be specified when storing a station in
          STORET.  The station was not stored.  The STORET help
          data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
          station type codes defined within STORET, as does
          Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct
          the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.

106       PIPE AND AMBNT

          The station type codes PIPE and AMBNT cannot both be
          specified on a station type (T) card.  If the level 1
          code is PIPE, then the level 2 code must be other than
          AMBNT; or if the level 2 code should be AMBNT, then the
          level 1 code must be other than PIPE.  The STORET help
          data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
          station type codes defined within STORET, as does
          APPENDIX F to the WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct
          the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.

107       NOT PIPE AND NOT AMBNT

          The level 1 station type code specified in the station
          type (T) card was not PIPE and the level 2 code was not
          AMBNT.  If the level 1 code is not PIPE, then the only
          valid level 2 code is AMBNT; if the level 2 code is not
          AMBNT, then the level 1 code must be PIPE.  The STORET
          help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
          station type codes defined within STORET, as does
          APPENDIX F to the WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct
          the codes specified on the T card and resubmit.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-21

-------
108       INVALID TYPE CODE IN T CARD

          One or more invalid station type codes were detected in
          the station type (T) card.   No information was stored
          for the station.  Check the string of station type
          codes specified in columns  1-78 of the T card for a
          typographical error or other invalid entry.  The STORET
          help data set named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all
          station type codes defined  within STORET, as does
          Appendix F to the WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct
          and resubmit.

109       MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 3 CODE

          More than one level 3 station type code was specified
          in the station type (T) card.  A level 3 code is
          required only if the level  1 code is PIPE; its use is
          optional otherwise.  If used, however, a maximum of one
          level 3 code is permitted.   The STORET help data set
          named STATION.TYPE contains a list of all station type
          codes defined within STORET, as does APPENDIX F to the
          WQ part of this Handbook.  Correct the codes specified
          on the T card and resubmit.

110       CARD IGNORED - SEARCHING FOR NEXT A OR T CARD

          An error had been discovered in a preceding card within
          the storage deck that caused this, and perhaps
          subsequent, cards to be purposely ignored and bypassed
          without editing.  Error checking will resume with the
          next agency card, either a  fixed format A card or a
          variable format AC card.

111       INVALID Q CARD - JOB TERMINATED

          An improper entry was detected in one or more fields of
          the Quality Assurance (Q) card.  No information was
          stored for the station from this point on.  Check
          column 2 for a proper quality assurance code, or
          columns 3-7 for a properly  structured 5-digit parameter
          code.  All other columns, including column 80, are to
          be blank.  Correct and resubmit.

112       TOO MANY Q CARDS - MAXIMUM=200

          The number of Quality Assurance (Q) cards submitted in
          the run exceeded the maximum allowable number of 200
          cards.  None of the Q cards were stored, nor were any
          of the other cards within the deck processed.
          Ascertain the number of Q cards within the run, divide
          them (and their associated  data cards) into sets having
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-22

-------
          less than 200 Q cards,  and resubmit the data as
          multiple runs.

113       INVALID AQC CARD

          An invlaid code was detected in one or more columns of
          the AQC card.  The data referenced by the card was not
          changed.  Check the entries for valid AQC codes in all
          positions.  Correct and resubmit.

114       This error message is no longer in use.

115       This error message is no longer in use.

116       DATA NOT CHECKED,  NO MATCHING X-REF STATION OR LIMITS

          Although user-supplied data edit checks were invoked,
          the referenced cross-reference station or pre-edit
          limits were not found.   Store the appropriate cross
          references, and resubmit.

117       This error message is no longer in use.

118       REQUIRED FIELD LEFT BLANK FOR CX OR NS TRANSACTION

          An attempt was made either to blank out a previously
          stored and required station location information field
          (via a CX transaction)  or to store a new station
          without providing all required station location
          information (via an NS transaction).  Check the station
          location storage cards for missing required fields.
          Correct and resubmit.

119       PARAMETER CODE IS IN INVALID RANGE

          An attempt was made to store data behind an invalid
          parameter code.  All data following the invalid
          parameter, within the concerned storage data set, was
          not stored.  Check the appropriate parameter code
          fields:  columns 19-23, 31-35, 43-47, 55-59, and 67-71
          of the parametric data card (for a ?01 storage
          procedure); columns 7-76 of the P card (for a ?02
          storage procedure); field 3 of the D card (for a ?03
          storage procedure); and field 9 of the SC card (for a
          ?04 storage procedure).  Correct and resubmit.

120       TOO MANY CHARACTERS FOR STATION NUMBER

          An attempt was made to store data, in which a station
          code exceeding the allowed maximum of 15 characters was
          specified.  Check the appropriate station code fields:
          field 3 of the D card (for a ?02 storage procedure),


                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-23

-------
          and field 2 of the SC card (for a ?04 storage
          procedure).  Correct and resubmit.

121        MORE THAN ONE LEVEL 4 CODE

          An attempt was made to store a station having more than
          one level 4 code on the station type (T)  card.  Delete
          the extra level 4 code(s) and resubmit.

122        INVALID COMBINATION LEVEL 5 SEWERS

          An attempt was made to store a station having an
          invalid combination of level 5 sewer identifiers on the
          station type (T) card.  Only one of the three accepted
          level 5 sewer type codes (CMBSWR, SANSWR,  or STMSWR)
          may be specified for each station being stored.
          Correct and resubmit.

123        SEWER IN LEVEL 5 BUT NOT OUTFALL IN LEVEL 4

          An attempt was made to store a station having CMBSWR,
          SANSWR, or STMSWR as a level 5 code, but  having other
          than OUTFL or CMBSRC as a level 4 identifier.  When
          using one of the three accepted level 5 sewer codes, a
          level 4 type identifier must be specified,  indicating
          OUTFL or CMBSRC only.  Correct the improperly-specified
          entry on the station type (T) card and resubmit.

124        TOO MANY STATIONS ON "P" CARD - MAX=20

          An attempt was made to store data,  using  the ?03
          storage procedure, in which more than 20  stations were
          coded on a single P card.  Code the additional stations
          on a separate P card, repeat the D cards  associated
          with those stations, and resubmit.

125        NO VALUE FOR REMARK CODE

          A remark code was specified in a data (D)  card,  but no
          value was associated with the remark code.   For ?02 and
          ?03 storage procedures, parameter values  are to
          immediately follow remark codes in field  6 of the data
          card; for ?04 storage procedures, parameter values
          precede remark codes in field 10 of the SC card; and
          for ?01 storage procedures, parameter values precede
          remark codes in specific columns.  Examine coding in
          data cards, correct, and resubmit.
APRIL 1981                   WQ-DE
                             A3-24

-------
126       DATA CANNOT BE STORED UNDER SEC I SAME WEEK AS STATION
          STORAGE

          An attempt was made to store parameter data behind a
          secondary station code of a station initially stored
          during the week.   (Parametric data can be stored for a
          station the same week it was stored only if the
          station's primary station code is used.)  No data were
          stored.  Resubmit storage run the next week.

127       This error message is not in use.

128       This error message is not in use.

129       This error message is not in use.

130       This error message is not in use.

131       NO VALUE FOR PARAMETER

          In a ?04 storage run, a parameter code was specified in
          field 9 of an SC card, but no parameter value for that
          code was found in field 10.  Examine the data coded in
          the SC card, correct, and resubmit.

132       DUPLICATE COMMA

          In a ?04 storage run, a comma was coded immediately
          after another comma with no intervening data.  In
          coding AC and SC cards, a comma is coded to conclude a
          data field only if data were coded for that field.
          Correct and resubmit the run.
                              WQ-DE                    APRIL 1981
                              A3-25

-------
                     TABLE 0? CONTENTS
                                   Suciect
    1         Syntax  Considerations                             1-1

    2         Building a Retrieval                               2-1

    3         General Descriptions  of WQF Programs              3-1

    4         General Retrieval  Keywords                        4-1

    5         Advanced General Retrieval Keywords               5-1

    6         Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special        6-1
             Keywords

             Advanced Retrieval Program- and Their Special     ~-i
             Keywords



Aooendices                         Suciect                    ?aae
    1        Index of Available HELP Files

    2        Tables of WQF Keywords by Retrieval Program

    3        Summary of Retrieval Keyword Descriptions        A3'

    4        Summary of Most Frequently Used Purpose Cedes

    5        Terminal Procedures

    6        U.S. Geological Survey Remark Codes

    7        Retrieval Error Messaaes                         A"-l
                          WQ-RET

-------
The purpose of this WQ-RET chapter is to describe, both in
general terms and in detail,  the retrieval capabilities of
STORE!'s WQF.

This chapter is divided into sections and supporting appendices,
as outlined in the Table of Contents.  Section one describes the
syntax rules that generally apply to the use of the STORET
retrieval language and the Handbook.   Sections two and three are
somewhat general in content,  and present, respectively, a
discussion.cn structuring a retrieval request, and a general
description of each retrieval program.   Sections four through
seven are detailed in content,  and present complete descriptions
of the many keywords and programs which make up the WQF retrieval
capability.  The appendices provide a number of indices,
summaries,  and cross references to assist the STORET user.

In order to present the keywords and programs in an orderly
manner, they have been grouped into four logically-distinct
modules as follows:

Section         -     Contents of Section

   4      General Retrieval Keywords
   5      Advanced General Retrieval Keywords
   6      Basic Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords
   7      Advanced Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords

General retrieval keywords are those keywords which are not
program dependent, and are generally applicable to any WQF
retrieval.  Section five describes advanced keyword capabilities
whose most effective use usually requires several months of
experience as an active STORET user.  Sections six and seven
describe in detail the individual programs and those keywords
which are associated only with one or several specific programs.
Effective use of the programs described  in Section seven requires
users  to have several months of experience with the basic
retrieval programs.

Each keyword and program description includes all information
that pertains to the keyword or program  being described,
including  illustrative computer printouts.  To facilitate the
location of a particular keyword and/or  program description, al"
pages of the detailed descriptions have  the name of the
keyword/program printed in the upper right corner for quick
visual reference.
ail
                             WQ-RET

-------
          as illustrated in the steps described in Section 2,
          Building A Retrieval.

          The first instruction on a line normally begins in
          column one,  though it may begin in any column.
          Subsequent instructions on a line normally begin
          immediately after the preceding comma, though, one o:
          more blanks may be left between instructions.  The
          following retrievals are equivalent.
                     PGM=RET,               PGM RET,PUR? 305/STA,
                     PURP=305B/STA,   or    A 14AGNFS9, S G700C9,
                     A=14AGNFS9,            P 11,  P 30C,
                     5=070009,
                     P=11,P=300,
1.2  ORDER OF INSTRUCTIONS WITHIiN A RETRIEVAL REQUEST

          The first instruction within any retrieval request must
          be the ' PGM = program-name, '  instruction which -denotes
          the beginning of a retrieval request, and which
          specifies the WQF retrieval program to be executed.

          There are a number of other instructions which must be
          specified in a certain order when used in conjunction
          with certain other instructions.  For example, when
          selecting stations,  the agency keyword (A) must precede
          its associated station keywords (S); and the county
          keyword (CO) must follow the state keyword '.STC; to
          which it applies.  Positional requirements are noted in
          the keyword detailed descriptions in Sections 4 through
          7 .

1.3  SPECIAL NOTATION USED IN THIS DOCUMENT

          Where the user must code a blank character or blank
          space (a column  in which nothing is coded), it will be
          indicated in this document by a lower case letter  b
          with a slash through its stem (-6> .

          When coding retrieval requests to be processed by  a
          computer, care must be exercised to ensure that the
          letter oh (0^ is not mistakenly coded in place of  the
          digit zero  (0),  or vice versa.  Readers should note
          that the capital letter oh of the type face used in
          this Handbook is noticeably rounder than  its slimmer
          zero.  Similarly, the letter eye (I) must not be
         ' confused with the digit one (1).
                             WQ-RET
                               1-3

-------
1.4  UPPERCASE AND LOWERCASE
          Within each keyword description is a discussion of the
          various values that can be associated with the
          respective keyword.  These values are expressed either
          as lowercase letters or words, or as numbers or
          uppercase letters or words.

          If the value is lowercase, then that value can be
          assigned a variable quantity or expression, as defined
          in the keyword description.  For example,  '?GM=program-
          name,'  means that the value for the PGM keyword, i.e.
          program-name,  can be -specified as RET,  INVENT, PLOT, or
          any other acceptable WQF retrieval program name.

          If the value is either a number or in uppercase, then
          that value cannot be a variable and must be entered as
                                    (Bl.
          shown.   For example, BOT= (Wj, means that  the only
          acceptable instruction formats are 'BOT=3,' or
          'BOT=W,'.

          All keywords are given in uppercase letters which
          indicates that they must be specified as indicated.
          Abbreviations are not acceptable.
1.5  NOTATION CONVENTIONS
          The presence of braces | }  enclosing a column of two or
          more values indicates that an optional choice exists
          among the enclosed values, but that one of the enclosed
          values must be specified if the associated keyword is
          specified within the retrieval request.  For example,
          the format of the beginning date keyword is shown as:
                     Iyymmdd^               where  yy=year
                     yymm   I,                     mm=month
                     yy     j                      dd=day
          which indicates that if BD is specified, then it must
          be assigned one of the kinds of values shown within the
          braces.
1.6  DEFAULT VALUES
          The system assumes a default, value for any optional
          keyword not supplied by the user.  These default values
          are described in the section relating to the specific
          keyword.  Whenever a default value is overridden, the
          entire default is replaced.
                             WQ-RET
                               1-4

-------
STEP
APPLICABLE  KEYWORDS
                       SELECT
                    APPROPRIATE
                 RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
                       STATE
                      PURPOSE
                    OF RETRIEVAL
                      IDENTIFY
                     STATION (S)
                    OF INTEREST
                      IDENTIFY
                  PARAMETRIC DATA
                    OF INTEREST
                       SELECT
                  PROGRAM-SPECIFIC
                      KEYWORDS
                       SELECT
                    PRINT CONTROL
                       DESIRED
                   X^SUEMITX
                   (      FOR    )
                   \PROCESSINGX
       PGM
       PUF.P
  A,B,S,RMI,LT,
   P,3D,UD,ANC,
  SCRT,SCALE,DR,.
  PRT,SHIFT,HEAD,
                    WQ-RET
                      2-3

-------
STEP 1:   SELECT APPROPRIATE RETRIEVAL PROGRAM
          The keyword PGM is used to select the appropriate WQF
          retrieval program.  Some programs are appropriate to
          those whose interests are geographically oriented,
          while others are suited to those who are more
          interested in one or more water quality parameters,
          regardless of their specific geographical location.
          The following list
          these programs and
          provide:
   summarizes  the primary functions oi
   the type of information they
            Inventory of Parameters Sampled
            INVENT   list summary information on parameters sampled
                     (132 character line)
            INV120   list summary information on parameters sampled
                     (120 character line)

            Listings of Actual Sample Values
            RET      tabular listings of selected parameters
            ALLPARM  list sample values for all parameters
            PUNCH  •  punch selected parametric data onto 80-column
                     cards

            Statistical Analysis of Parameter Data
            STAND    compare actual data values against standards
            MEAN     perform statistics on selected parameters
            REG      perform linear regression analyses on
                     parametric data
            MSP      plot selected statistics of parameter
                     values as functions of stations
            PLOT     plot data values as a function of time

            Station  Information Only
            STA     . list station codes for selected agencies
            INDEX    list station header information
            NOPAR    select stations meeting specified sampling criteria
            LOC      plot a map showing station locations

          The first  instruction in a retrieval request must be
          the PGM keyword, whose value is one of the program
          names listed above, such as:
            STEP 1
PGM=RET,
Request tabular listings
of selected parameters.
          Sections 6 and 7 of this chapter present detailed
          descriptions of these retrieval programs.
                             WQ-RET
                               2-4'

-------
STEP 2:  STATE PURPOSE OF RETRIEVAL

          The PURP keyword, which identifies both the purpose and
          the ultimate recipient of the output of a retrieval,
          must be specified in each retrieval request and falls
          logically as the second step in building a retrieval.
          In most instances the purpose will be to satisfy some
          reporting requirement of Public Law 92-500 and the
          ultimate recipient will be a Federal agency, a state
          agency, an EPA regional office, or other user.  The
          information provided by this keyword is used in various
          analyses of the uses made of the data stored in the
          WQF.
            STEP 2
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
Request will satisfy
requirements of
Section 305B of
PL 92-500.
          Appendix 4 to this chapter contains a summary of
          frequently used PURP values.
                             WQ-RET
                               2-5

-------
STEP 3:   IDENTIFY STATION(s)  OF INTEREST

          The WQF provides several station identification
          keywords used to define which of the approximately
          500,000 sites available within the WQF are of interest
          for a particular retrieval.   The several basic ways
          that stations can be selected are listed below,  along
          with the station identification keywords that are used
          to achieve the resoective station selections.
            Station Retrieval Alternatives
                                       Station Identification
                                       	Keywords	
          1  all stations whose latitude/longitude
             coordinates are within a user-defined
             geographical area.
                                                 LT,  L
          2  stations by agency code and/or station codes  A,S,B

          3  stations along a length of a waterway          RMI

                                                          STC,CO
4  stations within one or more states and/or
   counties

5  stations by major/minor/sub basin

6  stations within any designated state
   areawide waste treatment management area
   as defined by Section 208 of PL 92-500

7  further screening of stations found within
   one of the above categories
                                                            3S
                                                           AREA
                                                           U,ST,
                                                          EXTRACT
          Section four describes each of these station selection
          methods in detail along with the logic that must be
          applied in the use of these keywords.
            STEP 3
             PGM=RET,
             PURP=305B/STA,
             A=14AGNF59,
             5=070009,
Request will select
station 070009 owned
and maintained by
agency 14AGNFS9.
                             WQ-RET
                               2-6

-------
STEP 4:   IDENTIFY PARAMETRIC DATA OF INTEREST

          Data selection keywords enable a user to restrict the
          parametric data retrieved to those specific parameters,
          specific sampling dates, sampling depths, and sampling
          conditions of interest.  There are approximately 5000
          unique parameters defined within STORET.
            STEP 4
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=070009,
BD«730101,
P=11,P=300,
Request will select
all values for
temperature in degrees
Fahrenheit (? = !!'• and
dissolved oxygen (?=3G.
sampled since Januarv
1, 1973 (BD«7301C1).*
STEP 5:  SELECT PROGRAM-SPECIFIC KEYWORDS

          Most of the WQF retrieval programs have one or more
          'special1 keywords.  For example, the PLOT program has
          a keyword which allows the user  to choose symbols to
          identify plotted data values.  This keyword would
          obviously not be applicable  to programs whose function
          is to print station descriptions.
            STEP  5
PGM=RET,
PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
S=070009,
BD-730101,
P«11,P»300,
DR=1,
Request will print
values for parameter
300 as whole numbers
                              WQ-RET
                                2-7

-------
STEP 6:   SELECT PRINT CONTROL DESIRED

          The final step in building a retrieval is to determine
          whether the standard print format for the chosen
          program is satisfactory, and if not, what changes
          should be made.   The PRT, HEAD, SHIFT, and PRMI
          keywords allow the user some control over the content
          and format of the printed output.
            STEP 6
PGM=RET,
PURP*305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
5=070009,
BD-730101,
P=11.P=300,
DR=1,
SHIFT,
SHIFT causes the
station header
information to be
shifted from the
upper right hand
corner to the upper
left hand corner of
each page of the
printed output.
SUBMITTING THE RETRIEVAL FOR PROCESSING
          Once the retrieval has been set up and visually checked
          for omissions and coding errors, it is ready for
          submission to the STORET system for processing by the
          computer.  The retrieval instructions chosen in the six
          basic steps can be keypunched onto cards and submitted
          via a card-reading terminal, or they can be keyed via a
          keyboard terminal.  Computer output generated by the
          above retrieval is shown on the next page.
                             WQ-RET
                               2-8

-------
i 3
•^-X-^;^ 070009 LOS<
' 5 ~ \"-- 46 14 31.2 039 i 1 43

jw
0 1
4
^^ • 	 y
6
•-— ' ,-^iONG L.AKE 10 MI E WATERSMEET - ^--^. ._
7 , 26053 MICHIGAN -
/ — N •. 	 ,-LAKE SUPERIOR
3 	 .M3 DNTONAGOS RIVER

070793-

,—±~-S 14AGNFS9 -• - ' --'—
11 0000 ?EET DEPTH CI-AS3 00 	
14 ' . '15 ' 16
• 	 , ' ^ — <• •- — '
DATE TIME DEPTH
FROM OF
TO DAY FEET
73/01/03 09 25
73/05/15 03 30
73/06/04 09 00
73/07/05 09 10
73/03/03 08 30
73/09/11 09 15
73/12/20 10 50
74/05/16
74/06/13 09 30
74/06/26 09 25 0007
74/07/19 03 10 0007
74/08/27 10 30 0007
75/05/16 10 50
75/05/29 10 15
75/06/11 10 00 0010
75/06/24 09 00
75/07/02 11 00 0009
75/07/10 10 00
75/07/15 10 40
75/07/22 10 35
75/03/27 03 30 0009
75/09/24 09 30
75/10/02 10 00
75/10/07 11 00 0005
75/10/16 10 30
75/10/21 11 00 0005
75/11/04 10 00
76/04/23 10 30
76/05/28 10 15
10 30 0022
76/06/30 03 10
76/07/13 11 00

00011
WATER
TEMP
FA.HN
33.0
49.0
63.0
69.5
69.0
66.0
33.0
50.0
60.5
63.0
73.0
57.0
55.0
60.0
51.0
72.0
73.0
78.0
71.0
76.0
66.0
53.0
50.0
51 .0
47.0
43.0
43.0
44.0
63.0
57.0
69.0
73.0
6 - — ~
, 	 .- — . i i
'10 " il.
^^' ^— AM3NT/LAKE
	 ' 12

00300
DO

MG/L
14
11
9
3
3
3
14
10
9
9
j

10

9

3



3


10

11

11
10
10
3
3
 1)  .Primary Station Code        14)
 2)   Secondary Station Code
 3)   Latitude and Longitude
 4)   Station Location
 5)   State and County Codes
 6)   State
 7)   Major 3asin                 15)
 8)   Basin Codes
 9)   Minor Basin
10)   Agency Code                 16)
11)   Depth Units
12)   Archive Class (00=online)
13)   Station Type
Date sampled-required
information stored for
each sample.  If no date
appears on the printout,
the date listed in the
preceding line applies.
Time Sampied-optionai
information which may be
stored for each sample.
Depth of Sample-optional
information which may be
stored for each samcle.
                         WQ-RET
                           2-9

-------
PGM=INVENT,
PGM=INV120,

The primary function of these two programs is to retrieve summary
information on all of the parameters that have been sampled at
the stations specified in the retrieval request.  Information
listed for each parameter includes the number of observations,
the mean value, variance, standard deviation, coefficient of
variance, standard error of the values, the maximum and minimum
values, and the beginning and ending sampling dates for the data
stored.  INVENT utilizes a 132-character print line; INV120
excludes the printing of the coefficient of variance and the
standard error so the listing can print on a 120-character line.

LJN
;*o
-A'
"9
A»e"*r '_A«E ; 4A
>•'
M^er^ ,,,e£a «A
j i ' *A""-' 3 -"<*0 J'AH'J
lv^;t *ia TEJI* FAHN

'""••"• - ; A -K ?
. ; 3 1 - ? . - L ) ?
. , « : '-2 ; 7 ."•'
,.!;•, JO
.- : 4 -; ; i rt
J"!*!: ^!l;j
'?>!* ,«;'ON 3
d'.V.T? -AC
•JOH: ;s
:-;:• I-N
7 , • j •* i ;
i

;•»- :
:?OT j
, . . 5 5 "VS'JNt .it J.:i
i o •* ; i : sc : .1 , TOT •;
•iv,' ::T ML: -rr.-ENDc /i
* L # 4 1> J .''0 ? LA S 4 y~ H £ 9 L

f 7 '-'
:s
U."*rtO
^
-'
^L

r_
j
0.1L
7E 8
13. . 'J
4 • •> . J 2
4 Ql. 12
S 4.3-00
i '".2
j ,';';
3 ^ i . "
3 * . i .
s a. 1C
« . J5 L
4 .001

•j ;j . i
7 19.9
T 132.
! 26: .
6 . 'J 0 0 '.
i i ) ;
.HS ^ :. ;34
VA^ASCS i
0
0 - 0 -j . " ) i
6 I 24 . 4 ?•)
J 2 . 2 J 0 ."; '..
0 S.300G2
3 'L ") " J . i 2
5 :o -i-'i
4 : > . :i ; '
r .'.::.' 4 j
1 !:^*:
j .MI jo T-
. jooood
7 2V »4il
0 3 25 . 1 tb
0
L 130972
0 . 0 C 0 J 'J 0
0 '. 5 f> 3 . 2 0

4 -i. 2 Jd? :i 4*. :• i

3 «!-.:* :CAN
3 • j ? E a ; j P ;~j7'j]
VTONAGCN .»: VE3
NF3*
0 ;LAaJ O'J
AN 3SV -•."£r .'AP jTASQ -7 '•^X rfl1,1*

1 ! j ?

0




|
S
d»
J7
,,

j i
°-
t\
ii
'J .252331 ^.344i7 "d.
•1 . i i 3 7 2 7 i . ,. 4 C i 4 i 2 .
4 ,4«)51! . 5i3?25 5.0
3 . j 1 i 7 4 7 1 . : I i 5 5 1.2
) .23:202 ;.?;;;4 2s 4
: ;iOi = 5 ' s^"o {'.'
5 lit::: . ~ : ; •> 4 5 i . .
i .;7T4"I . . 4 ; ' " 5 .4.
IS .054042 .244)39 '.2
4 . 705417 . ;
i !. D^ji .2
• '. . 1 «70 2«
1 . ; i 4 1 2 1 .
J.JHS .63*53 *.
6.i5L3 I. 3 663 •> .
l.i)54 . il 579 H
J7.:o3 1.56:4; -a
C 0 J 2 0 0 . J
9.i3*y 1 . ? I &4 5 1J
.S^M: J.*?OJd ^.
i?^ 'if
0637 :;.,
3205 50.
3*73 70.
30.
vu

:








3
'til !;oo;
"ft"* J4* '""
-:N[-J- i
". i ' 2 \
45. .2
i. ;;.
H..2
' '::..'
i -





30
J .

: .; i » :;.;::, . o


00
"••
JO


. 0





=


~
•"

'
i
^
i
3










•


:»
' '

,
:



3
t '
j


1.
- ~ -I
•2 . j



'











; :.7£


;" : :.










: • : i
: •< •• -
070009 LOSCL
LOMG LAR£ '.0 .^1 E -*TS3SHEST
LAKE SUPCRIOR 070743
•9 ONTC'MAGOU PIVER
A?»3NT-'LAI L . 40^ft5i 7 . 4000C 7 .
c* • . J3-JL54 . :aoo:c .:
.5 154.115 T:Q..;OO .:
:i 5. :3«oi 5o.oooo jo
46 Ii.031d 7'J.OC03 LO
10 . jojg jj
0.'H3 J4.3*l J JO.OOOU . J
47.0' 3 I . 3 J 5 6 400. J 0 0 10
90972 437.003 1500.30 i.
00000 .'JOOUOC . )OOOJO .0
6J.OO 3*. 5MSJ J4.JQJO . ;
.2.48.1 .4. Jill ,.,.H1 20.0000 .00
JCJ
30

JO
00
ao
oc
OJ
C.l
-0 J
JO

au
CO
0 J
00
00
5

7
•s

•j
•)
I
,
3
;
i
s

3
•JOJ S
c^o •



/










'
•

6'









3
j :
?
i •
3
j
5
6
1
t

]

:






3


i
•-0'' 7: -1 '-3
4 -0
* 0
5 0
Q •' '.'
i 3
6 :
S 0
I'c"
- .
t '-
5 '.

/O
1

•;
':
'

















J
J















4 -- ;•
                             WQ-RET
                                3-3

-------
PGM=RET,

The function of the RET program is to obtain, for selected
stations  and parameters,  listings of actual sample values, i
raw data  values which have not been manipulated in any
the WQF analysis programs.   The listings show
times,  and depths of the parameters specified
request.   As many as fifty parameters can be
single retrieval.
   in any manner by
 the sampling dates,
 in the retrieval
requested in a

BATE
raOH
TO
'3/01/03
73/05/15
73/06/04
73/07/05
73/03/01
73/09/11
73/12/20
74/05/16
74/06/11
74/06/26
74/07/19
74/08/27
75/05/16
75/05/29
75/0&/ 1 1
75/06/24
75/07/02
75/07/10
75/07/15
75/07/22
75/OS/2'
75/09/24
75/10/02
75/10/07
75/10/16
75/10/2!
'5/11/04
16/04/23
76/05/28

76/06/30
76/07/13


rtx:
Of
OAY
0)
03
09
09
03
09
10

09
09
J3
10
10
10
10
09
11
10
10
10
08
09
10
11
10
11
10
10
10
10
03
11


25
10
00
10
la
15
50

10
25
10
10
50
15
00
00
00
00
40
35
30
10
00
00
30
00
00
30
IS
30
10
00
0'0009 '.OHCL
44 14 11.2 039 21 4a.O \
LONG LAKE 10 *I £ rfATERS«££7
26051 *ICHI.3AM
LA«E SUPERIOR I'Q^!
.13 ONTONACON RIVES
DEPTH

fEET









0007
3007
3007


3010

5009



0009


0005

0005



0022


oooi :
HATE 9
TEMP
FAHS
11.0
49.;
63. J
S9. 5
69.0
66.0
33.0
50.0
60.5
S3.0
78.0
67.0
55.0
60.0
61.0
72.0
73.0
78.0
71.0
76.0
66.0
53.0
50.0
51.0
47.0
4 .0
4 .0
4 .0
6 .0
5 .0
6 .0
7 .0
00300
DO

"»C/L
13.3
10.6
i. 7
3.2
3. 1
3.4
D.9
10.2
3. 7
3.9
7.6

:o.2

3.3

7.6



8.1


1.1

10. S

11.4
) . ',
9.'
3.4
3.4
00400
?H

SU
. SO
.50
.50
.50
.50
.00
.50
.50
.70
.60
.50
.60
.00
.50
.20
. 4 2
. 70
.40
.00
.00
.'0
.00
.70
.00
.00
.50
.00
.00
.60
.60
.30
.30
0000
00610 01045
NH3-N IRON
TOTAt ft. TOT
SC/C. UC/L
50
140

140
52

280
120
140
230
620
120















0.050K 70
0.050* 100
3.050K 100
O.OSOI 501
0.050 90
fEET OCPTK C1AS3 JO
11501
TOT CO LI
If IMENOO
/100HL
10
100
1500
30

300
5
130
10
100
10





















                             WQ-RET
                               3-4

-------
PGM=ALLPARM,

The ALLPARM program  is  used to obtain, without  specifying any
parameter codes,  tabular listings of actual  sample values fi.e.,
raw data values  which  have not been manipulated in any manner by
the WQF analysis programs) for all parameters  stored ct selected
stations.
     « : -"• ' i r ? ; .•-/
     >!,,.,.
     411 . !<.' .[S       fir
     04.1 -.4--•-,..; , ;•;.-.4-i-  r ;r,
                   TOT (,/L
                              WQ-RET
                                 3-5

-------
PGM=MEAN,

The MEAN program performs a variety o'f user-specified statistical
calculations on requested parameters, and provides maximum
flexibility with regard to combining stations and grouping data
according to desired time frames.  The statistical functions  that
can be selected include maximum, minimum, mean, sum of squares,
variance,  standard deviation, and other basic statistical
analyses.   High and/or low data values can be eliminated prior to
analyses,  and calculations can be performed on the logarithms of
the values.  The program also can be used to calculate loadings,
dissolved oxygen saturation, temperature conversions, and un-
ionized ammonia.






AM8J4


DATE ?
??OM
TO 3
71 ' 0 1 /O 1
YEAR


74/01/00
74/01/01
YEAR



75/01/00
75/01/01
»CAR



76/01/00
76/01/01
YEA*



77/01/00
00/00/00
STATION









T/LAKE


! £ DEPTH
}
» FEET

U 8EJ
A l!»Cf
t i.-Jrt


J 8£P
A IPUH
I I MUM
E .1


j sen
A HUM
INlnun
EAS


LJM9ER
A1IMUM
t N I MUM
EAN


UMBER
AXIMUM
INIMU.1
EAN








30011
•ATE R
TEMP
FAUN

7.00000
i9. 5000
] 1 . COCO


5'.00000
73.3000
50.0000
34.71,00


15.0000
78.0000
43.0000
60. 5000


5.00000
73.0000
44.0000
61.2000


12.0000
78.0000
11.0000
40.0112








00100
X

-G/L

7.3HOOC
11.9000
i . 10000


4.30000
10. 2000
7.60000
1.84999


6.00000
10 . 6000
7.60000
9.16666


5. 00000
11.4000
1 . 40000
J.51999


22.0000
11.9000
7.50000
9.53181
070009 LONGL
4* 14 j! .2 089 !! 4E 10 *r i WOSRSMEET
26053 .4ICHI;*.«
LAKE 5-JPS 10? 370751
-3 ONTOSA ON -TVE."
14ACNPS9
3000 FEE DEPTH CLASS 30
10400 33510 31045 11 31
?H NHl-r» [RON TOT C i
TOTAL Ft. TOT -flM N O
ju -G/L as/(. /;o s

7..:C30C 5. 30000 .030
S.VJGOO 30.030 5>: . 3
5. -u MO 3.0000 . : 0 0


5.30000 .30000 .00000
5.7000U , 20.300 00.000
6.50000 20.300 0.0000
6.57999 56.000 25.000


15.0000
7.20000
5. 70000
6.24111


5.00000 5.30000 5.00003
5.JOOCO .3503003 100.0'JO
S.OOOCO .0500000 50.0030
6.55999 .0500.300 32.0000


12.3000 5.00000 15.0000 10.0000
7.20003 .0500000 420.000 1500.10
5.50000 .3530000 50.0000 5.00003
6.35175 .0500000 156.800 294.500
Statistical calculations of selected parameters  can  be  easily
obtained by the MEAN program.  This run produced yearly (for  the
years 73 through 76) and period-of-record groupings  of  six
parameters stored at station 070009.  The blank  areas of  the
report reflect no data stored for that parameter for that period.
                             WQ-RET
                                3-6

-------
PGM=PLOT,

The PLOT  program plots the  values of each selected parameter  (y-
axis) for each selected station for the specified time period  ' x-
axis).  Values plotted may  take the form of  raw concentrations
(e.g. mg/1)  or "loadings (e.g.  Ibs/day).  Options include scale
control and  plotting of symbols.   Plots are  produced on EPA's
digital plotting equipment  (CALCOMP} and disseminated to users.
                 C7C079     '.3«CL
                 -.6 :«l 31.8 089 I: 'it.Q :
                 ->c _«e :a M. £ *areRs»eET
                 J50S.'    ."ICiIGS"
                 .=«£ 3i.P!«!SH      075793
                 -g iwrcMacaN *;v£p
                                           :3OC  i:30  ,i-yi
This  PLOT program output  plots the values  of
(Iron,  Total, ug/15  stored at station  070009
through the first half  of 1976.
parameter  01045
for the years  19'
                               WQ-RET
                                 3-7

-------
PGM=LOG,

The LOG program plots a map of a user defined area, and plots a'
symbol to denote the locations of all stations within the area,
using CALCOM? plotting routines.  Printed output from the mapping
routine includes a listing of all stations and their associated
latitude and longitude coordinates.  Plots can optionally include
outlines of cities, lakes, reservoirs (where available), and
county lines.  Plotted stations can be tagged with coded
identifiers which cross-reference to the printed output.
 This  LOG  program  output  plots  the  locations  of  stations  along the
 Flint River  in  Michigan,  along with  the  outline of  the counties
 through which  the river  flows.   The  stations are tagged  for easy
 cross reference to a  list of station locations.
                              WQ-RET
                                3-8

-------
PGM=STAND,

The STAND  program compares  the observed values  of selected  water
quality parameters with a set  of values (criteria)  specified
within the retrieval request.   These criteria  could be the  state
or Federal standards currently in force for  a  particular stream
segment of interest.  Stored parameter values  which do not
satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged  with an asterisk  (*}
in the program output.  The program provides for various output
formats,  including violations  lists and violations  summaries.
                  SUPPORT: NO PASA.-ETSRS
             A.13NT/LASE
           CATt  71 .* £

           /Oa/04 3-JOO

           /'j'/'.'f 03 M
                   TE.1P
                   F AriN
                        00320
                        •30
30400
?H


5U
                                           3 ?;JOO'J      LGSGL
                                          46 It 31.2 J 3 9 „• 1 4 •). ) I
                                          LONG LAKE 10 •«[ i «A TS S^.'-EET
                                          iSOS 3    -tCH I CAN
                                          LAKE SC?£S!Of>       -) ' n. 7 J 3
                                          "9 JN70NA-3CN StVE^
 ) i:: I
707 ::LI
               MOO.'J-
               ioo. :•
                10.:



















•J700
40 14
LONG
«d ON
A.13NT/UKE 14AGN
•JOCO
jU.lflAaY OF VIOLATIONS Of* 3A
0011 OOJOO 00<00 .-0610
W 7£a 00 ?^ NH3-N
ErtP TOTAL ?
*HN flC.'L 5U ^G/ L
10 3f MJ.1.-E3 }l 22 12 i
CAN (J. U. S. 0.
liDlAN 2. 3. 7. 0. 1
0 OF VIOUj J 3 J 0
SSCSNT VICL 0. 0. 0. 0.
INIMUH VIOL 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 . %
EAN V!OL J. 0. ). 0. i
PLEJ COLLECT
C104S 11
' ?CN 7? :

•jr./L .-10
;s
•i . i 294 .
0.0 ii.

7 2
0.) SM.
0 . 0 '. 1:0.
AXIflUH VIOL 3. 3. 0. 0. 520.0 1:00.
1 LJNCL
! 1 . 2 3 i 9 2 1 43.0 1
A
59
JiiT -JSPTH ;LAi5 OJ
•: ?FO- !i/oi..ai :o •,.,;:.:..
01

N c-:

i


2





Two formats  of the STAND  program are shown  above:  Violations  with
Supporting  Parameters, and  a Violations Summary.
                               WQ-RET
                                 3-9

-------
PGM=INDEX,

The  INDEX  program  prints  station  header  information  (eight  per
page)   for  each  station  retrieved  to enable users  to  easily
examine  stations of  interest.
    SIOGfl "SIBIEVIl OITE 79/06/01                                                        D*CE

    mif       SI/CO I    IQCiriON                                 flSIN C3CE        SinsiGf }*TP
               111r1CN TTPE
               USE'  CODE    ST1T10N    SECONOier STltiONS                rtj/rIK/1[n»


                      INOF>



    "I SS1SS10P!   ??077 r.O"OCHIlI3 »IVF«  If 9CSFTTI, MIS
               /TT»I/1KPNI/ST»E1"
               ?l»-.
               31 19 ?0.0 091 36 ?0.3
                      INOEI


    13UI3IIN1     ??053 i»l II  »IV5» II »0«T VINCFNT. 11.                    !(.?;»?
               /TT»»/1XPNT/S fBFIx
               i >?«e,'-      :?390i?o                                 f i^ i"
               3f i" ««.r 091 39 sa.?




               /TT01/»x«NI/5IOfIX

               10 t* ^^.0 091 17 0^.0
                      110 fl



               /TTPI/lxPhI/5I8E1X
               I 1?4>0      0737* I JO                                 US It.
               30 17 00.0 091 13 21.0
                      I«OEI



               / Tr»l/lw!>sr/S TSE i«

               .'1 30 4 ).0 090 ?7 »0.0
                      I*0£I


         |00|   J8001 "1<5ISS1P»I  8. It NlTCHf?. "ISS.                    IC?|9J

               11?^P0      n7?908BO                                 5-ISIW
               31 33 37.0 091 J5 07.0
                      INOEI
                                         WQ-RET
                                           3-10

-------
PGM=STA,

The STA program produces a listing of all primary and secondary
station codes associated with a specified agency code.
JO.
JO
00.
JOS
:a<
•j-j
,0.
0
J j
00
JO
Jli
>u
JO
•>o
..0

OC
)0
j ;
JG
.10
•JO
;c
, J
• •j'j
•JU


























aovESHELTEa ujs *OA :LADE L* cos
.1THGNY JX. 0:3 ANVIL LX 11 J'OS
U-j JOS AJ3-U JOS
'JS-3EDOOC ,'05 *US-5f*tTH 3R JOS
lAJLiY aAPID OOS 3ALLARO ?ONO JOS
ASS - CPGRQ 003 3ASS LAKE 30S
SEE 3UN OUa 3ELCW "UOOY JOS
'.'JOl Ou? 070002 OOP
~000? OOP J'OOOd OOP
7QOU OOP 'j"OC"i4 30?
OC I'J J3P 0*0020 OOP
002; 00?J?0026 -OP
£.; j i oo? O7oo 3 JOP
JJ37 Co? O'tlOi JOP
;Ui «o?J7iJio JJP
010* ± -j ? J • 0 1 0 0 3 P

01*0 j?;ou -o?
'-IH J y : u oo?
•j 4b o ? : ijo ;OP
"04 j ? : *oo oo?
T 1 2 JP24LJ ;jp
* i* OP: 4:0 OOP
"25 u P 2 426 JO?
" H Q ? i 4 34 ):?
* 4 i u j 3 US *Dfl [•< 005
* 'JOOU: 'J OJS •» ?T'w£ 3SAV J03
^0«4[N ^RCA 305 >D«IM 5ITS 3
^LLEN L OOS ».^.^0. 'JSfT J
VJ3LS PONO OflS A^PCA 3
^US-400'. 3H. 005 AL'SASLZ-.^IOJ J
IALT:.^C?C a. -jos SARD 3
SAr-i JOS 3AY-2
JKLOWSHELTSa JOS 3C««[S PaECIP 0
-000) ^'P 0-00-4
?QOQ» 30? 'JO i
7QOi 5 oo? a; j
"0021 0? 00
:oo2" o? :•:
"30J3 OP 00
700 Si OP } -J
70 103 03 3 i 300 U
?0i0o 0? ; LC"

201*2 0? i3«
20142 0? 14
20151 0? 15:
2" Cd 0? 40}
2 ' 1 4 j ? 4 ; ;
27 II 0? 422
2' 2: CP 423
2* 36 0? "4J"
05000004 :s 4 503:ou •;
o"020oi* ; ? .11 «.ARY srAriiH
OS
as
C3
OS
05
OS
OS

3?
OP
:?
j '
o?
5
5
I

.
p
P
p
p
p
p
p
15
5-2
S-IIM SITE J
^THOSY
j-;
'JS-3'.'?TCN 3
.4 ILL jut
AaSEM ?OP
£A? '.A** 2
3SNA ?S
"3 J5
- j i ;
70 ; '
7-: n
7 ] ;•)
"0 35
"J OGOOO}
':- 0305.2
:: l\

J! 17 i
144 i
4:1-
4 10
4 16
4 £ )
4 i ?
*33
^ o ; ; ; 3 ; *
04 jS:ONCARY j .
3 V(
5 XL
= 3A
3 ?A
3 3E
3 ^c.
: r
? ;•
? j ~
y ;.
P ,
? J
; j

' '

?
;
p
3
3
f
?
?

- •
; .** : : T t :
:POC-»=^,
." : v ^ ? t ;
3 : 4 2 - J t •
0 '.. M E "5
TON LA.<2

) ;
•- 3
'j 1
0 ;
„ ,
1 ^ J '- -j :
I ) - 3 1 -.
'- * i
1
i ; -
. 4 :
4 j
'':•.
4 . '
«t 4
* j - i
: ] i
•c c --;*'.. i

This run of the STA program produced a  listing of  the  2,004
primary station codes and  1233 secondary station codes  (a  portion
of which are shown here) associated with agency 14AGNFS9.  This
listing is sorted  in station code sequence,  reading  left to
right, top to bottom.
                             WQ-RET
                               3-11

-------
PGM=PUNCH,

Output from the PUNCH program is a deck of 80-column punched
cards containing the station codes, sampling dates, and data
values for  up to six parameters.  These cards may be used as
input to a  user-written program and submitted through a card-
reading terminal.
                             WQ-RET
                              3-12

-------
PGM=MSP,

The MSP (Multiple Station Plot) program performs a number of
statistical computations on the values of selected parameters,
and plots the resulting values as a function of the stations
selected.  The program allows the user rather extensive control
over the format of the resulting plots.  Parameters to be
plotted, scaling and axes control, statistical values to be
plotted, stations to be grouped, and line printer or digital
plotter output are all user-optional specifications.
This run of  the MSP program plots  the  max, mean,  and  nun  values
of dissolved oxygen sampled over a  seven  year  period  at stations
located along a 180-mile stretch of  a  river.
                             WQ-RET
                               3-13

-------
PGM=REG,

The REG program allows the computation of the best-fit,, s.traight
line relationship between a parameter and time, between two
different parameters at the same site, or between the  same or
different parameters at two different sites.  The program permits
specification of features of the linear regression analysis to be
performed, including the specification of time periods, and
maximum abscissa and ordinate values.
                                                    \
This run of  the REG program displays  the  best-fit  straight  line
relationship between  two parameters  (water  temperature  and
dissolved oxygen)  at  a single station  location  (station 070009)
A summary of the  statistical computations performed  is  provided
on a summary page which accompanies  the REG print  plot;   The
asterisks appearing in the plot margin denote the  intercepts  of
the regression  line with the plot  axes.   Users  may draw a line
between these points  to show the regression line.
                             WQ-RET
                               3-14

-------
PGM=NOPAR,

The NOPAR program performs station selection only, and produces a
summary printout and three optional files which identify those
stations meeting specified sampling criteria based on minimum
sampling frequencies of parameter groups for specified time
periods.  A representative output is not shown below since the
primary purpose of the NOPAR program is to produce a station file
which will  be read by a subsequent retrieval utilizing another
WQF retrieval program.
                             WQ-RET
                               3-15

-------
SECTION 4:  GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS
This section describes in detail those WQF retrieval keywords
that generally apply to all or most of the WQF retrieval programs
available to STORET users.  This group of general retrieval
keywords is divided into four logically distinct categories
titled:  Retrieval Identification Keywords; Station
Identification Keywords; Data Selection Keywords; and Print
Control Keywords.

The order of these categories, as well as the order of the
keywords described within each category, parallels the suggested
sequence that a user should follow when considering keywords for
inclusion into a retrieval request.  The Retrieval Identification
Keyword category contains two keywords, PGM and PCJR?, both of
which are required for all retrieval requests, and which
logically are the first keywords specified in any retrieval.
These are followed by one or more of the station identification
keywords that are used to specify which sampling stations are  to
be selected in the retrieval request.  The data selection
keywords define which water quality parameters and samples are to
be selected for the stations specified, and how the samples
containing those parameters will be treated.  The print control
keywords further define the format of  the information that is  to
appear on the retrieval output.

The individual keyword descriptions contain extensive information
on the keywords, including what they are used for, what their
format and allowable values are, and how they are used with other
retrieval keywords and programs.  The  keyword name appears at  the
top outside corner of the first page of each keyword description
to facilitate easy reference.  If a keyword is required, the word
'required' will appear  in the classification category of the
keyword description.  Also included in each keyword description
are one or more examples which illustrate correct uses of the
keyword in various retrieval requests.  Efforts were made to keep
the examples uncomplicated, in order to highlight the use of the
keyword being explained.  To this end, portions of the following
standard format of keywords and keyword values will be used,
where appropriate, in all of the examples herein:

                     PGM-RET,PURP=305B/STA/
                     A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
                     P-11,P«300,P-400,P«610,P«1045,P-31501,
                     BD-730101,

Appendices to the WQ-RET chapter contain a Table of Keywords by
Program which summarizes which keywords can be used with which
programs, and a Summary of Keyword Descriptions, which gives a
brief description of each WQF retrieval keyword.  A  listing of
the general retrieval keywords appears on the next page.
                             WQ-RET
                                4-1

-------
                   GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS'
Retrieval Identification Keywords

          PGM
          PURP

Station Identification Keywords

  station selection keywords (selectors)
          A,B,S
          LT,L
          RMI
          STC,CO
          BS
          AREA
          MASK

  station restriction keywords (restrictors)
          ST
          STCNTY
          U,ONLYU,NOTU
          EXTRACT
          ARCLASS

Data Selection Keywords

          P
          PARONLY
          PARU,PARF
          PRV,PLV,PHV
          BD,ED
          BT,ET
          BG,EG
          R
          UD, LD   >-
          D
          30T
          DSROC
          ANC
          UK
          AGGR
          IS

Print Control Keywords

          PRT
          SHIFT
          HEAD
          PRMI
                             WQ-RET
                               4-2

-------
                                                                 PGM
CLASSIFICATION:  Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required

USE:      This keyword denotes the beginning of a retrieval
          request and is used to specify the WQF retrieval
          program to be performed.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          PGM=program-name,     where program-name is one of the
                                following WQF retrieval programs:
INV120
INVENT
RET
ALL? ARM
MEAN
PLOT
LOC
STAND
INDEX
STA
PUNCH
MSP
REG
NOPAR


                                The functions of these programs are
                                described in detail  in Sections
                                3, 6, and 7 of this  chapter.
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword must be the first keyword specified within
          a retrieval request, and can be specified only once per
          request.

          In general, the keywords discussed  in this section may
          be used with any PGM option.  The keywords which are
          unique or special to the individual programs are
          discussed in detail in Sections 6 and 7 of this WQ-RET
          chapter.  Appendix  2 to this chapter contains a summary
          of keywords by program, which denotes which keywords
          apply to which retrieval programs.
                              WQ-RET
                                4-5

-------
                                                                 PUR?
CLASSIFICATION:  Retrieval Identification Keyword; Required

USE:      This keyword is used to identify both the purpose and
          the recipient of each retrieval request.  Retrieval
          purposes are used to analyze the uses made of the
          data stored in the WQF.  This information can also be
          used by the users of the system to determine how
          STORET's WQF supports their program requirements.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

                   Iaaaa/bbb eeee  \
                   PLcccc/bbb eeee |,        where:
                   dddd           )

                   aaaa  is the section or subsection of PL 92-500
                         for which the retrieval  is being requested
                         (followed by a slash), e.g. 106/ or 303E/.

                   bbb   is a three letter code indicating the ultimate
                         recipient of the retrieval, as follows:
                                EPA  In-house use by EPA HQ or Regional
                                     personnel
                                FED  Federal non-EPA personnel
                                STA  State government personnel
                                LOG  Local government personnel
                                ACA  Academic (student, university)
                                     personnel
                                CON  Contractor
                                PUB  General Public

                   cccc  denotes the Federal legislation, other than
                         PL 92-500, for which the retrieval is being
                         made.

                   dddd  is a l-to-35 letter description of the
                         purpose of the retrieval other than in
                         support of Federal legislation.  FOI is
                         an acceptable entry for  those requests
                         which answer.the requirement of the
                         Freedom of Information Act.

                   eeee  is an optional text remark, up to 35
                         characters in length, including
                         positions used for public law and
                         recipient.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-7

-------
DEFAULT VALUE:   None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          Specify only once per retrieval request.
          Appendix 4 to this WQ-RET chapter contains a summary of
          the most frequently used PURP values.
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve data for a
          state in support of
          section 303(e).
          Retrieve data for a
          contractor in support of
          the Coastal Zone
          Management Act of 1972.

          Retrieve data for a state
          in support of the Water
          Quality Inventory Report
          requirement (the second
          version cites the subsection)
PGM=RET,PURP=303E/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
           or
PGM=RET,PURP = 303(E)/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,

PGM=RET,PURP=PL92-583/CON
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD-730101,

PGM=RET/PURP=305/STA,
A=14AGNFS9',S = 070009,
P-11,P-300,P-400/
BD=730101,
           or
PGM=RET, PURP = 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
                             WQ-RET
                               4-8

-------
          stations by specific agency code

          stations with certain parameter or type
          characteristics
  5       archived data

Selectors vs. Restrictors
            EXTRACT
            ARCLASS
Station identification keywords are divided into two groups:
selectors and restrictors.  The keywords ST, STCNTY, EXTRACT,
ARCLASS, and U, NOTU, ONLYU are restrictors.  All other station
identification keywords are selectors.

At least one selector must be included in the retrieval request,
or no stations (and therefore no data) will be selected by  it.
Optionally, one or more restrictors may be  included whose
function is to further screen the selected  stations.
Generally, only one selector should be specified per retrieval.
More than one selector may be specified, if necessary, but
caution should be used.  Since each selector is processed
independently of the others, users may inadvertently select the
same station more than once.  For example, if a retrieval
contained both the LT,L keywords (specifying a polygon which
encompassed part of a particular state) and the STC keyword
(specifying that same state), then, since LT,L and STC are both
selectors, the stations located within that part of the state
overlapped by the polygon (area B) would be retrieved, printed,
and analyzed twice, along with all other stations within the
remaining areas of the polygon (area A) and the state (area C).
        LT=I/STC=nn,
LT=I,ST=nn,
         (Stations  in B are
         selected twice)
(Stations only
are selected)
in B
                     STATION SELECTION LOGIC
                             WQ-RET
                              4-11

-------
The result is duplicated data that, will resu.l.t,. in an increase' in
the cost of the retrieval and difficulty with analysis-.  The
logic employed by the restrictor keywords has the effect of
limiting or narrowing the number of stations retrieved.  Using
the polygon/state example above, the specification of  the LT
keyword (a selector) and the ST keyword (a restrictor  for
retrieval by state) would result in the retrieval of stations
located only in area B since the stations would have to be  in
both the polygon AND the state  in order to be retrieved.  There
will be no duplication of stations retrieved, and significantly
fewer total number of stations  retrieved.

Selection Strategies

The set of station identification keywords allows for  a number of.
different keyword combinations.  In fact, different combinations
of selector keyword and restrictor keyword pairs can result  in
the same set of stations retrieved.  For example, the  A keyword
and a range of stations identified by B and S can be used to
retrieve all stations within a  particular agency, which are  then
narrowed by those stations associated with the agency  but located
in a particular state (ST keyword).  The same group of stations
could be selected by specifying the STC and U keywords.

Whenever stations are selected  both by state and by an agency
code, users have a choice of specifying these criteria by either
a station selector keyword (STC or A,S) or a station restrictcr
keyword  (ST or U).  The following guideline should always be
followed in determining which stations should be specified  via
the selector keyword, and which should be specified by the
restrictor keyword.  Since the  system first retrieves  those
stations specified by the station selector keyword, and then
narrows or reduces those stations via the station restrictor
criteria, the criteria that would expectedly find the  fewer
number of stations should always be identified by the  station
selector keyword.  For example, if a user were interested in the
stations within one state of an agency whose station network
encompassed several states, the STC and U keywords should be
used.  However, if it were known that an agency didn't have  too
many stations, but that they were spread over a wide multi-state
area, the A, S and ST keywords  would probably result in the  more
efficient retrieval.  By following this guideline in retrievals
which have either STC and U, or A,S and STC specified, users will
structure a more efficient retrieval since less data will be
retrieved, thereby minimizing the cost of the retrieval.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-12

-------
                                                                 A
                                                                 B
                                                                 S
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selection Keyword
USE:
These keywords are used to select a specific set of
sampling stations by specifying the agency code (A) of
the owner/agency, .and specific station codes (S), as
established by that agency, or in conjunction with B,
ranges of station codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES;

          A=agency-code,
          S=station-cr e,
          B-
DEFAULT VALUE:  A:
                S:
                B:

NOTES ON USAGE:
                      used to specify the agency whose
                      stations are to be retrieved, where
                      agency-code is the cne-to-eight-
                      character agency code assigned to
                      the agency responsible for collecting
                      and entering the data into the WQF.

                      used to specify a specific station
                      code, to select that station,
                      or to serve as an end point  for
                      a range (in conjunction with
                      keyword B).
                      specified in a retrieval request
                      to switch modes from single
                      station selection to range of
                      stations, and back again.
          None,
          None,
          B-fi,
          S may specify either a primary or a secondary station
          code, or if used with B to delimit a range, may be a
          fictitious station code.  A must precede the first S to
          which it applies.

          Agency codes  (A) and station codes (S) entered  in the
          retrieval are paired to form A and S pairs.  Each
          agency code is paired with all the station codes which
          follow it, until superceded by another agency code.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-13

-------
          Usually,  A  and  S  pairs  are  used  as  station  selectors,
          with  each pair  identifying  one station  to be retrieved.

          The B keyword,  if supplied,  serves  to  re-set the search
          technique/mode.   If  'B=P,'  is  entered,  subsequent A and
          S  pairs  are used  alternately as  beginning and ending
          points for  ranges of  primary (P)  station codes.   '3=S,'
          has the  same effect,  but  refers  to  beginning and ending
          points of ranges  of secondary  (S) station codes.
          '3=B,'  refers to  ranges that may include both primary
          and secondary station codes.

          'B=  ,'  is coded,  together with a preceding  'A=agency-
          code,'  to turn  off the  range search.   Subsequent A and
          S  pairs  will be again used  singly,  and  each will
          retrieve one station.

          Single stations are printed in  the  order requested;
          ranges of stations are  printed  in increasing numerical
          order.   Agencies  are  always printed in  the order
          requested.

          The  A keyword is  valid  with all  WQF retrieval programs.

          For  all  programs  except STA, INVENT,  and INV120 if the
          A  keyword is specified, -the S keyword must also be
          specified.   The A keyword may be specified alone with
          INVENT and  INV120 and is the only station selector
          keyword valid with program STA.   A  and S pairs provide
          the  only valid station  selection method for program
          REG.

          A  listing of the current agency  codes is available in a
          STORET help data set  named AGENCODE.   The STA program
          (described  in Section 6)  may be  used to obtain  lists of
          stations for agency codes of interest.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
          When a specific network of stations, or one or more
          specific stations, is of interest, these keywords
          provide for the most efficient, and perhaps easiest,
          way to define the stations within the retrieval.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-14

-------
EXAMPLE', S) :
          Retrieve data from stations      PGM=RET,PUR?=3053/STA,
          with primary numbers between     A=I4AGNFS9,B=P,5=070001,
          070001 and 070009 for agency     5=070009,A=14AGNFS9,3= ,
          14AGNFS9, and individual         5 = 070021,S=07QC24 ,
          stations 070021 and 070024       P= 11, P = 3CO , ? = 400 .,
          for the same agency.  Note       BD=730101,
          the recommended practice of
          repeating the agency code
          whenever the 3 keyword
          is respecified.

          Retrieve data from stations      PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
          with primary numbers 070001      A=14AGNFS9,B=P,S=Q7GOG1,
          through 070003 and from those    S = 07Q003 , A»UAGNFS9 ,
          with secondary codes LONGL       B=S,S=LONGL,5=0406020006
          through 0406020006 for agency
          14AGNFS9.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-15

-------
                                                                 LT
                                                                 T
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selection Keywords

USE:

          The area containing stations of interest may be defined
          by coding the latitude and longitude coordinates of
          vertices that form one or more polygons.  A polygon  is
          a geographical area bounded by straight lines
          connecting three or more vertices  (a) whose locations
          are pinpointed by their respective latitude and
          longitude coordinates.
          Two  keywords, LT  and  L, are  used  to  define  this  type  of
          station  selection criteria.   The  LT  keyword is used  to
          initiate one  or more  polygons within the  retrieval
          request.   The L keywords  are specified  in pairs,  one
          pair for each vertex  of the  polygon.
KEYWORD  FORMATS  AND  VALUES:
           LT-I,
specifies that all stations within the defined
polygon are to be retrieved, including those
stations located at the vertices of the polygon
               dddmmsst
               dddmmss
               ddmmsst
               ddmmss
               dddmm
               ddmm
               ddd
              Idd
     used in conjunction with the LT keyword
     to specify the latitude and longitude
     coordinates.of one or more polygon
     vertices.  The first L in a pair is
     set equal to the latitude and the
     second L to the longitude, using any
     one of the formats shown, where d
     stands for degrees, m minutes, s
     seconds, and t tenths of a second.
     Leading and trailing zeroes may be
     omitted.
                              WQ-RET
                               4-17

-------
DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:
          The LT and L keywords are used in conjunction with one
          another; if either is used, the other must be.  The LT
          keyword must precede all L keyword pairs to which  it
          applies.  For each vertex, the latitude must be
          specified before its longitude.  (Within the
          continental U.S., the degrees latitude of any location
          is less than the degrees longitude of the location.)
          Up to ten polygons can be defined within a single
          retrieval each initiated with LT=I..  A total of 700
          vertices may be used per retrieval request.

          A "polygon" retrieval scans all stations within the
          polygon whose vertices are specified by
          latitude/longitude.  The stations within this polygon
          must have been stored with latitude/longitude
          coordinates in order to be retrieved by these keywords.

          Although the majority of stations stored within the WQF
          have latitude/longitude coordinates stored, a small
          percentage of stations do not.  If you are aware of the
          existence of a station but it does not appear in a
          polygon retrieval,- then it was stored without
          latitude/longitude coordinates.  Storage of
          latitude/longitude coordinates became a mandatory
          requirement in 1974.

          Once a geographical area has been defined, any
          latitude/longitude pair of that area may serve as  a
          beginning point and the remaining vertices of the  area
          may be specified in either a clock-wise or counter
          clockwise direction.  Since the crossing of lines  is
          invalid, once a direction has been determined it may  •
          not be changed for a given polygon.

          Stations will be printed in increasing longitude within
          latitude order, beginning with the southeastern most
          station of the polygon.

          There are no restrictions on the use of these keywords
          with other WQF retrieval keywords.  However, care
          should be exercised when using them with other station
          selectors.  The keywords are valid for all programs
          except REG and STA.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-18

-------
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
          Retrieving stations by polygon is often helpful when
          the area of interest is comprised of overlapping state
          and basin boundaries.  This station selector method is
          also an effective way to determine the monitoring
          networks that exist in a oarticular area of interest.
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve data for stations
          within the specified polygon
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,?rJRP = 305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645233.L=8950,
L=4635,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L=46,L=S935.
L=4645233,L=8925,
P=11,P=30Q,P=4GC,
BD=73C101,
          Specifying the coordinates of a polygon's vertices  in
          such a way that one or more lines connecting the
          vertices (in the order defined by the sequence of L
          keywords) cross other lines results in eliminating
          desired areas.  Stations located outside the polygon
          described, say in area B in the diagram below, are
          omitted from the retrieval.
          WRONG WAY
RIGHT WAY
                             WQ-RET
                              4-19

-------
                                                                 RMI
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selection Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to initiate the selection of
          sampling stations utilizing river-mile-indices.


          A hydrologic, or river mile, index (RMI) is a numerical
          code which identifies the location of a point on a
          stream by defining its distance from, and hydrologic
          relationship to, the mouth of the river system.  The
          index is composed of a major and minor basin code, a
          terminal stream number, and other codes which identify
          the direction of flow, stream level,  and mileage
          references which allow stations to be uniquely located.
          Parts of the following areas have RMI values stored:
          Michigan, Northeast Region, Ohio River Basin,
          Mississippi River, the Pacific Northwest, the Potomac
          River Basin, and the Tennessee River Basin.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          The RMI keyword is coded on a card (line) by itself and
          its values on the next card (line) in a fixed-field
          format, where its various values must appear in
          specific columns or positions on a line.  Three types
          of fixed field control cards (or line images) can be
          specified, each of which must be preceded by the
          keyword R.MI= (without a trailing comma).  These cards
          are a 7 card, an 8 card, and a 9 card.

          The 7 card is used to retrieve all stations above a
          control point along a waterway, and  is coded as
          follows:

          7 card:
            Column or Position               Contents
                     1          The number
                  7-13      Major basin, minor basin, and
                                terminal stream number of the
                                terminal stream.

            14 - 19, 20 - 24,   The level 2 - 12 streams  index
            25 - 28, 29 - 32,   numbers are entered as needed
            33 - 36, 37 - 40,   to describe the control point.
            41 - 44, 45 - 48,   The last level entered, is the
            49 - 52, 53 - 56,   one for the stream on which  the
                             WQ-RET
                              4-21

-------
  and 57 - 60

       61 - 66



         67
                  control  poinU Ls,
                  The  distance  up  the  last
                  stream  to  the control  point
                  to the  nearest hundreth  of 'a  mile
                  Comma  (,)
The 3 and 9 control cards are
retrieve stations between two
All of the 8 card and columns
card describe the location of
                          used  as  a  pair to
                          points along  a waterway
                          14 -through 53 of  the 9
                          the upstream  point;
columns 72 through 79 of the 9 card describe the
downstream point.  These cards are coded as follows
8 card:

  Column
     or  Position
       1
         Contents
The number
                                   8
        7-13
       14
          19
The major basin, minor basin
and terminal stream number
of the terminal stream.

The miles up the level 1
stream to the confluence of
the level 2 stream, or if the
upstream control point is on
the level 1 stream, the distance
to the control point  (Base miles)
to the nearest hundredths of a mile
 42
 60
 46
 64
       20  -  25
       26  -  31
       32  -  36
       37  -  41
- 45,  51 - 54,
The level
number.
                            2 stream index
The miles up the level 2
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.

The level 3 stream index
number.

The miles up the level 3
stream to the nearest hundredth
of a mile.

The index numbers for the
  63,  and 69 - 72 level 4-7 streams as
                  needed.

  50,  55 - 59,    The distance up the stream
  68,  and 73 - 76 that is indicated by the preceding
                   WQ-RET
                     4-22

-------
                      index number as needed.

 A comma (,)  must immediately follow the last entry
 on this card.
9 card:
  Column or Position
                     Contents
  14 - 17,
  30 - 33,
  and 46 -
1

22 - 25,
38 - 41,
49
The number

The index
level 8 -
needed.
numbers for the
12 streams as
  18 - 21,  26
  34 - 37,  42
  and 50 - 53

         71
     29,
     45,
The miles up
is. indicated
index number
   the stream that
   by the preceding
   as needed.
    72  -  73
    74  -  79
       80
           Type of retrieval control desired.
           Code "2" to retrieve stations only
           on the main-stem.  Code "4" to
           retrieve stations on the main-stem
           and on the tributaries below the
           control point.

           The level of the stream on
           which the downstream control
           point is located.

           The distance up the indicated
           stream to the downstream
           control point.

           Comma (,)
                   WQ-RET
                    4-23

-------
DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:
          Stations will.be printed in upstream hydrologic order.
          When main stem and tributaries are requested, all main
          stem stations are printed followed by all stations on
          each tributary, beginning with the tributary closest to
          the terminal stream.

          When using multiple sets of RMI cards within a single
          retrieval request, all 7 cards should be entered
          first, followed by all 8 and 9 card pairs.

          An RMI card must precede each 7,'8, and 9 card.  Each
          7, 8, and  9 card must be ended with a comma; no comma
          is to be coded after the RMI keyword.  A station may be
          physically located in a basin other than its terminal
          basin.  For example, a sampling station on the Ohio
          River at Cincinnati would be physically located in
          major basin 05 (Ohio River Basin);  however, its
          terminal major basin would be 10  (Southwest Lower
          Mississippi Basin) since this is  the last basin through
          which water from the Ohio flows before it enters the
          ocean.

          There.are no restrictions on the 'use of RMI with any
          ether retrieval keywords.  However, care should be
          exercised when using this keyword with other station
          selectors.  This keyword is valid for all programs
          except REG and STA.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-24

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
                      14  MINOR BASIN -
TERMINAL
 STREAM
 NUMBER
            Using  the river system  shown  above,  the  following  will
            retrieve data from  all  stations above point  A.
                    fC»«aeT.PU«P-iOS8/STA.
                    RH>
                    ;    •)) uoo 201100 loooo 10
                    ?-U,P-)00,?-400.
                    80-7JOIOI , ?!WI,
            To retrieve  data  from  stations between  points B and C
            on the  mainstem and on  the  tributaries  below  point  C,
            the 8 and 9  cards  are  utilized, as follows:
                     0     I     I      )     <      5     6     7      i
                     12 ]4*>7S90 12 34 Ji71>011]4J< 7190 12)4 Ji7l)0i:]4 1C WO 123416 '190 12)456 '890 12 ]45» 7190
                     RMI*
                     9   0
                     MI-
                     1
                     P-U.?-100,P-400.
                     ao-iioioi, piwi.
                                   WQ-RET
                                    4-25

-------
                       \
                  \
                   \
                    ^*as\-
                      •   .  7.41   \
                      ';/
                                                        /
                                 C«  / 0
                                   /

                        04-0010  A    ,^3-00010 /   ,'
                                8  :'«  9.28  /^'"
                                   S     / 02-000060
                                                            '
             6.12
Control  Point
1 is  0.75  mile
up Gamma Creek.
Control  Point 2 is
2.20 miles up Delta  Creek.

Control  Point 3 is  17.62
miles  UD Delta Creek.
                                    Z. ZZ

                                X: level  number
                                Y: stream index
                                   number
                                Z: mileage

                                Major  Basin: 12
                                Minor  Basin: 03
The  following will  retrieve all  stations above  control point 1 on
the  map above, namely stations A,  B,  C, and  D:
               0    1     2     )     4     5     S     7      i
               :2)45S7H10123456739012)456789012J456789012)4S67S90123456799012)456799012)45o7890

               PO»*rMVENT.PURP-)058/STA.
The  following will  retrieve data  from stations  E and F  on  the
main  stem of Delta  Creek between  control points 2 and 3.   If a 4
were  coded in column 71 of the  9  card (instead  of a 2 as shown),
data  from stations  located on the tributary  to  Delta Creek
(stations G and H)  would also be  retrieved.
0
12 J
   i     4     5
S6 73?0 U 14 S« 7890 12)4)6 1990 m<
                                            i
                                            901 211 5
                 12080020009610000)0001762,
                               WQ-RET
                                 4-26

-------
                                                                 STC
                                                                  CO
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to retrieve stations according to
the states and/or counties in which they are located.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
          STC=state-code,
          C0=county-code,
DEFAULT VALUES:  None.
                      where state-code is a two-digit
                      numerical Federal Information
                      Processing Standards (FIPS)
                      state code.  Leading zeroes may
                      be omitted.

                      where county-code is a three-digit
                      numerical FIPS code identifying
                      the county or county equivalent,
                      such as an independent city.
                      Leading zeroes may be omitted.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          When one or more CO keywords are specified, they must
          follow the STC keyword and value to which they apply.
STC can be specified without any
to retrieve all stations for all
state(s) specified.
                                           following CO keywords
                                           counties within the
          There  is no limitation on the number of times these
          keywords can be specified within a single retrieval.
          Care should be exercised, however, when these keywords
          are used with other station selectors.

          Stations are printed  in random order within a county,
          but counties always will be retrieved  in numerical
          order  within a state  regardless of order requested.
          States are listed  in  the order requested.

          These  keywords are valid for all programs except REG
          and STA.
          Listings of the state and county codes are contained  i
          Appendix C to  this part of  the Handbook.
                                                      in
                             WQ-RET
                               4-27

-------
EXAMPLE(S;
          Retrieve data from
          stations in Gogebic(53)
          and Ontonago(131)  counties
          in Michigan(26) as well
          as Vilas(125) county in
          Wisconsin(55) .

          Retrieve a summary of the
          data for all stations in
          the State of California (06
          in counties Sacramento (067
          and El Dorado  (017) .
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STO26,CO=53,CO=131,
STC=55,CO=125,
P=11,P=3CO.
BD-730101,
P»40G,
PGM=INVENT,PUR?=104B6/STA,
STC=06,CO=017,CO=067,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
          The STC keyword should not be confused with the ST
          keyword which is also used to request stations based
          upon the state in which they are located.  It should be
          noted that STC is a station selector, where ST is a
          station restrictor.  When STC is used in conjunction
          with another station selector, such as LT,L or RMI,  it
          could result in the retrieval of some stations twice.
          The ST keyword should be used to restrict stations
          retrieved  (by means of a station restrictor) to those
          in one or  more states.

          The keyword CO can not be used in conjunction with the
          keyword ST.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-28

-------
                                                                 BS
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selection Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to retrieve stations according to
          the major/minor/sub basins in which they are located.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
             BS =
mmnnss
mmnn
mm
                                where
                                mm
                                nn
                                ss
                 IS
                 is
                 is
the two-digit major basin code
the two-digit minor basin code
the sub-basin code
                                           values -of 3S
                                           	   Leading
              Acceptable
              mmnn, or mmnnss.  Leading zeroes c
              one digit codes must be specified.
                  include mm,
                    zeroes of
DEFAULT VALUES:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          These codes designate the major/minor and sub basin  in
          which a station is physically located, and should not
          be confused with the terminal basin codes used with
          RMI.

          Listings of the major and minor basin codes are
          contained within Appendix D to this Handbook.  They  can
          also be obtained by listing the STORET help data set
          named BASIN.CODES.  Since sub-basin coding is performed
          at the state level, the applicable state office should
          be contacted for information on sub-basin codes.  '

          There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
          with other WQF retrieval keywords.  However, care
          should be exercised when using this keyword with other
          station selectors.  The keyword may be used with all
          programs except REG and STA.

          Stations are printed in random order within the sub
          basin/minor'basin/major basin categories.  Major basins
          are printed in the order requested.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-29

-------
EXAMPLE(S:
          Retrieve data from
          stations in the
          Ontonagon minor basin(12)
          of the Lake Superior(22)
          major basin.

          Retrieve a summary of the
          data in the Sacramento River
          Basin.
PGM=RET,PURP-305B/STA,
BS=2212,
?=11;P=300,P=400,
BD-730101,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=1Q4B6/STA,
65=1409,
                              WQ-RET
                               4-30

-------
                                                             AREA
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selector Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to retrieve stations located
          within a designated state areawide waste treatment
          management area as defined within Section 208 of
          PL 92-500.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          AREA=area-name,  where area-name is one of the designates
                           208 areas.

DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          Stations are printed in latitude/longitude order within
          the requested area.

          A listing of all 208 areas defined within STORET can be
          obtained by listing the STORET help data set named
          SEC208.AREAS.  Additional information can be obtained
          from the publication titled "Water Quality Management
          Directory", dated July 1, 1976 which lists designated
          local and state WQM agencies, principal contacts, and
          EPA regional contacts.  The publication is available at
          EPA regional offices or from the Program Management
          Branch of the Water Planning Division, EPA
          Headquarters, Washington, D.C.  A recent map of the
          designated 208 areas is shown on the next page.

          A maximum of 10 areas can be specified per retrieval.

          Polygons defining the 208 areas were computed utilizing
          the Census Bureau county data base.

          There are no restrictions on the use of this keyword
          with other WQF retrieval keywords.  However, care
          should be exercised when using this keyword with other
          station selector keywords.

          This keyword is valid with all WQF retrieval programs
          except STA and REG.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-31

-------
EXAMPLE{S):
          Retrieve data from
          stations in the
          Muskegon, Michigan
          208 area.

          Retrieve a summary of data
          for all stations in the
          Cape Cod, Maine 208 area.
PGM=RET,PURP=3053/STA,
AREA-MUSKEGON,
P=11,?»300,P-400,
30=730101,

PGM-INVENT,PURP-208/EPA,
AR£A=CAPECOD,
                   MAP OF DESIGNATED 208 AREAS
                             WQ-RET
                              4-32

-------
                                                             MASK
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Selector Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in conjunction with the EXTRACT
keyword so that only those stations satisfying the
EXTRACT criteria are selected.  (The keyword itself
selects no stations; its presence in a retrieval
satisfies the requirement that at least one station
selector be specified in each retrieval request.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          MASK,
           There is no value associated with this
           keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword is valid for all WQF programs except REG
and STA.

If this
EXTRACT
                  keyword
                  keyword
                is specified
                must also be
in a retrieval
specified.
the
EXAMPLES;
          Retrieve all the stations
          associated with municipal
          water supplies that are
          sampling parameters 31516 or
          31517 and 70900 in the ocean
          at points where all effluents
          should have been effectively
          treated.
                                 PGM=INDEX,PURP=104B6/STA,
                                 MASK,
                                 EXTRACT=(P31516 OR P31517)
                                 AND P70900 AND OCEAN AND
                                 TREATD AND MUN,
                              WQ-RET
                               4-33

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
selector keyword to further limit the stations that ar;
selected to those within the states specified.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          ST=state-code,
                      where state-code is.one of the
                      two-digit numerical Federal
                      Information Processing Standards
                      (FIPS) state codes.  A leading
                      zero may be omitted.
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          A maximum of three state codes may be specified in any
          single retrieval request.

          This keyword must be used in conjunction with at least
          one station selector keyword.

          Listings of the state codes are contained in Appendix C
          to this.part of the Handbook.

          This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
          STA.

          Stations are printed in the order that the station
          selection keywords (specified in the retrieval with ST)
          are normally printed, unless the U keyword is also
          specified, in which case stations are printed in
          numerical order within agency.
EXAMPLE(S)
          Restrict retrieval of
          stations within the polygon
          to only those stations
          in the state of
          Michigan.
                                 PGM=R£T,PURP=305B/STA,
                                 LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
                                 L=4635,L=90,
                                 L=4610454,L=8950102,
                                 L=46,L=8935,L=46452S3,
                                 L=8925,
                                 ST=26,
                                 P»11,P-300,P-400,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-35

-------
          Retrieve an inventory for        PGM=INVENT,PURP=104B6/STA,
          the stations that are in the     BS=090S,
          Nebraska portion of the North    ST=31,
          Platte River Basin.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
          The ST keyword and the STC keyword are not
          interchangeable.   ST is a station restrictor, STC a
          station selector; consequently, each functions
          differently.  If  stations are to be selected within a
          state without regard to other station selection
          criteria, then STC should be used.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-36

-------
                                                             STCNTY
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Restrictor Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used in conjunction with a station
          selector keyword to further limit the stations that are
          selected to those within the state-county specified.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          STCNTY=SSCCC,

            where:

             ss      is the two-digit FIPS code for the state
                     desired

             ccc     is the three-digit FIPS code for the county
                     within that state.  Leading zeros must be
                     specified.

DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          You must specify all five digits for this keyword,  for
          example:

          STCNTY=51001,

          'You may specify the STCNTY keyword up to 30 times in
          one retrieval.

          This keyword must be used in conjunction with at  least
          one station selector keyword.

          Valid FIPS state and county codes are found in Appendix
          C to this part of the Handbook.

          This keyword is valid for all programs except REG and
          STA.
EXAMPLE(S:
          Retrieve only those stations     PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
          whose primary station numbers    A=14AGNFS9,
          are between 070009 and  070029    B=P,5=070009,5=070029,
          and which are also in Fairfax    STCNTY=51059,
          County, Virginia.                BD-730101,P=ll,P=1045,
                                           P=300,
                             WQ-RET
                               4-37

-------
Using the INDEX retrieval        PGM=IN0EX;, ?URP:=.20S7LO'C,
format, retrieve only the        SS=Q214,
stations in the Potomac          ST-51,STCNTY»51059,
River basin (0214) that are      ST=24,STCNTY=24031,
also in Fairfax County  (059)     STCNTY=24033,
Virginia (51) and Montgomery
(031) and Prince Georges  (033)
counties Maryland (24).
                      WQ-RET
                       4-38

-------
                                                                 u
                                                              ONLYU,
                                                               NOTU,
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Restrictor Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used with a station selector keyword
to restrict a retrieval to all stations within
specified agency codes.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

          U=agency-code,
          ONLYU,
          NOTU,
DEFAULT VALUE(S:

          U:
          ONLYU;
          NOTU:
                      specifies the agency for which
                      stations are to be retrieved,
                      where  agency-code is the one-to-
                      eight character agency code
                      assigned to the agency responsible
                      for collecting and entering  the
                      data into the WQF.  The stations
                      retrieved will be listed in
                      ascending numerical sequence within
                      agency code.

                      specifies that the stations
                      retrieved via one or more
                      U keywords are to be
                      listed in-the order of the station
                      selection keyword (e..g... RM.I -or LT,L!
                      rather than in numerical sequence.
                      There is no value associated with
                      this keyword.

                      specifies that the agencies
                      referenced by one or more U
                      keywords are to be excluded
                      from the retrieval.  There
                      is no value associated with  this
                      keyword.  This keyword preserves
                      the order of stations established
                      by station selector keywords.
        None.
        Not applicable.
        Not applicable.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-39

-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
          Any number of U keywords can be specified
          retrieval request.
         in a single
          The A keyword and U keyword are not interchangeable.
          The A keyword is used as a station selector, usually  in
          conjunction with the S keyword; the U keyword is used
          as a restrictor to limit selected stations  to those
          within specific agencies.  (The A keyword is used when
          selecting stations with the S keyword; the  U keyword  is
          used when not selecting stations by station number.)

          These keywords are valid with all WQF retrieval
          programs except STA, REG, and ALLPARM.
          NOTU and ONLYU are mutually exclusive,
          be used in the same retrieval.
      i.e.  both cannot
          Stations are printed in station order within agency  in
          the order the agencies are specified.

          A listing of the current agency codes is available  in a
          STORET help data set named AGENCODE.
EXAMPLE(S;
          Retrieve data from
          only those stations in
          Gogebic County, Michigan
          which belong to agency
          14AGNFS9.

          Retrieve data from only
          those stations in Gogebic
          County, Michigan which
          do not belong to agency
          14AGNFS9.

          Retrieve data from stations
          within the specified
          polygon belonging to
          agency 14AGNFS9, and have
          the selected stations listed
          in order by the latitude
          and longitude coordinates.
PGM=RET,PURP=3G5B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=26,CO=53,
NOTU,U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
BD-730101,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
LT=I,L=4645283,L=8950,
L=4535,L=90,L=4610454,
L=8950102,L-46,L=8935,
L=4645283,L=8925,
ONLYU,U=14AGNFS9,
P=11,P=30C,P=400,
BD=7301C1,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-40

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Restrictcr Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to limit a retrieval request
          those stations with a specific attribute or combin
          of attributes as descriced'by station masks.  A st
          mask is a computer device which contains one bit cf
          information on every STORE! station.  Masks are created
          by the STORET programming staff to be used by all
STORE! users,  or they may be created by  TR   use
                                                   TORE!
          (usinc ?GM=NOPAR) to meet their individual needs.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          EXTRACT=^ mask-name  operator  mask-name  .  .

                     where mask-name is the system  name for
                     any existing STORE! mask, and  operator
                     is a valid LOGICAL operator •'   'AND'  .
                     'OR' }.

                     Mask names and operators may be  cornsined  in
                     any logically consistent fash.cn, using
                     parentheses where necessary to eliminate
                     ambiguity.

DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          A mask has been created for each STORE! parameter,
          identifying the attribute 'parameter nnn  is present  at
          this station' for every station on  the system.  The
          names of these masks are the same as the  parameter
          number.

          Masks have been created to facilitate retrieval by four
          of the 129 priority pollutant groups.  The  four masks
          are:  PRIPOLIN for inorganics, PRIPOLME for metals,
          PRIPOLPE for pesticides, and PRIPOLOR for organics.
          The STORET help data set named PRIORITY.POLUTANT.GROUPS
          lists the parameter numbers included in each group.

          Masks have also been created to facilitate  retrieval by
          station  type.  The STORET'help data set named
          STATION.TYPE contains a list of valid station type
          codes (masks) which may be combined in any  order to
          retrieve stations with particular station type
         . attributes.
                             WQ-RET
                             —4-41

-------
          Users  may  create  masks  utilizing  the retrieval  program
          NOPAR.   Masks  may be  created  for  stations? in. a  specific
          area  that  are,  for example, .sampling specific
          parameters during a specific  time period a specified
          number of  times per year.   The criteria for a mask may
          be  as  sophisticated or  as  simple  as a user desires.
          The EXTRACT keyword can then  be used to restrict to
          those  stations identified  in  a user-created mask.   When
          utilizing  user-created  masks,  a job control language
          'JCD  data definition (DD)  statement must be used  to
          indicate the location of the  mask.   See the description
          of  the NOPAR program  in Section 7,  Advanced Retrieval
          Programs- and Their Special  Keywords, for more detail on
          this  capability.

          EXTRACT may be used with all  WQF  programs except REG
          and STA,  and serves as  a station  restrictor, to be used
          in  conjunction with a station selection keyword such as
          LT, L, RMI,  or STC, to  limit  the  numoer of stations
          retrieved  to those meeting  both the -station selection
          criteria AND the  mask.criteria.   Note that the EXTRACT
          keyword functions to  retrieve stations, not to print
          data.   The parameter  keyword  P must be specified as
          usual  to obtain data  listings.

          Stations are printed  in the order that the station
          selection  keywords (specified in  the retrieval  with
          EXTRACT) are normally printed., unless the U keyword is
          also specified, in which case stations are printed in
          numerical  order within  agency.

          Note the use of the MASK station  selector keyword
          whenever no.other station selector is specified in a
          retrieval  with the EXTRACT keyword.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
          This keyword might be used to limit a retrieval to
          stations which sample a particular parameter, thus
          eliminating from the retrieval any station which has no
          observations of that particular parameter.  In the
          event that the parameter is infrequently measured (a
          newly discovered toxic parameter,  for example), the use
          of the EXTRACT keyword can result in a major cost
          reduction in the retrieval.  Through the use of masks
          built by the user with the NOPAR program (described in
          Section 7),  the retrieval can be very effectively
          limited to stations with minimum acceptable quantities
          of data.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-42

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Obtain an inventory of
          stations in Maryland
          (STC 24) which sample
          eith'er parameter 300 or
          parameter 400.

          Obtain an inventory of
          stations in Delaware
          (STC 10) which have at
          least one observation of
          Plutonium (22010) as well
          as either one observation
          of Total Uranium (22601)
          or one observation of
          Dissolved Uranium (22603).

          Obtain an inventory of
          stations in Colorado (STC 08
          which have either parameter
          present  in each of the
          following oairs:
                    608 - 610
                     10 - 11
                    400 - 430
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=24,
EXTRACT=3QOOR400,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=10,
EXTRACTS 22601QR22603 )
AND22010,
PGM=INVENT,PURP=3G5B/STA,
STC=08,
EXTRACT*(6080R610?
AiND (IQORll)AND
(4000R430),  '
          Obtain an  inventory of all
          ambient  stream stations
          under agency code  1110NET.
          Obtain  an  inventory of  all
          effluent stations  for the
          state of Delaware.
          Obtain  an  inventory of  the
          ambient stream  stations in
          Maryland which  also have
          sampled parameter  650
          (total  phosphorus  as P04)
          during  1978.
PGM-INVENT,
PURP=208/STA PLANNING STUDY,
A=1110NET,
EXTRACT*AMBNT- AND STREAM,

PGM=INVENT,
PURP=305B/STA ANNUAL REPORT,
STC=10,
EXTRACT=PIPE,

PGM-RET,PURP-305B/STA,
STC=24,
BD=78,ED=78,
EXTRACT=(650ANDAMBNTANDSTREAM!
                              WQ-RET
                               4-43

-------
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
          Even though a retrieval has EXTRACT references to
          specific parameter codes,  it uses- those only for
          purposes of station selection.
          For example:

                     PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
                     STC = 51,EXTRACT* 315150R31516,

          will NOT print-any results.  In spite of references to
          parameters 31515 and 31516, a retrieval must specify
          (via the P keyword) which parameters are to be printed.
          It is NOT necessary to print the parameters referenced
          by the EXTRACT.  The following  is acceptable:

                     PGM=RET,?URP=305B/STA,
                     STC = 51,EXTRACT = 315150R31516,
                     P=300,P=400,P=610,P=395600,P=10,

          and will print data on parameters 300, 400, 610, 39560,
          and 10 for all STORET stations  in Virginia  (STC 51)
          with at least one observation of either parameter  31515
          or 31516.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-44

-------
                                                          ARCLASS
CLASSIFICATION:  Station Restrictor Keyword
USE:
Some infrequently-used data in the Water Quality File
have been archived,  i.e.,  taken off-line, in order to
save on-line storage costs and space.  This keyword is
used to retrieve data for stations whose data have been
archived.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          ARCLASS=
                   i/n[/m...
                    ALL
                                 where n and m are any
                                 two digit whole numbers
                                 of the archive ciassies!
                                 to be retrieved.  Each
                                 archive class number
                                 must be preceded by a
                                 slash; a leading zero
                                 must be specified.  Any
                                 number of individual
                                 archive class numbers
                                 may be specified.
                                 Specifying ARCLASS=ALL
                                 will retrieve all data
                                 stored whether archived
                                 or regular on-line data,
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          The archive status of parametric data for any given
          station can be determined by examining the archive
          class code printed in the station header information
          for the station.   (See Section 2 of this WQ-RET chapter
          for a detailed description of the information contained
          within station header information.)  An archive class
          other than 00 (on-line) indicates that data for that
          station have been archived.

          This keyword acts as a station restrictor/ consequently
          it must be accompanied by one or more station selector
          keywords within the retrieval.

          This keyword is valid for all programs except INDEX and
          STA.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-45

-------
EXAMPLE',
          Retrieve all data that
          may have been archived
          for any station within
          the agency.
?GM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,
ARCLASS=/01/02,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-46

-------
CLASSIFICATION7:  Data Selection Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to specify the individual water
          quality parameters that are to be retrieved.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          P=parameter-code,     where parameter-code  is one of
                                the five-digit water  quality
                                parameters defined within STORET.
                                Leading zeroes need not be
                                specified.

DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword is mandatory for all programs  which
          retrieve data except INVENT, INV120, and ALLPARM.

          Up  to 50 parameters may be specified for the RET, MS?
          and STAND programs; up to 10 parameters may be
          specified for PLOT, MEAN, MSP with the MEAN keyword
          specified, and REG; up to 6 parameters may  be specified
          for PUNCH; up to 500 parameters may be specified for
          INVENT and INV120; and up to 2000 parameters may be
          specified for ALLPARM.  If more parameters  are
          specified than are allowed, the retrieval does not run.

          Parameters retrieved are listed in the order specified
          in  the retrieval request.

          'P=0', will produce a blank column on printouts which
          may be used as space for user comments or notes.

          The same parameter may be requested more than once in a
          retrieval request.

          Complete listings of the STORET parameter definitions
          and codes can be obtained via the computer  as described
          in  Appendix B.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-49

-------
          P must be specified with the programs RET, PUNCH,
          STAND, MEAN,  REG,  MSP,  and PLOT, unless  'PRT=PAR,' is
          specified,  which replaces the printing of data values
          with a station description paragraph.  When not
          specified for programs INVENT,  INV120, and ALLPARM, all
          parameters stored will be retrieved.
EXAMPLE!S)
          Retrieve data on water
          temperature(11),  D0(300),
          pHUOO), ammonia( 610),
          iron(1045),  and coliforms
          (31501).
PGM=RET,PUR?=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=61G
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101
                             WQ-RET
                              4-50

-------
                                                             PARONLY
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword

USE:      This keyword is used to specify that parametric data
          associated with each water quality sample are to be
          printed only when values for certain selected
          parameters are present; it is used in conjunction with
          the P keyword.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

         PARONLY=n,  where n is a whole number from one to
                     ten which represents the number of
                     parameters which must be present  in
                     the sample in order to print data for
                     all parameters specified in the
                     retrieval request.

DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          The value of n can not exceed 10 or be greater than the
          number of P keywords specified within the retrieval
          request.

          It  is important to note that the parameters  to which
          PARONLY refers are those that appear first in the
          string of parameters specified.  For this reason, the
          parameters that are referenced by PARONLY must be
          specified before other parameters.

          This keyword  is used in conjunction with the P keyword.
          It  is positioned after the last P keyword within the
          retrieval request.

          This keyword  is valid with all programs which retrieve
          data except INVENT and INV120.

SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:

          This keyword  is most helpful when used to assure the
          presence of one or more parameter values before
          producing output which will be used for such things as
          establishing a water quality index, or input to a river
          basin model.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-51

-------
EXAMPLE;s;
          Retrieve data only
          when there are values
          for the first three
          parameters (11,300,400
PGM=RET, PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
                                           30*730101
                             WQ-RET
                              4-52

-------
                                                               ?AKU
                                                               PAR?
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords

USE:      These two keywords are used together to convert a
          stored value for a parameter to an equivalent value
          expressed in different units.

KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

          PARU=new-units,       where new-units is a string of up  to
                                eight characters which denotes any
                                valid unit measurement expression.

          PARF=factor,          where factor is the multiplication
                                factor that will properly convert  the
                                parameter value from its stored value
                                to its desired value.

DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          These keywords are valid with all programs which
          retrieve data except  INVENT and INV120.  PARU and PARF
          'should not be used with the MEAN program to compute
          loadings or perform calculations.

          Both keywords must be specified for each parameter
          whose units and values are to be changed for reporting
          purposes.  These keywords do not alter the stored units
          and  values for the parameters.

          STORET assumes that a correct conversion factor has
          been specified.  Consequently, it performs the
          conversion according  to the PARU, PARF instructions
          without any check on  the values specified.

          The  PARU keyword is positioned immediately after the P
          keyword to which it refers, and immediately before  its
          associated PARF keyword.

          The  PARU and PARF keywords may be specified in pairs
          for  any number of parameters within a single retrieval
          request.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-53

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Retrieve raw data and            PGM = RET, PURP = 3C5B/S.JA,
          convert the values for           A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          parameter 1045 (total iron)      P=ll,P=300,P=400,P=61C,
          from ug/1 to mg/1.                P=1045,?ARU=MG/L,
                                           PARF'.QOl,
                                           30=730101,

          Retrieve raw data and            PGM=RET, P(JRP=305B/STA,
          convert parameter 916 from       A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          mg/1 to ug/1.                     PARF=1000,
                             WQ-RET
                               4-54

-------
                                                             ?RV
                                                             ?LV
                                                             PHV
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords
USE
These keywords are used to specify that parametric data
associated with specified water quality samples are to
be printed only when the values for a specific
parameter or parameters within the sample fall within a
specified range.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

          PRV=parameter-code,
          ?LV=low-value,
          PHV=high-value,
                      where parameter-code is one cf
                      the five-digit water quality
                      parameters defined within STORZ7,
                      and specifies the parameter whose
                      values are to be compared with
                      the values specified by PLV and
                      PHV.

                      where low-value and high-value
                      are any numerical value, including
                      a decimal value, between -S99I+7
                      and +899E+7.  PLV establishes che
                      low value of the desired range of
                      values for parameter-code; PHV
                      establishes the high value of the
                      desired range of values for
                      parameter-code.
DEFAULT VALUES:  PHV=+1E+50,
                 PLV=-1E*50,

NOTES ON USAGE:
           If  the  PRV  keyword  is  used  in  a  retrieval,  either,  or
           both, the PLV  and PHV  keywords must  also  be specified.
           A maximum of two sets  of  these keywords may be
           specified in a  retrieval  request.   If  two sets  are
           specified,  then both conditions  must be satisfied
           before  data will be printed.

           The PRV keyword may specify a  parameter other than
           those whose values  are to be printed if the PRV
           parameter's values  lie within  the  specified range.
           (The parameter  keyword-P  is used to  indicate which
           parameters  are  to be printed.)
                              WQ-RET
                               4-55

-------
EXAMPLES;
          To specify a single value" for a" parameter-'-)  set- PLV  and
          PHV equal to the same value.

          These keywords are valid with all retrieval  programs
          which retrieve parametric data, exceot  INVENT  and
          INV120.
          Retrieve parameters 400, 300,    PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
          and 310 when the value for       A=14AGNFS9,3=070009,
          parameter 10 is between 12       PRV=10,PLV=12,PHV=18,
          and 18 degrees, and when the     PRV=30Q,PLV=8,?HV=8,
          value for parameter 300 is 8.    P=400,P=300,P=310,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-56

-------
                                                                 BD
                                                                 ED
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords
USE:
          These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
          values to be retrieved by specifying that data sampled
          before (3D) and/or after (ED) the specified dates are
          to be eliminated from the data retrieved.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

              jyymmdd]
          BD= •' yymm  > ,
              I yy    )
              (yymmdd}
          ED= / yymm  \ ,
              (yy    )
                                values may be specified  in any of
                                the three formats shown, where

                                 yy = last two digits of the
                                      calendar year
                                 mm = two digit numeric  for the
                                      month of the year
                                 dd = two digit numeric  for the
                                      day of the month

                                Leading zeroes must be specified.
DEFAULT VALUES:  BD-010101,
                 ED=991231,
              KEYWORD
                                           VALUE
                                entered
                                                      assumed
                BD
                ED
                                  yy
                                 yymm

                                  yy
                                 yymm
yyOlOl
yymmOl

yy!231
yymm31
                             WQ-RET
                               4-57

-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
          These keywords are valid with all programs which
          retrieve data.

          These keywords apply to all of the parameters selected
          within the retrieval request.

          Either keyword may be specified;  they do not have to be
          specified in pairs.
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve data collected
          on or after July 15,  1972
          Retrieve data collected
          on or before July 15,  1972
          Retrieve data collected
          between April 5,  1966 and
          August 18, 1970.
          Retrieve data collected
          during the entire years of
          1972, 1973 and 1974.
          Retrieve data collected
          between the beginning of
          April 1972 and the end of
          October 1974.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,PURP = 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=720715,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
ED=720715,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=66Q405, ED=7Q0318,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=72,ED=74,

PGM=RET,PQRP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P»11,P-300,P»400,
BD=7204,ED=7410,
          If a date range is specified when no data were sampled,
          the result will be no retrieval output.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-58

-------
                                                                 3T
                                                                 ET
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict the parameter
values to be retrieved to those which were sampled
during a specific range of time during the day.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

          BT=tttt,

          ET=tttt,
                      where tttt is the time of day
                      based on a 24-hour-per-day
                      military time system.  All four
                      digits must be specified; leading
                      zeros must be specified.  BT
                      specifies the beginning time, ET
                      the ending time.
DEFAULT VALUES;
NOTES ON USAGE;
       BT=0000,
       ET=2400,
          These keywords are valid for all programs which
          retrieve data, and apply to all parameters  selected
          within the retrieval request.

          When more than one time period  is  specified in a
          retrieval, the periods must be  specified  in ascending
          order.
          Either  keyword may  be  specified;
          specified  in pairs.
                                 they do not have  to be
                              WQ-RET
                               4-59

-------
EXAMPLE:
          Retrieve data sampled between    PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
          the hours of 8:00 am to 11:00    A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          am, and between 3:00 pm and      P=ll,P=300,P=400,
          7:30 pm.                         BD=720715,
                                           BT=0800,ET=1100,
                                           BT=1500,ET=19'30,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-60

-------
                                                                 BG
                                                                 EG
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords
USE:
These keywords are used to restrict retrievals to
parameter values sampled during specific months and
days of each year.  Samples with dates before and/or
after the specified date groupings will be eliminated
from the retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
          BG=mmdd,   where mm is the two digit numeric for the
                     month of the year, and dd is the two digit
          EG=mmdd,   numeric for the day of the month.   (yy  for
                     year is not an option with these keywords.)
                     Leading zeroes must be specified, and both
                     mm and dd must be specified for each keyword.
                     BG specifies the beginning of the date  group,
                     EG specifies the end of the date group.
DEFAULT VALUES:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          These keywords are valid for all programs which
          retrieve data.

          If used within a retrieval, both keywords must be
          specified.

          When more  than one date group  is specified,  the groups
          must be specified in ascending date order.   A date
          group may  span one or more months, or one or more days.

          BG and EG  combinations may be  specified a maximum of
          three times  in a retrieval.

          If BG and  EG  are not used, no  groupings will result;
          data retrieved will be for periods indicated by BD
          and/or ED, or for the period of record, if BD and/or  ED
          are not used.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
          This keyword  is  helpful with  season dependent
          retrievals where one or more  seasons  (or sets of
          months)  are needed.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-61

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve data that'exists        PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
          for the month of January         A=14AGNFS9,S=070C09,
          and for the last four            P=300,P=400,
          months of all years between :     30=660101,ED=75123i,
          1966 and 1975.                   BG=0101,EG=0131,
                                           BG=Q901,EG=1231,
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
          Date groups may not overlap (e.g., BG=0201, EG=0431,
          BG=0301, EG=0631, is invalid), nor may they span the
          end of a year (e.g., BG=1101,  EG=0131, is  invalid, but
          BG-1101, EG-1231, BG=0101, EG=0131, is valid).
                             WQ-RET
                              4-62

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword

USE:      At data storage time, users may associate one of
          several remark codes with data values stored, for the
          purpose of providing clarifying information on the
          circumstances surrounding the sampling or analysis
          technique.  The R keyword is used to restrict the
          retrieval of parameters to those values stored with
          selected remark codes.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

                 EPA-remark-codes
                     ALL
                     OFF
                     *

             where EPA-remark-codes is a string of one or more of
             the following valid EPA remark codes:

                     A  Value  reported is mean of two or more
                        determinations.
                     B  Results based upon colony counts outside
                        the acceptable range.
                     C  Calculated.
                     D  Indicates field measurement.
                     E  Indicates extra samples taken at
                        composite stations.
                     F  In the case of species, F indicates female
                        sex.
                     G  Value  reported is maximum of two or more
                        determinations.
                     H  Value  based on field  kit determination;
                        results may not be accurate.
                     J  Estimated value; value not accurate.
                     K  Actual value is known to be less than  value
                        given.
                     L  Actual value is known to be greater than
                        value  given.
                     M  Presence of material  verified but not
                        quantified.  In the case of temperature
                        or oxygen reduction potential, M indicates
                        a negative value.  In the case of species,
                        M indicates male sex.
                     N  Presumptive evidence  of presence of
                        material.
                     0  Sampled, but analysis lost.
                     S  Laboratory test.


                             WQ-RET
                               4-63

-------
                     T  Value reported is less than criteria of
                        detection.
                     U  Indicates material  was analyzed for but
                        not detected.   In the case of species, U
                        indicates undetermined sex.
                     W  Value observed is less than lowest value
                        reportable under "T" code.

          ALL,        retrieves all data for which a non-blank
                     remark code is stored.  This value is
                     equivalent to specifying all of the above
                     alphabetic EPA remark  codes.

          OFF,        disables remark code selection restrictions
                     until superceded by a  subsequent R keyword
                     within the retrieval request.  All values
                     are retrieved regardless of remark code stored

          *,          retrieves only data having no remark codes
                     stored.
DEFAULT VALUE:   R=OFF,

NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword is valid for all raw data retrievals and
          inventory programs except ALLPARM.

          The R keyword may be specified as many times as needed
          in each retrieval, and applies to all parameters which
          follow it within the retrieval request,  until
          superceded by a subsequent R keyword.

          Data owned by the U.S. Geological Survey (STORET agency
          code 112WRD) can of course be similarly restricted via
          the R keyword in the retrieval.   However, some remark
          codes may mean different things than the EPA codes.

          Appendix 6 contains a list of the remark codes used by
          USGS (A=112WRD,).  Most of the commonly used codes (J,
          K,.L, M) have the same meaning for both agencies.  Some
          codes (such as F, G, X, and Y) have different meanings.
          Users are cautioned against use of these codes as
          retrieval restrictors in retrievals involving a mix of
          agencies which include USGS.  Refer to the descriptions
          of the U and NOTU keywords for ways of controlling
          inclusion of USGS data in vour retrieval.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-64

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve only those
          values of parameters 11
          and 1045 which have remark
          codes of K or L.  Retrieve
          all values of parameters
          300 and 400.

          Retrieve data stored for
          parameters 11 and 610 only
          if no remark codes have been
          stored with the values.
PGM=RET,?URP=305B/STA,
A=14AGN'FS9,5 = 070009,
R=KL,Pall,?=1045,
R=OFF,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,?URP=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70Q09,
R=*,P=11,P=610,
BD=7301C1,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-65

-------
                                                                 UD
                                                                 LD
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keywords
USE:
One
the values that can be stored with sampling data
          is the depth at which the sample was taken.  The UD and
          LD keywords are "used to restrict the parametric values
          to be retrieved to those sampled above, below, or
          between specified depths.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES
          UD=upper-depth,
          LD=lower-depth,
               where uppar-depth is any whole
               number between zero and 999999
               specifying the upper sample depth
               limitation.  Data sampled at
               depths closer to the surface
               (values numerically less than the
               upper-depth value) will not be
               retrieved.

               where lower-depth is any whole
               number between zero and 999999
               specifying the lower sample depth
               limitation.  Data sampled at
               depths closer to the bottom
               (values numerically greater than
               the lower-depth value) will not
               be retrieved.

               Leading zeroes need not be
               specified for either UD or LD.
               Values are assumed to be in feet
               unless the D keyword is specified,
               (D=M specifies depth in meters.)
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
UD=0,
LD=999999,
          These keywords are valid with all programs which
          retrieve data.

          Either keyword may be specified; they do not have  to be
          specified  in pairs.

          If UD and/or LD are specified, samples which are not
          stored with depth values are disregarded.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-67

-------
          Each keyword may be specified once and if specified,
          applies to data for all parameters selected within the
          retrieval request.   If either is specified more than
          once,  only the last-specified value will be valid.

          The units associated with the values for UD and LD are
          assumed to be feet  unless the 'D=M,' instruction is
          specified to request a conversion from feet to meters.

          Appendix E contains a list of location codes which may
          be stored in the sample depth fiel-d to denote inplant
          sampling for municipal or industrial stations.
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve samples between 5
          and 20 feet only.
          Retrieve all samples from a
          depth of 5 feet and below.
          Retrieve all samples taken
          from a depth of 20 feet and
          above.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=300,
UD=5,LD=20,
BD=730101,

PGM=RET,PURP=305S/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=300,
UD=5,
BD=730101,

PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=07C009,
P=300,
LD=20,
BD=730101,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-.6 8

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
          This keyword is used to specify the units associated
          with sample depths.
USE:


KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
          D= IF (  ,   where
              Mj
                     D=F, specifies that depths are to be printed
                          in feet.

                     D=M, specifies that depths are to be printed
                          in meters.
DEFAULT VALUE: D=F,

NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
          data except INVENT and INV120.

          This keyword may be specified only once within a single
          retrieval request and applies to all parameters
          retrieved.  If specified more than once, only the  last
          specified value will be valid.

          Depth is stored in the WQF in feet, with values rounded
          to the nearest whole foot.  Data entered in meters  is
          converted to feet before storing.  Data can be
          retrieved in feet or in the nearest tenth of a meter.
          This can result in an inconsistency when depth
          information in meters is input to STORET, and is then
          retrieved with D=M specified.  Users should be aware of
          this potential error, as illustrated in the following
          example:

          Assume a sample depth of 0.5 meter is input.  This
          value is converted by STORET to feet (1.64 feet) and
          stored to the nearest whole foot (2 feet).  If this
          depth is retrieved in meters (D=M), the stored value (2
          feet) is converted to meters (0.61 meter) and printed
          out to the nearest tenth of a meter (0.6 meter).
                             WQ-RET
                              4-69

-------
EXAMPLE(S:
          Retrieve data and print
          depth information in
          meters rather than in feet,
PGM--RET", PURP= 30'SB/STA,
A=14AGN?S9,5=070009,
P=11,P=30C,P=400,?=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
D=M,



JATt

7J/01.-01
J /OS/1;
' /Je/04
: / .j ; / 3 5
7 • ; ^ / .. j
: o •» .' : i
• , i ;/ ;.„'
; ' •; ; ,. ; 1}
' / j b .• ! 2
* ' Jo/ Zb
7 .' ij ; ,.' \ 9
: /Od/27
:5/05/16
' }/ Oi/ 2*
75/06/11
:S/04/3«
75,07/02
75/07/10
75/07/15
Ti/07/22
7$, '03.' 2 "
75/09/24
7Vl'J/02
: j/ .')/C7
75/iu/U
; v uv : i
.'5/11/04
75/04/21
7&, -OS/Id


;»/o7/u



:« OCVTH
AY *£7iP.
15
!0
30
lu
i j
^ ^
•: d

JO
25 0 : . 1
10 32.1
jo ;:.!
so
15
0 '30 03.0
9 30
1 00 32. !
0 00
0 40
0 IS
a ic 02.7
•) ja
0 jO
I 00 01.5
0 1C
1 00 01.5
0 00
0 JO
0 15
0 JO 06.7
3 10
1 00


00011
4A7ES
F'AriN
! J .
49 .
6J.
63 .
^"J
1 1 .


lO
63
73.
3 7 .
55.
60 .
6 1
72
73
73
' 1
• 6
66
5J
50
Si.
4 7 .
43
43
44
6J
57
59
71





0
.3
0
5

;
J

i
0
0
0
0
0
•J
0
0
0
0
0
0
rj
0
0
0
•3
0
0
0
0
0
u


00)00 00400 00610
00 ?» SrtJ-H,
^G/L 5U IG/l
11 i 6.50
10 6 i.>0
3 7 6.50
i 2 *. 50
i 1 !. jj
j 4 6 . 00
: ! * 3 . • o
132 6 . ; 0
1 ' 'j . 7 '3
j * 6 . 60
7 a 6.50
6 . 6u
10.2 6.00
6.00
3.3 7.20
6.42
7.4 6.70
6.40
6.00
6.00
J.I 6. 70
6.00
5. 70
9.7 6 . 00
6.00
10.6 6.5C
6.00
11.4 6.00 ) OSOK
9.7 6. 60 0 3SOK
9.7 6.60 0 3SO«
3.4 6. 30 0 OSOK
3.4 6.30 0 050
j 70009 LONG:.
46 14 11. : 039 21 43.0 1
LA.<£ 5UP£P[Ot> 070793
14AC.N? S9
300'3 1ETS9 ;€?TH .".AJS 00
31045 11501
i ?cs ror :OL:
UG/L 100*1
50 10
140 100
1500
140 13
5.'
J'30
CiO :.
::-3 .30
140 13
23J )'3J
620 10
120















70
100
100
so*
90
                              WQ-RET
                               4-70

-------
                                                                30T
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify whether bottom (mud)
samples are to be excluded or included in the data
retrieved.  (This keyword refers only to samples
explicitly stored as bottom (mud) samples, and does not
necessarily refer to the lowest sample depth stored.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES
          BOT=
                W
           where
           BOT=B,
                            specifies that only bottom samples
                            are to be retrieved.  All other
                            values will be excluded.
                     BOT=W, specifies that bottom samples are  to
                            be excluded from the data retrieved.
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES .ON USAGE:
          This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
          data except INVENT and  INV120.

          Only one BOT keyword may be specified  in a single
          retrieval request and applies to all parameters
          retrieved.  If more than one are specified, only the
          last-specified value will be valid.
           If BOT  is not specified,
           samples are retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S)
          Retrieve
          samples.
         only bottom
                         then both bottom and water
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
30=730101,
30T=B,
                              WQ-RET
                               4-71

-------
                                                              DSROC
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify whether the data
retrieved is to include only regular (grab) samples or
only composite samples.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
          DSROC=
             where
                       DSROC=1,
                       DSROC=2
                      specifies that data values from
                      regular (grab) samples are to be
                      retrieved.  Data from composite
                      samples are to be excluded.

                      specifies that data values from
                      composite samples are to be
                      retrieved.  Data from regular
                      (grab) samples are to be excluded
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword
          data.
             is valid for all programs which, retrieve
          Only one DSROC keyword may be specified within a single
          retrieval request and it applies to all samples.   If
          more than one are specified, only the  last-specified
          keyword will be valid.

          If only specific composite value types are of interest,
          use the ANC keyword.  DSROC retrieves  or excludes  all
          values stored as composites.

          If DSROC is not specified within a retrieval request,
          then both regular (grab) and composite sample data will
          be retrieved.
EXAMPLE(S:
          Retrieve data only from
          composite samples.
                                 PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
                                 A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
                                 P=11,P=30Q,P=400,
                                 BD=730101,
                                 DSROC*2,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-73

-------
                                                                 ANC
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword

USE:      When storing data resulting from sophisticated
          composite samples, certain calculated values associated
          with the sample also can be stored.  This keyword  is
          used to specify the types of composite values to be
          retrieved.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

       ANC=values,   where values is a string of one or more of  the
                     following characters which invoke the functions
                     described:

                     A  specifies that the computed average  values
                        are to be retrieved

                     H  specifies that the maximum values are  to
                        be retrieved

                     L  specifies that the minimum values are  to
                        be retrieved

                     *5  specifies that the measurement taken after
                        the compositing process has been completed
                        is to be retrieved

                I or N  specifies that the number of samples (that
                        comprise the composite) is to be retrieved

DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword  is valid for all programs which retrieve
          data.

          Values  for the  above ANC values must have been stored
          for  the composite.  STORET will not compute them as  a
          result  of this  keyword being specified.

          If ANC  is not specified, then all  values stored for
          composite samples will be printed.

          If the  data to  be retrieved  includes any composite
          value types,  i.e. A, H, and  #, ANC should be used  to
          specify which of  the values  are to be considered for
          calculations  and  analyses.


                             WQ-RET
                              4-75

-------
EXAMPLE(S:
          Retrieve only average
          values for composite
          samples.
          Retrieve high and low
          values for composite
          samples.
PGM=RET,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD«73C101,
ANC=A,

PGM-RZT,PURP-305B/STA
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P-11,P-300,P»400,
BD-730101,
ANC=HL,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-76

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
USE:
          When storing data into the WQF, users have the option
          of protecting, or locking, the data from retrieval by
          others for the purpose of checking the validty of the
          data before releasing it.  This keyword is used to
          free, or unlock, the locked data for retrieval.  All
          WQF data remains protected for storage purposes by
          users other than the owner of  the data.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE
          UK=unlocking-key,   where unlocking-key  is the one-to-
                              where unlocking-key is the one-tc
                              eight alphanumeric unlocking key
                              for the agency responsible for
                              storing the data.
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword
          data.
                        is valid for all programs which retrieve
          This keyword can be used only once within a retrieval
          request.   If specified more than once, only the .last-
          specified  value will be valid.   If the retrieval
          involves two or more agencies who have stations with
          locked data, multiple retrievals must be run  in order
          to retrieve all locked data of  interest.

          Data is  locked at sample level,  not station level.
          Therefore  users can have part of their data locked, and
          part unlocked.

          When a retrieval encounters locked data, a diagnostic
          message  indicating the agency code, station number  and
          unlocking  date for the locked data is printed.

          Users must obtain unlocking keys directly from the
          respective agency.  STORET User  Assistance does not
          give out this  information.  Users can reference the
          STORET help data set named AGENCODE to  identify an
          individual to  contact within an  agency of interest.

          UK is usually  used in conjunction with  the A  or U
          station  identification keywords.  However, it can  also
          be used  with other station  identification keywords.
                              WQ-RET
                               4-77

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve data including
          values locked with an
          associated locking code of
          12345678.
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,PUR?=3053/STA,
A=UAGNFS9, 5 = 070009,
P=11,P=300,?=400,
BD=73C101,
UK=12345673,
          Failure to specify an unlocking key when the data are
          locked, or failure to specify an unlocking key
          correctly via the UK keyword, will result in no data.
                             WQ-RET
                              4-78

-------
                                                                 AGGR
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
USE:
The AGGR keyword is used to combine  (or aggregate) data
retrieved from a group of stations into a single
station according to the geographical area specified
with the AGGR keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
            AGGR =
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
/ STATE
 COUNTY
 MAJORBASIN
 MINORSAS IN
 SUBBASIN
 CELLaaaaaXbbbbb
 ALL
                                where the value  specifies
                                the geographical  area  into
                                which the retrieved  data
                                are to be aggregated.
          This keyword  is valid
          data.
                      for all programs which  retrieve
          Cells are.-used -to~.def Ln.e an. -ar_ea..specif ie.d i.n .seconds
          of  latitude  (aaaaa)  by  seconds  of  longitude  (bbbbb).
          The maximum  area which  may be specified  by the  CELL...
          value is approximately  27 degrees  latitude by  27
          degrees longitude  (99999 seconds high,  99999 seconds
          wide).  Cells are  computed from south  to  north,
          beginning  at the southeastern-most  point  of  the
          retrieval  area, proceeding westerly.   Leading  zeros of
          aaaaa and  bbbbb values  need  not be  specified.

          Specifying  'AGGR=ALL,'  aggregates  all  parametric  data
          for all stations retrieved as if the data were  from a
          single station.
EXAMPLE( S) :
          Retrieve  all  stations  in
          Michigan  and  print  the
          requested data  in area
          aggregates whose
          dimensions are  15 minutes
          latitude  by 30  minutes
          longitude.
                                  PGM=INVENT,PURP-305B/STA,
                                  STC=26,
                                  SP,
                                  AGGR=CELL900X1800,
                              WQ-RET
                               4-79

-------
Retrieve all stations in
Michigan and print the
requested data in county
aggregates.
PGM=INVENT,PURP = 3 0 5B/STA,
STC=26,
SP,
AGGR=COUNTY,

<1959
1953
1959
1960
1961
1962
196)
1964
1965
1966
1967
1963
1969
1970
1971
1972
197)
1974
1975
1976
1977
TOTAL

STA SEC
0
I
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
4
i)
0
0
0
)
1)
2
9
0
0
19

STA END
3
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
1
0
2
3
0
2
3
10
0
3
19
26007
COUNTY
OF 08S 1 OF SAflPLE
0 0
20 )
61 12
60 11
19 3
19 10
531 43
199 19
263 26
210 27
17] 37
456 102
1107 »0
1078 94
959 19
1044 95
595 15
1127 16
6)5 22
782 26
0 3
199) 9)4
PARAMETER NUKgcR
00010
00020
900)1
00015
000)6
00060
00070
00076
00077
30090
00095
00)00
00)01
S0160
60400
60600
70100
70101
70)02
70101
rfATCR
AIR
CLOUD
tf[H3
HIMO
STREAK
rjR»
TtJRB
7RAISP
COLOR
c»oucTvr
00
30
ALCAE
OIATONS
3IATOHS
RES I DUB
DISS SOL
OISS SOL
DISS SOL
TEWP
TENP
COVER
VELOCITY
OID.rROM
FLOW
JISK
TRSIDKTfl
5ECCHI
PT-C3
AT 25C

SATUR
DESX1DS
CENTRIC
PENMATE
OISS-190
SUN
TONS/DAY
TONS PE1
CENT
CENT
PERCENT
NPM
HORTfl-O
CFS
JTO
HACH FTU
meats
UNITS
"tcaonHO
NG/L
PERCENT
TOT /*l
/NL
/*L
C HG/L


ACRZ-rr
6)9
)17
3)8
133
)21
252
39
64
1
12
27]
285
44
I
11
12
11
)
1
2









•0 <.S <) >•)
3000
0003
0030
0033
0000
0000
3300
0000
0010
0900
0101
0000
3003
0020
0003
0 .1 0 5
0 10 0 3
02)7
3003
003)
0000
0 14 6 19 !
Z6007 CCUNTY
NBAN
15.00)9
22.1987
51.6509
7.15285
199.67)
192.242
9.49««)
.60731
4.0000
.3)))]
45.194
.79959
4.6476
18.0000
94.7271
195.250
762.191
146.11)
726.000
.215000
VARIANCE
57.6400
21.3990
1542.3)
22.0)55
7551.42
344104
14)9.46
12.2)60

61.7379
M16.15
1.12257
45.1710

6241.82
100820
176)27
1680.17

.011250
STAN OEV
7.59210
4.67347
)9.2799
4.69420
36.9)92
518.110
17.9402
1.49799

7.9867]
36.1182
1.95514
6.72108

79.0052
117.521
611.455
40.1924

.106066
COB? VAJt
.50(009
.210754
.760468
.597770
.458)64
.6669)5
).995U
.759145

.904153
.249471
.191512
.079401

.3)4029
.30)141
.804867
.246447

.151144
3TANO BR
.300)39
.262761
2.1)649
.257240
4.35247
37.0600
4.02166
.4)7249

2.)0557
5.21211
.11581!
1.01)24

21.3210
91 . 5605
134.164
21.6669

.075000
«A-:NOH
29.0000
n.ogoo
100.000
30.0000
150.000
J970.00
360.000
18.0000
34 .0000
21.0000
955.000
15 . 6000
17 . 7700
IB .0000
252.300
995.000
2067.00
190.300
726.000
.110000
,;,,„„„
.000000
11.0000
.000000
.000000
20.C330
14.3000
1 .00000
1.30000
14.0000
.900000
12J.OOO
5.20000
65.7500
19.0000
). 00000
24.9000
123.000
119.900
726.000
.160000
BBS OAT;
60/ov::
59/06/13
69/06' 13
69/OS/19
69/06/19
a]/0]/12
49/01/22
•4/06/19
67/04/20
• 0/07. '1!
60/0 VI 1
61/31/12
6)/01/12
S9/07/16
61/06/13
69/06/19
60/07/11
74/03/29
67/04/0]
60/07/11
SNO 3ATE
76' 11/02
7)/OV09
11/11/19
71/07/39
72/09/1)
76'09/U
74/09/13
76/11/92
i 7/04/20
76/13/11
J6/11/02
76/11/32
65/12/21
69/9T''6
69/03/27
69/03/2)
74/09/13
74/09/1)
67/04/0)
57/04/0)
                    WQ-RET
                     4-80

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to control what is to be printed
from a retrieval.   Output options include combinations
of the station description paragraph and the raw data.
Station header information always prints.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
  PRT =
          PRT=PAR,
          PRT=DATA,
          PRT=BOTH,
          PRT=NO,
           the PRT keyword may be assigned any one of
           the following values, as follows:
           specifies that only the station description
           paragraph is to be printed.  Stored or
           calculated parametric data values will
           not print.

           specifies that only the stored parametric
           data values are to be printed.

           specifies that both stored parametric data
           values (and calculated values, if applicable)
           and the station description paragraph are co
           be printed.

           specifies that the stored parametric data
           values used for the analysis are not to be
           printed.  Calculated data values and station
           header information will be printed.
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
      PRT=DATA,
      PRT=NO,
For programs RET and ALLPARM.
For all programs but RET and
ALLPARM.
          This keyword  is valid for  all programs which  retrieve
          data except INVENT and  INV120.

          This keyword  may be  used only once  in any  retrieval
          request.   If  specified  more  than once, only the  last-
          specified  value will be valid.

          The WQF  analysis programs  MEAN, STAND, PLOT,  REG,  and
          MSP automatically suppress the printing of data  values
          used for analysis.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-83

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Print the station                PGM=RET,PURP=30SB/STA,
          description paragraph along      A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          with the station header          P=ll,P=300,P=400,
          information and the data.        BD=73G101,
                                           PRT=BOTH,

          Print calculated values          PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
          output by the MEAN program,      A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
          but do not print stored      '    P=ll,P=300,P=400,P=610,
          parametric data values.          P=1045,P=31501,
                                           BD=730101,
                                           PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-84

-------
                                                              SHIFT,
CLASSIFICATION:  Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to shift a retrieval's station
header information from the upper right hand corner of
each page to the upper left hand corner of each page.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:

          SHIFT,     There is no value associated with this kevword
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
          data except INVENT and INV120.

          If SHIFT and HEAD are both used in a single retrieval,
          care must be exercised in the specification of the HEAD
          keyword character strings so that the station header
          information (moved by SHIFT) does not override the
          report identification information (specified by HEAD).
          See further discussion under the HEAD keyword
          description.

SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:

          Depending upon the information retrieved, the station
          header information is often the only information on the
          right half of the retrieval output.  Shifting of this
          header information will allow the output to be printed
          on narrower paper, or to be trimmed for easier
          handling.
EXAMPLE(S)
          Print the station
          header  information  in
          the upper left hand
          corner  of each page
          rather  than  in the
          upper right  hand corner.
                                 PGM=RET,PURP=305/STA,
                                 A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
                                 P=11,P=300,P=400,
                                 BD=730101,
                                 SHIFT,
                             WQ-RET
                               4-85

-------
                                                               HEAD
CLASSIFICATION:  Print Control Keyword
USE;
This keyword is used to specify user-entered report
identification information which is to be printed at
the top of each page of a retrieval.  This information
is in addition to the station header information, and
optionally the station description paragraph, and is an
ideal way for users to title their retrievals.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
          HEAD*text,
                      where text is a string of from
                      one to 66 alphanumeric
                      characters, including blanks,
                      which will be printed at top of
                      each page of the retrieval  in t.h<
                      positions designated by the user
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword
          data.
             is valid for all programs which retrieve
          The specified character strings may not contain any
          embedded commas, but a comma must  follow  each  line of
          text.

          Up to  five HEAD  keywords  can be specified in a single
          retrieval request  for a total of five  lines of report
          heading  information.

          Care should be exercised  when HEAD and SHIFT are  used
          in the same retrieval request.  If the SHIFT keyword
          which  shifts the station  header information to the left
          corner of each page  is specified along with the HEAD
          keyword  in a retrieval, 35  blanks  must be left at the
          beginning of each  value of  the HEAD keyword so that the
          report
          is not
        identification  information  (specified by HEAD!
        overriden by the station header  information.
          When  used with  the  LOC  program,  the  text  for  the  HEAD
          keyword  may  not  exceed  35  characters.
                              WQ-RET
                               4-87

-------
EXAMPLES!
          Print the following
          two lines at the top
          of each page of output:
          DATA COLLECTED
          SINCE 1973
SOME COMMON ERRORS:
PGM=RET,. PURP= 30 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400/
BD-730101,
HEAD*DATA COLLECTED,
HEAD=SINCE 1973,
          When coding a lengthy value for a HEAD keyword,  it  is
          very easy to overlook placing a comma at the end of  the
          instruction.  The HEAD keyword is like all other
          keywords in this STORET syntax requirement.
                             WQ-RET
                               4-88

-------
                                                               PRMI
CLASSIFICATION:  Print Control Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to specify that RMI coding (see
the description in this section on the RMI station
selector keyword)  is to appear as an additional line of
station header information.  (All other coding stored
with a station prints automatically.)
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
          PRMI,
           There is no value associated with this
           keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword is valid for all programs which retrieve
          data.

          Programs  INVENT, INV120, and INDEX print RMI
          automatically.  The keyword must also be used with
          mileage-linear retrievals using the Multiple Station
          Plot (MSP) program (see Section 7).

          The storing of RMI information with a station is
          optional.  Obviously, RMI values have to have been
          stored  in order for this keyword to have validity.
EXAMPLE(S!
          Print  the RMI  information
          for the station along with
          the station header and data.
                                 PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
                                 A=1115D050,5=255420,
                                 P=10,P=30C,P=400,
                                 PRMI,
                             WQ-RET
                              4-89

-------
SECTION 6:  BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS.
            AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS

    Program Name     Primary Program Function

     INVENT          provides summary information on all parameters
                   .  sampled at requested stations (132 character line:
     INV120          provides summary information on all parameters
                     sampled at requested stations (120 character line/
     RET             list sample values for selected parameters
     ALLPARM         list sample values for all parameters
     MEAN            perform statistical calculations on parametric data
     PLOT            plot parametric data as a function of time
     LOC             plot locations of stations within a geographic area
     STAND           compare stored parameter values with parameter
                     standards
     INDEX           list station identification information
     STA             list primary and secondary station codes
     PUNCH           punch selected WQF data onto 80-column cards

The following pages contain a detailed discussion of each of
these programs, including a statement on the program's use, a
summary of the keywords that are special or unique to the
respective program, and sample printouts which illustrate the
printed output of the program.  Immediately after each program
description are the detailed descriptions for the keywords
specific  to the program.

A summary of the keywords described in this section, listed by
the program with which they are associated, follows.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-1

-------
INVENT
INV120
  PSA
  S?

RET
  DR
BASIC RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS AND THEIR SPECIAL KEYWORDS

                                 LOC
                                   SCALE
                                   NOCOUN
                                   NOPOLPLT
                                   TAGS,STREAMS,CLR
ALLPARM
  NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS

MEAN
  LV,HV
  DG
  SORT
  BASE,VD
  SF
  LOAD
  LOG
  DM
  LL1,LH1,LL2,LH2
  CALCULATION OF DISSOLVED
    OXYGEN SATURATION
  CALCULATION OF UN-IONIZED
    AMMONIA

PLOT
  FACT,SYM
  SC
  LOAD
  LOG
  NOPLOT
  LV,HV
                                 STAND
                                   LV,HV
                                   PSI,PSA,PSO,PVS
                                   TS

                                 INDEX
                                   NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS

                                 STA
                                   NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS

                                 PUNCH
                                   NO SPECIAL KEYWORDS
                             WQ-RET
                               6-2

-------
                                                      PGM=INVENT,
                                                      PGM=iNV12Q,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The function of these two programs is to produce
          ^summary listings about all parameters that have beer,
          "sampled at the selected stations.  Information listed
          for each parameter includes the number of observations
          and its period of record, as well as several
          statistical expressions of the data.  The programs also
          produce the same summary  information for selected
          parameters.  INVENT utilizes a 132-character print
          line/ INV120 excludes two colu.-r.s of statistical data
          (the coefficient of variance and the standard error) so
          that the  listing can print on a 120-character line.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All station selection keywords described in Section  4
          are valid with these programs.  Data selection keywords
          valid with INVENT and INV120 are ?, 3D, ED, 3G, EG,  ET,
          BT, R, AGGR, UD, LD, UK,  ANC, and DSROC.  The or.iy
          valid print control keyword is HEAD.  The keywords
          SELECT and NOSELECT described in Section 5 are valid.

SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:

          These programs provide excellent summary information
          for users who wish to review the coverage for their  own
          network,  or who wish to review monitoring activities in
          other geographical areas.
                             WQ-RET
                                6-5

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:

          EXAMPLE  1
          Retrieve  an  inventory
          for station  070009
          of agency 14AGNFS9.
PGM=INVENT,PURP=3C53/STA,
A=L4AGNFS9,5=070009,

          .*NCNE3E
                                     1?) 26.3513 :.]*«<
                                     .07 a i . 3 ] 5 5 .ft 1j i
                                     i'2 n:.:3j i.4»;i
           EXAMPLE 2

           Retrieve an inventory
           for  station 070009 of
           agency 14AGNFS9 but limit
           print  to 120 characters.
PGM=INV120,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=0700C9,

T.H





4

). i«r
K. »4
' ;•• •
. . i« 3
•ti^'.;- ji.a.'-s i...-::: •::..:. 3
. ><;}•; 
-------
                                                         PSA,    I

                                                     PGM=INVENT,!
                                                     PGM=INV12C,I
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The PSA keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to print the station.header
information for all stations retrieved whether or not
they contain any data either for the parameter codes
specified or for the stations (if all parameters are
desired) in the retrieval request.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          PSA,
           There is no value associated with this
           keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          If not specified, station header information will not
          print for stations which do not contain data.
EXAMPLE(S;
          Print station header
          information even if data
          for selected parameters
          are not present.
                                 PGM-INVENT,PURP-305B/STA,
                                 A=14AGNFS9,B=P,5=070001,
                                 S=070009,
                                 P=ll,P=300/P=4GO,P=6iO,
                                 BD-730101,
                                 PSA,
                             WQ-RET
                                6-7

-------
                                                          s?,     I

                                                      ?GM=INVENT,!
                                                      ?GM=INV12G,,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The SP keyword may be used with either the INVENT or
INV120 retrieval programs to suppress printing of
individual station summaries.  It produces a summary oi
the information for all stations retrieved as if the
data came from a single station.  It also produces a
summary page showing parameter coverage.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          SP,
           There is no value associated with this
           keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          If not used, a summary for  individual stations as well
          as a summary which includes all stations will be
          printed.  If the AGGR keyword  is used with SP,
          summaries will print for each  aggregate.
                             WQ-RET
                                6-9

-------
EXAMPLES
          Retrieve a cumulative
          inventory of all stations
          specified and a summary
          of parameter coverage.  •
PGM=INVENT,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,B=?,S=070C01,
5=070009,30=730101,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,SP,
                                  (T
                           c
                          110
                          Do
"SAN
«*.*54«
* . 5 ; S J 3
.053241
•>='• 33
.3311)34 .Oi;a
*•'*': 4 4 i •"> i
s
4
^
^ :

:39Z: .:j*3)l ;5.*000 *.
45:si . ;om!i .jjoooa .:
i\l-t, [*•'', 'il '•'•''"; ':'
'"j'L
•-1 }•' :
. ,.
;.].']•
!"•!!*•] T6":-'T
i ,•'.•:! ••;•::•:
: • '. T ' ' " > • - ' '.
' • ' •' ' 4 ^ - '
The following correspond to the circled numbers on the output.

          1)  The gross table was generated via the SP keyword.
              This portion of the INVENT output is the standard
              statistical summary provided by this program.
          2)  The number of stations initially stored during  the
             .year.
          3)  The number of stations deleted during the year.
          4)  The total number of observations made at all stations
              during the year.
          5)  The total number of samples taken at all stations
              during the year.
          6)  The life  (period-of-record) of the stations deleted
              during the year.

This  INVENT output shows that stations within the specified  range
were  not established until 1973 during which time 5 stations  were
established.  In 1974,  one of these 5 stations was deleted,  and
another station was established.  The remaining 5 stations were
deleted in 1976.  Thus  4 stations had a life (period-of-record;
of at  least 3 years, while 2 stations were deleted in less than  3
years.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-10

-------
                                                        ?GM=RET,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The RET program is usually used to obtain tabular
          listings of actual sample values, i.e., raw data values
          which have not been manipulated in any way by the WQF
          analysis programs.  These listings show the sampling
          dates, sampling times, depths, and values of requested
          parameters.  Up to 50 parameters can be specified;
          values for ten parameters will be printed per pace.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
          valid with the RET program.  The parameter code keyword
          (P) should be omitted if the keyword 'PRT=PAR,' is
          entered for printing of station descriptive paragraphs.

          The default for the PRT keyword with program RET is
          DATA.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-13

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
          Retrieve data on samples
          taken since January 1, 1973
          at station 070009, agency
          14AGNFS9.  The parameters to
          be retrieved are water
          temperature(11), DO(300),
          pHUOO), ammonia( 610) ,
          iron(1045), and coliforms
          (31501) .
PGM-RET,PURP=3053/STA,
A«14AGNFS9,S-070009,
P-11/P-300,P«400/P»610,
P-1045,P-31501,
BD-730101,










































*

DATS
-- 3- }fl
re
3 . _ i /
3 ' *\t
•£
, 1 2,'
/05/
/ ) a /
/•Jo/
/U7/
• Utf/
5 .' „• 5 /
5' J5/
5/CS/
5/0 o/
5/07.'
5/07,'
/07,'
/o:/
/ Jd/
,'Ot/
,10'
/ 1 0 /
/ i'j/
/ 1 o/
5-' 11,'
s/04/
9/05/

4/'Ja/
o/07/




^




>























]
i

0
1




?/UA«£
000
:*-i QE?:H ^A?£
Or 7E*
Ar F£2T TAH
q : $ j
! -o =
i ;• ;
V 10 1

•> JO i
i !5 J007 ,
•a 10 J007 7
v !U JU07 ,
'.' 50 5
U 1 5 a
0 JO .,010 •>
•i Ou 7
1 00 0005 7
w JO 7
0 10 7
0 15 7
B !0 J009 i
•4 J'J 5
J 00 5
1 .00 JOC5 5
0 Jo *
1 00 0005 '
u JO >
0 JO 4
0 15 4
0 ij ;022 5
3 13 i
1 JO 7





; jOi:j ;o
30 ?

"•j.'L 3
.0 1 ) . 3
1 ;;:;
.0 1.1
. J I J . *
. o ;o.:
. ': 1.7
.0 d . 4
.0 7.4
, -j
.0 10.2
, (j
.0 J.8
.0
.0 7.,
.0
. 0
. -j
. •:• J.I
.0
.0
.0 •>. 7
.0
.0 1C.S
J. J
» . -0 11.1
i.O 9.7
'.0 )-7
S.O J.4
J.O i.4
170001 LONC'L
' « i 4 si.; : j v ;: " • . : :
U'-NG LAKE i* " r i -ATtPs-'iir
26053 T-.-ISA.I
UA '-4]-''^* J°N 3ll/i?
01, JOSIO 01045 1150
srij-N i ??s *c? re
TCTAL Tt.TOT -FI-iN
.•*G/i. j'j/L /lOO.1^
. 50 JO
.50 1J.J
0, * i
. : 0 240
.:J 120 1
.70 140
.60 230 ) 0
.50 420 0
. 40 1 20
.00
.00
.20
. 1 2
. 70
.10
. :«
. JO
. ;o
. J'J
. 70
5.00
1.00
s. ;0
1.03
4.00 0.050K 7:
j.50 C.050K 100
5. SO O.J50K 100
i.6o o . :so< 50*
..JO 0.050 90
                             WQ-RET
                               6-14

-------
                                                           DR
                                                        PGM=RET,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword

          This keyword may be used with the RET program  to select
          the location of the decimal point for parameter values
          that are printed by the RET retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          DR-x,
where x
zero to
is any single digit value,
8, as follows:
from
                     value of x

                        DR=0,
                        DR=1,
                        DR = 2,
                        DR = 3,
                        DR = 4,
                        DR = 5,
                        DR=6,
                        DR=7,
                        DR = 8,
                requested decimal placement

                      .XXXXE+XX
                      xxxxxxxx
                      xxxxxx.x
                      xxxxx.xx
                      XXXX.XXX
                      xxx.xxxx
                      XX.XXXXX
                      x.xxxxxx
                      .xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword  is parameter dependent and  applies  only  to
          the  immediately preceding parameter code keyword (P).
          It may be used once  for each  parameter requested.

          If DR  is not  specified, the parameter values  will  be
          printed with  the decimal placement as defined in the
          parameter code definitions.
SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:
          This  keyword may  be  used  to  prevent  retrieved
          parameters  from printing  imprecise trailing  digits  with
          their default  decimal placement.
                              WQ-RET
                               6-15

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Print values for parameter
          11 as whole numbers
          and values for parameter
          400 with one number to
          the right of the decimal
          point.  Decimal location
          for parameter 300 will
          not be changed.

          Print values of parameter
          625 using all available
          decimal representations.
          (See example below.)
PGM=RET,PURP=104/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,DR=1,P=300,
P=400,DR = 2,
BD=730101,
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=11EPALES,S=4435A2,
P=625,DR=0,P=625,DR=1,
P=625,DR=2,P=625,DR=3/
P«625,DR=4,P=625,DR=5,
P=625,DR=6,P=625,DR=7,
P=625,DR=8,
AHiiNT/iTSSA*

OATE
?9UK
TO
'2/OJ/26
~2/0 */09
2/U/14
2/11/04
2/12/09
J/01/06
J/02/0 J
J/OJ/OJ
J/OJ/1-
73/04/07
7J/04/21
7J/06/3J
•J/07/1J

I*
OP
• AJ
0

0
0
2
0
0
0
09
11
09
10
09

E DEPTH

.'££7
JO

10
J)
JO
30
JO
1J
15
15
50
30
JO
•J0625
TOT tjf.
X
1C /L
.799E»00
.-50E-00
.500E-00
.29U'00
. J19E-00
. 109E*00
,519E>00
. J41E-00
. J09E-00
. Ii7£«01
.J69E-00
.me. oo
,5)9£-00
30(25 00625 0062
TOT K.'EI. TOT KJE'_ TOT <-'
S * S
*G/'» 4C/L *G/l
1 O.J 0.
1 O.d 0.
0.5 3.5 0 .
O.J O.J 0 .
O.J J.J J .
0.1 0.1 0 .
1 0.5 3.
J.J 'J.J 0 .
J.J J.J 3 .
2 1.7 1.
0.4 0.4 0 .
3.4 3.4 0 .
1 0 . 0 3 .
5
EL


*0
75
50
JO
J2
11
;2
J5
Jl
6d
J7
40
50
4435*2 -J44};4
»; ou ;o.o o"i :•-: oo.-. 4
44 * . i :EO«GlA.'tLLE
5T HWY i JROC £ -iXJt 3F
Ue?ALES
0000 »f£T JEPTH :tAS3
00625
TOT 
-------
                                                       PGM=MEAN,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The MEAN program performs a variety of user-specified
          statistical calculations on requested parameters, and
          provides maximum flexibility with regard to combining
          stations and grouping data according to desired time
          frames.  The statistical functions that can be selected
          include maximum and minimum value calculations, sum. of
          squares, variance, standard deviations,, and other basic
          statistical analyses.  High and/or low data values can
          be eliminated prior to analyses, and calculations can
          be performed on the logarithms of the values.  The
          program is used to calculate loadings, dissolved oxygen
          saturations, temperature conversions, and un-ionized
          ammonia.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All general keywords described  in Sections 4 and 5 are
          valid with the MEAN program.  The parameter keyword P
          IT,ay be specified up to 10 times.

OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:

          Neither depth nor remark codes are printed by  the MEAN
          program.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-21

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
          Retrieve statistical summaries
          for the selected parameters
          and suppress raw data.
          The example shows a portion
          of the default groupings.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9, 5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,P=610,
P=1045,P=31501,
BD=730101,
PRT=NO,
AM8NT/LAKE
LAKE =-J?E.= !0? ;7;:-.!
14AONfS9
:cuo ?£ET -:2?rH ::.A5j ;o

DATS THE 36PTH
??CM Of
TO OAY ?££T
73/01/01
*EA3 NU.1BEB
.".AXI.1U.1
•»;«j l.-Kjfl
*£AN
M/0 i.-'OO
74 /a i/o i
YEA« NU!*d£?
."•AXirt'Jfl
- : w t -j.i
* t A ?f
'y;'|. U '
fiA?'"'01 NLV-8SP
.1AX1.1UH
.flNIHUrt
.It AM
76/U1/OD
74/31/01
YEAH NU'SES
1A4 I.iUrt
.*IN [fltl.1
.1EAN
77/01/00
00/00/00

-AXI.IUM
.^IN IflUM

3001!
•WATE5
TE.MP
?AHN

7.00000
69. 5000
11.5000
54.6423


5 .00000
78.3000
50 .0000
64 . "<;00

15.UOOO
73.0000
o.oooo
60.6000


5.00000
73. 1000
44.0000
61.20.30


32.0030
73. '3000
13.3000
60.0112
30300
DC

1G/C.

7 .00000
11.9000
i. 10000
10.2429


4.30000
10.2003
7 . 600CO
i.'.lXi

6.00000
'.0.6000
7.60000
9.16666


5.00C30
11.4000
3.40000
). 51999


22 . 00(30
D.iOOO
7.60000
* . i 11 3 1
00400
?H

SU

7 .00000
i. -0000
5. 50000
6.23571


5. 30000
6. 70000
i. SOOCO
6 . ; 7 9 5 )

15.0000
7.20030
5. 70000
6.24133


i. 00000
6. iUOOO
6.00000
S. 55999


1 2 . 0000
7.20000
5.50000
5.3)3-77
006 1C 01045
NH3-N iRON
72TAL .'£ . TOT
SO/!. JG/L

5.10000
230 . 000
53.D-300
112.400


5 . .30000
620.000
'.2-3.000
2 56 . 00 i







5.3U;300 5.' 30000
.05000CC 100. 000
.0500000 -O.OO.IO
,050'JOOO i2.0000



.3500000 620.300
.0500030 50.0030
.OVJ0032 I -5. 300
31501
TOT -C c L ;
.if :.i£Non
.".OO.-.L

6 . 3 3 C 0 C
150.3. 30
; . 30.J.3C
437. 5'30


4 .00000
100. 331
I '3 " 3 '.' •!
1 2 5 . ') i ;














'.503.3;
\ . 3'3 3'.)C
2-J4 . :;: :
                             WQ-RET
                              6-22

-------
                                                        LV,HV

                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE:
          These keywords may be used with the MEAN program  to
          exclude high and/or low values from calculations
          performed by the MEAN program.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
        LV=lower-limit,
        KV=upper-l imit,
                            where lower-limit is any numerical
                            value, including a decimal value,
                            between -899E-"7 and +899E+7.
                            LV establishes the lower limit  for
                            a parameter value; parameter values
                            less, or lower, than the lower-limit
                            are excluded from the MEAN
                            calculations.

                            where upper-limit is any numerical
                            value, including a decimal value,
                            between -899E+7 and +899E+7.
                            Parameter values which are greater
                            than  the upper-limit are excluded frorr.
                            the MEAN calculations.
DEFAULT VALUES:
NOTES ON USAGE:
                 LV=-899E+7,
                 HV=+899E+7,
          Either, or both, of these keywords may be specified  for
          each parameter.

          These keywords  are parameter dependent and  apply  only
          to the preceding parameter code keyword  (P).

          Up to ten pairs of P and LV,HV keywords  can be
          specified in a  single retrieval request.

          Although LV and HV may be used with both programs MEAN
          and STAND, their function is different with each
          program.  With  program MEAN, values which are not
          within the specified limits are excluded; with  program
          STAND, values which are not within the specified  limits
          are flagged.
                              WQ-RET
                               6-23

-------
EXAMPLE(S;
          Exclude from statistical         PGM-MEAN, PU.RPO.05B/STA,
          calculations values for          A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          parameter. 1045 which are        . P=ll, P=1045, LV=5C, PO15C.
          below 50 and values for          HV=1000,
          parameter 31501 which are        BD=730101,
          above 1000.  All values for      PRT=NO,
          parameter 11 are used in the
          calculations.
                              WQ-RET
                               6-24

-------
                                                         DG

                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword

USE:      This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
          assign date groupings to the data to be analyzed.   It
          is also used in conjunction with the SORT keyword.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:

       DG=values,    where values is a string of one or more  of  the
                     following alphabetic characters which  invoke
                     the functions described:

                     S  prints individual samples

                     M  calculates summaries by month

                     Q  calculates summaries by quarters

                     Y  calculates summaries by year

                     P  calculates summaries for period of  record

                   .. G  calculates summaries by aggregation of
                        all data retrieved as if they  came  from  one
                        station

DEFAULT VALUE:   DG=YPG,

NOTES ON USAGE:

          The  DG keyword may be specified only once within  a
          retrieval request.

          The  individual values for DG may be specified  in  any
          order, e.g.  'DG=YPG,' or  'DG=PGY,' are equivalent
          instructions.  Regardless of the order, however,
          summaries will be printed in the order of increasing
          group  size,  i.e., in the order  listed above.

          The  DG keyword must be specified when the SORT keyword
          is used.  Descriptions of its use with SORT  are
          provided in  this section.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-25

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Calculate statistical
          summaries by month,
          quarter, and year.
PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,?=4CO,
BD«730101,
DG=YMQ,PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-26

-------
                                                         SORT
                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to sort
samples prior to statistical analysis by the MEAN
program.  The keyword must be used in conjunction with
the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:
     SORT
  (SM 1
   sv
   AM
   AV
SORT=SM,


SORT=SV,




SORT=AM,




SORT=AV,
          SORT=AY,
           the SORT keyword may be assigned any one of the
           listed values, and functions in conjunction witJ
           the DG keyword,  as follows:
                     for each station,
                     in monthly order,
                             samples are to be sorted
                             ignoring the year field.
           for each station, samples are to be sorted
           in ascending order by values of the first
           parameter specified in the retrieval.

           samples are to be sorted in monthly order,
           as in SORT=SM, except that the data for
           all stations retrieved will be aggregated as
           if the data were from one station.

           samples are to be sorted in ascending
           order by values of the first parameter
           specified in the retrieval (as in
           SORT=SV), except that the data are aggregated
           as if the data were from one station.

           samples are to be aggregated for all
           stations as if the data were from
           a single station and listed in
           year/month/day order.
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-27

-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
          The SORT keyword can be specified only once in a
          retrieval.

          The SORT keyword must be used with the DG keyword,
          which serves as a trigger to the sorting process.

          The use of the SORT keyword increases the cost of
          retrievals.  In some situations, it may be possible to
          achieve the same results by using date grouping  (the DG
          keyword) alone.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-28

-------
EXAMPLE 1
          Retrieve individual samples
          for the specified station.
          Sort in monthly order
          regardless, of year.
  ?GM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
. . A=14AGNFS9,S = 070C09,
  P=11,?=300,P=400,
  BD=73C1Q1,ED=751231,
  SORT=SM,DG=S,
  SHI?T,?RT=NO,
.= '!;-!;.: ,„ n"3°i :
:bii-: • -ICHIJA.N
-A-<£ 5-;?£aiOr 0"'KJ]
13 J-N TvNAOON HUtH
ooaii -jj jyj
-ATi ::.•£ J5PTH -ATES 00
.•'.'C- OF Ti.l?
."0 JAY ,-EtT ;AHN -J '•_
3 / -J I / 0 J ; a 2 3 3 J . J 0 0 G i j . 3 0 0 0
1 " '• 5 .' 1 3 5 0 . J t,1 ; 0 , V - J J J

. ' J ^ ' ' * . ' ' .' • ; - • - 3 • J • '•; •:
i/yo/g« - »y.. i3.0-.. : s. *J^.;^
)/:"-li LJ*u 'V.JOOO
i/--"/^ luJ: "i.JOJu

1/ji'U JJSo ttiojoo 4':UJOU
v i'j/ u uj-j 4*. jyoa
1' . 1/J4 i'JU'i 4 ] .LO-JJ
i-- 1 :, ;w i js i • j . vju-j : i . i.j.jj

V3N7 LASS
; ; 4.;c
. s-;::o
. 5 C C 0 0


. 3»: Ja.j
50000
J-JO'-O
4 JLJuO
iC J03
. jUuOO
. J-O'JU
:;":;;
                             WQ-RET
                              6-29

-------
EXAMPLE 2
          Retrieve individual samples,
          monthly and quarterly
          summaries for three stations.
          Sort the data by
          period regardless of year.
          The output shown is for
          station 070002.
PGM = MEAN,PURP = 30 53/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070002,
5=070003,3=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
BD=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=SM,DG=SMQ,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
:-ooo'
46 L4 ;
CuA?U L,
ia05J
LAA£ a.-1
.is ;NTO
UA,;SF3
J I) J 0 ?

OA7E
70
-J/OV'l
•4/05/j]
ri/05/i2
•j/Ji/ JJ
*V'J5/01
•OiNTn


*Vj /4/01
}'JA<»T£a


,-ovoo
•J/UVO*
' =, ' J ' / 1 '.
ION TH


-s/rjj/z'j
: 4 / -J 6 .' 2 ;
^ui/2!


rj/cl/g:
L-NfH/lJ


iVL-J/vU
;;JAKT£R


»VU/Ov

.4 039 20
XE " .11 3«
MJCH IOAS
-;s;oa
AGON 3IVES

£? 0£?TH

n.^e 3£?T
DA* ?££T
•J910

ja t 5
10JO

.'iiJ^BiS
"-AXIflU.".
.^£AN

1030
J J2Q
J-» J-J
')3 JO
j 3 I ';

ll.HI-U-

^U.18£3
1AXIMU.1
.^1.1 IM'J.1
IE AN
1045
0^4;
J *10
•i^aeR
* IN [ .1U1*
T SAN
•Jdli
C *UJ
•0310
HA.t I.1U *
-EAN
J045
•JJ.-3£H
.HAXI.^J.I
•4lNt*U-1
l£AN
•*U13£1
-AX[*ij.r
•INEMU.I

LARK
:~ .1 l
*A?£H5«£Sr

; ' o 7 ">


CLASS :j
juO t I
u WA:SR
»H!
46.-:ooo
;)J . JOOO
iil.OOOO
•t 3 . 0 0 0 U

4.00QQU
ii.O'JOU
56 . "50J

5 * . -J 0 0 0
•) 1 . i Jja
•j ; . : j o a
il.OOOQ
• i ._'.',' i
i. JGOUJ
5?::ooc

^.UOOGO
ii.UUOU
4i» . COOO
».«„
3: . JCOO
•3.0*00
•3.0000
•3.0000
4. ,0000
63.0000

34.0000
5 5 . uO 00
56.0000
34.0000
65.0000
3 3 . o o o o
1 .'JO-JOO
«J.OOOO
SS.JOOO
33.0000
3 .OOOOJ
•3.0000
34 . JOOO
34. ^SOO
040602C007



J



50300
00
10/t
11.5000
10.?000
). 30000


3 .00000
11.5000
10.3000

t . 40000
> . 30000
* . 4 0 0 0 0
(.50000

4.J.J03
1.40-OuO

' . 00000
11.5-000
9.40000
,.»,::
. 3.50000
3.20000

3.00000
3 ' '31'-
J. 21113
3 . 3 J 0 0 0
3 . '0000
3.50000
1. 30000
i.4)?»9
i. OJOO
1 . 0000
3. 0000
J. 0000
t. 000-0
•. oooo
3. 0000
3. 0000
3. 4235






».»3NT/1AK£

10400
?H
"
i. 50000
6.30000
6 .300U2


1.00000
3.3'OOOC
3.TOOOO

3.3-1000
3 . ; o -0 ; 0
3. 3 JO 10
3.30000

t JOO-JO
3.3'JOOO

•..'000-J
6.3UOOO
6 . 50000
3.'OOOJ
i . 10000

i.:ooo;
'* . aOOO'J

i. -OOJO
i . "OiDJG
3,0'J OJ
!'-o '•
•j-.ti 5-i
6 . : J C J
i . • j C 0 c
a . 50 00
i. 50 t;
o. 5J JO
- .- • ..'
0 . t ^ J •-
b . :•: wo

                             WQ-RET
                              6-30

-------
EXAMPLE 3
          Retrieve individual samples
          for each of the three
          specified stations.  Sort
          the retrieval data in
          ascending order by values
          of the first parameter
          specified (P=ll, water
          temperature).  The output
          shown is for stations
          070002 and 070003.
PGM=MEAN,PURP = 3 0 5B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=C70002,
S*070003,S=G700C9,
?=11,P=300,P=400,
BD*73C101,ED«751231,
SORT=SV,DG=S,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,
'••"»? . ..•-'-***
\Lj~m S-AKE ''M'J. i*rtns
>*E1jLvsii:oa''1 ''"*''" )
04c^-32
£• r
0:93
JOC *


000.. >S£T OEyTM O'.AiS 00
JOO
OATE TIME 3EP7H -'ATE
fao.i of :£s
•5/-.VO: 0930
•j/01/Oa 1010 32.0
• 4 / o i / : 3 i u i s 3i.o
•;.'05/ii 0931; <6.o
-:/10/;i 1015 51.0
•i/10/Zl 0100 il.j
* i . '. 0 / J • 0 9 4 • 53.0
' i • I0/'j ' 090'J i 3 . 0
•4/^5/21 -3.0
•4,'0o,'ii 1030 i'.,
• ; / 'J <3 / '. ': .; i : J 3 1 . .
•i/05/2: -J3li 53.0
•J/Oo/js 0130 al.o
*j/'j3/26 OJ15 34.0
•j/Oi/JO U'OO 35..'
•4/03/23 jiOO 3i.i
'.}'•"'-:'. "*". !°-J
'l/w'/xi 1J45 33.0
1 00300 00400
30

?d

3.00COO i.'OOOj
oo ;.*-
00 3.)..
00 1.5
00 j . 3
00 0.3
CO . •;
;o . • j
00 i, . •
j- '!o
CO . 50
CO . 3 :J
JU
30 . "'J
«*j . j;
JO * . " 0 0 0 0
0 i. uOoO
o i. oaco
0 ^ . 00 JO
'J » . 0 w J C-
j > . i'; J 0 ,
o * o •; i j
i tjOOO
-J -, ^OO.J
'- 5 o2/J
0 5 'JOOO

1 J 3 , * , 0 0 ,
- ' ' - - J - -
3 j j . iJOQO 6 . 6'jOw>;
TJ/o°/i, Jiio -5:o5oo i.:oooo ,.*oooo
•j/0^/10 Oilu -3.0
.o:?4°!3.3 ,i, ;-::]°3 :
CH'OOKEJ i.A*E a SI 3. -ATE
j.E^jpeaioa ^ ;
MAOMF3*
Ow
TO

5"iST
j*l)





\«a-.*/LA(f E
JOOO fEET OEPTH tLAaj JO
OOCU J030U J0400
-ATS THE 3E?TH JATE.
f«un Of .-£-.
TO SAt FiEf r'Art.
5/10/21 I'll: 51. J.
3,u;/30 JiOU i'.O^
4/05/io -Ja45 9.J
4/OWlt 0910 9.j^
3/U3/10 vlli 3.JW
j/uS/Jl Ii.l3 :..0l
JO

"C/L
oo iw.;o

oo : .so
00 t 4«J
^r
4/Od/i* 1000 T.^000 - 3V.O
i/0»/10 3900 0.0'
5/j3/r* 1U2S a.Ov
3/04/15 Oa30 3.0
3/UO/21 0930 i 0'
3/09/Od OajO 0 Ov
3/0^/09 1000 4 0'
5/06/20 1000 4 3-
4/y'/15 0955 4 0
5/v*V!0 0900 3 0
5/OVul 10iO "9 0-
OJ J *OC
00 J JOO
00 4 "00
00 a o 0 0
00 3 100
00 3400
0«
Olj 3. 4 CO
00
JO a.aflO
?H

5'J
0 ' '000.
a * soo jo
U i JJOOO
j J'JOuJ
j - •. • -.
10 1 jUOOO
0 i 3UOOO
u * j J 0 0 0
JO i -SOO-
3 -j .j * 0 J 0 0
)C - iJOOO
)0 1 JJoOO
i '0000
10 i 50000

,; i. ooooo
•;/OV23 Od45 34 50UO
                             WQ-RET
                               6-31

-------
EXAMPLE  4
              Retrieve quarterly  and monthly
              statistical summaries  with  data
              aggregated  as  if   it were from
              a  single station   rather  than
              the three  separate  stations
              specified.   The  data  for each
              summary  are made   up of all
              values sampled for  the
              particular  quarter  or  month
              regardless  of  year.
                    PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
                    A=14AGNFS9,5=070002,
                    5=070003,5=070009,
                    P=11,P«300,P=400,
                    BD=730101,ED=751231,
                    SORT=AM,DG=QM,
                    SHIFT,PRT=NO,
                                                          oooooo:.: oooooooo::o
                          BARTER  .I'Jna'R

                                •INI.IUfl


                          47/05/01
                          ONTH   MUSSES
                                ."JKXIM'J-
                                JINIK-J*
                                .1EAN
                          IVJ6/00
                          *'/•:•»/j i
                          tGSTrt   su*9£3

                                "INIWC"
                          IT/10/00
                          JT/avoi
                               X.I.4UIU!!
                               •SAN
                                        1.00000
                                        11.0000
                                        i:.jooo
 1.JOOOQ
 il.OOOO
       l.'JOOOO   1.00000
       IS.9000   5.*0'J30
       12.'000   4.5000C
       14.1J31   4.-JCOG
 1.30000
 15. 'UOu
12.0000
45.3000
15.00CO
"4.0000
! •. : j o:
                                        •4.0000
                                        40.3300
                                        15.0000
                                        J4.0000
                          ^O^T«   .liMSCJ     ). 00000
                                «x:-'.-s    19.0000
                                         10000
                                         .0000
                                         ,0003
                                        94.
                                        51.
                                       10.0COO
                                .lAXIXUK   ij.3'JOO
                                        l.'JOOOO
                                        41.0000
                                       1.30000
                                       13.0030
                                       11.0000
                                       11.0000
 1.J3000
 11.5000
 9.50000
 10.1J49
 12.0000
 ».90000
       11.5000
       3.43330
       9.-1S09
       J.00000
       3.50000
       ".40000
       4.1:555
       3.jgOOO
       i.'OOL-l
       • . 50000
       3.OOOU3
       3.40003
       i.10000
       1.231)1
       20.OuOO
       J.-0033
       ".40000
       3.J0300
       10.4300
       i.OOCCO
              1.30000
              5.0*300
              14.3000
       24.0000
       i.90303
       ».;oooo
       '.15914
       12.3i.-03
       3.50300
       4.33003
       >.:c::o

       5.50303
       '.15555
       •.5C003
       a.3003:
       6.500:0
       25.0330

       5.5C33C
       4.92SOO
       10.3-.-00
       '.•-.OjO
12.0000
SI.0000
11.3000
49.iili
             1.00003
             4.30000
             4 .'33000
       1.00030  1.00300
       11.9003  4.S0033
       13.900J  4.50003
       11.9000  6.50030
9.3COOO   12.3030
D.J333   '.'OOOO
9.03000   5.-0030
13.ld.19   4.50300
                                        WQ-RET
                                         6-32

-------
EXAMPLE 5
          Retrieve samples with the
          data aggregated as if they were
          from a single station rather
          than the three separate stations
          specified.  Sort the retrieval
          data in ascending order by
          values of the first parameter
          specified (P=ll, water
          temperature).
PGM-MEAN,?UR?=3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9, 5 = 070002,
5=070003,5=070009,
P=11,P=300,P=400,
3D=730101,ED=75i231,
SORT=AVtDG=S,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,



-
•
-
-




:
•
*
-
*
I

•



,
_


-
*
*
*
-







7
~
"


•

;
-
•

•
•
-


•
*
••
-



*
*

j
.-

t.-

3/

:/
3/

)/
j/
4/
j/
5''
y
?'


*
if
\/
4/

4 /
j/
; ,
4/
;,


4/

,/
,/
i ,
i/
4/
4/
*/
\/
^/
]/
; /
i,.
j/
j_.
j/

i,/
; /
4 /
i/
•/
4,
j/
a/
5,
i/
• /
;/
4/


•,-r
30 ^

. 1/-3
' / 2 3
.2/20
-;/-i
. '. . j 4
J i/ i ;
.C/16
IC/21
J5/1*
; j/ u
i<*/u k
.'j/ii~
l-/t:
•-,/ i '
. ^ ,• (, 7
- ,-]
^. "I
,9/1 I
,3/3.,
*!"'•• 5
-S/'.l
U0, ; ;
jo/ ; L
g o / ; i
* -; / 2 i
j a / •) a
^*/2*
^3 ,' J S
j,/ JO
to, 2i
w i / L 1
J i / j 2
Oa 'It
V 0 r' * 4
03/2"
-a/ii
:a/ LO
,0/ib
J 9 ' Z '.
0 0 ,' 1 5
; * / j j
J9/0"
-3/jJ
j"/Ja
;>/09
;-/:3
Co/24
jT/LA
u'/O »
0»/23
U ? ,' L 5
•J " / * 2
J"/ 2;
J'/IO
j " / i 0
« " / 1) *
j'/L'u
J*/l»
0 " / 0 I

."v^E 2£?TH
3P
J? 10
LOJJ
' J 1 i
1050
J9* 5
luOO
0930
13 JJ
HOC
Ja JJ

i JwJ
Il8u
09];
;*fj!
J1*, J
.**s
, > j .
I-]-
, t J'J

'^•# JC
;OJJ
0^2u
j*10
j o 1 5
.'al-
ts I i
; V J j
;»ii
101:
iS t5
•J9 Jj
j3 J j
Lu*0
1U3U
lOC^J
J?00
'. j i i
•J J JO
33 i J
'. i43
0543
JSJ'J
j HQ
03 3«;
1040
j V30
,"J4U
ioc;
IOOJ
i J33
J ->4 3
13)3
j J JO
• j » 0 0
llUJ
1000
JdiO
'.C50
*i/OT/2j -J043
J-3
WAT
7t

ii .
J 2 .
1 ] .
1 J.
4 ] .
46.
*' .
40 .
4 ).
;-J .
iO .
si.
-i*
n!
i i .
i j .
'!'
,-.
j ' .
i».

•j j .
9 1
9l
o2
9}
9 3
n 4
•»'
i?
i i
30
90
. 30
3 ?
9?
97
9d
3d
9 i
9d
5 j
!s
3 't
9 *
'0
*I
" ;
' ;
: 4
•4
? 4
*9
•6
T J
•j
*3
"d
•a
"•*
o:: )a3J3 i
S3
1?

L •; c •.
DGOO
OOOJ
JOOO
J ' i G j
Jl) Ju
3UOJ
oooa
-J3C J
JoOQ
JC30
j J'JO
3003
JO "'0

J.JJ.J


^J^j
.' J J 'J
J'JOJ
2o!!s
iOOu
•JCC3
OJOO
JOOO
•J 'J C i*
O-j'30
j ; u j
OOO'J
J J - y
JOJO
•ijao
J 00 w
SO 50
*'j jO
J300
D03U
300C
JCOO
0302
•;ooo
OOwJ
;oo-,
-.0 «0

3000
•3000
J^OO
•:ooo
0000
03GO
:OQJ
•JOOO
3JOC
oaoc
wOOC
wOOO
oo(;o
JOOO
3000
0033


i.

15
13


; \

•0
1C
10

i.
1U
10
i .
'


1 .
IJ
1C
3 .
J
, ,
) .
j
J
J
1

}
a
3
j
*


>
3
3
3
3
j
J
^
3


j
j

a




•*

•
a
20

i 0 C j 0
. "^ . J
y ij 2 C
. 90 a j
,ao;o

.ioo:

.9'J-JJ
. 9 -j 'J '.
. O'J Ju

* o a w o
.3000
. J-JOO
0 C j 0 C
" • - - J


4-j.jO'j

.i;.-.
"0010
dUUOO
JOOOJ
40000
S3UOJ
3 JOOO
JJ«J--
"JJ.O

iOOJC
40woO
iOJOJ
1 0 0 C ;
»-ul, J

9COUU
*OLO-:
*(JouO
oCQOO
' 0 0 OJJO
jCOQJ
i ; 30 j
0 G •_ ' J
i .' 3 J -
JCCOO
i •'. -J 0 0
: - -^ j 'J
••JOQO
•-:;oo
: w « j c


ii. jc.
:J3«.-

:iJ>J-
a..-;.';:
3V-J-.
^!^!i
• - j . •;
2300,
aOOdi)
3CJ30
u 2 J 'j
4-JJuj
';-J..
"•J-J-.d

.;-iu
J'jQ.JO
•JOOJJ
- , ; ; j
" j 0 'J 0
aGCUJ
; CO-JO
iOO.Jvj
9030-*
S.,J3
" 0 J C 2
h •'. 0 0 0
iO-Ju:
3-JJOJ
^ j 0 u • J
sJC-ifl
:j3ijj
42C-J
*C-J J J
OO'.O-
*:30-:
3 JOOO

oooac


' 0 v, j J
4 00 'JO
iJO'OO
0000 C
a 4 . o o ^ u
                              WQ-RET
                               6-33

-------
EXAMPLE 6
          Retrieve samples and monthly
          summaries with the data
          aggregated as if they were from
          a single station rather than
          the three separate stations
          specified.  Sort the data in
          ascending order by year/month/
          day.
PGM=MZAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=700C2,
3=070003,5=070009,
?=11,P=300,P=400,
3D=730101,ED=751231,
SORT=AY,DG=SM,
SHIFT,PRT=NO,


3AT£
FSOS
ro
•3/-,l/<33
7 i / 0 1 / 0 a
•J/Cl/01
MONTH



•3/05/11
73/05/15
?i/05/ 30
MONTS


"1/J6/04
73/06/06
71/05/a
•3/05/01
MONT!*



7I/OVOO
•5/10/02
'5/10/07
75/ 10/07
"5/10/07
•5/10/0'
•5/10/16
75/1-J/21
•5/10/21
75/10/21
•5/10/21
75/10/01
MONTH



•j/n/oo
75/11/04
75/11/J1
.MONTH



•5/12/JO


TIME 3E?T«
Of
uAT tlt-
3925
lulO

>UM3EP
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEAS
0930
3830
3900
,1'jMaefi
MAXIMUM
,£AN
I, »00
0830
39 30

.MUM3SH
MAXIMUM
•INIMj-B
MCAM

1000
1100
0945
090J
•3900
1010
1100
3930
1015
0900

•4U*9£P
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MEA.S

1000

HUMd&it
.MAXIMUM
M ; N i M'J M
"•AM


00011
•ATE a
JEM?
?AHN
31.0000
32.0000

; .OjOOO
13.0000
12.0000
12.5000
6 .0000
9.0000
-.0000
.00000
•.C03C
S.J.,5-,'
53.0000
61.0000
55.3300

1 .00000
58.0000
61.0000
64.6667

iO.^000
il.OOOO
53 . 0000
53.0000
52 .'J00«
4* . 0000
49.3000
51.0000
51.3000
51.0000

10.0000
53. 0000
47.0000
50.7000

43.0000

1.-3000C
41.0000
41.0000
41.COOO


OOluO
00

Mi/L
ii.aooo
12.7000

2.300'JO
11.5-000
12.7000
11.2500
11.5000
10.6000
10.1000
3.00000
11. MOO
i i . 1 0 r. -3
*.-:ooo
)! J3000
4.60000

1.00000
9.50000
1. 50000
i. 91111


* . 70000
9.73000
9. '0000
9.0-3000

10.500-3
10.3000
10. 1000
10.1000

3 .00000
10.5000
9.00000
9.94999








00:0000: icj;-::-::;::
00400
?.-i

5J
6.5COOC
J. 70000

l.jOOOO
6.70000
6.5GOOO
6.50000
6.50000
6.5000C
•. J-300
1.-3000
7 . 5300
i. (33i
5.5000
5.5000
j.5000

1.0000
j.SOOO
6.50000
7.20000

5. '0030
6. JOOOO
5.50000
6.50000
7.50030
6.0000:
5. 50000
•.•oooo
5.50000
5.50003

10.0000
7.700CO
5.700C3
6.55000

6.00000

1.00050
4.00000
5.00039
6.3JOOO

                             WQ-RET
                              6-34

-------
                                                         BASE
                                                          VD
                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE:
The BASE and VD keywords may be used with the MEAN
program to assign variable date groupings to the data
to be analyzed.  The BASE keyword is used to specify a
beginning date other than a normal (the first day of
the first month) beginning date for the monthly,
quarterly, and/or annual statistical analyses, and the
VD keyword is used to specify date groupings other than
those that can be specified with the DG keyword.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
       BASE=mmdd,

       VD=mmdd,





DEFAULT VALUES:


NOTES ON USAGE:
           where mm is the two digit numeric for the
           month of the year, and dd is the two digit
           numeric for the day of the month.   (yy for
           year is not an option with these keywords.)
           Leading zeroes must be specified, and both
           mm and dd must be specified for each keyword
       VD:
       BASE:
None.
BASE=0101,
          BASE may be specified only once  in a retrieval request.

          If used the VD keyword must appear at  least twice  and
          may be used up to 20 times.

          If VD is not specified, the date groupings default  to
          those established via the DG keyword.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-35

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve statistical summaries
          for data sampled between
          February 15, 1973 and August
          14, 1975.  Group the summaries
          in monthly and quarterly
          periods from a starting date
          of February 15.

          Retrieve statistical summaries
          for data sampled between
          February 15, 1973 and August
          14, 1975.  Group data in the
          following periods: February 15
          through April  14, April 15
          through August 29, August 30
          through October 20, and October
          21 through February 14.
PGM»MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P»11,P-300,P-400,-
BD=730215,ED=750814,
BASE=0215,DG=MQ,
PRT=NO,
PGM-MEAN,PURP«3053/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P-11,P«300,P-400,
BD=730215,ED=750814,
VD-0215,VD"0415,VD-083G.
VD-1021,
PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                               6-36

-------
                                                          SF
                                                       PGM = ME AN, •:
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used with the MEAN program to select
the arithmetic statistical functions that the MEAN
program is to perform.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
        SF=values,
           where values is a string of one or more of the
           following alphanumeric characters which invoke
           the calculations indicated:

           N  calculates the number of observations
           H  calculates the maximum value of the
              observations
           L  calculates the minimum value of the
              observations
           S  calculates the sum of the values
           2  calculates the sum of the squares
           M  calculates the mean
           V  calculates the variance
           D  calculates the standard deviation
           C  calculates the coefficient of variation
           E  calculates the standard error
           F  calculates flow weighted average
DEFAULT VALUE:  SF=NHLM,

NOTES ON USAGE:
          The SF keyword can be specified only once within a
          retrieval request.

          The individual values for SF may be specified  in any
          order, e.g.   'SF=HLS2,' or  'SF=H2SL,' are equivalent
          values.

          See keyword LOG for calculations of geometric
          statistics.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-37

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Retrieve statistical summaries
          with all statistics, except
          flow weighted average,
          calculated.
PGM=MEAN,PURP-305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
P=ll,?=300,?=400,
BD=730101,
S?=N2CSHLMVDE,
PRT=NO,




•iATt
f 3V.1
:o
" j/ n/ui
YiA3









* 4 •' J 1 •' M v)
' * - i •' j 1








*3/«i/uu
Ta/wl/Ul
YEAR








'»/ jl/OO
"o/Ol/Ol
iEAS







"/'JlAiU
^.'-J/'JO
j 7 * ? [ CM








"'•"""




7I!"E DtPTH
•J?
JAY ?E£T

Si,:M3£3
1AX Lit'.*
MN'i.lijr
jj 1
JJ.'-SOUAR
*£*N
MS [ ASC£
3TV13 itV
wOEr 'AH
3 "AN J • rf 8


'A < : rt-j.^
1 i.i r'ij.1*
j-'rt
JU.f-J»iJAi4
lLA.'i
I'AriiA.'i,;?
5TANO 3£.'
.'JSr .««


.4U.13ER
:UNl-Uf
3-J.1
3 J * - 3 JIJA S
.1SAN
VARIANCt
jTANO 25V
C-JEF VA«
STANO saa


Njissa
5-J.1
5U.1-aOUAH
.l£ AS
/*SIANC£
jTA.'O 3£V
CJt- 7AR
5 TA:JJ s.-i.t


NU.-llE3.
.*AX:W.W •
.IINI^-.I
5 U.I
5U1-3JUAR
«£AN
VASCA.'JCE
57A.HO 3E.*
:JSF VAH
5? AND £83



.011
-ATES
r £.*!?•
?AH.i

" . 0 J 0 J 0
a ) . ia03
31. JOOG
1*2.500
i 249 i . 2
34 . s4 2a
tt>5 . "21}
Is . JJ 1 2
- i'H Ji 2
1 . 1 6it '


:3. J.;JQ
i j . J Jjtf
K I . 500
2Ui".:
64 . 7uOO
US.'JS
I'J. 1293
.1599J-


15.0000
4). 0000
309 . 000
5"14 3 . 3
60 . 9000
14o. )')
12.1233
. 200054
1.11021


.'j°5°^
:45..'00
11617. j
90.3)33
I'J-. 002
10.3442
.1-1451
3.1490"


1 9 . 0 G 0 0
73.00CO
11.0000
2153.00
114611
59. 9444
150. j70
12.2:01
.204161
2.04K1




iO

•«.;'!.

-.10000
13.90JO
1.15000
-i.-ooo
-'5.109
10.2423
6 . ' 3 il 2
2.90440
.254265
. »o4 i -;


u.: c.
7.9'. Ou
15.1 00
116. 'jj
i . 34 11
1.13 -2
1.09 I'
.120 'I


9.00000
-.50000
55.0000
:-ii.3C'j
i. 16666
1.12691
1.19419
.110 JO 9
. IS 76 4 )


lo.ooou

75a . 1 5 3
3.17999
9.31512
3.14003
.334943
.395-4"


27.0000
11.9000
.-ooooo
241.900
2161.1-
3.01111
6.036U
2.46-02
.27)102
. 474^73
46 11 1 . . i v 3 i : 1 1 ; . ; .
-u.'w -«• - I'J J. ^i ^ A i i. 3*ii .
LAKE JJ?£H:OS :'i-:-;
Id Osr-jfAGGN ':.'£.-
10400
?H

5 J

* . :oooo
6.50)00
5.5000.
1 4 . C 0 0 .'
2"* . 500
5.235"!
.1517i j
. 1 3 i 1 i "
.0525^0"
. 1 H " J 2


3 . '-JO Jj
9 . 5 . J J 0
)2 . *00.j
2 1 6 . 5 1 j
9 . 5 ' '1 1 9
. J 0 - J 3 "
. ;3 9 1 1 3 3 5
.012-916


LJ.JJ'JO
5 . "JOOO
93.0MO
:36.5)S
5 . 2 1 1 ; )
. '. :, 5 " i 9
. 1 t.i 4 '2
.05)0172
.102.190


10. JOOO
9 . 3UOOO
:. JJOOO
416. IJ'J
5.4)999
.1-1355
.415960
.054-451
.1)1151


17.001,0
".20000
5.50000
214.920
K90.35
5.14919
. 147U 1
. 1915)9
.06040-4
,0o)05]2
                             WQ-RET
                              6-38

-------
                                                        LOAD,

                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The LOAD keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute stream loadings for selected parameters.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          LOAD,      specifies that loadings are to be calculated
                     for the immediately preceding parameter
                     keyword.  There is no value associated with
                     this keyword.

DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          A flow parameter, such as 58  (average flow, gpm), 59
          (instantaneous flow, gpm), 60 (average flow, cfs), 61
          (instantaneous flow, cfs), 5G050 (conduit flow, mgd),
          50051 (instantaneous flow, mgd), or 74020 (flow, pump
          out, mgd), must be present in the retrieved sample in
          order to perform the loading  calculation for other
          parameters in the sample.

          LOAD applies to each parameter keyword it follows, and
          can be specified as many times as is required within a
          retrieval request.
          The
          PARF
          4)
    MEAN program cannot compute loadings i
    1 are used (see Data Selection Keywords
if PARU and
  in Section
          The following depicts what unit conversions are
          performed when computing loadings on the parameter
          values having the stored units shown.
          STORED UNITS

          milligrams/liter(mg/l)
          micrograms/1iter(ug/1)
          pico curies/liter(pc/l)
                     /100 milliliter
                                 LOADING COMPUTATION

                                 Ibs/day
                                 Ibs/day
                                 pc/day
                                 No./day
                             WQ-RET
                              6-39

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Calculate loadings for                PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
          parameter 650 (phosphates)            A=1115D050,S=255420,
          at the specified station.             P=60,P=650,LOAD,P=1045,
          Loadings are not to be calculated     PRT=NO,
          for parameter 1045 (iron).  The
          example shows default date
          groupings and statistical
          functions.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-40

-------
                                                          LOG,

                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The LOG keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
compute the logarithms of the retrieved parameter
values prior to the statistical analysis, thus
providing geometric statistics, such as geometric'
means.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
          LOG,
           specifies that logarithms of the values of the
           immediately preceding parameter keyword are to
           be computed.  There is no value associated
           with this keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          LOG applies to each parameter keyword it follows, and
          can be specified as many times as required within a
          retrieval request.
EXAMPLE!
          Retrieve statistical summaries
          with logarithms computed for
          parameters 300 and 600 prior
          to calculations.
                                 PGM-MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
                                 A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
                                 P«11,P-300,LOG,P"600,LOG,
                                 BD-730101,
                                 PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                               6-41

-------
                                                          DM
                                                     I  PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
This keyword may be used with the MEAN program to
select the location of the decimal point for parameter
values that are printed by the MEAN retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:
                     where x is any single digit value, from
                     zero to 8, as follows:
                     value of x

                        DM=0,
                        DM-1,
                        DM = 2,
                        DM = 3,
                        DM = 4,
                        DM = 5,
                        DM = 6,
                        DM=7,
                        DM=8,
                         requested decimal placement

                                  .XXXXE+XX
                                  xxxxxxxx
                                  xxxxxx.x
                                  xxxxx.xx
                                  xxxx.xxx
                                  XXX.XXXX
                                  xx.xxxxx
                                  x.xxxxxx
                                  .xxxxxxx
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          This keyword  is similar  in function to  the DR  keyword
          used with the RET program.

          DM applies  to each parameter keyword  it  follows,  and
          can be specified as many  times as  is  required  within a
          retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S
          Produce statistical summaries
          and print values for parameter
          11 as whole numbers and  values
          for parameter 400 with one
          number to the right of the
          decimal point.
                                 PGM=MEAN,PURP=3053/STA,
                                 A=14AGNFS9,S=C70009,
                                 P=11,DM=1,P=300,?=4OC,DM=2
                                 80=730101,
                                 PRT=NO,
                              WQ-RET
                               6-43

-------
                                                        LL1 LH1
                                                        LL2 LH2
                                                       PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE;
These keywords may be used with the MEAN program to
specify acceptable ranges for the values of either one
or two of the parameters retrieved.  LL1 and LH1 refer
respectively to the lower and higher acceptable values
of the first water quality parameter in the retrieval,
LL2 and LH2 refer similarly to the second parameter in
the retrieval.  The entire sample will be ignored if
the value of either parameter falls outside the
specified values.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

     LLl=lower-limit,
     LHl=upper-limit,
     LL2=lower-limit,
     LH2=upper-limit,
                where both lower-limit and upper-limit
                are any numerical value, including a
                decimal value, between -900E>37 and
                +900E+38.  Parameter values less, or  lower
                than lower-limit fall outside the
                acceptable range; parameter values
                higher, or greater, than upper-limit
                also fall outside the acceptable range.
DEFAULT VALUE:
NOTES ON USAGE:
      LL1= -900E+37,
      LH1= +900E+38,
      LL2 = -900E+37,
      LH2= +900E+38,
          LL2 and LH2 cannot be specified unless LL1 and LH1 are
          specified.
EXAMPLE(S):
          The entire sample will be
          ignored unless the value for
          parameter 11  is between
          35 and 70, AND the value
          for parameter 400. is between
          6 and 8.
                                 PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
                                 A«li'GNFS9,5=070009,
                                 P=11,P=400,P=300,
                                 LL1=35,LH1=7Q,
                                 LL2=6,LH2=8,
                                 BD-730101,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-45

-------
                                                          DO      |
                                                       Saturation I
                                                      Calculation j

                                                       PGM=MEAN,  I
CLASSIFICATION:
USE:
       Program Associated Function;
       Calculation of Dissolved Oxygen Saturation
This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below.  This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
          To have the dissolved oxygen saturation calculated by
          the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
          within the retrieval request:  P=10 (temperature in
          degrees Celsius) or P=ll (temperature in degrees
          Fahrenheit); P=299 (dissolved oxygen, probe) or P=300
          (dissolved oxygen); and P=301 (percentage of dissolved
          oxygen saturation).  The MEAN program will then
          automatically perform the necessary conversions and
          calculations, and will place the calculated value into
          the positions associated with parameter 301.   (It is
          essential that P=30V be specified in the retrieval,
          otherwise no computation will result as there  would be
          no column in which to record the results of the
          calculations.)

          Certain adjustments can be made to these calculations
          based upon the presence of chlorides and on the
          altitude of the station at which the DO saturation
          values are being calculated.  By specifying P=904
          (chloride), the MEAN program will allow for the
          presence of these compounds  in the DO saturation
          calculations.  By specifying P=42 (altitude in feet),
          the MEAN program will also allow for the effect of the
          associated altitude in the calculation of the  DO
          saturations.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          The altitude of the station must have been stored as
          parameter 42 for sample date 01/01/01.

          This calculation will not be performed on samples
          containing a user stored value for DO saturation.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-47

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Retrieve statistical summaries
          including calculations of the
          dissolved oxygen saturation.
PGM=MEAN,PUR?=305B/STA,
A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
?=11,P=300,P=301,?=40C
BD=730101,DG=S,

A.iaNT/LAXE
CAT! TIME OCP7H
faow IF
70 DA* f££T
'3/01/03 '19 25
'1/05/15 03 10
71/0o,04 09 00
75/10/16 LO 10
'5/io/:: 11 oo 3005
75/11 '04 10 00
74'04/21 10 10
74/05/23 10 '.5
10 10 3022
10 45 0044
74/06/10 33 10
76/07/11 11 00
'6/03/01 10 00
10 15 30:0
10 30 OJ40
76/00/25 03 10
39. 45 3015
09 00 0010
76/09/14 10 1C
11 00 3313
1! 10 0014
'-, 10/29 19 •;

COO 11
"'ATE 3
TE.-P
11.0
49.0
43.0
47.0
44.0
4 .0
4 .0
5 .0
5 .3
4 .0
5 .0
73.0
53.0
60.3
54. u
70.0
71 .0
51.0
52.0
52.0
49.0


V
30100
y>

I]
1C
4

10

1 1
9
4
s
j
3
3
7
j
o
$
•1
3
j
3
it i

3
5


6







1
6

0
0
4
5
5
4
3
^'
30101
00
SAT'J."






















373309 LOSCL
4 14 31.2 339 21 4a.: 1
2 353 <:;H!:A>
1 HE 3UPEPIOR 070'91
-•4 3MTONAGON ?:v£?
. 3000 .'SET 3EPTH C^A5S 33
00400

6.50
4.50
5 . 50
4.30
4.50
6.00
6.00
4 . 60
6.40
5.30
6.30
6.30
4.90
4.60
: .30
4.50
5 .00

6.20
5.20
4 . i 1
o . 40







Afl8N7/LA«E


TO QA» ?EET
71/01/01 0925
73/Oj/l i H10
73/06/04 0300
75/10/16 1030
75/10/21 1100
75/11/04 1000
76/04/21 1030
!6/05/2o 1015
76/05/23 1010
76, OS/IS 1045
76/06/ 10 0910
76/07/11 1100
74/09/03 1000
7S/08/03 1015
76/03/03 1010
76/03/25 3830
76/03/7,5 0345
76/00/24 0900
74/09/U 1010 •
75/09/16 HOC
76/09/16 1:10
76/10/29 3950








00'3 1 1
f"<
11. uOOO
49 .0000
41.0000
4 7 .0000
48 .0000
41.0000
44 .0000
61.0000
57.000-3
47.0000
69 .0000
71.0000
48.0300
69.0000
54.0000
70 .3000
71 .0000
6! .3000
42 .0003
62.0000
•9.0JOO
11.9SOC








00 100
DO

ii.aooo
10.4000
3.70030

10.5000

11.4000
9 70000
9 70000
6 00000
3 43000
3 40000
a :ooso
7 50000
. 00000
3 '300UO
3 OOOOli
. 4000JC
a.jooao
9.50000
.400000
11.3003
,.*~















00301
•ES
97
41
39

31

91
100
91
50
91
96
18
32
4 .
33
90
4 .
37
i?
1.
31
CENT
.lan
.3791
.6907

.1791

.4426
.0000
.2692
.4202
.1111
.551'
.0434
.6087
43143
.3339
.909 1
;iooo
.6299
.6239
44o27
.0936
070039 LON^l
L11G LA«E 10 It E .A7E?S»£ET
44 :4 11.2 339 :: i?.: i
i4041 «t:il3«i
f_A<£ S'jpE^ICy J7C79]
."e OHTCtAOON 3:vE =
;4ACNI'i9
3030 ?EET j£?TM :'.»33 3'
0040:
5'J
4.53:00
6.50.;oo
4.50030
4.33000
6.50003
5.03000
5.00000
6.60000
5.600CO
5.30000
6.30000
6.30000 '
5.90000
5.60000
5.30300
6.5.000
5 . 30000

4.2..'OC.)
5 . 20COG
5.23000
6.50000
          1) Stored parameter data values
          2) Calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
                             WQ-RET
                              6-48

-------
                                                      Un-icnized
                                                       Ammonia
                                                     Calculation

                                                      PGM=MEAN,
CLASSIFICATION:
       Program Associated Function;
       Calculation of Un-ionized Ammonia
USE:
This function is performed automatically by the MEAN
program on each sample which contains the proper set of
parameter code keywords described below.  This function
is not invoked by a keyword/value specification.
PROCEDURE:
          To have the percent of un-ionized ammonia calculated by
          the MEAN program, specify the following parameters
          within the retrieval request:  P=10 (temperature  in
          degrees Celsius) or P=ll (temperature in degrees
          Fahrenheit); P=400 (pH.) or P = 403 (lab pH); P = 610  (total
          ammonia, mg/1 as N) or P=71845 (total ammonia, mg/1 as
          NH4); and P=619  (percentage of un-ionized ammonia).
          The MEAN program will then automatically perform  the
          necessary conversions and calculations, and will  place
          the calculated values into the positions associated
          with parameter 619.  (-It- is essential that P = 619  be--
          specif led in the retrieval, otherwise no computation
          will result, as  there would be no column in which  to
          record the results of the calculations.)  The percent
          of un-ionized ammonia in the water is computed
          according to the table provided by -Thurston, et al,
          1974.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          The program will use either of the temperature or
          ammonia parameters it finds if both are specified  in a
          retrieval.  If a data value exists for both of the
          temperature or ammonia parameters for the same date,
          the program will use parameter 00011  (degrees F) for
          the temperature and 71845  (ammonia, total NH) for
          ammonia instead of 00010  (degrees C)  and 00610 (total
          ammonia).  The limits of  the computation are between 5
          and 30 degrees C and between 6 and 10 pH units.  For
          example, when pH is 8.5 and temperature is 34 degrees
          C, 20% will be used to compute un-ionized ammonia.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-49

-------
Temperature and pH are the two most commonly measured
parameters in the WQF, while ammonia is number 13 in
terms of reporting frequency.  Consequently there is a
good chance that the data necessary for the calculation
will be present for the stations of interest.

This calculation will not be performed on samples
containing a user stored value for un-ionized ammonia.

The MEAN program cannot compute loadings if PARfJ and
PARF are used (see Data Selection Keywords in Section
4) .
                   WQ-RET
                    6-50

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Provide  statistical  summaries
          including  calculations of
          un-ionized ammonia.
  PGM=MEAN,PURP=305B/STA,
  A=14AGNFS9,S=070G09,
  P=11,P=40C,P=6IO,P=619,P = 3 0 0 ,
  3D=7301C1,DG=S,
                        1.0

                        3 0
                                IG'L
                                     •H3-
                                     :C-'
                0 00
                0 10
                0 15
                0 1:
                0 3o

''°°*


0022
J J44



jo ; 3

]
t
j
?
7
4
3
i
i
J
o
j
'J
o
J
y
J
.J

"-^
.0*0
. c ;j o . j s ;
.60 •; . j c. o
.60 0.050
.30 J.Ji-,
.JU -J.050
.30 J . J ^ J
.90 J . J i 'i
.ad ; . J i L,
10.S

i I 4






























V*8NT.'LAKE


2»TE ?[.1£ 2E? TH
?p>:- 3F
70 3At ?tIT
J''Jl/Oj 0925
j / (1 i / 1 i )930
l/io/04 090U
/10/li 1030
/ io/ ;i I'.oo
,11/04 1000
.•04/23 1010
.'05/13 1015
,'05/23 1010
/05/23 1045
,'Og/lC 3910
/07/1J 1100
/OS/01 1000
.'03/03 1015
/Oa/03 10JO
/ 10/29 0950






300 1 I
'ATE?
Tt.^P
?ArtH
J .0000
? .0000
3.0JOO
;.oooo
3 . J 0 0 0
3 .0000
4 .0000
3 .0000
7.0000
7.0300
9.0000
3.0000
3.0000
3.0300
4.0000







30 400
??

iU
3.50000
5 . 50000
3 . 50000
3 .00000
5. 50000
3.00000
6.00000
3 .60000
3.30000
5.JOOOO
3.30003
6.30000
5. ,0000
6.60000
5.30000
6.50000
"7





306 10
NH1-N
TOTAL
•n/L






35-jCOOO
05C 300Q
0500000
0500000
0500000
.0500000
.0500000
.0500000
.2dOOOO







006 : )
•j.i- ion:
: SMI-.HH
i «a/L






.30000)3
.30-00151
.0000609
.0000102
.000160)
.000ia;4
.0001919
.0000983
.OOOO'SS

O'OOO' '-•-.•"•.I
43 It 31.; >39 ii 43. C I
:»05i ncaiMN
19 >NTCXAGO'4 3IVE3
UWSfS'9
1000 fEET 3EPT" .".•Si 33
00130
00

«C,'.
13. JOOO
10.6000
i . -OSOO

10 .5000

11.4000
1 M'OOO
) 70000
3 00000
1 40000
j 40000
i 10000
7 50030
.700000
11. JOOO
           1)  Stored parameter data values
           2)  Calculation of un-ionized ammonia
                              WQ-RET
                               6-51

-------
                                                       PGM=PLOT,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The PLOT program retrieves data from the WQF and plots
          the values of each selected parameter for each selected
          station (Y-axis) for the specified time period (X-
          axis).  Values plotted may take the form of raw
          concentrations (mg/1), loadings (Ibs/dy), or
          logarithms.  The program allows for the control of the
          plot format including size control and plot symbols
          used.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
          valid with the PLOT program.  The parameter keyword P
          may be specified up to 10 times.

OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:

          The program generates the plot data onto a magnetic
          tape which is forwarded to EPA headquarters for
          plotting and dissemination to the user.

          Users should exercise restraint in producing a large
          number of plots in a relatively short period of time.
          Each specification of 'PGM=PLOT,' generates a separate
          plot tape which is sent to EPA by the computer services
          vendor.  Requests for a large number of plots in a
          short period of time may result in a backlog of tapes
          to be plotted at EPA and a depletion of the number of
          tapes available for use as plot tapes.  If you have any
          questions relating to your particular plotting
          requirements, please call STORET User Assistance.

          The following keywords described in the MEAN program
          may be used with the PLOT program to plot calculated
          values:

               LOAD      allows computation of stream loadings
               LOG       calculates logarithmic values
               LL1...    specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
                         values
               LV        establishes  lower limit for a parameter
                         value
               HV        establishes upper limit for a parameter
                         value
               calculation of dissolved oxygen saturation
               calculation of un-ionized ammonia
                             WQ-RET
                               6-55

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
           Plot values of  iron(P=1045
           The starting  date for the
           x-axis(time)  is  to be
           January 1,  1973.
PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
A-14AGNFS9,5=070009,
P=1045,
3D=730101,
PRT=NO,
                   145 '.-4 31. i is? j!
                    -3*0 ..-axS :: "; i
                   CCCC .-E-- 3E»?H -1 = 53 OC
                 s .
                                        soo  ice '.we ;toc
                               WQ-RET
                                 6-56

-------
                                                         FACT
                                                          SYM
                                                       PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE:
          These keywords may be used with the PLOT program to
          specify the size of each plot and the plotting symbol
          to be used to represent the plotted data points.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
          FACT=n,    where n is any numerical value, including a
                     decimal value, between 0.1 and 5 inclusive.
                     The specified value is the multiple by which
                     the basic plot size of 5 1/2" x 6 1/2"
                     (FACT=1.0) is increased or decreased.

          SYM=mss,   where ss  is any two digit whole number that
                     equates to one of the plotting symbols shown
                     below, and where m is an optional minus
                     sign which specifies that the plotted symbols
                     are not to be connected by straight lines.
a
 00
01
            02
            03
                                               04
                                                     05
                                                           06
/\
 07
                       Z   Y
08
09
                                   10
                                         11
                                                     11
                              20
                     The value of 20 specifies that no symbol  is  to
                     be plotted.
DEFAULT VALUES
NOTES ON USAGE:
                     Leading zeroes must be specified.


                                                   connected by
                 FACT-1.40,  (7.75" x 9.0")
                 SYM=02,  (plot using the symbol
                          straight  lines. )
          These keywords may be specified only once  in a
          retrieval request.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-57

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Plot values of water temperature      PGM=PLOT,?URP=305B/STA,
          and DO as a function of time          A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          using an "X" to mark data points.     P=ll,?=300,
          The size of the plot produced         BD=730101,
          is to be approximately 11" by 13".    FACT=2,5YM*4,
                                                PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-58

-------
                                                         sc

                                                       PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword

USE:      This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
          specify that the scales of the axes of the plots are  to
          be uniform throughout the program.  The keyword SC
          specifies that the scales of all plots associated with
          stations and parameters are to be identical.

KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:

          SC=A,      examines all of the data retrieved and
                     then sets scales according to the maximum
                     value for each parameter retrieved and the
                     maximum number of days.  This causes the
                     scales for the various plots to be the
                     same.

DEFAULT VALUES:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          If  'SC*A,' is not specified, the x- and y-axes will be
          set  to the maximum and minimum sampling dates and
          maximum parameter values for each parameter at each
          station.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-59

-------
EXAMPLE(S)
          Plot values of DO for the three
          stations specified (i.e.  three
          plots will be produced).   The
          sampling characteristics  of the
          three stations are as follows:
                            PGM«PLOT,PURP-305B/STA,
                            A=14AGNFS9,S=C70C02,
                            S=070006,5=070009,
                            P=300,
                            30=730101,
                            SC = A,
                            PRT=NO,
         station
          070002
          070006
          070009
     date
730108/760713
730108/740516
730103/760713
max, value
  . 11.0
   16.4
   13.9
          Since 'SC=A,'  is specified the axes
          will be set as follows for all three
          plots.
                   origin point
                       730103
                          0
                end point
                  760713
                    16.4
                             WQ-RET
                               6-60

-------
                                                        NOPLOT,

                                                       PGM=PLOT,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword

USE:      This keyword may be used with the PLOT program to
          eliminate the plotting .of specified parameters.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUE:

          NOPLOT,    specifies that the values of the  immediately
                     preceding parameter are not to be plotted.
                     There is no value associated with this keyworc

DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          If not specified, all requested parameters will be
          plotted.

          NOPLOT applies to each parameter keyword it  follows,
          and can be specified as many times as is required
         .within a retrieval request, up to a maximum  of 10
          times. -

SOME REPRESENTATIVE USES:

          For calculating  loadings, a flow parameter must be
          retrieved, but need not be plotted.
EXAMPLE(S):
          Plot loadings for parameter      PGM=PLOT,PURP=305B/STA,
          650 at the specified station     A=1115D050,5=255420,
          but do not plot values for the   P=60,NOPLOT,P=650,LOAD,
          flow parameter  (60).
                             WQ-RET
                              6-61

-------
                                                        PGM=LOC,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The LOG program plots a map of the area defined with
          any station selection method, and plots a symbol to
          denote the locations of all stations within thac area,
          the state boundaries, and optionally, the county
          boundaries and polygon vertices.  The map will be a
          maximum of 24" high  (north/south), and 49" wide
          (east/west) to include the area plotted.  Included with
          the map is a listing of all stations and their
          associated latitude  and longitude coordinates.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All station identification keywords described  in
          Section 4 are valid  with this program.  Data selection
          keywords are not valid since the LOG program retrieves
          no data.  The HEAD keyword may be specified and will
          appear in the title  block of the map.   (When used with
          LOG, the text of the HEAD keyword may not exceed 35
          characters.)  SHIFT, PRT and ?RMI are not valid for
          LOG.

          All advanced general retrieval keywords described in
          Section- 5 are v-alid  except the-PM keyword-.--

OTHER NOTES AND COMMENTS:

          Although all station selection methods are valid, it  is
          recommended that polygon selection (LT,L keywords) be
          used to ensure the most accurate locations of  stations
          plotted.

          See the LOG program  description in Section 7,  Advanced
          Retrieval Programs and Their Special Keywords, for a
          discussion of the use of LT=NORET to eliminate the
          plotting of stations located at unwanted or
          incorrectly-stored coordinates.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-65

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
          Plot a map of the area
          described by the specified
          polygon,  with symbols plotted
          to denote stations belonging
          to agency 21MICH.
PGM»LOC,PURP-305H/STA,
TAGS,STREAMS,CLR,
SCALE=250000,
LT=I,
L-4320,L«8404,L=4315,
L-833730,L-4330,L-8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L«432230,L*825230,
L-433730,L-825230,L«433730,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4345,
L-8315,L-433730,L-8315,
L*4330,L=8345,L«433C,L=8405,
U-21MICH,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-66

-------
                                                         SCALE
                                                        PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The SCALE keyword may be used with the LOG program to
specify the desired scale for the map to be plotted.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          SCALE=scale,
                      where scale is any numerical value
                      indicating the scale desired.  No
                      commas are to be embedded within
                      the value.  Units are in a map-
                      distance to real-distance ratio',
                      so SCALE=500000, will produce a
                      map at scale 1:500,000.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Scale=5000000,  (5 million)

NOTES ON USAGE:

           If  this keyword  is  not specified,  the system
           maximize  the scale  used, based  upon  the size
           area  to be plotted.
                                             will
                                             of the
           If the scale specified would result  in a map  over  24"
           high  (north-south direction) or  49"  wide (east-west
           direction), this keyword will  be  ignored,  and the  map
           will  be reduced to  24" x 49".

           This  keyword must be used  in order to obtain  any
           standard map scale; a standard scale is not
           automatically provided if  SCALE  is not specified.
EXAMPLE(S)
           The map  specified  is  to  be
           plotted  with  a  scale  of
           1:250000.
                                  PGM»LOC,PURP-305B/STA,
                                  SCALE=250000,
                                  LT=I,
                                  L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
                                  L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
                                  L»4330,L»830730,L=430730,
                                  L«8304,L»432230,L-825230,
                                  L«433730,L«825230,L-43373C,
                                  L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=434:
                                  L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
                                  L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=840:
                                  U=21MICH,
                              WQ-RET
                               6-67

-------
                                                         NOCOUN,
                                                        PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The NOCOUN keyword may be used with the LOG program to
suppress the mapping of county boundaries.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          NOCOUN,    There is no value associated with this
                     keyword.

DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          On maps covering large geographical areas, the presence
          of county boundaries on the map may hinder the study
          and  interpretation of the map.  Specifying NOCOUN can
          help alleviate this condition, as well as reduce the
          cost of the plot.
EXAMPLE(S:
          The map specified will be
          plotted with county lines
          suppresed.
                                 PGM=LOC,PURP=3053/STA,
                                 SCALE = 250000,NOCOUN,
                                 LT= I
                                 L=4320,L=34G4,L=4315,
                                 L=833730,L=4330,L=S3i5,
                                 L«4330,L«83073Q,L*430730,
                                 L=8304,L=432230,L=825230,
                                 L«433730,L«325230,L«433720,
                                 L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=434:
                                 L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
                                 L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405
                                 U=21MICH,
                             WQ-RET
                               6-69

-------
                                                       NOPOLPLT,
                                                        PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword
USE:
The NOPOLPLT keyword may be used with the LOG program
(when the area whose stations are to be plotted is
defined by a polygon) to suppress mapping of the
polygon.
KEYWORD FORMAT AflD VALUES:

          NOPOLPLT,
                There is no value associated with this
                keyword.
DEFAULT VALUE:  Not applicable.

EXAMPLE(S):
          The map
          plotted
          polygon
        specified will
        without the
        outline.
be
PGM=LOC,PURP-305B/STA,
SCAL£=250000,NOPOLPLT,
LT=I,
L=4320,L=8404, L=4315,
L=833730,L=4330,L=8315,
L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
L=8304,L=432230,L=32523C,
L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4343,
L=8315,L=433730,L=8315,
L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
U=21MICH,
                              WQ-RET
                               6-71

-------
                                                         TAGS,     I
                                                        STREAMS,  !
                                                          CLR,     !
                                                        PGM=LOG,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE:
          These keywords may be used with the LOG program to tag
          stations with a cross reference number, and to plot,
          where available, streams, cities, lakes, and
          reservoirs.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          TAGS,      specifies that each station plotted on the
                     map  is to be tagged with a coded identifier
                     which relates to a listing of descriptive
                     information for the stations.

          STREAMS,   specifies that stream traces are to be plotted,
                     if the data are available.   (Areas which have  •
                     such data include the State of Michigan and
                     the  Southeast Region.)

          CLR,       specifies that the outlines of cities, lakes,
                     and  reservoirs are to be plotted, if the data
                     are  available.  (Areas which have such data
                     include the State of Michigan and the
                     Southeast Region.)

          There are no values associated with any of these keywords.

DEFAULT VALUES:  Not applicable.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          If TAGS is specified, only 300 stations may be
          retrieved/plotted.  STORET will produce up to 5 maps to
          avoid overprinting any of the tags.  Users should not
          use  this keyword when plotting many stations located in
          a relatively small area.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-73

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          For the previous map include     PGM-LOC, PURP=305B/STA,
          cross reference tags for the     TAGS,STREAMS,CLR,
          stations, stream traces, and     SCALE*250000,
          outlines of cities,  lakes        LT=I,
          and reservoirs.                  L=4320,L=8404,L=4315,
                                           L=83 3730 ,L=4330,L=8315,
                                           L=4330,L=830730,L=430730,
                                           L = 83.04,L=432230, L = 825230,
                                           L=433730,L=825230,L=433730,
                                           L=8247,L=4345,L=8247,L=4345,
                                           L=8315,L«433730,L=8315,
                                           L=4330,L=8345,L=4330,L=8405,
                                           U=21MICH,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-74

-------
                                                      PGM=STAND,
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:

          The STAND program compares the stored values of
          selected water quality parameters with a set of values
          (criteria) specified in the retrieval request.  These
          criteria, for instance, could be the State or Federal
          standards currently in force for a particular stream
          segment of interest.  Stored parameter values which do
          not satisfy the criteria comparison are flagged with an
          asterisk in the printed output.  The program provides
          for various output formats, including violations lists
          and violations summaries.

GENERAL KEYWORD APPLICABILITY:

          All general keywords described in Sections 4 and 5 are
          valid with the STAND program.  The parameter keyword P
          may be specified up to 50 times.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-77

-------
PROGRAM OUTPUT:
Retrieve a  list  of  violations
along with  supporting parameter
values and  a  violations summary.
The parameters  to be examined
are iron (P=1045) with maximum
criteria of  500  and -coliforms
(P=31501) with  maximum criteria
of 600.
                                             PGM = STAND,PURP = 30 53/STA,
                                             A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
                                             P=11,P=300/P=400,P=610,
                                             P=1045,HV=500,P=315C1,HV=600,
                                             BD«730101,
                                             PSA=T,PVS=T,
                                             PRT=NO,
                  -tTrt aOPPOST :NO
                     • ATEP
                     TiMP
                     :"*HN
                                             i'OOO*     -ONGL
                                             46 i * ) i. 2 •: 3 $ :: i s.:
                                             LONG LAKi • ; *r. i -*TS
                                             ZoOH    «;CHICAN
                                         :i'J4$   31 >01
                                         :?ON  TOT COL I
A*3NT/1AX





M 3K VAi'JES
.«.;AN
.•S3 IAS
NC 2f VIOLJ
JSPCiNT VIOL
•:N;*U* v:ji.
.1EAN VIOL
.fAXIUjfl VIOL



3u««
;Uvll OOJCO
•iAT^S 00
?AMS "0-L
12 22
SO. 10.
»2. 9.
o o
0 . 0 .
:. o.
0 . fl .
0. 0.



r ;F VIOLATIONS ON
OJ4CC -3J610
?H ,
-------
                                                        LV,HV

                                                      PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords
USE:
These keywords may be used with the STAND program  to
establish the upper and lower limits against which
parameter values are to be compared.  Parameter values
which are outside of these keyword values are  flagged
with asterisks in the printed output.  Either  or both
can be used in a retrieval.
KEYWORD FORMATS AND VALUES:
          LV=lower-limit,
          HV=upper-limit,
                      where lower-limit  is any  numerical
                      value,  including a decimal  value,
                      between -899E+7 and +899E+7.   LV
                      establishes the lower  limit  for a
                      parameter value; parameter  values
                      less, or lower, than lower-limit
                      will be flagged.

                      where upper-limit  is any  numerical
                      value,  including a decimal  value,
                      between — 8-9-9E+7--and- -»-89-9E-t-7-.-  -
                      Parameter values which  are
                      greater than upper-limit  will
                      be flagged.
DEFAULT VALUES
NOTES ON USAGE:
       LV=-899E+7,
       HV=f899E+7,
          These keywords  apply  only  to  the  preceding  parameter
          code keyword  (P),  and in order  to flag  any  values
          outside  the specified criteria, either,  or  both,  but at
          least one, of these keywords  must be  specified in a
          'PGM=STAND,'  retrieval  request.

          Although  LV and HV may  be  used  with both programs STAND
          and MEAN,  their function  is different with  each
          program.   With  program  STAND, values  which  are not
          within the specified  limits are flagged; with program
          MEAN, values  which are  not within the specified limits
          are excluded.
                              WQ-RET
                               6-79

-------
          LV and HV may be specified, in any order.   Up. to  5.0
          pairs of P and LV/HV keywords can be spec-ified  in a-
          single retrieval request.
EXAMPLE(S)
          Flag all temperature values      PGM=STAND,PURP=3053/STA,
          less than 35 degrees F and       A=14AGNFS9,5=070009,
          all coliform values greater      P-ll,LV=35,P=31501,HV=600
          than 600.                        BD-730101,
                                           PRT=NO,
                             WQ-RET
                               6-80

-------
                                                         PS I
                                                         PSA
                                                         PVS
                                                         PSO

                                                      PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keywords

USE:      These keywords may be used with the STAND program to
          specify the format for the program's output.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          PSI=T,     specifies that only the number of parameters
                     retrieved, the criteria for these parameters,
                     and the number of transformations to be
                     performed are to be printed.

          PSA=T,     specifies that the flagged value of each
                     parameter that violated the specified criteria
                     will be printed for each occurrence.  In
                     addition, it will print the supporting data
                    •values for all other parameters specified for
                     each violation that occurred.  (I.e., if a
                     violation occurred at a certain date for one
                     parameter, the data for all parameters
                     specified are to be printed for that date.)

          PVS=T,     specifies that a summary of the values falling
                     outside the criteria specified for all
                     parameters is to be printed.

          PSO=T,     specifies that only those parameters that are
                     in violation of the specified criteria are
                     to be printed.

DEFAULT VALUES:  PVS=T, PSO=T,
                             WQ-RET
                              6-81

-------
NOTES ON USAGE:
          .Any combination of these four keywords may be specified
          in a STAND retrieval.

          The summary provided by 'PVS=T,' includes the
          following:

            Number of total values
            Mean of total values
            Median of the total values
            Number of violations within the total
              values
            Percent of violations
            Minimum value of those in violation
            Mean value of those in violation
            Maximum value of those in violation
            Minimum value specified in the retrieval
              request as a criteria
            Maximum value specified.in the retrieval
              request as a criteria
                             WQ-RET
                              6-82

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
            Produce  all  four  output
            formats.   The following
            annotated output  shows
            the results  of the retrieval.
                           ?GM=STAND,PUR?=3053/STA,
                           A=14AGNFS9,S=070009,
                           P=11,LV=35,P=31501,HV=600,
                           30=730101,
                           PVS=T,PSO=T,
                           PSA=T,PSI=T,
                           PRT=NO,
                           CJNTHOL [NFOi».-«Ar:-J!i AS i.WJT
                           i7ATI3..j/CaiTS*lA LIST
                           ;TVC!U>i 3TH-KISC    JJIViSIA  0
                                CSITEJIA  1


                              I   1S.OJ-J""
                 JUM.ITY v:OLAT:C.-i5
                 AMSHT.'UKE
                        00011   31501
                        •ATE*   TOT COUI
                        TEX?   KMKCNOO
                    TIME  ?AHN   /100XL
              •J/Ol/J] 09!5
              :j/o«/04 o^oo
              :i/a«/u mis
              •1/12/20 1050
Jl.OU-   10.0
63.00  1500.0*
it.00   100.3-
J3.00'    i.O
                          to 14 !!.! lit 21 43.0 I

                                  ."1CHISAN

                           3 3NTC*ACOH RIVtR

                           oooo FEET 3e?TH ;LAS$
                                                   ioOSJ
                                                   LAKE
            1)  Output  specified  by 'PSI-T,'
            2)  Output  specified  by 'PSA=T/<
                                   WQ-RET
                                     6-83

-------
            VIOLATIONS
      A-OST/ LAKE
               300i:    )i'.ji
               • A7ER    TOT COLi
               TE.1P    1FI.12NOO
   OATE   71,'E   fAHN    /10J*L

 •3/01/0) 1125     D.'JO-
 •J/uo/^4 g)uO            1500.0-
 •1/-H/U 3»1=             iOt.O-
 "j/12/20 U5J     13.00'
                                   0
                                                        CO)
                                                        4  !; .2  OS
 -A7ER DUALITY VIOLATIONS
                                   G
                                                      j-ooos        :
                                                     46 14  H.2  Hi :i
                                                     L01-;  LA
-------
                                                         TS
                                                     | PGM=STAND,
CLASSIFICATION:  Program Associated Keyword

USE:      This keyword may be used with the STAND program to
          perform a linear transformation of water quality
          parameter values prior to the values' comparison with
          the specified criteria.  The form of the linear
          transformation is Y=A+BX.

KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

          TS=abcd,   where abed represents a 24 digit value, as
                     follows:

                     a   is the two-digit positional indicator for
                         parameter Y
                     b   is the two-digit positional indicator for
                         parameter X
                     c   is the ten-digit intercept value A  in
                         the linear transformation equation
                     d   is the ten-digit slope value B  in the
                         linear transformation equation

                     Leading and trailing zeroes must be coded.

DEFAULT VALUE:  None.

NOTES ON USAGE:

          This keyword must be coded precisely, using the 24
          digit abed as a fixed format, position dependent value.

          If the parameter referenced by b is not stored for a
          given point, no transformations will be performed.

          Since transformation results are recorded under the
          parameter referenced by  the A and Y values,
          transformation will not  be performed for samples that
          already contain a raw data observation for that
          parameter.

          X is the parameter present in the sample, and  Y. is the
          parameter to which it is transformed.
                             WQ-RET
                              6-85

-------
EXAMPLE(S):
          Assume that data on phosphorus   PGM=STAND,PURP=3053/STA,
          at a particular station are      A-11140100,3=173816,
          stored as both parameter 665     P=665,LV=1.2,HV«1.7,P=650,
          (phosphorus total), and
          parameter 650 (total             PRT=NO,
          phosphorus as P04).   Also
          assume these two phosphate
          parameters can be equated
          using the transformation
          P665+ 0.33333 (P650), which
          transforms the P04 to total
          phosphate.  The example shown
          will convert values for
          parameter 650 using the
          transormation shown prior to
          comparing the parameter values
          (for 665 and 650 transformed)
          against the specified criteria.
                             WQ-RET
                               6-86

-------
APPENDIX 1:  INDEX OF AVAILABLE HELP FILES

A number of helpful data sets are maintained on the system by
STORE! User Assistance.  These data sets are available on-line
and can be listed at any time by simply entering the appropriate
commands from a low-speed keyboard type terminal.  They also may
be printed at an RJE terminal.

The STORET help data set named INDEX provides a listing of the
names of all currently available help data sets.  This data set
also gives the date each data set was added or  last changed.
STORET users should occasionally list this data set and scan the
date column for any help data sets added or changed since they
last reviewed the index.

The STORET help data set named PRNTHELP contains the job control
language necessary to produce a listing of the  names of STORET
help data sets at a user's RJE terminal.
                              WQ-RET
                               Al-1

-------
APPEiNDIX 2:  TABLES OF WQF KEYWORDS 3Y RETRIEVAL PROGRAM

The following two tables depict the applicability of all general
retrieval keywords (described in sections 4 and 5 of chapter WQ-
RET) with respect to the WQF retrieval programs.  Table A2-1
lists the keywords in alphabetical order; table A2-2 lists the
keywords by functional group.  The following Key to Table Entries
applies to both tables.

                      KEY TO TABLE ENTRIES

                     meaning

                     keyword may be used; keyword description
                     found in Section 4
                     keyword may be used; keyword description
                     found in Section 5
                     keyword is not valid for the designated
                     program; do not use
            *        keyword must be used
            +        keyword may be used (Table A2-2)
            G        keyword may be used; keyword description
                     found in Appendix G
            I        keyword may be used; keyword description
                     found in Appendix I
                              WQ-RET
                               A2-1

-------
                  TABLE A2rl
GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY RETRIEVAL  PROGRAM,
ALL-
INV120
FARM RET INVENT MEAN PLOT LOG STAND  INDEX  STA  PUNCH  MS? REG NOPAr,
A
AGGR
ANC
ARCLASS
AREA
B
BD,ED
BG,EG
BOT
BS
BT,ET
D
DSROC
EXTRACT
HEAD
IS
LT,L
MASK
NCRET
NOSELECT
NOTU
ONLYU
P
PARF
PARONLY
PARU
PGM
PLV,PHV
PRV
PM
PRMI
PRT
PURP
RMI
R
S
SELECT
SHIFT
ST
STC,CO
4
no
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
4
no
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
no
no
no
4
4
,*
t
4
4
4
4
4
•4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
no
4
4
4
no
4
4
no
5
4
4
4
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4 •
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
4
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
no
4
no
no
4
4
5
5
4
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
no
4
5
no
4
4
4*
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
G
4
4
5
5
A
*t
4
4
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4*
4
A
t
4
no
4
4
4
4
no
4
4
.1
•»
no
4
no
no
no
5
3
no
no
4*
4
4
4
4*
4
4
5
4
4
4*
no
4
4*
5
4
no
no
j
t
no
no
4
4
4
no
no
nc
A
T
no
no
no
•i
no
no
4
•i
^
5
T
4
no
no
no
no
4*
no
no
no
no
no
4*
4
•t
no
4
5
no
4
4
                     WQ-RET
                      A2-2

-------
                           TABLE A2-1
                            CONTINUED
STCNTY   no    4
U        no    4
UD,LD     4    4
UK       no    4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
no
no
no
no
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
no
no
4
4
.1
~y
^
no
no
                              WQ-RET
                               A2-3

-------
                  TABLE A2-2

GENERAL RETRIEVAL KEYWORDS BY' FUNCTIONAL GROUP-
                             »    .     - •' . 4   • ••  -





1
r
1
1
1
1


1
1

1

1
1
1
1
1
!.


l
1

i
i

'
i
I

i
1
'•
!
1

i
1
i

i
1
1
1
I

1




I
SEC-I RETRIEVAL
TIONI . 1 ! 1 ! 1 1 1 i
i TAV?L.';G ='~-
•VS4LY3 13 VSC :
. i
!
. : 1
•JT II 1
201 .SOPI? i L:C : :•;:
M

1 : ' t
1 i - •
1

i | l '
1 , '. * "
; : * 1 -
II*. '
• . : 1
' * ! " ' "
i i '.
ii-
1 ' :
i :
;
• ' .
<
; i so •;".
1 i SO ; ''.•', ' s
: i so si ;
! i -JO : M: •:
; : •;- ; -;-; .
. i -;^ \ .;'",
i i NO i '. ; ; •:
j i •;<} , .j,-. ; •;
: i \*c- ' •; :
i ' •.•'" N;
i | ,;-- . ..^ . .;
1 ' ''i'~' • ",'; "'.
-. \ '•"'? :.'•";
i : •[•;, - . •;
1 l :
, ; ;
| j ^.^ ' M '• 1 •;
! ' '' ' ' * i '«
i i -;o ! *;.: i s
i i 'io i NJ i •:
1 ! > '
i 1 i
! 1 * ! * i -
!!•.!+ i--

ll NO ! NO 1
! f J i
_0> . . ^ '.




1
X 57-


-






















i












•; ^


i N-
*( ;

* :•; z

                     WQ-RET

                      A2-4

-------
APPENDIX 3:  SUMMARY OF RETRIEVAL KEYWORD DESCRIPTIONS

This appendix provides a complete summary, in alphabetical order,
of all WQF retrieval keywords.  Each entry gives a brief
description of the keyword's function and the number (letter)
within parentheses indicates the WQ-RET section (appendix) in
which the keyword is described in detail.  Keywords are generally
applicable to all WQF retrieval programs unless otherwise noted.

          Keyword      Description

            A          (4) retrieves stations by agency codes
            ADDM       (7) inserts a mileage for a retrieved
                           station (MSP)
            AGGR       (4) combines data retrieved from a group of
                           stations into a single station
            ANC        (4) specifies the type of composite sampling
                           information to be retrieved
            ARCLASS    (4) retrieves archived data
            AREA       (4) retrieves stations within designated 203
                           areas
            ASA99      (7) generates overlays of the 99-area set
                           of Aggregated Subareas (LOG, MSP)
            AT         (7) specifies the inserted location of a
                           station relative to another station with
                           a known mileage (MSP)
            AUXFILE    (7) specifies additional location data to
                           be plotted (LOO
            AUXSYM     (7) specifies the plotting symbol to be
                           plotted for auxfile (LOO
            B          (4) qualifies specified stations as individual
                           or a range of stations
            BASE       (6) establishes beginning date for statistical
                           analysis (MEAN)
            BD         (4) restricts parametric data to samples taken
                         '  after a certain date
            BEGIN      (7) a dummy keyword, often used with the
                           SAMSTA keyword (MSP)
            BG         (4) eliminates parametric data outside of
                           a date group
            EOT        (4) specifies whether or not bottom (mud)
                           samples are to be retrieved
            BS         (4) retrieves stations by major/minor/sub
                           basin codes
            BT         (4) restricts parametric data to samples
                           taken after a specified time
            CKNO       (7) specifies the position of the first
                           character in the check value field (LOO
            CKWDTH     (7) specifies the number of characters in
                           the check value field (LOO
            CLR        (6) plots outlines of cities, lakes, and
                           reservoirs (LOO
                             WQ-RET
                              A3-1

-------
Keyword
Description
CO
COMSCL
CONLEV

CONN
CONV
CSIZE
D

DELM

DG
DG=,
DM
DO SAT

DR
DSROC

EARLY
ED

EG

ET

EXTRACT


FACT
FLEX

GRAPHNO

GROUPS
(4)
(7)
(7
(7)
(7)
(7)
(4)

(7)

(6)
(7)
(6)
(6)

(6)
(4)

(7)
(4)

(4)

(4)

(4)
 (6)
 (7)

 (7)

 (7)
                 retrieves stations b'y county codes
                 specifies that the scales of a plot
                 are to be the same as the previous
                 plot (MSP) .
                 sets the vertical (z-axis) increment at
                 which contour lines are to be drawn (MS?)
                 draws a continuous line through the
                 plotted stations even if a station
                 is not plotted (MSP)
                 produces an all-character output (RET)
                 specifies the height  of the first line
                 of characters in the  title block
                 (LOC, MSP)
                 specifies units associated with
                 depth-related output
                 specifies that a station is not to
                 be plotted on every plot (MSP)
                 specifies date grouping criteria (MEAN)
                 suppresses printing of statistical
                 calculations performed by the MEAN
                 program (MEAN)
                 controls decimal placement (MEAN/
                 method of calculating dissolved oxygen
                 saturation (MEAN)
                 controls decimal placement (RET)
                 specifies whether grab or composite
                 samples are to be retrieved
                 specifies the areas or stations to be
                 used as an early point of reference f-or
                 a trend map (MSP)
                 restricts parametric data to samples
                 taken before a certain date
                 eliminates parametric data outside of
                 a date group
                 restricts parametric data to samples
                 taken before a specified time
                 restricts retrieval to stations
                 with certain parameter or type
                 characteristics
                 controls size of plot (PLOT)
                 omits plotting of contour lines outside
                 a specified polygon (MSP)
                 specifies symbols or types of shading
                 to be plotted (MSP)
                 partitions data  linearly into groups
                 (MSP)
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-2

-------
Keyword

  GROUPSB

  GROUPSQ
Description
(7)

(7)
HEAD
HV
I NCR
IS
L
LABEL
LATE
LD
LEFTn
LK1/LH2
LINEAR
LINMIL
LINSTA
LL1/LL2
LOAD
LOG
LT
LT=NORET
LV
(4)
(6)
(7)
(G)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(6)
    partitions data into groups at specified
    breakpoints (MSP)
    partitions data into four groups having
    an approximately equal number of
    observations in each group (MSP)
    specifies user-written report
    identification information
    establishes upper limit for a parameter
    value (MEAN, PLOT,. STAND)
    specifies the number of miles per
    unit increment along the x-axis for
    mileage-linear plots (MSP)
    retrieves intensive survey data
    specifies latitude and longitude
    coordinates for a polygon retrieval
    supplies map title information
    specifies the areas or stations to be
    used as a late point of reference for
    a trend map (MSP)
    specifies a lower depth limitation
    for samples
    specifies that the scale, parameter
    and values of the nth parameter are
    appear on the left side of the plot
    specifies acceptable ranges for
    parameter values (MEAN, PLOT)
    plots a parameter on a linear scale
    specifies mileage-linear scaling for
    the x-axis  (MSP)
    specifies station-linear scaling for
    the x-axis  (MS?)
    specifies acceptable ranges for parameter
    values (MEAN, PLOT)
    allows computation of stream loadings
    (MEAN, PLOT)
    calculates  logarithmic values prior
    to statistical analysis  (MEAN, PLOT);
    plots a parameter on a log scale (MSP)
    selects stations within a user
    defined polygon
    eliminates  the plotting of data located
    at unwanted coordinates  (LOG, MSP)
    establishes lower limit for a parameter
    value (MEAN, PLOT, STAND)
                                                     name
                                                     to
                                                     (MS?'
                                                     (MSP;
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-3

-------
Keyword
Description
M + nS

M-nS

MASK

MAX

MEAN
MEAN=n

MIN

MODELL

MODELR

MORE

MSPARMS

MUL


NMIN

NOBOX

NOCONN


NOCOUN

NOLIST


NOPARCDS

NOPAREND

NOPLOT

NOPOLAUX

NOPOLPLT

NORET

NOSELECT
(7)

(7)

(4)

(7)

(7)
(7)

(7)

(7)

(7)

(7)

(7)

(7)


(7)

(7)

(7)


(6)

(7)


(7)

(7)

(6)

(7)

(6)

(5)

(5)
                 plots the mean value of the parameter
                 plus n times sigma (MSP)
                 plots the mean value of the parameter
                 minus n times sigma (MSP)
                 selects stations satisfying system and/or
                 user-supplied masks
                 plots the maximum value of the parameter
                 (MSP)
                 invokes execution of PGM=MEAN (MSP)
                 plots the mean value of the parameter
                 (MSP)
                 plots the minimum value of the
                 parameter (MSP)
                 establishes plot specifications for
                 the left axis  (MSP)
                 establishes plot specifications for
                 the right axis (MSP)
                 places RET retrieval output onto
                 disk or tape (RET)
                 denotes the beginning of MSP-specific
                 keywords (MSP)
                 specifies the character to be used
                 to plot positions on which two or
                 more statistics fall (MSP)
                 plots a station as a function of the
                 number of observations found (MSP)
                 suppresses the drawing of.a box around
                 a plot (LOG, MSP)
                 causes the connecting line to be
                 broken when a station is not plotted
                 (MSP)
                 suppresses plotting of county boundary
                 lines (LOG, MSP)
                 suppresses the printing of listings
                 normally produced by the MSP program
                 (MSP)
                 denotes the beginning of NOPAR control
                 cards (NOPAR)
                 denotes the end of NOPAR control cards
                 (NOPAR)
                 eliminates plotting of selected
                 parameters  (PLOT)
                 plots points in the
                 (LOG, MSP)
                 suppresses plotting
                 (LOG, MSP)
                 bypasses retrieval
                 stations and data
                 bypasses retrieval of
                 stations
                        of
                       of
auxiliary field

   the polygon

  water quality

  water quality
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-4

-------
Keyword

  NCSTATE

  NOTRMK
  NOTU
  NOVERLAY

  NUMLITE
  ONEORG

  ONLYU

  OUT

  P

  P=n

  PARF

  PARONLY

  PAPU

  %TILEnT.
  PGM

  PHV

  Pi

  PLOT

  PLOTMSG

  PLV

  PM
  POINTS

  POST

  PRMI

  PRT
 Description

 (7)  suppresses  plotting of  state and
     county boundary lines (LOG,  MSP!
 (7)  controls  the plotting of parametric
     data  according to the remark codes
     stored with the data (MSP)
 (4)  excludes  specific agencies  from retrieval
 (7)  suppresses  plotting of  state and
     county boundary lines (LOG,  MS?)
 (7)  controls  the number of  thin contour
     lines to  be plotted between thick
     contour  lines (MSP)
 (7)  forces all  plots to begin at the same
     origin  (LOG)
 (4)  lists stations retrieved in order
     of  station  selection keyword
 (7)  places MEAN program output  onto disk or
     tape  (MEAN)
 (4)  specifies water quality parameters
     to  be retrieved
 (7)  specifies that the nth  parameter in
     sequence  is to be plotted (REG)
 (4)  converts  a  parameter's  stored value
     to  an equivalent value
 (4)  retrieves parametric data only
     when  certain parameters are present
 (4)  converts  a  parameter's  stored units
     to  equivalent units
_(.7.). allows ±.h.e_.pio±Lin.g..af-_pej^cent.Ll.e~n -UMSP.)
 (4)  specifies which WQF retrieval program
     is  to be  executed
 (4)  restricts data selection by value of
     parameter
 (7)  prescribes  conditions under which the
     parametric  data are acceptable  (MSP)
 (7)  declares  the type of plot and
     associated  printout desired (REG, MSP)
 (7)  generates a message to  the  plotter
     operator  (LOG)
 (4)  restricts data selection by value of
     parameter
 (5)  reports  related parameters
 (7)  determines  the plotting symbol to be
     used  (MSP)
 (7)  controls  the appearance of  raw data
     points  (MSP)
 (4)  includes  RMI coding in  station header
     information
 (4)  controls  what is to be  printed from
     retrieval output
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-5

-------
Keyword

  PRV

  PSA


  PSA=T
D_escription
(4)

(6)
PSI=T
PSO = T
PURP
PVS = T
QUALITY
QUALMAP
R
REGPARMS
RES
RIGHTn
RMI
RMK
S
SAMSCL
SAMSTA
SAVE
SAVEOUT
(6)
(6)
(4)
(6)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(4)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
restricts data selection by value of
parameter
prints station descriptions for all
stations retrieved even if parametric
data are not present (INVENT,  INV120)
prints and flags the value of each
parameter that violates specified
criteria (STAND)
prints only the number of parameters
retrieved and their criteria (STAND)
prints only those parameters in
violation of specified criteria (STAND)
identifies the purpose and recipient
of the retrieval request
produces a summary of the values
outside specified criteria (STAND)
specifies the value of the quality
standard line to be plotted (REG)
requests geographical water quality
maps (MSP)
restricts retrieval to parameters
having certain remark codes
denotes the beginning of REG-specific
keywords (REG)
controls the fineness of the contour
lines plotted (MSP)
specifies that the scale, .parameter name,
and values of the nth parameter are to
appear on the righ-t-side -of - the plot 4MS?)
initiates a hydrological retrieval
based upon river mile indices
controls the plotting of parametric
data according to the remark codes
stored with the data (MSP)
specifies individual or groups of
stations to be retrieved
provides a common scale for both axes
of a plot (MSP)
groups stations together as if they
were a single station (MSP)
places MSP output onto disk or tape and
suppresses printing of MSP output  (MS?)
places MSP output onto disk or tape  (MSP)
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-6

-------
Keyword      Description

  SC         (5) causes scales of axes to be
                 identical (PLOT)
  SCALE      (6) selects the desired scale for the
                 area to be plotted (LOG, MSP)
  SEG        (7) selects time intervals for plotting
                 (MSP)
  SELECT     (5) bypasses retrieval of water quality
                 data
  SF         (6) allows selection of statistical
                 functions to be performed (MEAN)
  SHIFT      (4) shifts a retrieval's station header
                 information from the right corner
                 of the page to  the left
                 inhibits plotting of light lines to
                 avoid over-crowding (MSP)
                 sorts data prior to statistical
                 analysis (MEAN)
                 suppresses all  printed output except
                 summary information (INVENT, INV120)
                 restricts retrieved stations by
                 state codes
                 specifies mileage starting point for
                 a mileage-linear plot (MSP)
                 specifies which parameter statistics
                 are to be mapped (MS?)
  STC        (4) selects stations by state codes
  STCNTY     (4) restricts retrieved stations by counties
  STOPMSP    (7) denotes the end of MSP-specific
                 keywords -(-MSP)	-
  STOPREC    (7) specifies the highest check value  to be
                 plotted in a given plot  (LOO
  STOPREG    (7) denotes the end of REG-specific
                 keywords (REG)
  STREAMS    (6) plots streams  (LOO
  STRTREC    (7) specifies the  lowest check value to be
                 plotted in a given plot  (LOO
  SYM        (6) provides for choice of plotting symbols
                 representing data points (PLOT)
  SYMANG     (7) specifies angle of rotation of plotted
                 symbols (MSP)
  SYMSIZE    (7) specifies height of plotted symbols (MS?
  TAGS       (6) tags mapped stations with a cross
                 reference number (LOO
  TIME       (7) allows specification of  beginning  and
                 ending dates for the analysis  (REG)
  TLAT       (7) specifies the  vertical position of a
                 plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
SKPLESS
SORT
SP
ST
START
STAT
(7)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(7)
                    WQ-RET
                     A3-7

-------
Keyword

  TLONG

  TPLOT

  TRNDNLY

  TS

  U
  UD

  UK

  UN-ION AM

  VD
  XMAX

  YMAX

  ZOOM
Description^

(7) specifies the horizontal position of
    a plot's title block (LOG, MSP)
(7) requests the plotting of a trend map
    (MSP)
(7) suppresses plotting of data defined in
    a plot request (MSP)
(6) converts one form of a parameter to
    another (STAND)
(4) restricts stations by agency-code
(4) specifies an upper depth limitation
    for samples
(4) unlocks locked data for retrieval
    purposes
(6) method of calculating un-ionized
    ammonia (MEAN)
(6) allows variable date groupings (MEAN)
(7) specifies the maximum value for
    the abscissa parameter (REG)
(7) specifies the maximum value for the
    ordinate parameter (REG)
(7) restricts plotting to a specified area
    (MSP)
                   WQ-RET
                    A3-8

-------
APPENDIX 4:  SUMMARY OF MOST FREQUENTLY USED PURPOSE VALUES

The PURP keyword must be specified in each WQF retrieval request,
and is used to identify both the purpose and the ultimate
recipient of the retrieval.  The information provided by this
keyword is used by EPA headquarters personnel in various analyses
of the uses made of the data stored in the WQF.  The following
summary lists the Sections of PL 92-500 that are most frequently
used as the value of this keyword.  It is not intended  to  be all
inclusive and users may specify their own values for this  keyword
in accordance with the procedures identified in Section  4  of this
chapter.


                      SECTIONS OF PL 92-500
TITLE I - Research and Related Programs

Sec. 104 - Research, Investigations, Training and  Information
Sec. 104(a)(5) - National Water Quality Surveillance System  (NWQSS)
Sec. 105 - Grants for Research and Development
Sec. 106 - Grants for Pollution Control Programs
Sec. 107 - Mine Water Pollution Control Demonstrations
Sec. 108 - Pollution Control  in Great Lakes
Sec. 113 - Alaska Village Demonstration Projects
Sec. 114 - Lake Tahoe Study

TITLE II - Grants for Construction of Treatment Works

Sec. 201-- Cons-tructi-on-Grant Fac-i'l it-y- P-lan   -  -    •  -
Sec. 208 - Areawide Waste Treatment Management Plan
Sec. 209-- Basin Planning
Sec. 210 - Annual 0 & M Survey

TITLE III - Standards and Enforcement

Sec. 303 - Water Quality Standards and Implementation Plans
Sec. 303(e) - Basin Plans
Sec. 305 - Water Quality Inventory
Sec. 305(b) - Water Quality  Inventory
Sec. 308 - Inspections, Monitoring and Entry
Sec. 311 - Oil and Hazardous  Substance Liability
Sec. 314 - Clean Lakes
Sec. 315 - National Commission on Water Quality
Sec. 316 - Thermal Discharges
Sec. 318 - Aquaculture
                             WQ-RET
                               A4-1

-------
TITLE IV - Permits and Licenses

Sec. 402 - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
Sec. 403 - Ocean Discharge Criteria
Sec. 404 - Permits for Dredged or Fill Material

TITLE V - General Provisions

Sec. 516 - Reports to Congress
Sec. 516(b) - Economics of Clean Environment (Water) Report
                             WQ-RET
                              A4-2

-------
APPENDIX 5:  TERMINAL PROCEDURES

A complete description of these procedures is given in Chapter
WQ-TERM.
                              WQ-RET
                               A5-1

-------
APPENDIX 6:   U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY REMARK CODES
The following remark codes may be stored with USGS data (agency
code 112WRD).

     x
       Blank - regular analysis, positive value
       "-"   - regular analysis, negative value
       "F"   - field analysis, positive value
       "G"   - field analysis, negative value
       "X"   - extra grab sample at composite site,
               positive value
       "Y"   - extra grab sample at composite site,
               negative value

     y
       Blank - no remark
       "J"   - estimated value
       "K"   - actual value is known to be less than
               the value shown
       "L"   - actual value is known to be greater
               than the value shown
       "M"   - presence of material verified but
               not quantified
       "N"   - presumptive evidence of presence of
               material
       "U"   - material specifically analyzed for
               but not detected.
       "B"   - results based on colony count outside
               the acceptable-range Cnon-ideal colony
               count)
                             WQ-RET
                              A6-1

-------
APPENDIX 7:  RETRIEVAL ERROR MESSAGES

This appendix describes the error messages that are generated as
a result of an inaccurate or improper attempt to retrieve
information from the WQF.  In all cases, the requested retrieval
is not performed, unless otherwise noted.  The descriptions are
divided into three primary groups: 1) general retrieval error
messages;  2) error messages specific to the REG program; and 3)
error messages specific to the MSP program.

The descriptions give the format of the message itself, followed
by a brief explanation of the error message, and if possible, a
suggested corrective action to be taken.  Error messages are
bounded by pound signs (I) so that they may easily be noted when
checking the retrieval.

The general retrieval and REG program .error messages are both
numbered to facilitate their reference within this documentation
Note that each series begins with the number one.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-1

-------
                GENERAL RETRIEVAL ERROR MESSAGES,
tl BAD CHAR(S)  IN KEYWORD*
          Alphabetic characters were found in a value required to
          be numeric.   Check for alphabetic and/or blank
          characters.   Correct and resubmit.
#2 NO RETRIEVAL INSTRUCTIONS FOUND*

          A /* JCL statement was encountered before any retrieval
          instructions were read.   Perhaps an incorrect data set
          was referenced,  or the data set containing the
          retrieval request was inadvertently omitted from the
          job stream.


*3 MULTIPLE EXTRACT KEYWORDS!

          The EXTRACT keyword may be specified only once per
          retrieval request.  The format and value of the EXTRACT
          keyword are described in detail in Section 4.


#4 EXTRACT VALUE TOO LONG!

          No more than 299 characters (including parentheses and
          blanks) may be coded between the equals sign and the
          trailing comma of the EXTRACT instruction.  The format
          and value of the EXTRACT keyword are described in
          detail in Section 4.


15 EXTRACT VALUE IS ILLEGAL*

          The specified value violates the Boolean logic required
          of this keyword, e.g., a violation of the parenthesis
          convention, or the specification of two operators
          without an intervening mask.  The format and value of
          the EXTRACT keyword are described in detail  in Section
          4.
#6 INVALID KEYWORD*

          An invalid keyword (as opposed to an  invalid value) was
          specified.  This error normally results from a
          typographical error.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-2

-------
17 NOPAR CARDS MISSING*
          A NOPAREND keyword was encountered with no preceding
          NOPAR control cards and/or NOPARCDS keyword.  The NOPAR
          program,  and its special keywords and control cards,
          are described in detail in Section 7.
#8 PGM NOT FIRST KEYWORD*
          The PGM keyword must be the first keyword specified in
          any retrieval request.  This keyword is described in
          detail in Section 4.
*9 PGM VALUE ILLEGALI
          An improper program-name was specified as a value for
          the PGM keyword.  This keyword is described in detail
          in Section 4.
#10 MULTIPLE PGM KEYWORDS*
          The PGM keyword may be specified only once in a
          retrieval request.  This keyword is described in detail
          in Section 4.
#11 INVALID AUXSYM VALUE*
          An invalid two-digit value was specified for the AUXSYM
          keyword.  Check the acceptable values for this keyword,
          which is described in detail  in Section 7.
#12 TOO MANY HEAD KEYWORDS*
          A maximum' of five HEAD keywords may be specified  in a
          single retrieval request.  This print control keyword
          is described in detail in Section 4.
#13 TOO-MANY ST KEYWORDS*
          A maximum of three ST keywords may be specified  in  a
          single retrieval request.  This station restriction
          keyword  is described  in detail in Section 4.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-3

-------
#14 CONFLICTS WITH KEYWORD ONLYU*

          The data selection keywords ONLYU and NOTU may not both
          be used in the same retrieval request.   These keywords
          are described in detail in Section 4.
#15 CONFLICTS WITH KEYWORD NOTU*

          The data selection keywords ONLYU and NOTU may not both
          be used in the same retrieval request.   These keywords
          are described in detail in Section 4.

116 TOO MANY BG KEYWORDS*

          No more than three pairs of BG,EG keywords may be
          specified in a retrieval request.  These data selection
          keywords are described in detail in Section 4.


#17 UNMATCHED BG AND EG KEYWORDS*

          The BG and EG keywords, if specified, must be specified
          in pairs.  These data selection keywords are described
          in detail in Section 4.
#18 UNMATCHED L KEYWORDS!

          The L keyword, if specified, must be specified in pairs
          in order to properly designate a vertices' latitude and
          longitude coordinates.  This station identification
          keyword is described in detail in Section 4.


#19 INVALID LT VALUES

          A value other than I was specified as the value of the
          LT keyword.  This station identification keyword  is
          described in detail in Section 4.
#20 LT KEYWORD HAS NOT BEEN GIVEN*

          The set of L keywords was not preceded by an LT keyword
          as required.  These station identification keywords are
          described in detail in Section 4.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-4

-------
#21 TOO MANY L KEYWORDS*

          A maximum of 700 L keywords (describing up to 350
          polygon vertices) can be specified in any single
          retrieval request.  This station identification keywor;
          is described in detail in Section 4.


#22 RMI CARD TOO FAR FROM EQUAL SIGN*

          A blank line was encountered between the RMI keyword
          and its 7, 8, or 9 card value.  This station
          identification keyword is described in detail in
          Section 4.
#23 INVALID MAJOR BASIN CODE*

          An invalid major basin code was specified as a value
          for the BS keyword.  This keyword is described in
          detail in Section 4; the valid major basin codes are
          defined in Appendix D.


#24 KEYWORD A MISSING/MISPLACED!

          If one or more S keywords are specified in a retrieval
          request,  they must be preceded by at least one A
          keyword.   These station selector keywords are described
          in detail in Section 4.
#25 KEYWORD A MISSING*

          The A keyword must be specified in a STA retrieval
          request.  The use of general retrieval keywords with
          this program is described in detail in Section 6.

                                               %
#26 KEYWORD P NOT VALID FOR PGM#

          Specification of the P keyword is invalid for retrieval
          programs STA, NOPAR, INDEX, and LOC.  The use of
          general retrieval keywords with these retrieval
          programs is described in Sections 6 and 7.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-5

-------
#27 TOO MANY P KEYWORDS!
          Too many P keywords were specified for the program
          specified.  The maximum number of ?' keywords that can
          be specified by program are:

             retrieval program         maximum number of P keywords

               RET,MSP,STAND                    50
               PLOT,MEAN,REG                    10
               PUNCH                -             6
               INVENT,INV120                   500
               MSP with MEAN     .               10
#28 LV KEYWORD FOUND WITHOUT PRECEDING P KEYWORD*

          The LV and HV keywords are parameter dependent and
          refer to the immediately preceding P keyword, which
          must be specified.  The use'of these keywords with the
          MEAN, STAND, and PLOT retrieval programs is described
          in detail in Section 6.

#29 TOO MANY PREVIOUS PARU KEYWORDS*

          The PARU keyword has been specified more than once for
          a single P keyword.  The use of the PARU and PARF
          keywords is described in detail in Section 4.


#30 TOO MANY PREVIOUS PARF KEYWORDS*

          The PARF keyword has been specified more than once for
          a single PARU (and thus a single P} keyword.  The use
          of the PARU and PARF keywords  is described in detail in
          Section 4.


#31 TOO MANY AREA KEYWORDS - MAX=100#

          A maximum of 100 AREA keywords may be specified  in any
          single retrieval request.  This station selection
          keyword is described in detail in Section 4.


#32 INVALID AREA VALUE#

          An invalid value was specified for the AREA  keyword,
          which is described in detail  in Section 4.   The  STORET
          help data set named SEC208.AREAS contains a  complete
          list of valid AREA values.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-6

-------
#33 TOO MANY VD KEYWORDS*
          A maximum of 20 VD keywords may be specified in a
          retrieval request.  The use of the BASE and VD keywords
          with the MEAN program is described in detail in Section
          6.
#34 TOO MANY TS KEYWORDS!

          A maximum of five TS keywords may be specified in a
          retrieval request.  The use of this keyword with the
          STAND program is described in detail in Section 6.


#35 EXTRACT VALUE NOT FOUND:  VALUE*

          The indicated mask specified by the EXTRACT keyword was
          not found.  Check the value for a typographical error.
          The EXTRACT keyword is described in detail in Section
          4.
#36 INVALID AGGR VALUES

          An invalid value was specified for the AGGR keyword.
          The description of this data selection keyword in
          Section 4 gives a list of the AGGR values allowed.


#37 PURP KEYWORD MISSING*

          The PURP keyword is required for all retrieval
          requests.  The use of this retrieval identification
          keyword is described in detail in Section 4.


#38 NOPAREND KEYWORD MISSING*

          The NOPAREND keyword is required in all NOPAR
          retrievals.  The use of the NOPARCDS and NOPAREND
          keywords is described in Section 7.


#39 PRT KEYWORD NOT PERMITTED WITH PGM INVENT OR INV120#

          This keyword is valid only with programs that list
          stored or calculated parametric data values, as opposed
          to calculated statistical summaries listed by the
          inventory programs.  This print control keyword is
          described in detail in Section 4.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-7

-------
140 SCALE=CELLHT VALID ONLY WITH AGGR=CELL#

          The use of the CELLHT value of the SCALE keyword
          requires the use of the AGGR keyword.   A complete
          description of the use of the SCALE keyword with the
          LOC program is presented in Section 7.


#41 SORT KEYWORD VALID ONLY WITH PGM=MEAN#

          SORT is a keyword special to the MEAN program, which is
          described in detail in Section 6.
#42 INVALID SORT VALUEI

          An invalid value was specified for the SORT keyword.
          Section 6 contains a detailed description of the use of
          the SORT keyword with the MEAN program, and of the
          acceptable values for SORT.


#43 INVALID DG VALUE*

          An invalid value was specified for the DG keyword in
          its use with the SORT keyword.  Monthly and/or
          quarterly groupings can not be specified when
          'SORT=SV,' is specified.  A detailed description of the
          MEAN program, and the keywords special to it, is given
          in Section 6.
#44 PARONLY GREATER THAN NUMBER OF P KEYWORDS*

          The value specified for PARONLY must be equal to or
          less than the number of P parameters specified within
          the retrieval request.  The PARONLY keyword is
          described in detail in Section 4.
#45 NO P KEYWORDS USED#

          The parameter keyword P must be specified for all
          programs which retrieve data, except INVENT and  INV120.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-8

-------
           ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC TO THE REG PROGRAM
The following error messages are issued by the REG program and
indicate problems or specification discrepancies which cannot be
processed.   In all cases the requested analysis is not performed.
Error messages one through seven relate to errors encountered
during program processing; error messages nine through thirty-
three relate to errors encountered during input processing.
(Error message eight is no longer used.)  Following the
descriptions of the error messages is an example of a REG
retrieval request with an explanation of the errors generated by
the retrieval during its processing.

(1)  FILE HEADER PRESENT WITH NO DATA FOR STATION XXXXXXXX
     ALL ANALYSIS FOR THIS STATION DELETED.

          XXXXXXXX = Input station number.

          A station has been requested and retrieved for which no
          data on the requested parameter exists.  No analyses
          were run against this station.

          User corrective action:  none.

(2)  NO RETRIEVAL DATA FOUND FOR STATION XXXXXXXX
     YYY CASE 2 ANALYSES WERE DELETED.

          XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
          YYY      = Number of analyses deleted.
          Z        = Case number.

          A station has been requested for analysis which does
          not match any of the retrieved station numbers.
          Therefore, no analyses were run against this station.
          The type and number of analyses deleted are listed,

(3)  ANALYSIS FOR STATION XXXXXXXX PARAMETER YY
     WAS DELETED DUE TO INSUFFICIENT DATA.

          XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
          YY       = Parameter position.

          The requested parameter has less than 20 observations
          at the station under a Case I analysis.

.; 4)  NOT ENOUGH DATA FOR EITHER PARAMETER YY OR ZZ OR BOTH
     AT STATION XXXXXXXX.

          XXXXXXXX = Input station number.
          YY, ZZ   = Parameter positions.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-9

-------
          One or both of the requested parameters had less than
          20 observations at the station un.de,:"" a Cas'e; !!
          analysis.   Analysis was deleted.

(5)   NO DATA FOR YYYYYYY THRU ZZZ2ZZZ.

          YYYYYYY =  Start date.
          ZZZZZZZ =  End date.

          In plotting the trend  line,  a graph segment spans a
          time interval in which no observations occur.   The
          graph for  this segment was suppressed and the above
          message issued.

(6)   INSUFFICIENT DATA, ONLY ZZZ POINTS.
     EITHER STATION  XXXXXXXX PARAMETER YY OR STATION WWWWWWWW
     PARAMETER SS

          SS, YY              =  Parameter position.
          XXXXXXXX,  WWWWWWWW  =  Station number.
          ZZZ                 =  Number of data points.

          One or both of the requested parameters had less than
          20 observations at the stations under a Case III
          analysis.   Analysis was deleted.

(7)   CASE THREE ANALYSIS FOR STATIONS XXXXXXXX,YYYYYYYY
     DELETED BECAUSE NO DATA WAS FOUND.

          XXXXXXXX,  YYYYYYYY = Station Number.

          One or both of the stations requested for a Case III
          analysis were not present in the retrieved file, i.e.,
          the input's station request did not match any retrieved
          station numbers.

(8)        This error message is  no longer in use.


The following messages are associated with improperly specified
input.   Each time an error in an input card is detected the card .
image is printed out and the error underlined with dollar signs
(S).   Each error message is followed by the statement:

                  CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-10

-------
(9)   UNIDENTIFIED FIELD IN CARD XXX FIELD MARKED IS NEITHER
     KEYWORD NOR OPTION.

          XXX = Card number.

          The underscored alphanumeric string is not recognized
          by the REG program.

(10)   UNIDENTIFIED FIELD IN CARD XXX. FIELD IS NOT KEYWORD AND
      IS TOO SHORT FOR OPTION FIELD.

          XXX = Card number.

          The underscored alphanumeric string is not recognized
          by the program.

(11)   UNIDENTIFIABLE KEYWORD PARAMETER IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          A keyword (station, parameter, time, etc.) is
          encountered which  the program cannot identify.

(12)   STATION FIELD EXCEEDS  15 CHARACTERS IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          The station identification number exceeds the maximum
          allowable number of characters.

(13)   MORE THAN 2 STATIONS-ENCOUNTERED IN. CARD XXX,

          XXX = Card number.

          No more than 2 stations  can be specified on  any  one
          analysis  request.

(14)   ILLEGAL CHARACTER  IN PARAMETER FIELD, XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          The parameter  field can  only contain numeric values.

(15)   ILLEGAL PARAMETER  VALUE IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          The parameter  field numeric value must be between  1  and
          10.
                              WQ-RET
                               A7-11

-------
(16)   MORE THAN -2 PARAMETERS 'ENCOUNTERED IN CARD- XX-X,.

          XXX = Card number.

          No more than 2 parameters can be specified on any one
          analysis request.

(17}   TOO MANY TIME FIELDS ENCOUNTERED, XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Start and end dates can be specified, but no more than
          two time fields can be specified on any one analysis
          request.

(18)   ILLEGAL CHARACTER ENCOUNTERED IN TIME FIELD ON CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          The time field may contain only numeric values or
          numeric values and slashes (/).   Any other characters
          are illegal.

(19)   TOO MANY SLASHES ENCOUNTERED IN TIME FIELD ON CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Only two slashes are allowed in any one time field.

(20)   DATE TOO BIG IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Date improperly specified.

(21)   DATE NON-ZERO BUT LESS THAN YEAR 10 IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          A date earlier than 1910 may not be specified.

(22)   MORE THAN 1 QUALITY FIELD-IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Only one standard value allowed per analysis request.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-12

-------
(23)   ILLEGAL CHARACTER ENCOUNTERED IN QUALITY FIELD IN CARD
      XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Quality field must  contain only numeric values.

(24)   MORE THAN'1 XMAX IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

         .Only one abscissa maximum value can be specified per
          analysis.request.

(25)   ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN MAX FIELD IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Maximum field specification must be numeric.

(26)   MORE 'THAN 1 YMAX IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Only one ordinate maximum value can be specified per
          analysis request.

(21)   NO STATION FIELD FOUND IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          No station number on card.  A station number must be-
          present in all analysis requests.

(28)   NO PARAMETER FIELD FOUND IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          No parameter position on the card.  The parameter
          position must be present in all analysis requests.

(29)   TWO IDENTICAL STATION NUMBERS ON CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          For a Case III analysis, the station numbers must be
          different.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-13

-------
(30)   TOO MANY CASE YY ANALYSES.. AS OF CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.
          YY  = Type case number (1,2,3).
          ZZZ22ZZZ = Station  number.

          The maximum number  of analyses of type YY has been
          reached.  No further requests for this type of analysis
          are honored.

(31)   More than 10 STATIONS REQUESTED AS OF CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          Unle'ss the default  option for Case I is used, the
          maximum number of different stations for one execution
          of the analysis package is 10.

(32)   TOO MANY CASE YY CARDS  FOR STATION ZZZZZZZZ IN CARD XXX.

          XXX = Card number.
          YY  = Type case number (1,2,3).
          ZZZZZZZZ = Station  number.

          The maximum number  of Type YY analyses at the given
          station has been reached.  No further requests for this
          type analysis at this station are honored.

(33)   * "WARNING - 2 STATIONS AND 1 PARAMETER ENCOUNTERED IN CARD
      XXX.

          XXX = Card number.

          A Type  III analysis has been requested but only one
          parameter specified.  The program issues a warning and
          then assumes, that the parameter  is the same at both
          stations.  Analysis request is not deleted.

(34)   ONE ANALYSIS REQUEST REQUIRES MORE THAtf ONE CARD

          Any single plot request may not  be longer than 80
          characters.  The format and value of the keywords
          special to the REG program are described in detail  in
          . Section 7.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-14

-------
The following REG retrieval request contains several  input
errors.  The error messages that this retrieval generates are
numbered to match the numbers given in the error message
descriptions.

Card No

   0      PGM=REG,PURP=305B/STA,
   1      5=010120,P=2,T=63/01,T=65/01,
   2      S=010120,T=63/01,P=S,Q=7.0,T=65/01,
   3      P=2,P=3,S=010i20,S=010077,T=63/01,T=65/01,
   4   *  5=020110,P=22,T=62/10,
   5   *  P=5,T=5310,
   6   *  5=020011832,T=65,P=7,
   7      5=020111,P=5,T=6404,
   8      S=020111,P=5,P=8,T=60,T=65,
   9   *  T=6201,S=01523,5=010077,P=6,T=6801,
  10   *  5=020110,P=l,OUT,
  11   *  A=10223,P=6,T=5510,
  12      5=010077,P=3,T=60/10,
  13   .*  5=020111,T=7,T=63,5=020110,P=9,5=020111,

        Explanations of errors  flagged (*) in order shown

Error
Number    Explanation

  15      ILLEGAL PARAMETER VALUE IN CARD 4
          5=020110,P=22,T=62/10,

          CARD BYPASSED DUE TO  ERRORS.

  27      NO STATION FIELD FOUND IN CARD 5
          P=5,T=5810,
          CARD BYPASSED DUE TO  ERRORS.

  12      STATION FIELD EXCEEDS 8 CHARACTERS IN CARD  6
          5=020011832,T=65,P=7,

          CARD BYPASSED DUE TO  ERRORS.

  33      *.**WARNING - 2 STATIONS AND 1 PARAMETER ENCOUNTERED
             IN CARD 9

  10      UNIDENTIFIED FIELD  IN CARD 10
          FIELD IS NOT KEYWORD  AND IS TOO SHORT FOR OPTION FIELD
          S=C20110,P=1,OUT,

          CARD BYPASSED DUE TO  ERRORS.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-15

-------
 1      UNIDENTIFIABLE KEYWORD PARAMETER  IN CARD  11
        A=10223,P=6,T=5510,        .

        CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRC>RS;.

13  .    MORE THAN 2 STATIONS ENCOUNTERED  IN CARD  13
        S=020111,T=7,T=63,5=020110,P-9,S-020111,

        CARD BYPASSED DUE TO ERRORS.
                           WQ-RET
                            A7-16

-------
           ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC TO THE MSP PROGRAM
SALL KEYWORDS BETWEEN MSPARMS AND STOPMS? WILL BE PRINTED BELOW
ALONG WITH ANY SYNTAX ERRORS*


          This message appears in the listing produced by the MSP
          program.  Keywords which have no errors are repeated or
          echoed.  Keywords with which some problem was
          encountered are flagged (underprinted) with either an
          X, a question mark (?), or an asterisk (*), which
          connote the following:


          flag       meaning of flag

           X         the referenced keyword is invalid with MSP,
                     and processing of the MSP retrieval was
                     terminated.

            ?         MSP failed to recognize the referenced
                     keyword as a valid keyword, but did not
                     terminate processing of the MSP retrieval
                     request.

            *         The referenced keyword was not  interpreted,
                     probably because of the problem generated
                     by a preceding error referenced by an X.
                     Processing of the MSP retrieval was not
                     terminated.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-17

-------
          ERROR MESSAGES SPECIFIC.JTG,^T.HE NOPAR.PROGRAM
The following error messages are issued by the NOPAR program and
indicate problems or specification discrepancies which,  in most
cases, resulted in the abnormal termination of the processing of
the retrieval request.


TOO MANY GROUPS

          A maximum of 25 parameter groups may be defined within
          a single NOPAR retrieval.
ERROR
OVERLAY
MAX SIZE
          The indicated expression was not recognized by NOPAR as
          a valid NOPAR control card or keyword, and consequently
          was not processed.
          A parameter code may not appear in more than one
          parameter group.
          The maximum allowable number of parameters that may be
          specified in the parameter code range has been
          exceeded.  The description of the Parameter Group
          Control Card lists these maximum allowable numbers.
STATION LIST NOT ALLOWED IN RETRIEVAL MODE

          An illegal attempt was made to input a manual station
          list simultaneously with an automatic station list.
NO STATIONS IN LIST

          No stations were found in the automatic station  list.
                             WQ-RET
                              A7-18

-------
     STORE!  USER  HANDBOOK
              PART
               WQ
       WATER  QUALITY  FILE
            APPENDIX
              •  A
         A  WQF GLOSSARY
[Basic  Retrieval;  Second Edition!
               WQ

-------
APPENDIX A:  A WQF GLOSSARY

The words and terms included in this glossary are frequently used
by users of the STORET Water Quality File.  Its entries  include
environmental and water-pollution-related items, expressions
related to STORET and the WQF,  and the terminology associated
with the data processing aspect of STORET.
                         A WQF GLOSSARY

abatement:  The act or process of reducing the degree or
          intensity of pollution.

abend:  Abnormal end or termination.  The abnormal termination of
          a computer program due to invalid data, conflicting
          control' cards, or other circumstances which prevent
          successful program completion.

agency:  A name or code which uniquely  identifies a specific
          water quality monitoring network to STORET.

bacteriologic parameters:  One of several general categories into
          which approximately 35 of the most popular water
          quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as
          coliform, fecal coliform, and fecal strep are included
          in this group.

basin:  -see-"river basirr"" 	  • •  -

basin plan:  see "Water Quality Management Basin Plan"

batch processing:  A technique of data  processing in which jobs
          are collected and grouped before processing.
          Processing is generally scheduled in accordance to a
          series of priorities  (ranging from within a few minutes
          to a day) as opposed to being processed immediately.

biological parameters:  One of several  general categories into
          which approximately 335 of the most popular water
          quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as
          chlorophyll, pheophytin, and  total algae are  included
          in this group.

BOD:  Biochemical oxygen demand.  A measure of the amount of
          oxygen consumed in the biological processes that break
          down organic matter in water.  One of the more
          frequently retrieved WQF parameters.

collection point:  A point on a body of water where samples are
          taken, e.g., a monitoring station on a stream, river,


                               WQ
                              A-l

-------
          or lake.   STORE! contains data on samples taken from
          more than 200,000 unique collectiah-p'o'in'ts-- located o'n"-
          essentiaily all of the nation's rivers, lakes,'"streams
          and other waterways.

common carrier:  In data communications, a public utility company
          that is recognized by an appropriate regulatory agency
          as having a vested interest and responsibility in
          furnishing communication sources to the general public,
          e.g. Western Union, The Bell System.

composite sample:  Composite samples are combinations of
          individual samples obtained at intervals over a period
          of time.   These may be several grab samples spanning  a
          24 hour period where all grabs are placed in a single
          container or a series of samples taken at equal
          distances across a stream section.

computer network:  An interconnection of computer systems,
          terminals, and communications facilities.

connect time:  A measure of system usage, usually the time
          interval during which the user's terminal is on-line
          during a terminal session.

conversational.processing:  A mode of processing that involves
          step-by-step interaction between a computer and a
          remote user at a terminal by means of  keyboard cype
          terminals.  Interactive processing.

CPU time - Central Processing Unit Time:  A measure of system
          usage by a user, based on the total amount of computer
          processing time used.

data base:  A  structured collection of  information
          organizationally regarded as an entity or collection  of
          related files  treated as an entity.

data collection:  The act of bringing data from  one or more
          points to a central point.

data retrieval:  The process of extracting data  from a data  base
          in  a desired format; see "retrieval request"

data set:  A  collection  of data records that have a logical
          relationship to one another,  that reside within a
          computer system, and that are accessible to users  via
          remote terminals.

data sharing:  The ability of users at  several locations to
          access and utilize data stored at a single location.
                               WQ
                               A-2

-------
data storage:  The process of entering data into and maintaining
          data in a data base such as STORET.

data transmission:  The sending of data from one place for
          reception elsewhere.

delimiter:  A character that separates and organizes elements of
          data, such as a slash, comma, or blank.

Dial-up^line:  A communications circuit that is established by a
          switched circuit connection.

digital plotter:  A device used to produce graphic output of
          digital coordinates.

duplex:  Simultaneous two-way independent transmission in both
          directions.  Also referred  to as full-duplex.

effluent:  A discharge of pollutants  into the environment,
          whether partially or completely treated, or  in  its
          natural state.

enrichment:  The addition of nitrogen, phosphorus and  carbon
          compounds, or other nutrients into a  lake or other
          waterway that greatly increases the growth potential
          for  algae and other aquatic plants.

environment:   The sum of all external conditions and influences
          affecting the life/ development and ultimately, the
          survival of an organism.

environmental  impact statement:  A document prepared by a Federal
          agency on the environmental impact of  its proposals for
          legislation and other major actions significantly
          affecting the quality of the human environment.  They
          are  used as tools for decision making, and are  required
          by the National Environmental Policy  Act.

erosion:  The  wearing away of the land surface  by wind or water.
          Erosion occurs naturally from weather  or runoff, but  is
          often  intensified by man's  land-clearing practices.

eutrophication:. The normally slow aging process by which a  lake
          or other body of water evolves into a  bog or marsh  and
          ultimately assumes  a completely terrestrial  state  and
          disappears.

fecal  coliform bacteria:  A group of  organisms  common  to  the
          intestinal tracts of man and of animals.  The presence
          of fecal coliform bacteria  in water  is an indicator of
          pollution and of potentially dangerous bacterial
          contamination.
                                WQ
                               A-3

-------
 foreground processing:  High-priority processing.,.,,,usually ..
           resulting from real-time—en-tries, giverr-precedence, by-
           means of interrupts, over Tower priority  'background1'
           processing.

.^general inorganic parameters:  One of several general categories
           into which approximately 65 of the most popular water
           quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as
           carbon dioxide, cyanide, sulfur, and fluoride  are
           included in this group.

 grab sample:  An individual water quality sample  collected at a
           specific date and time.

 ground water:  The supply of freshwater under the earth's surface
           in an underground bed or stratum of earth  that forms
           the natural reservoir for use by man.

 half-duplex:  A communications circuit designed for  transmission
           in either direction, but not in both directions
           simultaneously.

 HASP:  .An acronym for Houston Automatic Spooling  Program.  An IBJr
           front-end software package which performs  job  input and
           output spooling and which controls communications
           between local and remote processors and RJE stations.

 hard water:  Water containing dissolved minerals  such as calcium,
           iron, and magnesium.

 hardware:  Physical computer equipment, as opposed  to a  computer
           program or method of use, including me.chanical,
           electrical, magnetic, or electronic devices.

 hydrology:  The science dealing with the properties,
           distribution, and circulation of water  and snow.

 implementation plan:  A document delineating the  steps to be
           taken to ensure attainment of environmental quality
           standards within a specified time period.

 job:  The major unit of work of a computer system.   A job
           consists of one or several related steps  defined by a
           series of job control language  (JCL) statements
           consisting of a JOB card, one or more job  step (EXEC)
           statements, and for each step, one or more data
           definition  (DD) statements.

 job control language  (JCL):  A user-written computer control
           language used to define a job and its requirements  to
           the computer system.
                                WQ
                               A-4

-------
job step:   A subdivision of a job performed as a separate task
          and defined by an execute (EXEC) statement that, among
          other things,  contains the name of the program to be
          executed to perform the step.

keyword=value:  An instruction to a WQF retrieval program which
          defines a certain action to be taken in the processing
          of the retrieval request in which it is specified.  A
          keyword generally may be assigned one or more values.

leased line:  A communications channel or circuit reserved for
          the exclusive use of a leasing customer without
          interexchange switching arrangements.

login:  A user access procedure to a computer system which
          involves identification, access control, and exchange
          of network information between the user and the system.
          Logon.  Signon.

logout:  A user exit procedure from a computer system often
          providing usage statistics to the user.  Logoff.
          Signoff.

metals parameters:  One of several general categories into which
          approximately 200 of the most popular water quality
          parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as calcium,
          barium, nickel, and manganese are included in this
          group.

mgd:  millions of gallons per day.  Mgd is commonly used to
          express rate of flow.

monitoring:  Periodic or continous determination of the amount cf
          pollutants present in the environment.

National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System  (NPDES):  The
          NPDES permit system was established by Public Law 92-
          500 to control the discharge of pollutants into any
          waterway, for insuring that effluent limits are met,
          that the necessary technology is applied, and that all
          requirements of the 1972 law for controlling discharges
          and complying with water quality standards are met on
          schedule.

nitrogen parameters:  One of several general categories into
          which approximately 40 of the most popular water qualty
          parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as ammonia and
          NOx are included in this group.

observation:  A measurement, or sampling, of a single parameter
          at a specific location or station, at a specific point
          in time.  Over 40 million observations are stored
          within STORE!.
                               WQ
                              A-5

-------
off-line:  The status of computer equipment or devices when not
          under control of the central processing uni.t.  Mjay ajsp
          be used to describe terminal equipment which is not
          connected to a transmission line.

on-line:  The status of computer equipment or devices under
          control of the CPU.  Also describes terminal equipment
          which is connected to a transmission line.

operating system:  Computer Software that controls the execution
          of computer programs and that may provide scheduling,
          debugging, input and output control, accounting,
          storage assignments, data management, and other
          functions.  Sometimes called Supervisor, Executive,
          Monitor, Master Control Program, depending upon the
          computer hardware manufacturer.

organic parameters:  One of several general categories into which
          approximately 95 of the most popular water quality
          parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as oil-grease,
          organic carbon, and phenols are  included in this group.

outfall:  The mouth of a sewer-, drain, or  conduit where an
          effluent is discharged into the  receiving waters.

oxygen demand:  One of several general categories into which
          approximately 100 of the most popular water quality
          parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as BOD-5 day,
          COD-low, and COD-high are included  in this group.

parameter:  The STORET water quality file  designation, for an
          individual element for which values relating to water
          quality are associated.  Approximately  5000  individual
          parameters are defined within the WQF.

parametric data:  WQF  information which describes the conditions
          under which a sample was taken  (such as date, time,  and
          depth)  as well as  the results of the sample analyses.

password:  A word or string  of characters  that is recognizable by
          a computer system  and that permits  a user to access
          protected storage  files.

permit:  A legal  document which establishes the limits of
          allowable discharges into navigable waters.  Permits
          are granted  to individual dischargers only after  they
          show  that their effluents will  not  contaminate  a
          waterway  in  excess of established water quality      v
          standards, or will not lower  its existing quality.
          Permits are  issued for fixed  terms  not  exceeding  five
          years and can be  terminated for  violations of any
          conditions of the  permit.
                                WQ
                               A-6

-------
pesticide parameters:  One of several general categories  into
          which approximately 190 of the most popular  water
          quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters  such as
          chlordane, DDD, DDE, DDT, dieldrin, and  heptachlor are
          included  in this group.

phosphorus parameters:  One of several general categories  into
          which approximately 35 of the most popular water
          quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters  such as
          SOLP04, POLYP04, and P40S-T ORTHO are  included  in  this
          group.

physical parameters:  One of several general categories  into
          which approximately 165 of the most popular  water
          quality .parameters are grouped.  Parameters  such as
          water and  air temperatures, water salinity,  pH,  and
          color are  included in this group.

point source:  Any  discernible, confined and discrete  conveyance,
          including  but not limited to any pipe, ditch,  channel,
          tunnel, conduit, well, discrete fissure,  container,
          rolling stock, concentrated animal feeding operation,
          or vessel  or other floating craft, from  which
          pollutants are or may be discharged, or  from which
          there  is  or may be a thermal discharge.

pollutant:  Any  introduced gas, liquid, or solid that  makes  a
          resource  unfit for a specific purpose.

pollution:  The presence of matter or energy whose nature,
          1 ocation-,~-or; -quantrty ~prradu"Ces~ ~und-esrred'"enviTonrtrents 1~
          effects.

ppm:  Parts per million.  The unit commonly used to represent  t;-.e
          degree of  pollutant concentration where  the
          concentrations are small.  Usually a weight/volume
          ratio.

primary station  code:  The prime station  identifier by which  the
          WQF associates the location at which data has  been
          collected and stored in  the WQF.

program:  A logically self-contained sequence of instructions
          that can  be executed by  a computing system  to  perform a
          specific  task.

radiological parameters:  One of several general categories  intc
          which  approximately 270  of the most popular  water
          quality parameters are grouped.  Parameters  such  as
          Alpha  and Beta waveforms are  included  in this  group.
                                WQ
                               A-7

-------
random access:  Pertaining to a storage device where data or
          blocks of data can be, rve.ad, in any. particular or.degr,
          including sequential.

remote job entry:  The submission of jobs through an input
          device, such as a remote terminal, that has access  to  a
          computer through a communications link.

response time:  The elapsed time between the generation of  the
          last character of a message at a terminal and the
          receipt of the first character of the reply.  It
          includes terminal delay and network delay.

retrieval request:  A collection of keywords and values, or
          instructions, which describe a specific request for
         • information to be obtained from the WQF.  Each
          retrieval request constitutes one computer job.

river basin:  A geographical area of hydrologic drainage.   The
          total area drained by a river and its tributaries.

river mile  index:  A hydrological index.  A numerical code  which
          identifies the location of a sampling station on  a
          defined river system by defining its distance from  and
          relationship to the mouth of the river system.

sample:  A  representative part of a body of water collected for
          subsequent analysis for the presence of pollutants;
          grab sample, composite sample.

secondary, station, codej.. Additio.nal- station- identifiers, or	
          aliases, of the primary station code, by which the  WQF
          associates the location at which data has been
          collected and stored in the WQF.

software:   A  set of computer programs, procedures, rules, and
          associated documentation concerned with the operation
          of  computers.  Computer software includes compilers,
          monitors, editors, and utility programs.

solids parameters:  One of several general categories into  which
          approximately 135 of the most popular water quality
          parameters are grouped.  Parameters such as residues
          and silica are included in this group.

sorting:  The act of collecting records of a data set or file  in
          accordance with a prescribed sequence either ascending
          or  descending.

spooling:   (Simultaneous Peripheral Operations On-Line.)  The
          software technique by which output to relatively  slow
          devices such as printers is placed into queues on
          relatively faster mass storage devices to await


                               WQ
                              A-8

-------
          transmission in bursts.  This allows for more efficient
          use of a computer system.

station:  A specific location, or collection point, within an
          agency where water quality data are sampled.

station data:  WQF information which describes the geographical
          location of where a sample has been taken, such as the
          station's latitude and longitude.  This data is not
          likely to ever change.

STORET:  The acronym used to identify the computerized data base
          utility maintained by EPA for the STOrage and RETrieval
          of data relating to the quality of the waterways-within
          and contiguous to the United States.

surface water:  Water on the earth's surface that is exposed to
          the atmosphere.

terminal:  A physical device used to access a computer system
          from locations remote from the computer site.  Two
          basic types of terminals are keyboard-type terminals
          and card-reading terminals.

terminal basin:  A body of water, such as.a large lake, ocean, or
          gulf, into which all water will ultimately flow.  A
          terminal basin can also be associated with an area
          where a river flows across an international boundary.

time-sharing.-  A method of computer operation in which a computer
          facility is shared concurrently..by multiple.users^fcr . - .
          varying purposes.  Although the computer actually
          services each user in sequence, one at a time, the
          high-speed of the computer makes it appear that users
          are handled simultaneously and that a user is the only
          user of the system.

turnaround time:  The elapsed time between the submission of a
          job to a computer system and the return of results.

user number:  A unique number assigned to a user of a computer
          system which is used to gain access to the system and
          to which all usage charges are accumulated for
          accounting purposes. User id; account number.

value:  A qualifying word or expression which further defines the
          action to be taken by a keyword in the processing of
          the retrieval request in which the keyword-value
          combination is specified.

water pollution:  The addition of sewage, industrial wastes, or
          other harmful or objectionable material to water in
                               WQ
                              A-9

-------
          concentrations or in sufficient quantities to result  in
          measurable degradation- of- water* quality-.
                               •';   , • .  ••**• -,     *.:<.•-•*, v

water quality criteria:  The levels of: pollutants that affect the
          suitability of water for a given use.  Generally, water
          use classifications include:  public water supply;
          recreation; propagation of fish and other aquatic life;
          agricultural use; and industrial use.

Water Quality File:  WQF.  One of several files within STORE?
          that pertains to the storage, retrieval, and analysis
          of water quality data.

water quality management basin plan:   A management document that
          identifies the water quality problems of a particular
          basin, or portion of a basin, and that sets forth an
          effective remedial program to alleviate those problems.

water quality sample:  A water sample  collected from a stream,
          lake, river, estuary, or waste treatment discharge.
          The sample is usually collected in a device holding a
          quart, liter, or 250 ml and  placed in the water  at a
          given depth.  Samples are analyzed, usually in a
          laboratory,  for various constituents and pollutant
          indicators.

water quality standard:  .A plan for water qualty management
          containing four major elements:  the use to.be made of
          the water; criteria to protect those uses;
the water; criteria to protect those uses;
implementation plans and enforcement plans; anc
anti-degradation statement to protect existing high
quality waters. .
                                WQ
                               A-10

-------
        STORE! USER HANDBOOK
                PART
                 WQ
         WATER QUALITY FILE
              APPENDIX
                  3
STORET PARAMETERS AND PARAMETER CODES
  (Basic Retrieval; Second Edition!

-------
APPENDIX B:  STORET PARAMETERS AND PARAMETER CODES

The term- 'parameter1,  as related to the STORET Water Quality
File,  is defined as a designation for an individual element, or
water quality measurement,  for which values relating to water
quality are associated.  There are approximately 5000 unique
water quality parameters defined within STORET, and, over the
years, these definitions or designations have become universally
recognized by both Federal  government and state agencies as being
the standard water quality measurement designations.

CLASSIFYING PARAMETERS AND GROUPS

          For purposes of classification, the collection of
          parameters defined within STORET are grouped into the
          16 general categories listed below (Figures are as of
          Aoril 1979):
                            TABLE B-l
                 PARAMETER GROUPS WITHIN THE WQF
    Parameter         Name of          t Parameters   t Observations
  Group Number    Parameter Group      Within Group    Within STOP.ZT

       1         Administrative             54             684,080
       2         Bacteriological            59           2,403,153
       3         Biological                735             644,390
       4         Dissolved Oxygen            6           3,098,561
      , 5         Flow                       35           1,937,599
       6         General  Inorganic         116           9,119,301
       7         General  Organic         1,827             883,054
       8         Metals                    438           7,995,713
       9         Nitrogen                  67           4,635,072
      10         Oxygen Demand             194           1,830.195
      11   .      Pesticides                559             757,519
      12         Phosphorus                 51           2,189,963
      13         Physical                  277          10,948,230
      14         Radiological              343             528,724
      15         Solids                    194           4,957,324
      16         Temperature                32           4,265,816
                                         4,987          56,878,719
                               WQ
                              B-l

-------
PARAMETER CODES
                                     \
          Associated with each parameter is a parameter code, a
          five-digit number which is unique-to each individual
          parameter.  This numerical coding structure along with
          the uniqueness characteristic allows parameter codes to
          be easily referenced by the computer-based STORZT
          system.

          Users may obtain a sorted listing of existing parameter
          codes by executing any of the following STORET help
          data sets, which contain the necessary job control
          language to sort the parameter codes in the order
          shown:

          NAME OF DATA SET                 SORTED IN

             PARMALFA           alphabetic order by parameter name
             PARNUMER           numerical order by parameter code
             PARGROUP           alphabetic order within parameter
                                group
             PARNOBS            parameter code by'number of
                                observations
                               WQ
                              B-2

-------
MOST POPULAR PARAMETERS
          The 20 most-frequently sampled water quality parameters withi
          the WQF are listed below:
     Parameter Code
Parameter Name
Number of Observations
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
1,
1,
1,
1,











913,
370,
319,
073,
012,
446,
236,
227,
111,
987,
974,
912,
877,
783,
715,
652,
690,
610,
594,
593,
383
412
715
034
027
911
507
078
516
251
366
626
355
273
753
263
756
166
619
175
         00010    Temperature-Degrees Celsius
         00400    pK
         00300    Dissolved Oxygen
         00095    Conductivity
         00940    Chlorides
         00410    Alkalinity
         00900    Hardness, Total
         00310    BOD - 5 day
         00070    Turbidity
         00011    Temperature-Degrees Farenheit
         00945  .  Sulfate
         00060    Flow
         00610    Ammonia - N
         00665    Phosphorus, Total
         31616    Fecal Coliform
         00902    Hardness, Non-carbonate
         00530    Residue
         00620    Nitrate
         00440    Bicarbonate Ion
         00925    Magnesium

EDIT CHECKING OF PARAMETER VALUES

          Prior to any parameter value being stored  in the WQF,
          an edit check is performed against each parameter value
          being stored to assure that it falls within an
          acceptable range pre-established for that  parameter.
          The tables provided at the end of this appendix give
          the highest and lowest 'acceptable values for the
          parameters included within the respective  parameter
          groups.

ADDING NEW PARAMETERS TO THE STORET SYSTEM

          The process for adding new parameters to the STORET
          Water Quality File is relatively simple.   A user who
          needs a new parameter submits a written request on a
          standard EPA form using furnished instructions  (see the
          following pages).  The request form contains
          information about the user and the parameter In
          question, sufficient to permit EPA programs to process
          the request.  A new parameter number is assigned for  a
          request where a parameter number does not  already
          exist.  After assignment, the identification number and
          parametric data are entered into the Water Quality File
          and the user is notified.
                               WQ
                              B-3

-------
                       5TOPFT  5VSTTM P.WJ-JFTS?-  3HXSST FCFM
                                               .   Phor.e
        es  and  .-ddress:                       3.  Da_e
Fcr SSvircrser.tal  Pro-cscticr. .-csr.cy  Pecicral L'se Cnly:


             ^n-.u=rc i      i -
 3.  3ar.pli.-.c Ac-^vicy:
     I.   Verier c: Sarzlir.c Lccat-crj

        ^a :-!ay Be  P-jrc.uJ.vec cr  Ceiecad After (Date:
                                        WQ
                                       B-4

-------
  .-.   S'r.cr" :.'ar.s:

Tcr trrvircnaer/Lai ?rrcec;icr. Acer.cy  Heado^ar^ars 3TC?.=..  -Vse CrJ.-..

     Analysis Type:  ,  3:  3  ,
     PsconL-.c v.-.i;s:
                         ~
     3her-; Xars:        .  p • 3   , ;    (See  .-ixr.-ei
     r^li >:=.-=:           0  ?   , .    (See  .-i
-------
     INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETING THE PARAMETER REQUEST FORM
                             PART I
I.     Initiating Individual

Items A,  C,  and D are self-explanatory.  Item B should also
specify whether the agency is:  State, Federal (other than EPA),
Interstate,  or EPA.  Enter a check mark in item E if the number
is needed immediately,- otherwise leave this space blank for the
normal response.  The normal response is a Xerox copy of the
parameter request form with the assigned parameter code.

II.    For Environmental Protection Agency Regional Use

To be completed by EPA regional STORET coordinators.  Items A, B,
and C are self-explanatory.

III.   Description of Parameter

List the parameter's most common name.  Use descriptive words or
phrases such as:  "Total organic Kjeldahl nitrogen in bottom
deposits." Also, list technical and trade names if they apply to
the parameter.  The description should also include the units
that the observation is reported in.

IV.    Description of Analysis Technique, Collection Procedure,
      Sensitivity of Analysis, Etc.

Be sure the information clearly shows the distinctive
characteristics which separate this parameter from other
parameters.   This minimizes confusion or duplication in the
existing parameter number file.  When analysis techniques conform
to a procedure provide the "reference title., chapter-page-
section-etc. ".  For example, EPA manual of Methods For Chemical
Analysis of_ Water and Wastes, page 150 describes the standard
methods for tin.  Where confusion results from a stated quantity
such as "total", "bottom deposits", "filtering", etc., include
additional information to differentiate between this parameter
and others.   The same conditions apply to sample location or
collection procedure, when appropriate.  In addition, be sure to
distinguish between the various different sample medias, such as:
whole water sample, fish tissue, sediment, etc.
                               WQ
                              B-6

-------
                                 T «T
V.     Classification

Select the most appropriate classification•from the following
list and write it in the space provided.

          Administrative                   Oxygen Demand
          Bacteriological                  Pesticides
          Biological                       Phosphorus
          Dissolved Oxygen    .             Physical
          Flow                             Radiological
          General Inorganic                Solids
          General Organic                  Temperature
          Metals               '            Miscellaneous
          Nitrogen

VI.   Sampling Stations

      A.   Check appropriate boxes for  type of sampling stations
           which will provide data under this parameter code.   I
           none are appropriate specify in space marked other.

      •Bl.  Check appropriate box for sampling activity.  Data
           already collected refers to  data which have been
           taken from prior measurements of a parameter which  are
           not identified  in the STORE! listings.  Data to be
           collected refers to a parameter which is not in the
           STORZT listings and for which data will be collected
           and stored in the STORET data base if a parameter
           number is assigned.  Both is self-explanatory.

      B2.  Indicate the number of sampling locations  (stations)
           where the parameter is expected to be measured.

      B3. ' Show the average number of observations expected  for
           this parameter  per year for  all stations.

      B4.  Show estimated  number of years  this parameter will  be
           observed.  If data are to be collected for a special
           project of limited time, indicate the beginning and
           ending dates.

      C.   List your agency code under  which data will be stored.
           If  more than one agency will be using this parameter,
           list other agency codes.

      D.   If  parameter number is needed for temporary data
           storage and use, estimate the date of expected
           completion so that data can  be  taken out of active
           storaae.
 WQ
B-7

-------
VII.  Suggested Computer Printout Abbreviation and Parameter
      Description

      A.   Show parameter abbreviation listing as you would like
           to see it in the STORET printout retrieval.  Use
           existing printout of similar parameters for an
           example.  Always show units in the third row.

      B.   Describe parameter as you would like to see it  in  the
           STORET retrieval printout.  For uniformity, list the
           parameter name first (for example, Iron or Nitrogen,
           not Total or Dissolved).  An existing printout  of  a
           similar parameter can.be used as an example.

      C.   Show preferred decimal point for parameter measurements
           in appropriate block.  This information is for
           computer printing only and does not effect data entry
           or computer storage.  The maximum number of numeric
           characters is 8, with all data values being in  floating
           point format and may range from 99 x 100**(xx)  to
           99 x 10**(-xx) .

      D.   Indicate the preferred units for the parameter.  Review
           STORET parameter code listing to verify if parameter
           number already exists in easily converted  units (for
           example, inches to feet).  Also check to see what  the
           usual reporting units are for a parameter  group (for
           example, metals are  usually reported as ug/1,
           micrograms per liter).
                                WQ
                               B-8

-------
                        TABLE B2 - Metals
                     5,000 is revised limit!
STORE!
Code

910
915
916
920
925
927
929
930
931
935
937
1000
1002
1005
1007
1010
1012
1020
1022
1025
1C27
1030
1032
1033
1034
1040
1042
1045
1046
1047
104.9
1051
1055
1056  •
1065
1067
1075
1077
1090
1092
1105
1106
1145
71890
71895
71900
74010
Parameter  Name

Calcium  (CAC03)
Calcium  -  diss
Calcium  -  total
Magnesium  (CAC03)
Magnesium  -  diss
Magnesium  -  total
.Sodium - total
Sodium - diss
Sodium Adsb. Ratio
Potassium  -  diss
Potassium  -  total
Arsenic  -  diss
Arsenic  -  total
Barium - diss
Barium - total
Beryllium  -  diss
Beryllium  -  total
Boron  -  diss
Boron  -  total
Cadmium  -  diss
Cadmium  -  total
 Chromium
 Chromium
 Chromium
 Chromium
 Copper
 Copper
  - diss
  - Hex Val
  - Tri Val
  - total
- diss
- total
 Iron - total
 Iron - diss
 Iron - Ferrous
 Lead - diss
 Lead - total
 Manganese - total
 Manganese - diss
 Nickel - diss
 Nickel - total
 Silver - diss
 Silver - total
 Zinc - diss
 Zinc - total
 Aluminum - total
 Aluminum - diss
 Selenium - diss
 Mercury - diss
 Mercury - Susp.
 Mercury - total
 Total Iron (as Fe)
       Highest Acceptable
             Value

mg/1         3000
mg/1         1000
mg/1         1000
mg/1         3000
mg/1         1000
mg/1         1000
mg/1         5000
mg/1         5000
mg/1           50
mg/1          175
mg/1          175
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         2000
ug/1        56000
ug/1        56000
ug/1        56000
ug/1         1000
ug/1         1000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         2000
ug/1         5000
ug/1         5000
ug/1        25000
ug/1        25000
ug/1        20000
ug/1        20000
ug/1
ug/1           10
ug/1           10
ug/1           10
ug/1       . 56000
                                          Lowest Acceptab
                                                Value

                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  Q
                                                  0
                                                  n
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  o  .
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
                                                  0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
w
0
0
,-t
w
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
                                WQ
                               B-9

-------
              TABLE B3 - Bacteriological Parameters
STORE!
Code .     Parameter Name

31501     Total Coliform
31503     Total Coliform
31504     Total Coliform
30150     Total Coliform

31613     Fecal Coliform
31615     Fecal Coliform
31616     Fecal Coliform

31672     Fecal Strep
31673     Fecal Strep
31677     Fecal Strep
31679     Fecal Strep

31749     Total plate count
31751     Total plate count
              Highest A-.cceptAbl.e-.  Lowest. Acceptable
                    Value               Value
                                          0
                                          0
                                          0
                                          0

                                          c
                                          0
                                          0

                                          0
                                          0
                                          0
                                          0

                                          0
                                          0
4/100
t/100
1/100
1/100
t/100
1/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/100
t/ml
I/ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml
ml


24
24
24
24
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
100
100
* *
**
**
**
**
* *
* *
**
**
* *
* *
**
**
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
6
6
                 TABLE B4 - Physical Parameters
STORET
Code      Parameter Name

10        Water Temp - C
11        Water Temp - F
20        Air Temp - C
21        Air Temp - F
32        Cloud Cover, %
35        Wind Velocity,
36        Wind direction,
45        Precipitation,
70        Turbidity - JTU
74        Transp. %
75        Turbidity - HLGE ppm
77        Transparency - Seechi
80        Color, PT - CO
81        AP Color, PT - CO
85        Odor - Threshold number
94        Conductivity - Field,  25
95        Conductivity - Lab, 25 C
400       pH
403       pH - Lab
480       Salinity, ppth
              Highest Acceptable
                    Value
mph
 degrees from North
total inches per
        inches






h
ay
1,






60,
60,



37
98
52
125
101
85
361
15
000
101
500
600
500
500
250
000
000
12
12
40
Lowest Acceptable
      Value

        -2
        31
       -40
       -40
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         0
         1
         1
       0.9
       0.9
         0
                               WQ
                              B-10

-------
                      TABLE B5 - Phosphorus
STORE!
Code      Parameter Name
           i
650       T - P04 as P04        mg/1
653       SOLP04 - T as P04     mg/1
655       POLYP04 as P04        mg/1
660       ORTHOP04 as P04       mg/1
665       PHOS-TOT as P         mg/1
666       PHOS-diss as P        mg/1
7C505     TP04 as P-COL         mg/1
70507     PHOS-T ORTHO as ?     mg/1
71886     Total P as P04        mg/1
Highest Acceptable
      Value

        30
        30
        30
        30
        10
        10
        10
        10
        30
Lowest Acceptab!
      Value
        0
        0
        c
        3
        0
STORET
Code
1501
1503
1505
3501
3503
3505
9503
13501
22703

Parameter Nam<
Total Alpha
Diss Alpha
SUSD. Alpha
Total Beta
Diss Beta
Susp Beta
RA - 226 diss
SR - 90 Total
U-NAT-diss
               TABLE B6 - Radiological Parameters
                                       Highest Acceptable
                                             Value
                    Lowest Accepcabi'
                          Value
                                pc/1
                                pc/1
                                pc/1
                                pc/1
                                pc/1
                                ug/1
                                pc/1
                                pc/1
                                ug/1
       200
        75
       150
      3500
      3000
      1500
       500
       500
       500
                               WQ
                               B-ll

-------
                      TABLE 37 - Pesticides
STORET
Code      Parameter Name

39330     Aldrin                ug/1
39340     BHC                   ug/1
39350     Chlordane             ug/1
39360     DDD                   ug/1
39365     DDE                   ug/1
39370     DDT                   ug/1
39380     Dieldrin              ug/1
39390     Endrin                ug/1
39400     Toxaphene             ug/1
39410     Heptachlor  .          ug/1
39420     Heptachlor-epoxide    ug/1
39480     Methoxychlor          ug/1
39530     Malathion             ug/1
39540     Parathion             ug/1
39600     Methyl Parathion      ug/1
39782     Lindane               ug/1
       Highest Acceptable.
             Value
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
                9
               ,9
               ,9
               ,9
               ,9
               ,9
               ,9
Lowest, AcceptabL
      Value

        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
                       TABLE B8 - Nitrogen
STORET
Code      Parameter Name

600       Total N
605       Organic N
608       Ammonia-N
610       T. Ammonia-N
615       N02-N
620       N03-N
625       Total Kjel N
630       N02 & N03-N
635       NH3 & Org.-N
71850     N03-N03
       Highest Acceptable
             Value

mg/1          100
mg/1           15
mg/1           25
mg/1           20
mg/1            5
mg/1           50
mg/1           50
mg/1           55
mg/1           70
mg/1           65
Lowest Acceptable
      Value"

        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
                               WQ
                              B-12

-------
                    TABLE B9 - Oxygen Demand
STORE!
Code

310
335
340
Parameter Name

BOD - 5 day
COD - Low
COD - Hiah
       Highest Acceptable  Lowest Acceptab!
             Value               Value

mg/1          150                  C
mg/1         1000                  0
mg/1         1000                  C
                  TABLE 310 - Dissolved Oxygen
STORET
Code

299
300
301
Parameter Name

D.O. probe
D.O.
D.O. % SAT
       Highest Acceptable  Lowest Acceptab]
             Value               Value
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
 30
 30
200
0
                                WQ
                               3-13

-------
            TABLE Bll - General Inorganic Parameters
STORE!
Code      Parameter Name

365       Chlorine demand 15min mg/1
405       Carbon dioxide        mg/1
410       Total Alkalinity      mg/1
415       Phenoth. Alkalinity   mg/1
435       Total Acidity         mg/1
436       Mineral Acidity       mg/1
437       C02 Acidity           mg/1
440       Bicarbonate Ion       mg/1
445       Carbonate Ion         mg/1
685       T. Inorganic Carbon   mg/1
690       Total Carbon          mg/1
720       Total Cyanide         mg/1
745    .   Total Sulfide         mg/1
746       Diss Sulfide          mg/1
760       SWL, PBI              mg/1
900       Total Hardness        mg/1
940       Chloride              mg/1
945       Total Sulfate         mg/1
946       Diss Sulfate          mg/1
947       Diss Fluoride         mg/1
951       Total Fluoride        mg/1
5006G     Chlorine tot residual mg/1
Highest Acceptable.
      Value

        15
       100
      1000
       750
      1000
      1000
       750
       450
       100
       100
       150
        10
      1500
      1500
       150
      5000
     22000
      2500
      2500
        15
        15
         5
                           Lowest Accepts:
                                 Value"

                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   0
                                   n
                TABLE B12 - Biological Parameters
STORET
Code      Parameter Name

32210     Chlorophyll-A (unc)
32211     Chlorophyll-A (cor)
32212     Chlorophyll-B (unc)
32214     Chlorophyll-C (unc)
32217     Chlorophyll-A (unc)
32218     Pheophytin-A
32219     Pheophytin Ratio
32721     % Chi A of Phe A
32230     Chlorophyll-A
32231     Chlorophyll-B
32232     Chlorophyll-C
32234     Total Chlorophyll
60050     Total Algae
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
ug/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
Highest Acceptable
      Value

       500
       750
      1000
       200
       500
       200
       2.0
       101
        . 5
       .75
        . 2
       1 . 0
    700000
Lowest Acceptab!
      Value

        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
        0
                               WQ
                              B-14

-------
                       TABLE 313  -  Solids
STORE!
Code
500
505
510
515
520
525
530
535
540
545
546
955
956 '
70300



. Parameter Name
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Res idue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Residue,
Silica,
Silica,
Residue,
Total
Tot-Vol
Tot-Fix
Diss-105C
VOL-FLT
FIX-FLT
TCT-NFLT
VOL-NFlt
FIX-NFLT
SETTL
SETTL
diss
Total
diss-180C
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
ml/1
mg/1
mg/1
.mg/1
mg/1
                                       Highest Acceptable
                                             Value

                                            15000
                                            10000
                                            10000
                                            20000
                                            10000
                                            10000
                                            10000
                                            10000
                                             1000
                                             1000
                                             1000
                                             2000  .
                                             2000
                                             4000
                    Lowest Acceptable
                          Value"
                            n
                            u
                            p.
             TABLE 314 - General Organic Parameters
STORET
Code     'Parameter Name

550       Oil-grease            mg/1
630       T. Organic Carbon     mg/1
681       Diss Organic Carbon   mg/1
32270     Chloroform Ext.       mg/1
32730     Phenols          .     ug/1
38260     MBAS                  mg/1
39516     PC3S                  ug/1
Highest Acceptable
      Value

       250
       100
       100
         5
      1500
        10
         5
Lowest Acceptabi
      Value
        0
        n
                               WQ
                              3-15

-------
                             Height

     WHO Code 1555 for recording height of the-dominant, waves
Code
Code
If 50
                                                 is added to direction
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
Less
1/2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
1/2
m
(
m
(
m
(
m
nan ° m
(11/2
3

6

9

ft
(5
1/2
(8
1/2
(11
)
ft
ft
ft
ft
ft
(1 ft)
ft)

)
)
)
)
)
(13 ft)

m
Height
(14
not
f
t)
determined
n •
w
]_
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
. 5 m
51/2
6 m
61/2
7 m
71/2
8 m
81/2
9 m
91/2
(16 ft)
m (171/2 ft)
(19 ft)
•m (21 ft)
(221/2 ft)
m. ( 2 4 ft)
(251/2 ft)
m (27 ft)
(29 ft)
m (301/2 ft)
Notes:

(1)  Each code figure provides for reporting a range of heights.   For
     example: 1 =1/4 m  (1 ft) to 3/4m  (21/2 ft); 5  = 2 m  (7  ft!  to
     2 3/4mm  (9 ft); 9  = 41/4 m (131/2 ft) to 4 3/4 m  (15  ft),  etc.

(2)  If a wave height comes exactly midway between  the heights
     corresponding  to two code figures, the lower code figure  is
     reported; e.g. a heig-ht of 2 3/4m is reportedy code  figure 5.

     In aeronautical forecast codes, only the left-hand table  is  to  be
     used and code  figure 9 has the meaning: 4 l/2m (14 ft)  or  more-.

     The average value  of the wave height (vertical distance between
     trough and crest)  is reported, as obtained from the  larger well
     formed waves of the wave system being observed.
                               WQ
                               B-16

-------
                             Period

      WMO Code 3155 for recording period of dominant waves
Code
                                     Code
  2   5 seconds or less
  3   6 or 7 seconds
  4   3 or 9 seconds
  5  10 or 11 seconds
  6  12 or 13 seconds
     14 or 15 seconds
                                       8   16 or 17 seconds
                                       9   18 or 19 seconds
                                       0   20 or 21 seconds
                                       1  - Over 21 seconds
                                       x   Calm, or period
                                           not determined
Notes:

(1)  The period of the waves is the time between the passage of two
     successive wave crests past a fixed point (it is equal to the
     wave length divided by the wave speed).

(2)  The average value of the wave period is reported,  as obtained
     from the larger well-formed waves of the wave system being
     observed.

                       Cloud Type (Genus)

         WMO Code 0500 for recording cloud type-(genus)
Code

  0
  1
  2
  3
  4
  5
  6
  7
  8
  9
  x
                 	    Cl
                 	    Cc
                 	    Cs
                 	    Ac
                 	    As
                 	    Ns
                 	    Sc
             	    St
             	    Cu
Cumulonimbus 	    Cb
Cloud not visible owing to darkness,  fog,
sandstorm, or other analogous phenomena
Cirrus .  .  .
Cirrocumulus
Cirrostratus
Altocumulus.
Altostratus.
Numbostratus
Stratocumulus
Stratus.  .  .
Cumulus.  .  .
                                          duststorm,
                               WQ
                              B-17

-------
                          Cloud Amount

            WHO Code 2700 for recording cioud amount
Code
00
1   1 okta or less, but not zero
2   2 oktas
3   3 oktas
4   4 oktas
5   5 oktas '
6   6 oktas
7   7 oktas or more, but not 8 oktas
8   8 oktas
9   .Sky obscured, or cloud amount
         cannot be estimated
                                           0
                                           1/10
but not zero
     or less,
2/10 - 3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10 - 8/10
9/10 or more, but not
10/10
                                                                  IC/l;
                               WQ
                              B-18

-------
                         Present Weather

Conversion from 1936 International.Meteorological Organization Code tc the

                          WMO Code 4501
                          Code Underlined                        WMO
                                                                 Code
          ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF SKY AND SPECIAL PHENOMENA   4501
                                                          (equivalent)

00   Cloudless                                                     0
0         1   Partly cloudy.                                       1
02   Cloudy.                                                       1
03   Overcast.                                                     2
04        Low fog, on ground or over sea.                          4
05   Haze (but visibility greater than 2,000 m., 2,200 yds).       4
06        Dust devils seen.                                        4
07   Distant  lightning.                                            9
08   Light fog or mist (visibility between 1,000 and 2,000 m.,     4
          1,100 and 2,200 yds).
09   Fog at a distance, but not at the ship.                       4
10   Precipitation within sight.                                   6
11   Thunder, without precipitation at the ship.                   9
12   Dust storm within sight, but not at the ship.                 3
13   Ugly, threatening sky.                i                        9
14        Squally weather.                                         9
15   Heavy squalls.  in last 3 hours                               9
16   Waterspouts seen.                                             9


   PRECIPITATION IN A LAST HOUR BUT NOT AT TIME OF OBSERVATION

20   Precipitation  (rain, drizzle, hail, snow, or sleet)
21        Drizzle                                                  5
22   Rain            other than showers                            6
23   Snow            other than showers              in last hour   7
24   Rain and snow or sleet                          but  not at     7
25   Rain shower  (s).                                 time of      3
26   Snow shower  (s).                                observation.   7
27   Hail or  rain and hail shower (s).                             9
28   Slight thunderstorm.                                          9
29   Heavy thunderstorm.                                           9
                               WQ
                              B-19

-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to th.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
                          WHO Code 4501
                            (Cont'd)

                DUST STORMS AND STORMS OF DRIFTING SNOW

             (Visibility less than 1,000 m., 1,100 yards
                    has decreased.
                    no appreciable change.
                    has increased.
Dust or sand storm.
Dust or sand storm,
Dust or sand storm,
Dust or sand storm,
Line of dust storms.
Storm of drifting snow.
Slight storm of drifting snowgenerally low
Heavy storm of drifting snow
Slight storm of drifting snowgenerally high
Heavy storm of drifting snow

                          FOG

     (Visibility less than 1,000 m., 1,100 yards)
                          WMO
                         Code
                         4501
                    '. equivalent)

                           3
                           3
                           3
                           3

                           3
                           3
                           3
                           3
                           3
fog.
Moderate fog in last hour
Thick fog in last hour
Fog,  sky discernible
     sky not discernible
     sky discernibleno appreciable change during
     sky not discernible
     sky discerniblehas begun or become thicker during
     sky not discernible   last hour
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog,
Fog
                           but not at time of observation

                           has become thinner during last hour
              last hour
    in patches.
                       4
                       4
                       4

                       4
                       4
                       4
                       4
                       4
                       4
                             DRIZZLE
       (Precipitation consisting of numerous minute drops)
Drizzle
Intermittent
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous
Drizzle and fog.
Slight or moderate
Thick
                slight drizzle
                slight drizzle
                moderate drizzle
                moderate drizzle
                thick drizzle
                thick drizzle
                           drizzle
                           drizzle
                           5
                           5
                           5
                           5
                           5
                           5
                           5
and
and
rain
rain
                               WQ
                              B-20

-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to th
                          WHO Code 4501
                             (Cont'd)

                               RAIN
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69

70
71
72
73
"4
75
76
77
78
79

80
31
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Rain.
Intermittent slight rain.
Continuous slight rain.
Intermittent moderate rain.
Continuous moderate rain.
Intermittent heavy rain.
Continuous heavy rain.
Rain and fog.








Slight or moderate rain and snow, mixed.
Heavy
SNOW
Snow or sleet.
Intermittent slight snow in flakes
Continuous slight snow in flakes
Intermittent moderate snow in flakes
Continuous moderate snow in flakes
Intermittent heavy snow in flakes
Continuous heavy snow in flakes
Snow and fog.
Granular snow (frozen drizzle).
Ice crystals
• SHOWERS ( S )
Shower (s)
Shower (s) of slight or moderate rain
Shower (s) of heavy rain
Shower (s) of slight or moderate snow
Shower (s) of heavy snow
Shower (s) of slight or moderate rain
Shower (s) of heavy rain
Shower (s) of granular snow
Shower (s) of slight or moderate hail,
Shower (s) of heavy hail


















and snow
and snow

or rain
or rain
   WHO
  Code
  45C1
' ecu ivalent

       6
       6
                                                         and hail
                                                        and hail
                               WQ
                              B-21

-------
Conversion from 1936 International Meteorological Organization Code to the

                           WHO Code 4501
                               (Cont'd)                 WHO
                                                        Code
                             THUNDERSTORM               4501
                                                    (equivalent)

90   Thunderstorm                                                9
91   Rain at time               thunderstorm during last hour,
92   Snow, or sleet at time     time of observation.             9
93   Thunderstorm, slight without hail or soft hail,
     but with rain (or snow)                                     9
94   Thunderstorm slight with soft hail                          9
9-5   Thunderstorm moderate without hail, but with
     rain (or snow)                                              9
9'6   Thunderstorm moderate with soft hail          at time of    9
97   Thunderstorm heavy without hail, but with     observation   9
     rain (or snow)                                              9
98   Thunderstorm combined with dust storm                       9
99   Thunderstorm heavy with hail                                9
                               WQ
                              B-22

-------
                        Present Weather

          WHO  Code  46 7 ? for  recording  present  weather


    Cede  figure
       ww
       00 Cloud  development  not observed  or  not
          observable                           characteristic  change
       01 Clouds generally dissolving  or       of  the  state  of  sky
          becoming  less developed              during  the  past  hour
       02 State  of  sky on  the  shole  unchanged
       03 Clouds generally forming or  developing
       04 Visibility  reduced by smoke,  e.g.  veldt  or  forest  fires.
           industrial  smoke or  volcanic ashes
       05 Haze
       06 Widespread  dust  in suspension  in  the air,  not  raised  by
          sind at or  near  the  station  at  the time  of  ocservaticr.
       07 Dust or sand raised  by wind  at  or  near  the  station at the
           time of observation, but no  well  developed  dust  whirlis-
          or  sand whirl(s),  and no duststorm or sandstorm  seen
       08'Well developed dust  whirl(s)  or sand whirl(s)  seen at
          or  near the station  during the  preceding hour  or at  the
           time of observation, but no  duststorm or standstorrn
       09 Duststorm or sandstorm within  sight  at  the  time  of
          observation, or  at the station  during the precedina  hour
       10 Mist
       11 Patches of    shallow fog  or ice  fog at  the  station,
       12 More or less  whether on land  or  sea, not deeper than
          continuous    about  2 metres on land or  10  metres  at  sea
       13 Lightning visible, no thunder  heard
       14 Precipitation within sight,  not reaching the ground  or
           the surface of the sea
       15  Precipitation within sight,  reaching the ground  or the
           surface of  the sea,  but distant (i.e. estimated  to be
          more than 5 km)  from the station
       16  Precipitation within sight,  reaching the ground  or the
           surface of  the sea,  near to,  but  not at  the  station
       17  Thunderstorm, but  no precipation  at  the  time of
          observation
       13  Squalls             at or  within  sight  of the  station
       19  Funnel cloud(s)**    during the  preceding hour  or at
                               the time of observation
 * The expression "at the station"  refers to a land station or a
** Tornado cloud or waterspout.
                               WQ.
                              3-23

-------
                       Code 4677  (Cont'd)
ww=20-29  Precipitation,  fog,  ice fog or thunderstorm at the
          station during  the preceding hour but not at the time
          of observation
ww
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Drizzle (not freezing) or snow grains
Rain (not freezing)
Snow
Rain and snow or ice pellets, type(s)
Freezing drizzle or freezing rain
Shower(s) of rain
Shower (s) of snow, or of rain and snow
Shower(s) of hail, or of rain and hail
Fog or ice fog
Thunderstorm (with or without precipita



not falling
as shower (s)





tion)
ww=30-39 Duststorm, sandstorm drifting or blowing snow

          ww
          30                               - has decreased during
                                             the preceding hour
          31  Slight or moderate dust-     - no appreciable change
              storm or sandstorm             during the preceding hour
          32                               - has begun or has increased
                                             during the preceding hour
          33                               - has decreased during the
                                             preceding hour
          34  Severe duststorm or          - no appreciable change
              sandstorm                      the preceding hour
          35                             .  - has begun or has increased
                                             during the preceding hour
          36  Slight or moderate blowing snow  generally low (below
          37  Heavy drifting snow              eye level)
          38  Slight or moderate blowing snow  generally high (above
          39  Heavy blowing snow               eye level)


ww=40-49 Fog or ice fog at time of observation

          ww
          40  Fog or ice fog at a distance at the time of observation,
              station but not at the station during the preceding
              hour, the fog or ice fog extending to a level above that
              of the observer
          41  Fog or ice fog in patches
          42  Fog or ice fog, sky visible     has become thinner during
          43  Fog or ice fog, sky invisible   the preceding hour


                               WQ
                              B-24

-------
                    Code 4677  (Cont'd)
Code figure
44
45
46
47
48
49
ww=50-59 Prec
Fog or ice fog, sky visible No appreciable chance
Fog or ice fog, sky invisible during the preceding he-
Fog or ice fog, sky visible has begun or has become
Fog or ice fog, sky invisible thicker during the
Fog, depositing rime, sky visible preceding hour
Fog, depositing rime, sky invisible
ipitation at the station at the time of observation
ww=50-59 Drizzle
ww
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent slight at time of
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous observation
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent moderate at time of
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous observation
Drizzle, not freezing, intermittent heavy (dense) at time
Drizzle, not freezing, continuous of observation
Drizzle, freezing, slight
Drizzle, freezing, moderate or heavy-(dense)
Drizzle and rain, slight
Drizzle and rain, moderate or heavy
ww=60-69 Rain
WW
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
63
69
ww=70-79
70
71
72
73
Rain, not freezing, intermittent slight at time
Rain, not freezing, continuous of observation
Rain, not freezing, intermittent moderate at time of
Rain, not freezing, continuous observation
Rain, not freezing, intermittent heavy at time
Rain, not freezing, continuous of observation
Rain, freezing, slight
Rain, Freezing, moderate or heavy
Rain or drizzle and snow, slight
Rain or drizzle and snow, moderate or heavy

Intermittent fall of snow flakes slight at time of
Continuous fall of snow flakes observation
Intermittent -fall of snow flakes moderate at time of
Continuous fall of snow flakes observation
                            WQ
                           B-25

-------
                       Code 4677  (Cont'd)
                                                 heavy at time of
                                                 observat ion
Code figure
       74  Intermittent fall of snow flakes
       75  Continuous fail of snow flakes
       76  Ice prisms (with or without for)
       77  Snow grains (with or without fog)
       78  Isolated starlike snow crystals (with or without fog)
       79  Ice pellets, type (a)
ww=80-39 Showery precipitation,  or precipitation with current or
              recent thunderstorm
ww
80
81
82
. 83
84
85
86
87

88

Rain shower(s), slight
Rain shower (s), moderate or heavy
Rain shower(s), violent
Shower(s) of rain and snow mixed, slight
Shower(s) of rain and snow mixed, moderate or heavy
Snow shower(s), slight
Snow shower (s), moderate or heavy
Shower (s) of snow pellets or ice - slight
pellets, type (b), with or without
rain or rain and snow mixed - moderate or heavy
          90
          91
          92

          93

          94
          95
          96
          97
          98
          99
          Shower(s) of hail,  with or
              without rain or rain and snow
           mixed, not associated with
           Slight rain at time of observation
           Moderate or heavy rain at time of
           observation
           Slight snow, or rain and snow mixed
           or hail at time of observation
           Moderate or heavy snow, or rain and
           snow mixed or hail at time of
           observation
           Thunderstorm, slight or moderate,
           without hail, but with rain and/or
           snow at time of observation
           Thunderstorm, slight or moderate,
                                    - slight

                                    - moderate or heavy
                                      thunderstorm during
                                      the preceding hour
                                      but not at time of
                                      observation
              with hail at time of
Thunderstorm,  heavy,
but with rain and/or
observation
Thunderstorm combined with
storm or sandstorm at time
vation
Thunderstorm,  heavy,  with
at time of observation
                                observation
                                without hail,
                                snow at time of
thunderstorm at
of observation
                                      dust-
                                      of obser-

                                     hail
                               WQ
                              B-26

-------
              CODES FOR TIDE STAGE PARAMETER 00067
DIGIT
First
       CODE
•(For  East and  Gulf
 Coast Stations)
          -(For West Coast Stations)
Second
                                       DESCRIPTION

                                       1    High  Water  Slack
                                       2    Ebb Current
                                       3    Low Water  Slack
                                       4    Flood Current
                                       3    Mean  Tide  Level  (Midway
                                           Between  Mean High Water
                                           and Mean Low Water)

                                       1    Higher High Water Slack
                                       2    Greater  Ebb
                                       3    Lower Low  Water  Slack
                                       4    Greater  Flood
                                       5    Lower High Water  Slack
                                       6    Lesser Ebb
                                       7    Higher Low Water  Slack
                                       8    Lesser Flood
                                       9    Mean  Tide  Level

                                       0    +-3  hour
                                       1    +- 2  hour
                                       2    +- 1  hour
                                       3    f- 40 minutes
                                       4    +- 20 minutes
                                       5    f- 10 minutes
                                       6    +-  5 minutes

                                       0    No Remark
                                       1    Determined from U.S.
                                           Coast and Geodetic
                                           Survey Tide or Current
                                           Tables
                                       2    Measured

                                       0    No Remark
                                       1    Maximum Ebb Current
                                       2    Maximum Flood Current

          The purpose of this parameter and the  associated codes
is to provide descriptive information concerning tidal stage at
the time of sample collection for use alone or in conjunction
with.parameter 00065 which shows water surface elevation in terms
of feet above datum.

          The tide codes are set up to provide the user with
flexibility in defining tidal stage.  As  an example,   for an East
Coast sampling station, the code 1000 would be used to show that
the stage was somewhere near high water at the time of sampling
(1 - High Water Slack, 0 - Occurred within plus  or minus 3 hours
Third
 Fourth
                                WQ
                               B-27

-------
of the sample time, 00 - No Remark).  On the other hand, if more
detailed information were available the code 1610 could hrave b-een-•
used (1 - High Water Slack, 6 - Occurred within plus or minus 5
minutes of sampling time, 1 - Determined from USC and GS Tide-
Tables, 0 - No Remark).

          It is necessary that the user enter all four digits of
code in proper order — that is,  code estimated occurrence of
East or Gulf Coast Mean Tide Level as 5000 rather than
0500,0050,0005, etc.

          Coding for severity parameters 01300,01305,01310, 01315,
           01320,  01325, 01330, 01335, 01340, 01345, 01350, 01355

                                           0 - None

                                           1 - Mild

                                           2 - Moderate

                                           3 - Serious

                                           4 - Extreme

                         PARAMETER 70211

                     5 DIGIT TIDE STAGE CODE

          1st digit                        0          Low Tide
                                           1          High Tide.

          2nd digit                        0          Before High or Low Tic
                                           1          After High or Low Tide

          3rd digit                        0          Less than one hour
                                           1 or       Equals number of hours

          4th & 5th digits               00-59       . Minutes

          This technique can not be used for standard STORET fixed field
          format.
                               WQ
                              B-28

-------
              CODES FOR WEATHER AT TIME OF SAMPLING

                         PARAMETER 47501
Second and
Third
Fourth
Fifth
CODING

1-Clear
2-Scattered clouds
3-Partly cloudy
4-Cloudy
5-Mist
6-Fog
7-Light shower
8-Rain
9-Snow
0-Sleet

Wind Direction-Round direction to nearest
10 degrees and use first two digits.
00-North
05-Northeast
09-East
18-South
27-West

Wind Speed Severity
0-Calm
1-Light
2-Moderately light
3-Moderate
4-Moderately strong
5-Strong
6-Gale or stronger

Relative Temperature
1-Freezing or below
2-Cold
3-Cool
4-Moderate
5-Warm
6-Hot
                               WQ
                              B-29

-------
                     CODES FOR CLOUD, AMOU.NT,

                         PARAMETER 84030
ALPHA VALUE          DESCRIPTION

    CLR              Clear:  less than 1% sky cover
    SCT              Scattered:  1% to 50% sky cover
    BKN           .   Broken:  60% to 90% sky cover
    OVC              Overcast:  more than 90% sky cover
                     Thin  (when prefixed to the above symbols)
    -X               Partial obscuration:  1% to less than  10%
                     sky hidden by precipitation or obstruction
                     to vision
     X               Obscuration:  10% sky hidden by precipitation
                     or obstruction to vision
                               WQ
                              B-30

-------
                   CODES FOR PHYSICAL WEATHER

                         PARAMETER 84031


A.   WEATHER AND OBSTRUCTION TO VISION SYMBOLS

    A                Hail
    BS               Blowing snow
    D                Dust
    F                Fog
    GF               Ground fog
    H                Haze
    K                Smoke
    L                Drizzle
    R                Rain
    RW               Rain showers
    S                Snow
    SW               Snow showers
    T                Thunderstorms
    T +               Severe thunderstorms
    ZL               Freezing drizzle
    ZR               Freezing rain

B.   PRECIPITATION INTENSITIES

    (-)              Light
    (No Sign)        Moderate
    (+)              Heavy


The Precipitation Intensity codes shown under B are prefixed  to
the alpha values listed under A, Weather and Obstruction  to
Vision Symbols.  For example, +A would be  the value for heavy
hail.
                               WQ
                              B-31

-------
                   CODES FOR STREAM CDNDJTLONS.

                         PARAMETER 84032
ALPHA VALUE          DESCRIPTION

    N                Normal
    L                Low
    H                High

    SW               Swift
    SL               Slow
    MO               Moderate

    C                Clear
    MU               Muddy
    0                Other
EXAMPLE:  NSLMU would indicate a normal, slow  flow,  muddy  stream,
                               WQ
                              B-32

-------
     STORE! USER  HANDBOOK
              PART
              WQ
      WATER QUALITY  FILE
            APPENDIX
                C
     STATE  AND  COUNTY  CODES
!Basic  Retrieval;  Second  Edition)

-------
APPENDIX C:  STATE AND COUNTY CODES

This appendix contains complete listings of the state codes, the
codes assigned to other U.S. territories and possessions, and the
codes assigned to each county and county equivalent within each
of the 50 states.  All listings appear in alphabetical sequence.
STATZ CODES:
Name

ALABAMA
ALASKA
ARIZONA
ARKANSAS
CALIFORNIA
                      Abbreviation  Code Name
                           AL
                           AK
                           AZ
                           AR
                           CA
                           01  MISSOURI
                           02  MONTANA
                           0 4  NEBRASKA
                           05  NEVADA
                           06  NEW HAMPSHIRE
                   Abbreviation

                        MO
                        MT
                        NE
                        NV
                        NH
Cede

 29
COLORADO
CONNECTICUT
DELAWARE
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
FLORIDA
                 CO
                 CT
                 DE
                 DC
                 FL
                                     08  NEW JERSEY          NJ
                                     09  NEW MEXICO          NM
                                     10  NEW YORK            NY
                                     11  NORTH CAROLINA      NC
                                     12  NORTH DAKOTA        ND
                                  36
                                  3 7
                                  •> 9
GEORGIA
HAWAII
IDAHO
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
                 GA
                 HI
                 ID
                 IL
                 IN
13  OHIO
15  OKLAHOMA
16  OREGON
17  PENNSYLVANIA
18  RHODE ISLAND
                                                             OH
                                                             OK
                                                             OR
                                                             ?A
                                                             RI
IOWA
KANSAS
KENTUCKY
LOUISIANA
MA I NE
                 IA
                 KS
                 KY
                 LA
                 ME
                                     19  SOUTH CAROLINA      SC
                                     20  SOUTH DAKOTA        SD
                                     21  TENNESSEE           TN
                                     22  TEXAS               TX
                                     23  UTAH                UT
                                  - S
                                  49
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
MISSISSIPPI
                 MD
                 MA
                 MI
                 MN
                 MS
                                     24  VERMONT
                                     25  VIRGINIA
                                     26  WASHINGTON
                                     27  WEST VIRGINIA
                                     28  WISCONSIN
                                         WYOMING
                        VT
                        VA
                        WA
                        wv
                        WI
                        WY
 50
 51
 5 3
 54
 5 5
 5 6
Note:  The following codes are reserved for possible future
in identifying American Samoa (03), Canal Zone  (07), Guam  •:
Puerto Rico (43), and Virgin Islands (52).
                                                                       use
                               WQ
                               C-l

-------
CODES. OF TERRITORIES AND POSSESSIONS:
Name


AMERICAN SAMOA

CANAL ZONE

CANTON AND ENDER3URY
  ISLANDS
*
*
*
GUAM

JOHNSTON ATOLL
MIDWAY ISLANDS

PUERTO RICO

RYUKYU ISLANDS,.SOUTHERN





SWAN  ISLANDS

TRUST TERRITORIES OF
  THE PACIFIC  ISLANDS

U.S.  MISCELLANEOUS
  CARIBBEAN  ISLANDS
U.S.  MISCELLANEOUS
  PACIFIC  ISLANDS
 VIRGIN  ISLANDS

 WAKE  ISLAND
   Code
^Numeric!

    60

    61

    62

    63
    64
    65
    66

    67
  Code Office
(Alpha)  Abbr.
               Notes
    74


    75


    76



    77


    78

    79
  AQ

  PQ

  EC-





 CO

 JQ
68
69
70
71
72
73



MQ
RQ
YQ
 SQ


 TQ


 BQ




 IQ


 VQ

 WQ
     U.S. territory in the
       Pacific
CZ   Territory in Panama
       leased by U.S.
     Under common U.S.-U.K.
       administration
GU   U.S. territory in the
       Pacific
     U.S. territory in the
       Pacific. Includes Sand
       Island
     U.S. territory  in  the
       Pacific
PR   Commonwealth associated
       with the U.S.
     U.S. administered  islands
       in the Pacific south of
       27 52'
     No. Lat.; 128   14  E. Long
       and the Daito-jima
     U.S. territory  in  the
       Caribbean
     U.S. administered:   Inclu
       Caroline, Mariana, and
       Marshall island  groups
     Includes Navassa Islands,
       Quito Sueno Bank,  Ronca
       Cay, Serrana  Bank  and
       Serranilia Bank.
     Includes Kingman Reef,
       Howland, Baker and
       Jarvis Island, and
       Palmyra Atoll
VI   U.S. territory  in  the
       Caribbean
     U.S. territory  in  the
       Pacific
                               WQ
                               C-2

-------
COUNTY CODES:

The codes assigned to each county and county equivalent, in
state-by-state order, appear on the following pages.

In addition to these codes, the following special county codes
have been established.  The current listing of these, and any
additional special county codes, is available on-line through the
STORE! help data set named COUNTY.CODES.
          AREA                             CODE

          Chesapeake Bay-Open Water         990
          Atlantic Ocean                    991
          Pacific Ocean                     992
          Gulf of Mexico  .                  993
          Lake Erie                         994
          Lake Ontario                      995
          Lake Superior                     996
          Lake Huron                        997
          Lake Michigan                     998
          Canada                            999
                               WQ
                               C-3

-------
ALABAMA—ALASKA
STATE
STATE


STATE


CODE

001
OC3
005

007

009

01 I
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

031
033
C- 3 r-
037
039

04!
043
045
047
049

05;

053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079
08!
083
085
087
089


NAME: ALABAMA
ABBREVIATION: AL


CODE: 01


COUNTY NAME

AUTAUGA
09 1 MA.RENGO
095 MARSHALL
097 MOBILE
099 .MONROE


10; MONTGOMERY
'03 WORGAN
'05 PERRY
i07 PlCXENS
BALDWIN !09 ?IK£
3AR3OUR

BIBB

8LOUNT

BULLOCK
BUTLER
CALHOUN
CHAMBERS
CHEROKEE

CHILTON
CHOCTAW
CLARKE
CLAY
CLE3URNE

COFFEE
COLBERT
CONECUH
COCSA
COVINGTON

CRENSHAW
CULLMAN
DALE
DALLAS
DE KAL9

5LMORE

ESCAM8IA
ETOWAH
FAYETTE
FRANKLIN
GENEVA
GREENE
HALE
HENRY
HOUSTON

JACKSON
JEFFERSON
LAMAR
LAUDERDALE
LAWRENCE
LEE
LIMESTONE
LOWNDES
MACON
MADISON

1 i 1 RANDOLPH

1 13 RUSSELL
115 STCLAIR
i i 7 SHELBY
i 19 SUMTER
1 2 ' TALLADEGA
123 TALLAPOOSA
125 TUSCALOOSA
127 WALKER
129 WASHINGTON

i31 WILCOX
133 WINSTON



STATE NAME: ALASKA


The o-^'oai political units of Alaska are
called oorcughs. There are II organized
boroughs and an unorganized borough. Un-
fortunately, for statistical purposes, rhe or-
ganized boroughs cover only a very small
percentage of "he land area of the State and
have rhe further Disadvantage of e«ciuding
military and Indian reservations which lie
within tneir boundaries. Consequently, the
unorganized ocrcugn is too large to orov.de a
f V t t" t'cal ana' s -or
these reasons rne boroughs are not usable
for most statistica! purposes.
The Bureau of the Census, in conjunction
Census Divisions for Alaska which provide a
more effective basis for statistical purposes.
The Census Divisions ore stable geographic
statistical areas with denned boundaries that
encompass the entire stcte end genera'ly
comprise the election districts. The State of
Alaska has requested that these Census

Divisions be •-•riiized for statistical purposes.
for the geopolitical subdivisions of Alaska;
namely, rhe Census Divisions and the
Boroughs. The Census Division codes all
have a zero ;n -he low order (last) position.
Also listed ne*t are codes for rhe boroughs.
These can be used in those applications hav-
ing definite reauirements to Identify these
political urn's. It shouic be noted that the low
jrder position of these codes are other than
.'ne. cr-oract
remainder
organized
•e.T-.s usir.a

Borough we
reservations


e, 2e,0 -so. -re Store :' -.ia-,-a
of it*e Srcfe other man rhe 1 i
;ofo JG-S. -c:3rdnn-civ 'nose »vi-
n.s c*r".-..ron of TIP 'Jnof^sn -^c

u'd cede •*•<* -iitirary 3.13 If-aiC-.
as •?*?'?'


STATE ABBREVIATION: AK


STATE CODE: 02





CODE
010'
020'
0301
*040-

050'

060'

070 ;
080'

090'
ICO'

liO'
120'
130'
UO'
150'

160'
170'

ISO1
190'
200'
2!0'
220'
230'

240'
250'
260'
270'
260'

290'

WQ
c-u



DIVISIONS

DIVISION NAME
ALEUTIAN ISLANDS
DIVISION
ANCHORAGE DIVISION
ANGCON DIVISION
BARROW-NORTH SLOPE
DIVISION
BETHEL DIVISION

BRISTOL BAY BOROUGH
DIVISION
BRISTOL SAY DIVISION
CORDOVA-MCCARTHY
DIVISION
FAIRBANKS DIVISION
HAINES DIVISION

JUNEAU DIVISION
KENAI-COOK INLET
DIVISION
KETCHIKAN DIVISION
KO3UK DIVISION
KODIAK DIVISION

KUSKOKW1.M DIVISION
MATANUSKA-SUSITNA
DIVISION
NOME DIVISION
OUTER KETCHIKAN
DIVISION
PRINCE OF WALES DIVISION
ScWASO DIVISION
SITKA DIVISION
SKAGV/AY-YAKUTAT
DIVISION
SOUTHEAST FAIRBANKS
DIVISION
UPPER YUKON DIVISION
VALD6Z-CHITINA.WHITTIER
DIVISION
WADE HAMPTON DIVISION
WRANGELL-PETERSBURG
DIVISION
YUKON-KOYUKUK
DIVISION



-------
 ALASKA—ARIZONA—ARKANSAS
           BOROUGHS
 CODE        BOROUGH NAME
 309'      BRISTOL BAY BOROUGH
 3i3'      FAIRBANKS NORTH STAR
             BOROUGH
 327 '      GREATER ANCHORAGE
             AREA 3OROUGH
 336'      GREATER JUNEAU
             BOROUGH
 345 '      GREATER SITKA BOROUGH

 854 '      HAINES BOROUGH
 363 '      KENAI PENINSULA
             BOROUGH
 372 '      KETCHIKAN GATEWAY
             BOROUGH
 381'      KOOIAK ISLAND BOROUGH
 399       NORTH SLOPE BOROUGH
 999'      UNORGANIZED BOROUGH

  040 ' BARROW-NORTH SLOPE  DIVISION.
Revited flPS 6-2, September 15. Originally
040 —BARROW DIVISION.
  399 NORTH SICPE BOROUGH added
?«viie3 PIPS 4-2. 1973 September 15
  Codes for Genius Divisions and Boroughs
except (399; Revised FlPS 6-1, June 15,
1970. Original codes listed below
   aiE'JTIAN SUNOS DIVISION
   ANGCON 3'V'SiON
   9ARRGW JlviSiCN
   3ET"El OIVISICN
   3R!S'Ol 8A" 3CROUG*

   3RISTOL SAY DIVISION
   CORDOVA. MCCARTHY DIVISION
   C-ATcWAr 3O9OUGH
   GREATER ANCHORAGE AREA 3CRO
   GREATER jUNEAU 3OROUGH


   GRE-"=R SITSA 3OROUG*
   *ENA| =EN!NSuLA 3GRO-NW
   »;NAI PENINSULA SORO-SE
   <03UK  DIVISION
   «.OOIA«  SLANO 3ORCUGH


   <;JSKCK\VIV DIVISION
   '.»NN CA.NAL-lC'' STRAITS  O'V
    NOWE DIVISION
    NORTH STAR 3CRCUG*

    OUTc! 
-------
CALJFOtNIA—COLORADO—CONNECTICUT
STATE

STATE

NAME: CALIFORNIA

ABBREVIATION: CA

STATE CODE: 06

CODE

001
003
005
007
009

01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029


031
033
035
037
039

C41
043
045
047
049

051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079

081
083
085
087
089



COUNTY NAME

ALAMEDA
ALPINE
AMADOR
BUTTE
CALAVERAS

COLUSA
CONTRA COSTA
DELNCRTE
EL DORADO
FRESNO
GLENN
HUMBOLDT
IMPERIAL
INYO
KERN


KINGS
LAKE
LASScN
LOS ANGELES
MAOERA

MARIN
MARIPOSA
MENOOCINO
MERCED
MOOOC

MONO
MONTEREY
NAPA
NEVADA
ORANGE

PLACER
PLUMAS
RIVERSIDE
SACRAMENTO
SAN BENITO
SAN BERNARDINO
SAN DIEGO
SAN FRANCISCO
SAN JOAQUIN
SAN LUIS O8ISPO

SAN MATEO
SANTA BARBARA
SANTA CLARA
SANTA CRUZ
SHASTA
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109

1 1 1
1 13
115




SIERRA
SISKIYOU
SOLANO
SONOMA
STANISLAUS
SUTTER
TEHAMA
TRINITY
TULARE
TUOLUMNE

VENTURA
YOLO
YU8A




STATE NAME: COLORADO


STATE ABBREVIATION: CO
STATE

CODE


001
003
005
007
009

Oil
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049

051
053
055
057
059


CODE: 08

COUNTY NAME


ADAMS
ALAMOSA
ARAPAHOE
.ARCHULETA
8ACA

BENT
BOULDER
CHAFFEE
CHEYENNE
CLEAR CREEK

CONEJOS
COSTILIA
CROWLEY
CUSTER
DELTA

DENVER
DOLORES
DOUGLAS
EAGLE
ELBERT
EL PASO
FREMONT
GARF1ELD
GILPIN
GRAND

GUNNISON
HINSOALE
HUERFANO
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
035
087
089

091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109

; i
;3
15
17
19

121
123
125








STATE

K1OWA,
KIT CARSON
LAKE-
LA PLATA
LARIMER
LAS ANIMAS
LINCOLN
LOGAN
MESA
MINERAL
MOrrAT
MONTEZUMA
MONTROSE
MORGAN
OTERO

OUR AY
PARK
PHILLIPS
PITKIN
PROWERS
PUEBLO
RIO BLANCO
RIO GRANDE
ROUTT
SAGUACHE

SAN JUAN
SAN MIGUEL
SEDGWICK
SUMMIT
TELLER

WASHINGTON
WELD
YUMA








NAME: CONNECTICUT

STATE ABBREVIATION: CT


STATE CODE: 09
CODE

001
003
005
007
009

Oil
013
015
WQ
C-6
COUNTY NAME

FAIRFIELD
HARTFORD
LITCHFIELD
MIDDLESEX
NEW HAVEN

NEW LONDON
TOLLAND
WINDHAM



-------
DELAWARE—DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA—FLORIDA—GEORGIA
STATE NAME: DELAWARE 031

STATE ABBREVIATION: OE

STATE CODE: 10

CODE COUNTY NAME

001 KENT
C03 NEWCASTLE
005 SUSSEX


STATE NAME: DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA

STATE ABBREVIATION: DC

STATE CODE: 1 1

CODE NAME

OOP WASHINGTON


001 ' Washington. Revised FIPS 6-1,
June 15. 1970.
Washington, D.C. is unique in rrot it is nor
an rndeoe^cent ciry or counry 35 ,n rhe otner
States, it is identified and coded in this stana-
ard :o provide a basis for statistical applica-
tions in that the total of oil the entities in-
cluded cover the fotal land moss of rhe
United States.

STATE NAME: FLORIDA

STATE ABBREVIATION: FL


STATE CODE: 12

CODE COUNTY NAME

001 ALACHUA
003 BAKER
005 BAY
007 BRADFORD
009 SREVARD

Oil 3ROWARD
013 CALHOUN
015 CHARLOTTE
017 CITRUS
019 CLAY

021 COLLIER
023 COLUMBIA
025 DADE
027 OESOTO
029 DIXIE
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049

051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
070

081
083
085
087
AGO
OoV
091
093
095
097
099

101
103
105
107
109

1 1 1
113
115
117
1 19

121
123
125
127
129

131
133


OUVAL STATE
ESCAMBIA
FLAGLER
FRANKLIN .
STATE

GAOSDEN STATE
GILCHRIST 1
GLADES
GULF
HA/MILTON
HARDEE

HENORY
HERNANDO
HIGHLANDS
HILLSBOROUGH
HOLMES

INDIAN RIVER
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
LAFAYETTE
LAKE

LEE
LEON
LEVY
LIBERTY
MADISON

MANATEE
.MARION
MARTIN
MONROE
NASSAU
OKALOOSA
OKEECHOBEE
ORANGE
OSCEOLA
PALM BEACH

PASCO
PINELLAS
POLK
PUTNAM
ST JOHNS

STLUCIE
SANTA ROSA
SARASOTA
SEMINOLE
SUMTER

SUWANNEE
TAYLOR
UNION
VOLUSIA
WAKULLA

WALTON
WASHINGTON
CODE

001
003
005
007
009

01 !
013
015
017
019

02!
023
025
027
029

03'
033
035
037
039

043
n A c
U45
047
049
05!

053
055
057
059
06!

063
065
067
069
07!

073
075
077
079
081

083
085
087
089
091
WQ
C-7
NAME: GEORGIA

ABBREVIATION: GA

CODE: 13

COUNTY NAME

APPLING
ATKINSON
BACON
BAKER
BALDWIN

SANKS
5 AS ROW
3ARTOW
BEN HILL
3ERRIEN

31BB
BLECKLEY
3RANTLEY
BROOKS
BRYAN

3ULLCCH
3USKE
BUTTS
CALHOUN
CAMOEN

CANDIES
f A QD/""1!! I
LAKKULL
CATOOSA
CHARLTON
CHATHAM

CHATTAH.OCCHEE
CHATTOCGA
CHEROKEE
CLARKE
CLAY

CLAYTON
CLINCH
COBS
COFFEE
COLQUITT

COLUMBIA
COOK
COWETA
CRAWFORD
CRISP

DADE
DAWSON
DECATUR
DE KALB
DODGE



-------
GEORGIA—HAWAII—IDAHO
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
111
1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
201
OOOLY
DOUGHERTY
DOUGLAS
EARLY
ECHOLS
EFFINGHAM
ELBERT
EMANUEL
EVANS
FANN1N
FAYETTE
FLOYD
FORSYTH
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GILMER
GLASCOCK
GLYNN
GORDON
GRADY
GREENE
GWINNETT
HABERSHAM
HALL
HANCOCK
HARALSON
HARRIS
HART
HEARD
HENRY
HOUSTON
IRWIN
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFF DAVIS
JEFFERSON
JENKINS
JOHNSON
JONES
LAMAR
LAN1ER
LAURENS
LEE
LIBERTY
LINCOLN
LONG
LOWNDES
LUMPKIN
MCDUFFIE
MC1NTOSH
MACON
MADISON
MARION
MERIWETHER
MILLER
205
207
209
211
213

•215 '
217
219
221
223

225
227
229
TT 1
I J 1
233
235
237
239
241
243
245
247
249
251
253

255
257
259
.261
263
265
267
269
271
273
' 275
277
279
281
283
285
287
289
291
293
295
297
299
301
303
305
307
309
31 1
313


MITCHELL 315 WIlCOX
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MURRAY


NEWTON
OCONEE
OGLETHORPE
PAULDING

PEACH
P1CKENS
PIERCE
Dl h'C
r 1 1st
POLK
PULASKI
PUTNAM
QUITMAN
RABUN
RANDOLPH
RICHMOND
ROCKDALE
SCHLEY
SCREVEN
SEMINOLE

SPALDiNG
STEPHENS
STEWART
SUMTER
TALSOT
TALIAFERRO
TATTNALL
TAYLOR
TELFAIR
TERRELL
THOMAS
TIFT
TOOM8S
TOWNS
TREUTLEN
TROUP
TURNER
TWIGGS
UNION
UPSON
WALKER
WALTON
WARE
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WHEELER
WHITE
WHITFIELD
317 WILKOS
3i9 WILKINSON
321 WORTH

CODE CONSOLIDATED
GOVERNMENT
•510 COLUMBUS
Code 215' Previously csngned to Musco-
gee County. Columbui (Code 510) identifies
a consolidated government, which has re-
placed Muscogee County os a primary divi-
sion of the State of Georgia. The name of this
new unit is not Columbus County, or Columbus
City; if is just Columbus.
STATE NAME: HAWAII
STATE ABBREVIATION: HI

STATE CODE: ' 5
CODE COUNTY NAME
001 HAWAII
003 HONOLULU
005 ; KAIAWAO
007 KAUAI
009 MAUI
005' Kolowoo. Revised FIPS 3-1, June I 5,
:°70.

-------
IDAHO—ILLINOIS—INDIANA
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
037


STATE

FRANKLIN
FREMONT
GEM
GOOOING
•OAhO
jEFFESSON
J-SOME
:
-------
INDIANA—IOWA
03 i
033
035
037
039
04;
043
045
047
049
05!
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
031
033
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 ! I
1 13
1 15
1 17
119
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139


DECA7UR
OE 
-------
IOWA—KANSAS—KENTUCKY
; 5 i
!53
i 55
; 5?
150
'el
'63
i65
'67
169
i 71
173
''75

177
;79
181
183
135
'•37
•'39
!91
1=3
195
197




STATE
STATE

STATE


CODE
001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039


POCA.-.GNTAS
?OL;<
?O " -'.".• AT fAMir.
PG'WESHiE:*:
SL •,-•.,— n
SAC
SCOTT
SKEL3Y
SIOUX
STORY
TAMA
TAYLOR
UNION

VAN 3 OR EN
WAPELLC
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WE3STES
WINNEBAGO
WINNESHIEK
WOOOBURY
WORTH
WRIGHT




NAME: KANSAS
ABBREVIATION: KS

CODE: 20


COUNTY NAME
ALLEN
ANDERSON
ATCHISON
BARBER
3ARTON
BOURBON
BROWN
BUTLER
CHASE
CHAUTAUQUA
CHEROKEE
CHEYENNE
CLARK
CLAY
CLOUD
COFFEY
COMANCHE
COWLEY
CRAWFORD
DECATUR


04:
043
045
04 7
04'
05.
053
055
057
059
061
043
065
067
06?

071
073
075
077
079
031
083
085
087
089
091

093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
! 15
1 17
119'
121
123
125
127
129
!3I
133
135
137
139
141
143
US
147
149


DICKINSON
CONIFHAN
DOUGLAS
c. -,•..«' A »n«
±^'4tr*^.^J
ELK
ELLIS
ELLSWORTH
F'NNEY
FORD
FRANKLIN
GEARY
GOVE
GRAHAM
GRANT
GRAY

GREE'.EY
GREENWOOD
HAMILTON
HARPER
HARVEY
HASKELl
HOCGcMAN
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
.-SWELL
jCHNSCN

KEARNY
KINGMAN
KIOWA
LABETTE
LANE
LEAVENWCRTH
LINCOLN
LiNN
LOGAN
LYON
--MCPHESSON
MARION
MARSHALL
MEADE
MIAMI
MITCHELL
MONTGOMERY
MORRIS
MORTON
NEMAHA
NEOSHO
NESS
NORTON
OSAGE
OS3ORNE
OTTAWA
PAWNEE
PHILLIPS
POTTAWATOM1E
WQ
C-1 1
I 5i
'. 53
:55
'57
i 59
!6i
i Co
i65
'C7
; i-?
; 7 }
:73
I75

' 77
'79
'3i
1 33
I55
'37
'39
i9i
;93
I95
197
; oc

_C i
203
205
207
209


STATE

STATE

STATE

CODE

00 I
003
005
007
009
Ol I
OI3
015
0!7
OI9
02 i
023
025
027
029


P^ATT
-•.-.VLi.NS
RENO
.RSP'jBL:--:
RICE
Ri'.EY
SCOKS
R ' J S H
?USS:-.L
SALINE
SCOTT
SEDGV/IC<
SEW A SO

3 -rJ AW NEE
SHrSiOAiN
SHERMAN
SMITH
STAFFORD
STANTCN
STEVENS
SUMNER
THOMAS
TREGO
WA5AUNSEE
v. ALL ACE

•.V A$-H!NGTC '-4
'vVICHiTA
WILSON
WOODSCN
WYANOOTTE


NAWE: :
-------
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 I 1
1 13
115
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
BUTLER
CALDWELL
CALLOWAY
CAMPBELL
CARLISLE
CARROLL
CARTER
CASEY
CHRISTIAN
CLARK
CLAY '
CLINTON
CRITTENDEN
CUMBERLAND
DAVIESS
EDMONSON
ELLIOTT
ESTILL
FAYETTE
FLEMING
FLOYD
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GALLATIN
OARRARD
GRANT
GRAVES
GRAYSON
GREEN
GREENUP
HANCOCK
HAROIN
HARLAN
HARRISON
HART
HENDERSON
HENRY
HICKMAN
HOPKINS
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JESSAMINE
JOHNSON
KENTON
KNOTT
KNOX
LARUE
LAUREL
LAWRENCE
LEE
LESLIE
LETCKER
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LIVINGSTON
KENTUCKY—LOUISIANA




           LOUISIANA




                 LA




                 22
141
143
US
147
149
151
153
155
157
159

161
163
165
167
169

171
173
!75
177
179


161
133
185
137
139

191
193
195
197
199

201
203
205
207
209

21 1
213
215
217
219

221
223
225
227
229
231
233
235
237
239


LOGAN | STATE
LYON
MCCRACKEN
MCCREARY
MCLEAN
MADISON
MAGOFFIN
MARION
MARSHALL
MARTIN

MASON
MEADE
MENIFEE
MERCER
METCALFE

MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MUHLEN8ERG
NELSON


NICHOLAS
OHIO
OLOHAM
CvVtN
OWSLEY

PENDLETON
PERRY
PIKE
POWELL
PULASKI

ROBERTSON
ROCKCASTLE
ROWAN
RUSSELL
SCOTT

SHELBY
SIMPSON
SPENCER
TAYLOR
TOOO

TRIGG
TRIMBLE
UNION
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBSTER
WHITLEY
WOLFE
WOOD FORD

STATE

STATE
CODE

001
003
005
007
009

01!
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029


031
033
0351
037
039
041
043
045
047
049

051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
WQ
C-12
NAME: LO

ABBREVIATION:

CODE:
COUNTY NAME

ACADIA
ALLEN
ASCENSION
ASSUMPTION
AVOYELLES

3EAUREGARD
SIENVILLc
BOSSIER
CAOOO
CALCASiEU'
CALDWEtL
CAMERON
CATAHOULA
CLAIBORNE
CONCORDIA


CE 3OTO
EAST BATON ROUO
EAST CARROLL
EAST FELiCIANA
EVANGEL1NE
FRANKLIN
GRANT
IBERIA
iSERVILLE
JACKSON

JEFFERSON
JEFFERSON DAVIS
LAFAYETTE
LAFOURCHE
LA SALLE

LINCOLN
LIVINGSTON
/MADISON
MOREHOUSE
NATCHITOCHES

ORLEANS
OUACHITA
PLAQUE/MINES
POINT? COUPE:
RAPIOES
RED RIVER
RICHLAND
SABINE
ST BERNARD
ST CHARLES



-------
LOUISIANA—MAINE—MARYLAND—MASSACHUSETTS—MICHIGAN
091 ST HELENA
093 ST JAMES
095 ST JOHN THE BAPTIST
097 ST LANDRY
099 ST MARTIN
10' ST '/.ARY
103 ST TAMMANY
105 TANGIPA.HOA
107 TENSAS
109 TERRE3ONNE

1 1 1 UNION
1 13 VERMILION
1 15 VERNON
117 WASHINGTON
119 WEBSTER

121 WEST BATON ROUGE
123 WEST CARROLL
125 WESTFELICIANA
127 WINN


035' Snsi Carroll. Revised PIPS 6-1. June
15. l°70. (Spelling correcrion from "East
Carrol.")






STATE NAME: MAINE

STATE ABBREVIATION: ME


STATE CODE: 23

CODE COUNTY NAME


00! ANDROSCOGGIN
003 AROOSTOCK
005 CUMBERLAND
007 FRANKLIN
009 HANCOCK

Oil KENNESEC
013 KNOX
015 LINCOLN
017 OXFORD
019 PENOBSCOT

021 PISCATAQUIS
023 SAGADAHOC
025 SOMERSET
027 WALDO
029 WASHINGTON

031 YORK
STATE NAME: MARYLAND

STATE ABBREVIATION: MD

STATE CODE: 24

CODE COUNTY NAME

00 1 ALLEGANY
003 ANNEARUNDEL
005 BALTIMORE
009 CALVERT
Oil CAROLINE

OI3 CARROLL
015 CECIL
017 CHARLES
019 DORCHESTER
021 FREDERICK

023 GARRETT
025 HARFORD
027 HOWARD
029 KENT
031 MONTGOMERY

033 PRINCE GEORGES
035 QUEEN ANNES
037 ST MARYS
039 SOMERSET
041 TALBOT

043 WASHINGTON
045 WICOMICO
047 WORCESTER

CODE INDEPENDENT CITY


510 BALTIMORE CITY



STATE NAME: MASSACHUSETTS
STATE ABBREVIATION: MA

STATE CODE: 25

CODE COUNTY NAME

00! BARNSTABLE
003 BERKSHIRE
005 BRISTOL
007 DUKES
009 ESSEX
Oil FRANKLIN
013 HAMPOEN
0'5 HAMPSHIRE
0'7 MIDDLESEX
021 NORFOLK
023 PLYMOUTH
025 SUFFOLK
027 WORCESTER



STATE NAME: MICHIGAN

STATE ABBREVIATION: Ml

STATE CODE: 26


CODE COUNTY NAME

00! . ALCONA
003 ALGER
005 ALLEC-AN
007 ALPENA
009 ANTRIM

Oil ARENAC
013 3ARAGA.
015 3ARRY
017 BAY
019 3ENZIE

021 BERRIEN
023 3RANC-
025 CALHOUN
027 CASS
029 CHARLEVCIX

031 CHESOYGAN
033 CHIPPEWA
035 CLARE
037 CLINTON
039 CRAWFORD

04! DELTA
043 DICKINSON
045 EATON
047 EMMET
049 C-ENESEE
05! 3LAOWIN
053 GOGE5IC
055 GRAND T-RAVERS:
057 GRATiOT
059 HILLSDALE

061 HOUGHTON
063 HURON
065 INGHAM
067 IONIA
069 IOSCO
07! IRON
073 ISABELLA
075 JACKSON
077 KALAMAZOO
019 NANTUCKET i 079 KALKASKA
WQ
C-13

-------
MICHIGAN—MINNESOTA—MISSISSIPPI
031
OS3
035
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
!01
103
'05
107
109

1 1 i
: 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
•3!
'33
137
139
141
143
145
147
U9
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165


STATE
STATE

STATE

CODE
001
003
005
OC7
009


KENT
KEWEENAW
LAKE
LAPEER
LEELANAU'
LENAWEE
LIVINGSTON
LUCE
MACXINAC
WACOM 3
MANISTEE
MARQUETTE
MASON
MECOSTA
MENOMINEE

MIDLAND
MISSAUKEE
MONROE
MONTCALM
MONTMORENCY
MUSKEGON
NEWAYGO
OAKLAND
OCEANA
OGEMAW
ONTONAGON
01 1
013
015
017
019

021
023

025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039

041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
03CEOLA lVl;
CSCOOA
OTSEGO
OTTAWA
PRESQUE ISLE
ROSCOMMON
SAGINAW
STCLAIR
ST JOSEPH
SANILAC
3CHOCLCR4FT
SHIAWASSEE
TUSCOLA
VAN BUREN
WASHTENAW
WAYNE
WEXFORD


NAME: MINNESOTA
ABBREVIATION: MN

CODE: 27

COUNTY NAME
AlTKIN
ANOKA
BECKER
3ELTRAMI
SENTON
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089

091
093
095
097
0"9
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
113
115
i i 7
1 19


BIG STONE
BLUE EARTH
BROWN
CARLTON
CARVER

CASS
CHIPPEWA

CHISAGO
CLAY
CLEARWATER

COOK
COTTONWCOO
CROW WING
DAKOTA
DODGE

DOUGLAS
FARIBAULT
FILLMORE
FREE3ORN
GOOOHUE
GRANT
HENNEPIN
HOUSTON
HU8BARD
I2l
I 23
125
127
I 29

I 3 3
I 33

)35
!37
!39

14!
I 43
I 45
147'
1 ^0

151
'153
155
157
159
161
163
1A5
167
ISANTI iS9
•TA3CA
JACKSON
KANA8EC
KANOIYOHI
• KITTSON.
KOOCHICHING
LAC OUI PARLE
LAKE
LAKE OF THE WOODS
LE SUEUR
LINCOLN
LYON
MCLEOD
MAHNCMEN
MARSHALL

MARTIN
MEEKER
MILLE LACS
MORRISON
MOWER
MURRAY
NICOLLET
NOBLES
NORMAN
OLMSTED
OTTER TAIL
PENNINGTON
PINE
PIPESTONE
POLK
1 71
;73




STATE
POPE
RAMSEY
RED LAKE
REDWOOD
RF.NVILLE

ROCK

ROSEAU
STLOUiS
SCOTT

SHERBURNE
SISLEY
STEARNS
STEELS
STEVENS

SWIFT
TODO
TRAVERSE
WABASHA
•A'ADENA
WASECA
WASHINGTON
WATCNWAN
WILKIN
WINCNA

•A/RIGHT
VELLOW MEDICINE




NAME: MISSISSIPPI
STATE ABBREVIATION: MS
STATE
CODE

001
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
WQ
C-1U
CODE: 28
COUNTY NAME

ADAMS
ALCORN
AMITE
ATTALA
SENTON
BOLIVAR
CAlHOUN
CARROLL
CHICKASAW
CHOCTAW
CLAIBORNE
CLARKE
CLAY
COAHOMA
COPIAH



-------
MISSISSIPPI—MISSOURI
031
033
035
037
039
041
04j
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063 .
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
•"17O

OS'
083
035
087
089
091
093
09:
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1
1 13
1 15
1 17
i 19
121
123
125
i27
129
13!
133
135
137
139


COVINGTON
CE sore
FORREST
FRANKLIN
GEORGE
GREENE
GRENADA
HANCOCK
HARRISON
HINDS
HOLMES
HUMPHREYS
ISSAQUENA
1 7 AW AM B A
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFFERSON
JEFFERSON DAVIS
JONES
KEMPER
LAFAYETTE
LAMAR
LAUDE.ROALE
LAWRENCE
LEAKE

L£c
LEFLORE
LINCOLN
LOWNDE5
MADISON
MARION
MARSHALL
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
NESHOBA
NEWTON
NOXUBEE
. OKTI88EHA
PANOLA
PEARL RIVER
PERRY
PIKE
PONTOTOC
PRENTISS
QUI T.MAN
RANKIN
SCOTT
SHARKEY
SIMPSON
SMITH
STONE
SUNFLOWER
TALLAHATCHIE
TATE
TIPP^H
141
143
145
147
149
151
!53
155
157
159
161
163





STATE

TISHOMINGO
TUNICA
UNION
061
063
065
WALTHALL 067
WARREN 069
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
071
073
WEBSTER 075
WILKINSON 0T7
WINSTON
079
YALO6USHA 031
YAZOO 083

085
087
i 039


NAME: MISSOURI

STATE ABBREVIATION: MO
STATE

CODE

00!
003
005
007
009

01 1
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029
031
033
-035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059


CODE: 29

COUNTY NAME

A DAIS
ANDREW
ATCHISON
AUDRAIN
BARRY

BARTON
BATES
3ENTON
3OLLINGER
BOONE

BUCHANAN
BUTLER
CALDWELL
CALLAWAY
CAMDEN
CAPEGIRARDEAU
CARROLL
CARTER
CASS
CEDAR
CHARITON
CHRISTIAN
CLARK
CLAY
CLINTON
COLE
COOPER
CRAWFORD
DADE
DALLAS
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
:07
109

i ' :
1 13
115
1 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129 •
'31
133
135
137
139
U!
143
U5
!47
!49
151
153
155
157
159 .
161
163
165
167
169
WQ
C-15
DAVIESS
DE KA.LB
OENT
DOUGLAS
DUNKLIN
FRANKLIN
GASCONADE
GENTRY
GREENE
C-RUNDY
HARBISON
HENRY
HlCKCRv
HOLT
HOWARD
HOWELL
IRON
JACKSON
JASPER
JEFFERSON
JOHNSON
KNOX
LACLEDE
LAFAYEHE
LAWRENCE

LEWIS
LINCOLN
LINN
LIVINGSTON
MCDONALD
MACON
MADISON
MARIES
MARION
MERCER
MILLER
MISSISSIPPI
MONITEAU
MONRCE
MGNTGOMER
MORGAN
NEW \AAOS!D
NEWTON
NODAWAY
OREGON
OSAGE
OZARK
PEMISCCT
PERRY
PETTIS
PHELPS
PIKE
PLATTE
POLK
PULASKI



-------
              MISSOURI—MONTANA—NEBRASKA
' / 1
173
i 75
177
1 70
ISi
:33
135
187
139

193
!95
197
109
20 i
203
205
207
209
2 i i

213
215
217
219
221

223
225
227
229.

CODE

510











STATE

PUTNAM
SAILS
RANDOLPH
SAY
REYNOLDS
RIP'.EY
ST CHARLtS
STCLA1R
ST FRANCOIS
ST LOUIS

STEGENEVIEVE
SALINE
SCHUYLER
SCOTLAND
SCOTT
SHANNON
SHELBY
STOOOARD
STONE
SULLIVAN

TANEY
TEXAS
VERNON
WARREN
WASHINGTON

WAYNE
WEBSTER
WORTH
WRIGHT

INDEPENDENT CITY

ST LOUIS CITY











NAME: MONTANA

STATE ABBREVIATION: MT

STATE

CODE

001
003
005
007
009

CODE: 30

COUNTY NAME

BEAVERHEAO
3IG HORN
BLAINE
BROADWATER
CARBON
01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045

047
049

051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079

081
083
085
087
089

091
093
095
097
099

101
103
105
107
109

111
113

CARTER
CASCADE
CHOUTEAU
CUSTER
DANIELS
DAWSON
DEER LODGE
FALLON
FERGUS
FLATHEAO

GALLATIN
GARFIELD
GLACIER
GOLDEN VALLEY
GRANITE
HILL
JEFFERSON
JUDITH BASIN

LAKE
LEWIS AND CLARK

LIBERTY
LINCOLN
MCCONE
MADISON
MEAGHER

MINERAL
MISSOUIA
MUSSELSHELL
PARK '
PETROLEUM
PHILLIPS
PONDERA
POWDER RIVER
POWELL
PRAIRIE

RAVALLI
RICHLAND
ROOSEVELT
ROSEBUD
SANDERS

SHERIDAN
SILVER BOW
STILLWATER
SWEET GRASS
TETON

TOOLE
TREASURE
VALLEY
WHEATLAND
WIBAUX

YELLOWSTONE
YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL
PARK-PART
STATE

STATE

STATE

CODE

001
003
005
007
009

01 1
013
Oi5
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039

041
043
045
047 .
049

051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079

081
083
085
087
089
NAME: NEBRASKA

ABBREVIATION: NE

CODE: 31

COUNTY NAME

ADAMS
ANTELOPE
ARTHUR
BANNER
8LAINE

SCONE
BOX BUTTE
BOYD
BROWN
BUFFALO

BURT
BUTLER
CASS
CEDAR
CHASE

CHERRY
CHEYENNE
CLAY
CQLFAX
CUMING

CUSTER
DAKOTA
DAWES
DAWSON
DEUEL

DIXON
DODGE
DOUGLAS
DUNDY
FILLMORE

FRANKLIN
FRONTIER
FURNAS
GAGE
GARDEN

GARFIELD
GOSPER
GRANT
GREELEY
HALL

HAMILTON
HARLAN
HAYES
HITCHCOCK
HOLT
 WQ
C-16

-------
NEBRASKA—NEVADA—NEW HAMPSHIRE—NEW JERSEY—NEW MEXICO
091 HOOKER
093 HOWARD
095 JEFFERSON
097 JOHNSON
099 KEARNEY
101 KEITH
103 KEYA PAH A
105 KIM8ALL
107 KNOX
109 LANCASTER

1 I 1 LINCOLN
113 LOGAN
115 LOUP
1 1 7 MCPHERSON
119 MADISON


121 MERRICK '
123 MORRILL
125 NANCE
127 NEMAHA
129 NUCKOLLS

131 OTOE
STATE NAME: NEVADA

STATE ABBREVIATION: NV

STATE CODE: 32
CODE COUNTY NAME

001 CHURCHILL
003 CLARK
005 DOUGLAS
007 EL.KO
009 ESMERALDA

on EUREKA.
013 HUMBOLDT
015 LANDER
017 LINCOLN
019 LYON

021 MINERAL
023 NYE
025'
027 PERSHING
029 STOREY
031 WASHOE
!33 PAWNEE 033 WHITE PINE
:35 ?ES.
-------
NEW
NEV/. Yo,a:|£>-N
-------
NORTH CAROLINA—NORTH DAKOTA—OHIO
121
!23
I 25
!27
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
'43
us
M7
U9

151
153
155
157
159

161
!63
165
167

159

171
173
175
177
179
181
183
135
137
189
191
193
195
197
199


STATE

STATE

•VMTCHEU
MONTGOMERY
MOORE
NASH
NEW HANOVER
NORTHAMPTON
ONSlOW
ORANGE
PAMLICO
PASQUOTANK
PENCER
PERGUIMANS
PERSON
PITT
POLK

RANDOLPH
RICHMOND
RO8ESON
ROCKINGHAM
3OWAN

RUTHERFORD
SAMPSON
SCOTLAND
STANLY

STOKES

SURRY
SWAIN
TRANSYLVANIA
TYRRELL
UNION
VANCE
WAKE
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WATAUGA
WAYNE
WILKES
WILSON
YAOKIN
YA.NCEY


NAME: NORTH DAKOTA

ABBREVIATION: NO

STATE CODE: 38

CODE

001
003
005
007
009



COUNTY NAME

ADAMS
3ARNES
BENSON
BILLINGS
BOTT1NEA.U
01 1
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

03!
033
035
037
039


04!
043
045
047
049

051
053

055
057
059 .

061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079


081
Afl->
'JoJ
085
087
089


091
093
095
097
099


101
103
105


BOWMAN
3URKE
3URLEIGH
CASS
CAVALIER

DICKEY
DIVIDE
DUNN
EDDY
5MMONS

FOSTER
GOLDEN VALLEY
GRAND FORKS
GRANT
GRIGGS


HETTINGER
KIDDER
LA MOURE
LOGAN
MCHENRY

MCINTOSH
V.CKENZis

MCLEAN
MERCER
MORTON

MOUNTRAIL
NELSON
OLIVER
PEMBINA
PIERCE

RAMSEY
RANSOM
RENVILLE
RlCHLAND
ROLETTE


SARGENT
SHERIDAN
SIOUX
SLOPE
STARK


STEELE
STUTSMAN
TOWNER
TRAILL
WALSH


WARD
WELLS
WILLIAMS
STATE

STATE

NAME: OHIO

ABBREVIATION: OH

STATE CODE: 39

CODE

00 1
003
005
007
009

01 i
013
OI5
OI7
OI9

021
023
025
027
029

031

033
035
037
039

041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059

061
DAT
UO J
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079

081
083
085
087
089
WQ
C-19

COUNTY NAME

ADAMS
ALLEN
ASHLAND
ASHTASULA
ATHENS

AUGLAIZE
3ELMONT
BROWN
SUTLER
CARROLL

CHAMPAIGN
CLARK
CLERMONT
CLINTON
COLUM8IANA

COSHOCTD.N

CRAWFORD
CUYAHOGA
DARKE
DEFIANCE

DELAWARE
ERIE
FAIRFIELD
FAYETTE
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GALLIA
GcAUGA
GREENE
GUERNSEY

HAMILTON
HANCOCK
HARDIN
HARRISON
HENRY

HIGHLAND
HOCKING
HOLMES
HURON
JACKSON

JEFFERSON
KNOX
LAKE
LAWRENCE
LICKING



-------
O KI AH Q ,'M A"£- Q&E G O N
0<5I
092
095
097
099
101
103
T05
;07
109
i ; i
1 13
! 15
I 17
1 19
121
123
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
! - 1

142
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169

171
!73
!75


STATE
LOGAN
LGRAIN
LUCAS
MADISON
MAHONING
MARION
MEDINA
MEiGS
MERCER
MIAMI
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MORGAN
MORROW
MUSKINGUM
NO8LE
OTTAWA
PAULDING
PERRY
PICKAWAY
PIKE
PORTAGE
1 PRE3LE
PUTNAM
aiCHLANO
POSS

SANOUSKY
SCiOTO
SENECA
SHELBY
STARK
SUMMIT
TRUMBULL
TUSCARAWAS
UNION
VAN WERT
V1NTON
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE

WILLIAMS
WOOD
WYANDOT


NAME: OKLAHOMA
STATE ABBREVIATION: OK

STATE

CODE
001
003
005
007
009



CODE: 40

COUNTY NAME
ADAIR
ALFALFA
ATOKA
BEAVER
BECKHAM
0! 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079

081
083
085
087
089

091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
111
1 13
i 15
1 17
1 19


BLAiNE
BRYAN
CADOO
CANADIAN
CARTER
CHEROKEE
CHOCTAW
CMASRON
CLEVELAND
COAL
COMANCHE
COTTON
CRAIG
CREEK
CUSTER
DELAWARE
OEWEY
ELLIS
GARFIELD
GARVIN
GRADY
GRANT
GREER
HARMON
HARPER

HASKELL
HUGHES
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JOHNSTON
KAY
KINGFISHER
K1GWA
LAT1MER
LE FLCRE

LINCOLN
LOGAN
LOVE
MCCLAIN
MCCURTAIN

MC1NTOSH
MAJOR
MARSHALL
MAYES
MURRAY
MUSKOGEE
NOBLE
NOWATA
OKFUSKEE
OKLAHOMA
OKMULGEE
OSAGE
OTTAWA
PAWNEE
PAYNE
MQ
020
12'
123
125
127
!29
131
133
•>35
137
139
! 41
143
145
147
149
151
153
STATE
STATE
STATE
CODE
OCI
003
005
007
009
01 1
013
015
017
019
02!
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
•041
043
045
047
049
P'TTSBURG
?ONTCTOC
PCTTAWATCAME
PUSHMATAHA
ROGER MILLS
ROGERS
SEMINOLE
SECCOYAH
STEPHENS
TEXAS
TILLMAN
TULSA
WAGONER
WASHINGTON
WASHlTA
WOODS
WOODWARD
NAME: OREGON
ABBREVIATION: OR
CODE: 41
COUNTY NAME
BAKER
BENTON
CLACKA/VAS
ClATSOP
COLUMBIA
•ccos
CROOK
CURRY
DESCHUTES
DOUGLAS
G:LLIAM
GRANT
HARNEY
HOOD RIVER
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
JOSEPHINE
KLAMATH
LAKE
LANE
LINCOLN
LiNN
MALHEUR
MARION
MORROW

-------
OREGON—PENNSYLVANIA—RHODE ISLAND—SOUTH CAROLINA
051
033
055
057
059
061
063
065
067
06?

07!





STATE

MULTNOMAH
POLK
SHERMAN
TILLAMCOK
UMATI'.LA
UNION
WALLOW A
WASCO
WASHINGTON
WHEELER

YAMHILL





NAME: PENNSYLVANIA

STATE ABBREVIATION: PA


STATE CODE: 42

CODE

00'
003
005
007'
009
01 i

013
015
0'7
019

02!
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059

COUNTY NAME

061
063
065
067
06-
07i
073
075
077
079

081
033
085
087
nso
\JO7
091
093
095
097
099

101
103
105
107
109
ADA:V:S
ALLEGHENY
ARMSTRONG
BEAVER
BEDFORD
BERKS

3LAIR
BRADFORD
BUCKS
BUTLER

CAMBRIA
CAMERON
CARBON
CENTRE
CHESTER
CLARION
CLEARFIELO
CLINTON
COLUMBIA
CRAWFORD
CUMBERLAND
DAUPHIN
DELAWARE
ELK
ERIE
FAYETTE
FOREST
FRANKLIN
FULTON
GREENE
1 i i
1 13
1 IS
1 17
1 19

121
123
125
127
!29

131
133



STATE

STATE
STATE

CODE
001
003
005
007
009
HUNTINGDON STATE
INDIANA

JEFFERSON ST^TE
JUNIATA

LACKAWANN A
1 STATE
LANCASTER
LAWRENCE
CODE
LEBANON
LEHIGH 1 00;
LUZERNE
003
005
LYCOMING I OQ7
MCKEAN
009
MERCER
MIFFLIN -,; ;
MON ROE •' ~ • "

MONTGOMERY
MONTOUR
NORTHAMPTON
NORTHUMBERLAND
PERRY

PHILADELPHIA
PIKE
POTTER
SCHUYLKILL
SNYDER

SOMERSET
SULLIVAN
SUSQUEHANNA
TIOGA
UNION

VENANGO
WARREN
WASHINGTON
u: J
015

Oi9
02!
023
C25
027
029
031
033

035
037

041
043
045
047
049

WAYNE 05 i
WESTMORELAND is?

WYOMING
YORK



NAME: RHODE ISLAND

ABBREVIATION: Rl
CODE: 44

COUNTY NAME
BRISTOL
KENT
NEWPORT
PROVIDENCE
WASHINGTON

055
057
055
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079

031
033
085
087
039

091
NAME: SOUT

ABBREVIATION:

CODE:

COUNTY NA,

.-oBEViLl:
AIKEM
ALLENQALE
ANDERSON
BAMBERG

3ARNWE-L
BEAUFORT
BERKELEY
CALHOL.N
CHARLESTON
CHEROKEE
CHESTER
CHESTESF'ELD
CLARENDON
COLLETON
DA.RLING'CN
DILLON

=OGEF:ELC
FAiRFlELO

FLORENCE
GEORGETOWN
GREENVILLE
GREENWOOD
rvAMPTON

HCRRY
'A^PER
" w
KERSHAW
LANCASTER
LAURENS
LEE
LEXINGTON
•ViCCOfi'.MCK
MARION
MARLBORO
,NEW3ERRV
OCONEE
CRANGE3URG
.-'CK6NS
R:CHLAND

SALUDA
S?ARTANSl!RG
SUMTER
'jNlON
WIL-JAMS8URG

YORK
                                                                        sc



                                                                        45
                                  C-21

-------
SOUTH DAKOTA—TENNESSEE
STATE

NAME: SOUTH DAKOTA

STATE ABBREVIATION: SO

STATE

CODE

003
005
007
009
01 1

013
015
017
019
021

023
025
027
029
031

033
035
037
039
041

043
045
047
049
05!

053
055
057
059
061

063
065
067
069
071


073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089
09!



CODE: 46

COUNTY NAME

AURORA
BEADLE
BENNETT
SON HOMME
BLOCKINGS

SROWN
8RULE
BUFFALO
BUTTE
CAMPBELL

CHARLES MIX
CLARK
CLAY
CCOINGTON
CORSON

CUSTER
DAVISON
OAY
OEUEL
OEWEY

DOUGLAS
EDMUNDS
FALL RIVER
FAULK
GRANT

GREGORY
HAAKON
HAMLIN
HAND
HANSON

HARDING
HUGHES
HUTC-ilNSCN
HYDE
JACKSON


JERAULD
JONES
KINGSBURY
LAKE
LAWRENCE
LINCOLN
LYMAN
MCCOOK
MCPHERSON
MARSHALL
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109
1 1 1

1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121

123
125
127
129
131
135
137






STATE

MEADE
MELLETTE
MINER
MINNEHA.HA
MOODY
PENNINGTON
PERKINS
POTTER
ROBERTS
SANBORN

SHANNON
SPINK
STANLEY
SULLY
TODO

TRIPP
TURNER
UNION
WALWORTH
WASHABAUGH
YANKTON
ZIEBACH






NAME: TENNESSEE

STATE ABBREVIATION: TN

STATE

CODE

00 i
003
005
007
009


Oil
013
015
017
019

02!
023
025
027
029
03 i
033
035
037
039



CODE: 47

COUNTY NAME

ANDERSON
BEDFORD
8ENTON
BLEDSOE
BLOUNT


BRADLEY
CAMPBELL
CANNON
CARROLL
CARTER

CHEATHAM
CHESTER
CLAI8ORNE
CLAY . . •
COCKE
COFFEE
CROCKETT
CUMBERLAND
DAVIDSON
OECATUR
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059

061
063
065
067
069

071
073
075
077
079
081
083
085
087
089

09!
093
095
097
099

10!
103
105
107
!09
1 i 1
i 13
1 15
1 17
1 19

1 2 1
123
125
127

129
131
133
135
!37
139
141
143
145
147
149
WQ
C-22
DE KAL8
DICKSON-
OYER
FAYETTE '
FEN'RESS
FRANKLIN
GIBSON
GiLES
GRAINGER
GREENE

GRUNDY
HAMBLEN
HAMILTON
HANCOCK
HARDEMAN

HARDIN
HAWKINS
HAYWOCO
HENDERSON
HENRY
HICKMAN
HOUSTON
HUMPHREYS
JACKSON
JEFFERSON

jOHNSON
KNOX
LAKE
LAUDERDALE
LAWRENCE

LEWIS
LINCOLN
LOUDON
MCMINN
MCNAIRY
MACON
MADISON
MARION
.MARSHALL
MAURY

MEIGS
MONROE
MONTGOMERY
MOORE

• MORGAN
O8ION
OVERTON
PERRY
PlCKETT
POLK
PUTNAM
RHEA
ROANE
ROBERTSON
RUTHERFORD



-------
TENNESSEE—TEXAS
' 5 i
: 53
' 5 ^
5 7
' 55
i.6:
•'63
; ;5
'67
'63
!7'
73
75
77
79
81
S3
35
137
,39
STATE


STATE
STATE

CODE


00:
002
005
007
009

01 i
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039
•04!
043
0.15
047
049


SCjTT
SEGUATCHiE
SeV'EV
SHELBY
SMITH
STEWART
SULLIVAN
SuMNER
T ! P T 3 N
TROUSDALE
iJNlCOl
UNION
VAN 3UREN
WARREN
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEAKLEY
W"lTE
WILLIAMSON
WILSON
NAME: TEXAS


ABBREVIATION: TX
CODE: 48

COUNTY NAME


ANDERSON
ANDREWS
ANGELINA
ARANSA.S
ARCHER

ARMSTRONG
ATASCOSA
AUSTIN
BAILEY
3ANDERA

3ASTRCP
BAYLOR
3EE
3EU
2EXAR

3LANCO
BORDEN
3OSOUE
3OWIE
3RAZORIA
BRAZOS
BREWSTER
3RISCOE
3ROOKS
BROWN


051
053
055
057
059
06 i
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
031
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
107
109

1 1 1
1 13
1 15
i 17
1 19

121
123
125
127
129

131
133
135
137
139
14!
143
145
147
149
!SI
153
155
157
159


3URLESON
3URNET
CAIDWELL
CALHOUN
CALLAHAN
CAMERON
CAMP
CARSON
CASS
CASTRO
CHAMBERS
CHEROKEE
CHILORESS
CLAY
COCHRAN
COKE
COLEMAN
COLLIN
COLLINGSWORTH
COLORADO
COMAL
COMANCHE
CONCHO
COOKE
CCRVELL
COTTLE
C.RANE
CROCKETT
C30SBY
C'JLBERSON

DALLAM
DALLAS
DAWSON
DEAF SMITH
DELTA

DENTON
OE WITT
DICKENS
DIMMIT
DONLEY

OUVAL
EASTLAND
ECTOR
EDWARDS
ELLIS
EL PASO
ERATH
FALLS
FANNIN
FAYETTE
FISHER
FLOYD
FOARD
FORT 3ENO
FRANKLIN
WQ
C-23
i A i
:63
:65
' 67
'59
:?:
• "3
; 75
77
i 7?
' 3 '
133
• i5
1 37
'39
;9i
. ^*
! Y J
195
197
:?9
20;
203
205
207
2CC
21 i
2!?
2'5
217
2:9

221
223
'^25
^ " 7
229

23:
233 .
235
237
239

24!
243
245
247
249
25)
253
255
257
259
261
263
265
267
269


FREESTONE
FRiC
OAiNES
3A. .'ES'ON
GAR;A
GILLE5P!;
C-LASSCDCK
GOLiAO
— GONZALES
GRAY
GRAYSON
GREGG
GRi.V.ES
GCADALUPE
HAL;
fiALL
HAMILTON
HANSFCRD
HARCEMAN
rfASC'N
HARRIS
HARRISON
UA5Ti_JV
HAS
-------
TEXAS—UTAH
27i
273
275
277
279
231
283
265
287
239
291
293
295
297
299
301
303
305
307
309
31 1
313
315
317
3i9
321
323
325
327
329
331
333
335
337
339

341
343
345
347
349

351
353
355
357
359
361
363
365
367
369

37]
373
375
377
379


KINNEY
KLE3ERG
KNOX
LAMAR
LAMB
LAMPASAS
LA SAILS
LAVACA
LEE
l:CN
LIBERTY
LIMESTONE
LiPSCOMB
LIVE OAK
LLANO
LOVING
LUBBGCK
LYNN
MCCULLOCH
MCLENNAN
MCMULLEN
MADISON
MARION
MARTIN
MASON
MATAGORDA
MAVERICK
MEDINA
MENARD
MIDLAND
Ml LAM
MILLS
MITCHELL
MONTAGUE
MONTGOMERY

MOORE
MORRIS
MOTLEY
NACOGDOCHES
NAVARRO

NEWTON
NOLAN
NUECES
vOCHILTREE
'OLOHAM
ORANGE
PALO PINTO
PANOLA
PARKER
PAR.WER

PECOS
POLK
POTTER
PRESIDIO
RAINS
381
333
385
387
389
391
393
395
397
399
401
403
405
407
409
41 1
413
415
417
419
421
423
425
427
429
431
433
435
437
439
441
443
445
447
449

451
453
455
457
459

461
463
465
467
469
471
4/3
475
477
479

481
483
485
487
4S9


RANDALL
REAGAN
REAL
RED RIVES
REEVES
RE.-UGIO
SOSESTS
ROBERTSON
ROCKWALL
RUNNELS
RUSK
SA8INE
SAN AUGUSTINE
SAN JACINTO
SAN PATRICIO
SAN SABA
SCHLEICHER
SCURRY
SHACKELFORD
SHELBY
SHERMAN
SMITH
SOMERVELL
STARR
STEPHENS
STERLING
STONEWALL
SUTTON
SWISHER
TARRANT
TAYLOR
TERRELL
TERRY
THROCKMORTON
TITUS

TOM GREEN
TRAVIS
TRINITY
TYLER
UPSHUR

UPTON
UVAlDE
VAL VERDE
VAN ZANDT
VICTORIA
WALKER
WALLER
WARD
WASHINGTON
WEBB

WHARTON
WHEELER
WICHITA
WILBARGER
WILLACY
491
493
495
J97
j90
501
503
505
507








STATE

STATE
STATE

CODE
001
003
005
007
009

Oil
013
015
017
019

021
023
025
027
029

031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049

051
053
055
057
WQ
C-2U
WILLIAMSON
••/••! LSON
'..'INKLES
•VISE
WOOD
Y OAKUM
YOUNG
ZAPATA
ZAVALA








NAME: UTAH

ABBREVIATION: UT
CODE: 49

COUNTY NAME
SEAVER
BOX ELDER
CACHE
CARBON .
OAGGETT

DAVIS
OUCHE5NE
EMERY
GARFiELD
GRAND

IRON
JUA6
KANE
MiLLARD
MORGAN

PIUTE
RICH
SALT LAKE
SAN JUAN
SANPETE
SEVIER
SUMMIT
TOOELE
UINTAH
UTAH

WASATCH
WASHINGTON
WAYNE
WEBES



-------
VERMONT—VIRGINIA
STATE NAME: VERMONT

STATE ABBREVIATION. VT

STATE CODE: 50

CODE COUNTY NAME

001 ADOISON
003 BENNINGTON
005 CALEDONIA
007 CHITTENDEN
009 ESSEX

Oil FRANKLIN
013 GRAND ISLE
015 LA/WOILLE
017 ORANGE
019 ORLEANS
021 RUTLAND
023 WASHINGTON
025 WINDHAM
027 WINDSOR

STATE NAME: VIRGINIA

STATE ABBREVIATION: VA

STATE CODE: 51

CODE COUNTY NAME -
001 ACCOMACK
003 AL8EMARLE
005 ALLEGHA.NY
007 AMELIA
009 AMHERST
Oil APPOMATTOX
013 ARLINGTON
015 AUGUSTA
017 BATH
019 BEDFORD
021 3LANO
023 SOTETOURT
025 BRUNSWICK
027 BUCHANAN
029 BUCKINGHAM
031 CAMPBELL
033 CAROLINE
035 CARROLL
036 CHARLES CITY
037 CHARLOTTE
041 CHESTERFIELD
043 CLARKE
045 CRAIG
047 CULPEPER
049 CUMBERLAND
05!
053
057
059
061
063
065
067
069
071

073
075
077
079
081

083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099
101

103
!05
107
109
1 11
1 13
1 15
1 17
1 19
121
•123 '
125
127
131
!33
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
153
155
157
159
161
163
165


DlCKENSON
DINWIDDIE
ESSEX
167
169
171
FAIRFAX ;/3
FAUO'JIER
FLOYD
FlUVANNA
FRANKLIN
FREDERICK
GILES

GLOUCESTER
GCOCHLANO
GRAYSON
GREENE
GREENSVILLE

HALIFAX
HANOVER
HENRICO
HENRY
HIGHLAND
ISLE OF WIGHT
JAMES CITY
KING AND OUEEN
KING GEORGE
KING WILLIAM

LANCASTER
LEE
LOUOOUN
LOUISA
LUNENBURG
MADISON
MATHEWS
MECKLENBURG
MIDDLESEX
MONTGOMERY

NELSON
NEW KENT
NORTHAMPTON
NORTHUMBERLAND
NOTTOWAY
ORANGE
PAGE
PATRICK
PITTSYLVANIA
POWHATAN
PRINCE EDWARD
PRINCE GEORGE
PRINCE WILLIAM
PULASKI
RAPPAHANNOCK
RICHMOND
ROANOKE
ROCKBRIDGE
ROCKINGHAM
175
177
179
!8i
133
135

137
191
!93
195
197

199

C006
510
SIS'
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
595
600
610
620
630
640
650
660
670
673
680
690
'695
700
710
720
730
740
750
760
770
775
780
790
800
810
WQ
C-25
RUSSELL
SCOTT
SHENANDCAH
' SMYTH
SOUTHAMPTON
SPOTSYLVANIA
STAFFORD
SURRY
SUSSEX
TAZEWELL

WARREN
WASHINGTON
WESTMORELAND
WISE
WYTHE

YORK

INDEPENDENT CITIES
ALEXANDRIA
BEDFORD
BRISTOL
BUENA VISTA
CHARLOTTESVILLE
CHESAPEAKE
CUFTCN FORGE
COLONIAL HEIGHTS
COVINGTON
DANVILLE .
EMPORIA
FAIRFAX
FALLS CHURCH
FRANKLIN
FREOERICKS3URG
GALAX
HAMPTON
HARRISON8URG
HOPEWELL
LEXINGTON
LYNCH3URG
MARTINSVILLE
NANSEMOND
NEWPORT NEWS
NORFOLK
NORTON
PETERSBURG
PORTSMOUTH
RADFORO
RICHMOND '
ROANOKE
SALEM
SOUTH BOSTON
STAUNTCN
SUFFOLK
VIRGINIA 3EACH



-------
r-WASHINGTON—WEST VIRGINIA—WISCONSIN
320 WAYNESBORO
330 WILLIAMS8URG
340 WINCHESTER

5:5' 3eafora. indecencer.T Cirv. Revised
C 1 p c i. _ 1 , „ „ i e IC7O
'. JO I , June ' J. lv/b.
Seafood. 'orTieriy port or Bedford Counry,
-.as been incorporated as an independent
:.ty.
695' Noniemond, Independent City, Re-
vised FIPS 6-2. 1973 September 15. Formerly
Nonwmond County (Code 123).


STATE NAME: WASHINGTON

STATE ABBREVIATION: WA

STATE CODE: S3


CODE COUNTY NAME

00 1 ADAMS
003 ASOTIN
005 BENTON
007 CHELAN
009 CLALLAM
0!! CLARK
013 COLUMBIA
015 COWLITZ
017 DOUGLAS
Oi9 FERRY
021 FRANKLIN
023 GARFIELD
025 GRANT
027 GRAYS HARBOR
029 ISLAND
031 JEFFERSON
033 KING
035 KITSAP
037 KITTITAS
039 KLICKITAT
O-il LEWIS
043 LINCOLN
0^5 MASON
047 . OKANOGAN
049 PACIFIC
051 PENDOREILLE
053 PIERCE
055 SAN JUAN
057 SKAGIT
059 SKAMANIA
061 SNCHOMISH
063 SPOKANE
065 STEVENS
067 THURSTON
069 WAHKIAKUM
071
073
075
077


STATE

STATE

STATE

CODE


001
Afn
UUJ
005
007
009

01 1
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
, 059
061
063
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079


WALLA WALLA-
WHATCOM
WHITMAN
YAKIMA


NAME: WEST VIRGINIA

ABBREVIATION: WV

CODE: 54

COUNTY NAME


3AR8CUR
QCOk'Cl CV
OCKNCLC "
BOONE
BRAXTCN
BROOKE

CABELL
CALHOUN
CLAY
DOOORIDGE
FAYETTE
GILMER
GRANT
GREENBRIER
HAMPSHIRE
HANCOCK
HARDY
HARRISON
JACKSON
JEFFERSON
KANAWHA
LEWIS
LINCOLN
LOGAN
MCDOWELL
MARION
MARSHALL
MASON
MERCER
MINERAL
MINGO
MONONGALIA
MONROE
MORGAN
' NICHOLAS
OHIO
PENDLETON
PLEASANTS
POCAHONTAS
PRESTON
PUTNAM
08!
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
097
099

10!
103
105
107
109



STATE

STATE


RALEIGH
RANDOLPH
RITCHIE
ROANE
SUMMERS
TAYLOR
TUCKER
TYLER
UPSHUR
WAYNE

WEBSTER
WETZEL
W!RT
WOOD
WYOMING



NAME: WISCONSIN

ABBREVIATION: Wl


STATE CODE: 55

CODE
001
003
005
007
009
Oil
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
049
051
053
055
057
059
WQ
C-26

COUNTY NAME
ADAMS
ASHLAND
BARRON
BAYFIELO
BROWN
BUFFALO
BURNETT
CALUMET
CHIPPF.WA
CLARK
COLUMBIA
CRAWFORD
DANE
DODGE
DOOR
DOUGLAS
DUNN
EAU CLAIRE
FLORENCE
FOND DU LAC
FOREST
GRANT
GREEN
GREEN LAKE
IOWA
IRON
JACKSON
. JEFFERSON
JUNEAU
KENOSHA



-------
WISCONSIN—WYOMING
061
063
065
067
OflS
07!
073
075
077
073
079
031
033
035
087
039
09 i
093
095
097
099
101
103
105
•' :o/
109
1 1 1
i 13
' 15
•117
KEWAUNEE
LACROSSE
LAFAYETTE
LAN GLADE
LINCOLN
MANITOWOC
MARATHON
MARINETTE
MARQUETTE
M'ENCMINEE
MILWAUKEE
.MONROE
OCONTO
GNEiCA
OuTAGAMIE
GZAUKEE
PEPIN
PIERCE
POLK
PORTAGE
PRICE
SACINE
RlCHLANO
SOCK
RUSK
S" CROIX
SAUK
SAWYER
SHAWANO
SHEBOYGAN
110 TAYLOR
12! TREMPEALEAU
123 VERNCN
125 VI LAS
!27 WALWORTH
i29 WASHBURN
13! WASHINGTON
133 WALJKESHA
135 WALJPACA
'37 WAUSHARA
•
139 WINNEBAGO
Ul WOOD



01 i
013
0!5
017
0'-9
021
023
025
027
029

03!
033
035
037
039
041

STATE NAME: WYOMING
STATE ABBREVIATION: WY
STATE CODE: 56
i /"l^fNC /"/"M IklTV VI A tlC
0^3
0^5


CROOK
rREWCNT
GOSKEN
HOT SPRINGS
JOHNSON
LARAMIE
LINCOLN
NATRONA
MOBRARA
PARK

PLATTE
SHERIDAN
SUBLE7"
SWEETV/ATER
' TETON
UINTA
WASHAKiE
WES'ON


                              001
                              003
                              005
                              007
                              009
ALBANY
BlG HORN
CAMPBELL
CARBON
CONVERSE
                                          WQ
                                         C-27

-------
     STORET USER HANDBOOK
             PART
              WQ
      WATER QUALITY  FILE
            APPENDIX
                D
           BASIN CODES
;Basic  Retrieval;  Second  Edition!

-------
APPENDIX D:  BASIN CODES

This appendix contains complete listings of the major and minor
river basin codes which EPA has defined for the waterways within
the United States.  There are 23 major river basins defined
within the U.S., with a variable number of minor basins defined
within each major basin.  The listings are in order by major
basin code, and minor basin code within major basin.

A complete listing of these basin codes can also be obtained by
listing the STORET help data set named BASIN:CODES.

Major River Basins

          CODE       NAME

           01        NORTHEAST
           02        NORTH ATLANTIC
           03        SOUTHEAST
           04        TENNESSEE RIVER
           05        OHIO RIVER
           06        LAKE ERIE
           07    .    UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
           08        LAKE MICHIGAN
           09        MISSOURI RIVER
           10        SOUTH CENTRAL LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER
           11        COLORADO RIVER
           12        WESTERN GULF
           13        PACIFIC NORTHWEST
           14        CALIFORNIA
           15        GREAT BASIN
           16        ALASKA
           17        HAWAII
           18        PUERTO RICO
           19        VIRGIN ISLANDS
           20        OCEANIA
           21        LAKE HURON
           22        LAKE SUPERIOR
           23        HUDSON BAY
Minor River Basins

Listings of the minor river basins appear  in the following pages,
in major river basin sequence.
                               WQ
                               D-l

-------
01  NE  NORTHEAST
          01         QUINNIPIAC RIVER & WESTERN CONN COASTAL.
          02         HOUSATONIC RIVER
          03         PAWCATUCK RIVER & EASTERN CONN COASTAL
          04         CONNECTICUT RIVER
          05         THAMES RIVER
          06         NARRAGANSETT BAY
          OS         MASSACHUSETTS COASTAL
          09       .  MERRIMACK RIVER
          10         PISCATAQUA RIVER & NEW HAMPSHIRE COASTAL
          12         SACO RIVER & SOUTH MAINE COASTAL
          14         PRESUMPSCOT RIVER AND CASCO BAY
          15         ANDROSCOGGIN RIVER
          16         KENNEBEC AND SHEEPSCOT RIVERS
          17         PENOBSCOT RIVER
          18         NORTH MAINE COASTAL
          19         ST. CROIX RIVER
          20         ST. JOHNS RIVER
          21         LAKE MEMPHREMAGOG
          24         LAKE CHAMPLAIN
          25         ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
          26         LAKE ONTARIO SHRE - OSWEGO RIVER TO
                     ST. LAWRENCE RIVER
          27         NIAGARA RIVER
          23         GENESEE RIVER
          29         OSWEGO RIVER
          30         MOHAWK RIVER
          31         UPPER HUDSON RIVER
          32         MIDDLE HUDSON RIVER
          33         LOWER HUDSON-NEW YORK METROPOLITAN AREA
          34         NEW JERSEY COAST
          35         LAKE ERIE SHORE & MINOR TRIBUTARIES
          36         LAKE ONTARIO SHORE - GENESEE R - OSWEGO R
          37         LAKE ONTARIO SHORE - NIAGARA R - GENESEE R
          38         ST. REGIS RIVER
02  NA  NORTH ATLANTIC
          03         DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE  1
          04         DELAWARE RIVER - LEHIGH
          05         DELAWARE RIVER - SCHUYLKILL
          06         DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE  2
          07         DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE  3
          08         DELAWARE RIVER - ZONE  4
          12         SUSQUEHANNA RIVER
          13         UPPER CHESAPEAKE BAY & MD-DEL COASTAL  DEL-MARVA
          14         POTOMAC RIVER
          15         RAPPAHANNOCK AND YORK  RIVERS - 'VIRGINIA  COAST
          16         JAMES RIVER
                               WQ
                               D-2

-------
03  SE  SOUTHEAST
          01         CHOWAN RIVER
          02         ROANOKE RIVER
          03         TAR RIVER
          04         NEUSE RIVER
          05         NORTH CAROLINA COASTAL AREA
          06         CAPE FEAR RIVER
          07    ,     YADKIN-PEE DEE-LOWER PEE DEE RIVER
          08         CATAWBA-WATEREE,CONGAREE,SANTEE-COOPER
                     RESERVOIR
          09         EDISTO-COMBAHEE RIVER
          13         SAVANNAH RIVER
          14         OGEECHEE RIVER
          15         OCOMEE RIVER
          16         OCOMULGEE RIVER
          17-         ALTAMAHA RIVER
          18         SATILLA RIVER
          19         ST. MARYS-NASSAU RIVER
          20         ST. JOHNS RIVER
          21         SUWANNEE RIVER
          22         OCHLOCKONEE-ST. MARKS RIVER
          23         WITHLACOCCHEE RIVER
          24         TAMPA BAY AREA
          25         PEACE RIVER
          26         KISSIMMEE RIVER
          27         FLORIDA EAST COASTAL AREA
          28         LOWER FLORIDA AREA
          29         FLINT .RIVER
          30         CHATTACHOOCHEE RIVER
          31         APALACHICOLA RIVER
          32         CHOCTAWHATCHEE RIVER
          33         PERDIDO-ESCAMBIA RIVER
          34         TALLAPOOSA RIVER
          35         COOSA RIVER
          36         CAHABA RIVER
          37         ALABAMA RIVER
          38         UPPER TOMBIGBEE RIVER
          39         WARRIOR RIVER
          40         LOWER TOMBIGBEE RIVER
          41         MOBILE BAY AREA
          42         PASACAGOULA RIVER
          43         PEARL RIVER
                               WQ
                               D-3

-------
04  TR  TENNESSEE RIVER
          •01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08

05  OR  OHIO RIVER

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08
          09
          10
          11
          12
          13
          14
          15
          16
          17
          18
          19
          20
          21

06  LE  LAKE ERIE

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          11
          12
          13
          14
          15
CLINCH RIVER
HOLSTON RIVER
FRENCH BROAD RIVER
LITTLE TENNESSEE RIVER
HIWASSEE RIVER
ELK RIVER
DUCK RIVER
TENNESSEE RIVER - MAIN STEM & MINOR  TRIES
ALLEGHENY RIVER
MONONGAHELA RIVER
BEAVER RIVER
MUSKINGUM RIVER
LITTLE KANAWHA RIVER
HOCKING RIVER
KANAWHA RIVER
GUYANBOT RIVER
BIG SANDY RIVER
SCIOTO RIVER
LITTLE MIAMI RIVER
LICKING RIVER
MIAMI RIVER
KENTUCKY RIVER
SALT RIVER
GREEN RIVER
WABASH RIVER
EAST FORK WHITE RIVER.  ...  -
WEST FORK WHITE RIVER
CUMBERLAND RIVER
OHIO RIVER - MAIN STEM  & MINOR  TRIES
MAUMEE RIVER
SANDUSKY RIVER
CUYAHOGA RIVER
LAKE ERIE SHORE
LAKE ERIE SHORE
LAKE ERIE SHORE
RAISIN
HURON
DETROIT
CLINTON
ST. CLAIR
MAUMEE R TO SANDUSKY R
SANDUSKY R TO CUYAHOGA R
CUYAHOGA R TO N.Y. STATE LIN;
                                WQ
                                D-4

-------
07  UM  UPPER MISSISSIPPI RIVER

          03         UPPER.PORTION UPPER MISSISSIPPI  RIVER
          04         MINNESOTA RIVER
          05         ST. CROIX
          06         LOWER PORTION UPPER MISSISSIPPI  RIVER
          07         WISCONSIN RIVER
          08         MISSISSIPPI-WAPSIPINICO.N  &  TRIBUTARIES
          09         ROCK RIVER
          10         MISSISSIPPI-IOWA-CEDAR RIVERS
          11         MISSISSIPPI-DES MOINES-SKUNK RIVERS
          12         MISSISSIPPI-SALT RIVERS
          13         CHICAGO-CALUMET RES.-DES  PLAINES RIVER
          15         KANKAKEE RIVER
          16         FOX RIVER
          17         ILLINOIS RIVER'
          18         MISSISSIPPI-ST. LOUIS AREA
          19         MERAMEC RIVER
          20         KASKASKIA RIVER
          21         BIG MUDDY RIVER
          22         MISSISSIPPI RIVER-CAPE GIRARDEAU AREA

08  LM  LAKE MICHIGAN

        •  03'         MENOMINEE
          04         CEDAR
          05         FORD
          06         ESCANABA
          07         RAPID
          08         WHITEFISH
          09         STURGEON
          10         FISHDAM
          11         MANISTIQUE
          12         MILLECOQUINS
          13         BEAR
          14         PINE
          15         ELK
          16         BOARDMAN
          17         PLATTE
          18         BETSIE
          19         MANISTEE
          20         BIG SABLE
          21         PERE MARQUETTE
          22         PENTWATER
          23         WHITE
          24         GREEN BAY - WESTERN SHORE
          25         FOX RIVER-WOLF CREEK
          26         LAKE MICHIGAN - WESTERN  SHORE
          27     .    MUSKEGON
          28         GRAND
          29         BLACK RIVER AT LAKE MACATAWA
          30         KALAMAZOO
                                WQ
                                D-5

-------
          31         BLACK RIVER AT SOUTH HAVEN
          32         ST. JOSEPH RIVER
          33         GALIEN
          49         CALUMET-BURNS DITCH COMPLEX

09  MR  MISSOURI RIVER

          01         UPPER MISSOUR R - HEADWATERS TO MILK RIVER
          02         YELLOWSTONE RIVER
          03         N CENTRAL MISSOURI R - MILK R TO SPRING CREEK
          04         S CENTRAL MISSOURI R - SPRING CREEK TO NIOBRARA  R
          05         NIOBRARA RIVER
          06         JAMES RIVER
          07         BIG SIOUX RIVER
          08         LOWER PLATTE R FROM NORTH PLATTE
          09         NORTH PLATTE RIVER
          10         SOUTH PLATTE RIVER
          11         KANSAS RIVER
          12         LOWER MISSOURI R FROM NIOBRARA R
          13         GRAND-CHARITON RIVERS
          14         OSAGE-GASCONADE RIVERS

10  SM  SOUTH CENTRAL LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER

          01       •  UPPER ARKANSAS R ABOVE KANSAS-COLORADO STATE LINE
          02         ARKANSAS R - KANSAS-COLORADO STATE LINE TO  TULSA
          03         VERDIGRIS RIVER
          04         GRAND NEOSHO RIVER
          05         WHITE RIVER
          06         LOWER MISSISSIPPI R - CAIRO. TO HELENA ARK
          07         CIMARRON R-IVER-NEX MEX-COLO-KANSAS-OKLA-     - -
          08         NORTH CANADIAN RIVER
          09         ARKANSAS RIVER - TULSA TO VAN BUREN
          10         ARKANSAS RIVER - VAN BUREN TO MOUTH
          11         LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-YAZOO RIVER
          12         SOUTH CANADIAN RIVER - ABOVE TEX-OKLA STATE LINE
          13         SOUTH CANADIAN RIVER - BELOW TEX-OKLA STATE LINE
          14         WASHITA RIVER
          15         UPPER RED RIVER - ABOVE DENISON
          16         LOWER RED RIVER - BELOW DENISON
          17         OUACHITA RIVER
          18         LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER-BIG BLACK RIVER
          19         ATCHAFALAYA RIVER
          20         CALCASIEU RIVER
          21         LOWER MISSISSIPPI RIVER - NATCHEZ TO GULF
                               WQ
                               D-6

-------
11  CR  COLORADO RIVER
          01         LOWER COLORADO RIVER
          02         MIDDLE COLORADO RIVER-SAN JUAN RIVER
          03         UPPER COLORADO RIVER
          04         GILA RIVER
          05         LITTLE COLORADO RIVER
          06         GREEN RIVER
          20         DEAN BASIN 01
          21         DEAN BASIN 02
          22         DEAD BASIN 03
          23         DEAD BASIN 04
          24         DEAD BASIN 05
          25         DEAD BASIN 06
          26         DEAD BASIN 07
          27         DEAD BASIN 08
          28         DEAD BASIN 09
          29         DEAD BASIN 10
12  WG  WESTERN GULF
          01         SABINE RIVER
          02         HECHES RIVER
          03         TRINITY & SAN JACINTO RIVERS
          04         BRAZOS RIVER
          05         COLORADO RIVER
          06         GUADELUPE LAVACA & SAN ANTONIO BASIN
          07         NUECES RIVER
          08         UPPER PECOS RIVER
          09      . .  RIO GRANDE UPPER ABOVE PECOS RIVER
          10         RIO GRANDE LOWER BELOW PECOS RIVER
13  PN  PACIFIC NORTHWEST
          01         KOOTENAI RIVER
          02         CLARK FORK-PEND OREILLE RIVER
          03         SPOKANE RIVER
          04         YAKIMA RIVER
          05         COLUMBIA RIVER ABOVE YAKIMA RIVER
          06         UPPER SNAKE RIVER
          07         CENTRAL SNAKE RIVER
          08         MIDDLE & LOWER SNAKE RIVER
          09         WILLAMETTE RIVER
          10         COLUMBIA RIVER BELOW YAKIMA RIVER
          12         PUGET SOUND
          12         WASHINGTON COAST
          13      .   OREGON COAST
          14         SOUTHERN OREGON LAKES
                               WQ
                               D-7

-------
14  CL  CALIFORNIA
          01
       •   02  .
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08
          09
          10
          11

15  GB  GREAT BASIN

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08

16  AL  ALASKA

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08
          09
          10
          11
          12

17  HA  HAWAII

          01
          02
          03
          04
KLAMATH RIVER
NORTH COASTAL
SAN FRANCISCO BAY REGION
CENTRAL COASTAL
SANTA CLARA RIVER
LOS ANGELES RIVER
SANTA ANA RIVER
SAN DIEGO COASTAL REGION
SACRAMENTO RIVER
SAN JOAQUIN RIVER
KINGS & KERN RIVERS AND TULARE LAKE
NORTHWESTERN LAHONTAN
HUMBOLDT RIVER
CENTRAL NEVADA
OWENS RIVER
MOJAVE RIVER
COLORADO RIVER BASIN REGION OF CALIFORNIA
GREAT SALT 'LAKE
SEVIER RIVER
ARCTIC SLOPE (COLVILLE & SAGAVAHIRKTOK RES)
N W (KOTSEVUR SOUND, NOATAK & KOBUK RES)
YUKON RIVER
KUSKOKWIM RIVER
BRISTOL BAY - BUSHAGAK & MULCHATNA RIVERS
SOUTHERN ALASKA PENINSULA
EAST COOK.INLET-SUSITNA RIVER
KENAI & KNIK ARM RIVERS
KODIAK ISLAND
COPPER RIVER
YAKUTAT BAY
SOUTHEASTERN ALASKA
HAWA11
HONOLULU OAHU ISLAND
KAUAI CO-KAUAI, MIIHAU  & SMALL  ISLANDS
MAUI-KALAWAO CO
                               WQ
                               D-8

-------
18   PR  PUERTO RICO

                     PUERTO RICO   .

19   VI  VIRGIN ISLANDS

                     VIRGIN ISLANDS
20  OC  OCEANIA

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08

21  LH  LAKE HURON

          01
          02
          03
          04
          05
          06
          07
          08
          09
          10
          11
          12
          13
          14
          15
          16
          17
          18
GUAM
MARIANA ISLANDS
PALAU
YAP
PONAPE
TRUK
MARSHALL ISLANDS
AMERICAN SAMOA
CHERRY CREEK
PIGEON
WISCOGGIN
SAGINAW
KAWKAWLIN
RIFLE
AUGRES
AUSABLE
BLACK (AT BLACK RIVER)
THUNDER BAY
SWAN CREEK
OCQUEOC
CHEBOYGAN
CARP
PINE
MUNUSCONG
CHARLOTTE
WAISKA
                               WQ
                               D-9

-------
22  LS  LAKE SUPERIOR-
          01         PENDILLS
          02      '   TAHQUAMENON
          03         TWO HEARTED
          04         AUTRAIN
          05         CHOCOLAY
          06         CARP
          07         SALMON TROUT
          08         STURGEON (HOUGHTON COUNTY:
          09         TOBACCO
          10         PORTAGE LAKE
          11         MISERY
          12         ONTONAGON
          13         IRON
          14         PRESQUE ISLE
          15         MONTREAL
          23         WISC & MINN DRAINAGE
23  HB  HUDSON BAY
          01         RED RIVER OF THE NORTH
          02         RAINY RIVER
          03         DEVILS LAKE AREA
          04         SOURIS RIVER
                               WQ
                               D-10

-------
     STORET USER HANDBOOK
              PART
               WQ
      WATER QUALITY  FILE
            APPENDIX
                E
      SAMPLING  SITES  WITHIN
     SEWAGE  TREATMENT PLANTS
[Basic  Retrieval;  Second Edition]

-------
   APPENDIX E:  SAMPLING SITES WITHIN SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANTS

CODE NUMBERS                    SAMPLING POSITIONS,

   0             Discharge
     35          Disinfection Processing completed
    31-3.4            During Process of Disinfection
     30          Prior to Disinfection Process
    20-29            Pre-Discharge
     1-19            Post Discharge (Mixing Zone)

    36-40            Other Treatment Processes, Removal
                     Process completed
    41-89            Other Treatment Processes, During
                     Process of Removal
    90-94            Other Treatment Processes, Prior to
                     Removal Processes

     105         Sludge, Processing completed
   106-155           Sludge, During Processing
     156             Sludge, Raw

     157         Phosphorous, Removal Processing Completed
   158-167           Phosphorous, During Processes of Removal
     168         Phosphorous, Prior to Removal Processes

     169         Nitrogen, Removal Processing Completed
   170-179           Nitrogen, During Processes of Removal
     180         Nitrogen, Prior to Removal Processes

     181         Suspended Solids, Removal Processing Completed
   182-191           Suspended Solids, During Removal Processes
     192         Suspended Solids, Prior to Removal Processes

     193         Advanced Treatment, Removal Processing Completed
   194-268     .      Advanced Treatment, During Removal Processes
     269         Advanced Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes

     270         Secondary Treatment, Removal Processing
                     Completed
   271-342           Secondary Treatment, During Removal  Processes
     343         Secondary Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes

     344         Intermediate Treatment, Removal Processing
                     Completed
   345-369           Intermediate Treatment, During Removal  Process^
     370         Intermediate Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes

     371         Primary Treatment, Removal Processing Completed
   372-396           Primary Treatment, During Removal Processes
     397         Primary Treatment, Prior to Removal Processes
                               WQ
                               E-l

-------
CODE NUMBERS                    SAMPLING POSITIONS

     398         Preliminary Treatment, Removal Processing
                     Completed
   399-423           Preliminary Treatment, During Removal
                     Processes
     424        .Preliminary Treatment, Prior to Removal
                     Processes

     500         Raw Sewage
    425-434          Plant By-Passes
    435-454          Separate Influent Points
    455-474          Collection Systems
                                WQ
                                E-2

-------
                           DEFINITIONS

1.         DISCHARGE - The point at which the effluent is emitted
          from the Outfall Sewer to the Receiving Waters.

2.         PRE-DISCHARGE - Any point between the effluent of the final
          Treatment Process,  usually disinfection, & the point
          at which the Discharge occurs.  To be used, normally,
          for points within the Outfall Sewer.

3.         POST-DISCHARGE - (MIXING ZONE) An area of the Receiving
          waters designated as a Mixing Zone.

4.         RAW SEWAGE - Sewage as received, in its raw stage, at the
          facility and before any treatment processes are
          applied.

5,    .     COLLECTION SYSTEMS - Collectively, any network of conduits,
          pipes, tunnels, ditches, wastewater lines, appurtenances,
          pumping stations, etc., which has been designed to
          convey sewage obtained from one or several sources to
          a common point, usually a wastewater Treatment Facility.

6.         PLANT BY-PASS - An arrangement of pipes, conduits, gates,
          valves, etc., whereby flow is diverted around a treat-
          ment facility with partial or no treatment.

7.         SEPARATE INVLUENT POINTS - An influent to the collection
          system other than the point at which the bulk of
          influent is received.  E.G.- An individual pipe from
          an  industrial source directly to the col lection'system.

8.         REMOVAL PROCESSES COMPLETED - That stage of processing
          where all that  is intended to be accomplished during
          a treatment process has been done and the wastewater
          is  ready for further processing or ultimate disposal.

9.         DURING PROCESSES OF REMOVAL - Any of the processing  stages
          during which the wastewater is being treated.

10.       PRIOR TO REMOVAL PROCESSES - The point at which the  waste-
          water or residue is received from a previous point or
          source and before any treatment processes are applied.

                              NOTE
Use principal processes ONLY under the established codes.   When
describing Non-Standard or Parallel Processes, use Other
Treatment Processes, code numbers 36 through  94 as required.   Use
the Advanced  Treatment Codes 193  through  269 where specific
functions as  Suspended Solids, Phosphorous or Nitrogen removal
cannot be separately identified.
                               WQ
                               E-3

-------
  STORE! USER HANDBOOK
          PART
           WQ
   WATER QUALITY FILE
        APPENDIX
            F
STORET STATION TYPE CODES

-------
APPENDIX F:  STORET STATION TYPE CODES

Water quality monitoring stations can be categorized acccrdin
a variety of alphabetic descriptions which are termed station
type codes.  These codes can be stored into the WQF as par
station's location data via the Station Tvoe Card  .. T Card
stations can be retrieved according to station types via t
                                             of valid stat
                                            codes is expec
                    an occasional new station type code ma
EXTRACT station restriction keyword.   A li
types is given below.  Although this set o
be somewhat stati
added frorr, time to time.  The on-line STORET help data set
STATION. TYPE always contains a list of all station type co
defined within STORET.
                                                          he
                                                          ion
                                                          ted co
                                                          y be
                                                           named
                                                          des
The list of valid station type codes as
follows:
                                         ;f December 23, 1973
 ..evel 1 codes:  (Each station must have exactly one.)
LAKE
STREAM
SPRING
WELL
ESTURY
     PIPE



     LND

     CANAL
     RESERV

Level 2 codes:

     AMBNT
               The
               The
               The
               The
               The
               The
                                          from the open
                                          in a lake.
                                                        sea.
                                          in a river or strea
                                                       spring.
                                          taken from a sp
                                          in a well.
                                          in the estuar
                                    the ocean.
                                    water at some point
                                    such as a treatment
                                    Use PIPE when the s
                                                       y zone

                                                        wicni
                                                        plant
                                                       tation

                                                        on so
                                                       terial
                                                        in a
                                                       r.
                   station monitors water
                   station monitors water
                   station monitors water
                   station monitors water
                   station monitors water
                   station monitors water
               between a stream and
               The station monitors
               a man-made facility,
               or industrial site.
               monitors the effluent discharge.
               The station monitors soil or crops grown
               which has received hazardous or toxic materials
               The station monitors water in a canal or in a drain,
               The station monitors water in a reservoi

                 (Each station must have exactly one.1

               The only valid Level 2 code unless Level 1 is coded
               PIPE.  Used to indicate that the sample was gat here-:
               in a natural body of water, as opposed to within
               a facility or in the effluent.

       The Level 2 codes below are valid only if Level 1 is PIPE.

     SEWER     The station monitors within a sewer.  (Further
               defined in Level 5 . ;
     INPLNT    The sampling point  is inside a treatment facility,
               and the depth code conventions (see STORET
               Handbook) for exact location will be used.
     NTRTMT    The samples are gathered at a point where no
               pollution abatement process has been performed
               on the water.
                               WQ
                              F-l

-------
Level 2 codes,

     FTRTMT


     TREATD


     CMBTRT


Level 3 codes:


     MUN '

     IND
     CMBMI
     AGRI
Level 4 codes:


     INTAKE

     OUTFL

     CM3SRC

Level 5 Codes:


     SUPPLY

     RUNOFF
     HRZTL

     GALERY

     TUNNEL
     NONPNT

     RANNEY

     FISH
     PRECIP
     SOLIDS
continued:             ;

The samples are gathered at a'point where some,
but not all,  of the intended pollution abatement
processess  have been performed.
The samples are gathered at a point where no
further pollution abatement process will be
performed.
The point where samples are gathered is not
clearly in  any of the 'above treatment status codes.

 (Required  if Level 1 is PIPE.   Optional otherwise.
  Use only  one.)

The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated  with municipal water supply and/or sewage.
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated  with industrial water intake and/or
effluent.
The site has both of the above attributes.
The station monitors ^water associated with agricultural,
silvicultural, or feedlot discharges.

 (Required  if Level 3 is used.   Optional otherwise.
  Use only  one.)

The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated  with a water intake.
The site from which samples are gathered is primarily
associated  with pollutant effluent.
The site has both-of .the above-attributes.  -

 (Optional. Miscellaneous additional information.
  Any combinations can be used.)

Water other than wastewater.  From a water supply
system.
The station monitors stormwater.
A horizontal well, usually associated with the
Level 1 code, WELL.
Gallery.  An underground structure designed to
collect subsurface water.
Tunnel, associated with the Level  1 code, WELL.
Data is associated with an effluent which is not a
point source.
Ranny Collector,  usually associated with the Level  1
code, WELL.
Station where  fish  (to include coastal aquatic  life)
are collected, identified, and analyzed for presence
of contaminants.
The station monitors rain water.
Stations where sludge or sediment  are sampled.
                               WQ
                              F-2

-------
Level 5 codes,  continued:

     MET       Station monitors meteorological data.
     SBSOIL    Station monitors drain tiles, or other locations jus;
               below the soil surface.
     TISSUE    Plant or animal matter is analyzed.
     CMESWR    Combined sewer.
     SANSWR    Sanitary sewer.
     STMSWR    Stormwater sewer.
                               WQ
                              F-3

-------
       STORE! USER HANDBOOK
               PART
                WQ
        WATER QUALITY FILE
             APPENDIX
                 G
STORING,  PROCESSING, AND RETRIEVING
       INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA

-------
APPENDIX G:   STORING,  PROCESSING,  AND RETRIEVING
             INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA

Because of its important support role co water pollution control
programs  particularly to the 4C CFR 13C-131 water quality
management process), water monitoring throughout the Nation has
been reoriented by EPA's Standing work Group on Water Monitoring.
from general, sometimes ill-defined data collection, to
activities designed to answer specific environmental questions.
Such reorientation will often result in a decrease  in ambient
fixed station water monitoring and an increase in intensive
surveys.  To benefit fully from the intensive surveys conducted,
water pollution control agencies must have a means  to siore,
process, and retrieve the effluent and ambient water quality daca
collected.  This appendix discusses the use of STORET for these
purpose's, and describes the STORET intensive survey capability.

DEFINITION OF AN INTENSIVE SURVEY

          An intensive survey is the frequent sampling of
          parameters at representative points • including points
          of effluent discharge) for a relatively short period of
          time to discover water quality conditions, causes,
          effects, and cause-and-effect relationships.  Intensive
          surveys may employ physical, chemical, and biological
          techniques for parameter measurement.

          There are three general categories of intensive
          surveys:

          1.  Surveys, for ambient, assessment-... -..  .

          An ambient assessment survey is used to discover
          general water quality conditions and to -determine cause
          and effect relationships.  Both ambient and effluent
          sampling may be undertaken.

          2.  Surveys for mathematical model calibration and
              verification

          Mathematical model calibration and verification surveys
          are used  in support of  the waste load allocation
          process and may involve ambient and effluent sampling.

          3.  Reconnaissance surveys

          A  reconnaissance survey provides data for  the design  of
          ambient fixed station networks  (and of other larger-
          scale intensive surveys) and for the  integration  of
          water monitoring activities.   In  the course of such
          surveys,  both ambient and effluent monitoring may be
          undertaken.
                               WQ
                               G-l

-------
SCOPE OF INTENSIVE SURVEY MONITORING*, ,

          The states will use intensive surveys to determine
          whether water quality conditions are improving or
          getting worse.  Such surveys can also be used to
          examine cause-and-effect relationships,  to provide data
          for waste load allocation studies, to explain the
          spatial significance of ambient station siting, to
          facilitate the interpretation of data collected at
          ambient stations, and to integrate monitoring
          components.

          An intensive survey should be conducted at least once
          during a five-year period on every significant segment.
          (A significant segment is any portion of a river, lake,
          estuary, bay, or aquifer, where; waste loads are
          allocated or adverse water quality. conditions have
          either'been  identified or are considered probable.)
          Since  there  are approximately 1,500 significant
          segments in  the United States, it is likely that about
          300 intensive surveys will be conducted a year ever a
          five-year period (0.20 x 1,500 = 300, assuming that 20
          percent of the 1,500 segments will be surveyed each
          year over the five-year period).  A typical survey may
          include from 10 to 100 sampling sites (stations) and
          may examine  from 20 to 200 unique parameters.

          Effluent data may be collected in any one of the three
          types  of intensive surveys, with an individual survey
          generally addressing no more than 20 facilities (major
          and/or minor-) .~ • This figure translates-  into- 6','000'  -
          facilities a year, or 30,000 over a five-year period.

STORAGE OF  INTENSIVE SURVEY DATA AND STATIONS

        .  Although an  intensive survey is characterized by a
          relatively large number of stations that collect
          samples over a short period of Mme, the STORET system
          will properly accommodate intensive survey data.
          However, where only one or two pieces of data exist for
          each station of an intensive survey (resulting,
          therefore, in a large number of stations with
          relatively little data), a user may choose not to store
          intensive survey data in STORET.  Although STORET's use
          is recommended in.most cases, there will be situations,
          as in  all data processing applications, where the
          volume of data involved  in a given intensive survey
          will not justify the use of any automated data system.
          When this is the case, the user may achieve better
          results through a manual data handling  procedure.
                               WQ
                               G-2

-------
          Each intensive survey will be assigned a unique six-
          digit number which will reference all water quality
          measurements made in the course of the survey.   The
          six-digit number will have the format: yyssnn,  where yy
          is che last two digits of the year in which th-e survey
          was begun,  ss is the PIPS code for the state in which
          the survey was begun, and nn is the number of che
          survey,  unique within state and year and ranging from
          zero to 99 in value.  This intensive survey identifier
          is stored as the value for parameter 116,  which
          signifies that the sample for which the parameter is
          scored belongs to the specified intensive survey.

          Stations included in an intensive survey which  are not
          already contained in STORET should be stored using
          either the standard STORE! ?01 '.'fixed format) station
          storage procedure, EASYSTOR,  a STORET command
          procedure.

          Ambient and effluent water quality data collected at
          the stations of an intensive survey should be stored
          using either STORET water quality data storage
          procedure type ?02,  ?03, or ?04.   Each sample stored
          will have the unique intensive survey identifier
          included as a value for parameter 116.

          Only the ?Q4 storage procedure- may be used to add
          parameter number 116 to an existing sample.

RETRIEVING INTENSIVE SURVEY STATIONS AND DATA PROM STORET

          Once all stations and data associated with an intensive
          survey have been successfully stored in STORET, users
          may request (by contacting STORET User Assistance1 that
          a mask be created for the stations of an intensive
          survey under, the unique identifier assigned to  the
          survey.   This mask can then be used with the EXTRACT
          keyword to facilitate station selection.

          The IS keyword is used to retrieve intensive survey
          data, and is described in detail  at che end of  this
          appendix.  It allows a user to separate, at retrieval
          .time, intensive survey data from data collected as part
          of a fixed station monitoring network.  It also allows
          a user to segregate the data at a particular station of
          an intensive survey by specific intensive survey.

          To obtain a location plot and/or listing of the
          stations included in a specific intensive survey, the
          user would specify via an appropriate STORET retrieval
          procedure,  using the STC and EXTRACT keywords,  the
          state or state? in which the survey was conducted and


                               WQ
                               G-3

-------
the unique intensive survey s.i x-dig.i.t number.  This,  in
turn,  would select, through: t-h-e- appropriate bit ma-s-k,
all stations belonging to the survey.  (Alternatively,
the user could simply specify the stations involved  in
the survey.)

Occasionally, stations of an intensive survey will be
required in downstream order.  Unfortunately, only
where river-mile-index information (RMI)  is available
and has been stored for the stations of the survey will
this be an easy effort.  Each individual  user, however,
will have the ability to create station 'paths' for
each intensive survey.  To obtain the stations of the
survey in a particular path sequence, the user, instead
of employing the intensive survey bit mask, will
specify the stations needed in the required path order.
It should be noted that this is not an automatic
procedure; the user will have to state explicitly the
stations of the survey in the required path sequence.

To retrieve the ambier.t and effluent water quality data
for a particular intensive survey, the user will first
specify the appropriate state code(s) and the unique
intensive survey six-digit number as described above
(or, alternatively, will explicitly specify the
stations used in the survey) to select all stations
used in the  intensive survey.  To exclude all water
quality data not belonging to the specified intensive
survey, the user will again specify  (through  the use  of
the IS keyword) the unique intensive survey number.

See the description of the IS keyword for several
examples illustrating the retrieval of intensive survey
stations and data.
                     WQ
                     G-4

-------
CLASSIFICATION:  Data Selection Keyword
USE:
This keyword is used to retrieve intensive survey data
It allows a user to separate, at retrieval time,
intensive survey data from data collected as part of a
routine fixed station monitoring network.  It also
allows a user to segregate data at a station of the
intensive survey by specific intensive survey.
KEYWORD FORMAT AND VALUES:

              fyyssnn[/yyssnn
          IS= < NOT
              LONLY

          IS=yyssnn...,
          IS=NOT,


          IS=ONLY,
                           where
                      specifies that only those samples
                      belonging to the specified
                      intensive survey identifier(s)
                      yyssnn are to be retrieved.
                      yyssnn is a six-digit nurr.erical
                      value, unique within a state  for
                      any given year, composed of the
                      last two digits of the-year in
                      which the survey was begun (yy),
                      the FIPS code for the state in
                      which the survey was begun (ss),
                      and the number of the survey  (nn)
                      conducted within state ss for
                      year yy.  nn may be any numerical
                      value from 00 to 99.  Up to 20
                      yyssnn identifiers may be
                      specified in a single retrieval
                      request, each identifier
                      separated from the preceding
                      identifier by a slash  (/}.

                      specifies that no intensive survey
                      data,  is to be retrieved.

                      specifies that only intensive
                      survey data is to be retrieved,
                      regardless of which intensive
                      survey it is associated.
                               WQ
                               G-5

-------
DEFAULT VALUE:  None.
If., not specif led, intensive survey
data will be retrieved along w,ith
other data stored, according to
the data selection keywords
specified.
NOTES ON USAGE:
          The IS keyword is valid with the RET, MEAN, PLOT, LOG,
          STAND, STA, PU!s?CH, MSP, and REG retrieval programs.

          'IS=NOT,'  inhibits the retrieval of all samples which
          have a value stored for parameter 116;  'IS=ONLY,'
          retrieves only samples which have values stored for
          parameter  116.

          When specifying more, than one identifier via  the yyssnn
          value of the IS keyword, each identifier must be unique
          and different.  A sample is selected  if it contains  any
          one of the specified intensive survey identifiers.

          Instead of using the STC and EXTRACT  keywords,
          intensive survey stations can also be specified
          explicitly via the agency (A) and station  (S) keywords,
          specifying each station that was part of the  survey.
          IS would still be used, however.
EXAMPLE;s):

Obtai-ri a location plot and
listing of the stations that -
belong to survey number 10
conducted by the State of
Maryland during 1977.

Perform a raw data retrieval
of the data collected in the
State of Maryland's  intensive
survey number 10 conducted
in 1977 for total chlorphyll
(P=32234), BOD-dissolved
(P=311), and BOD-first stage
(P=320).
PGM=LOC,PURP=305B/STA,
STC=24,EXTRACT=772410,
TAGS,SCALE=24000,
PGM=RET,PUR?=305B/STA,
STC=24,EXTRACT=772410,
IS=772410,P=32234,
P=311,P=320,
                               WQ
                               G-6

-------
       STORET USER HANDBOOK
               PART
                WQ
        WATER QUALITY FILE
             APPENDIX
                 J
INDICATING DATA VALUE SIGNIFICANCE
                WQ

-------
APPENDIX J:  INDICATING DATA VALUE SIGNIFICANCE
Water Quality File data storage and retrieval procedures do not
necessarily print parametric data with the same number of
significant digits as supplied at the time of data entry.

For data with decimal points, the number of decimal places
(digits to the right of the decimal point) in printed raw data  is
dependent either on predefined decimal placement values
associated with each parameter code or on the value assigned by
the program-specific decimal placement keyword DR used with' the
RET retrieval program.  When the stored value does not confer-  to
the expected format, STORET either adds zeros or prints a
rounded-off value. Consequently, the value printed may contain
non-significant digits that were not stored at the time of data
entry.

In addition, standard.WQF storage procedures provide no
indication as to the significance of values without decimal
points. For example, the user has no way of knowing whether a
stored value of 1500 represents an actual value of precisely 1500
(both zeros significant), an approximation to the nearest tench
(one zero significant), or an approximation to the nearest
hundredth (neither zero significant).

To preserve data significance throughout storage and retrieval,  a
special coding procedure can be used at data storage time to
override the usual decimal placement conventions and to ensure
that param.etc.Lc-values ..ar_e .printed ..exactly as stored. This coding
also allows the-user to distinguish between significant and non-
significant zeros in numbers without decimal points. The
procedures for storing, changing, deleting, and retrieving
parametric data with significance  indicators are discussed and
illustrated below.
                               WQ
                               J-l

-------
STORING PARAMETRIC DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           The significance of stored and printed parametric
           values is preserved as coded by adding a single card
           to the data storage deck in either a ?C1 fixed-form
           storage procedure or a ?C4 WQGSTOR storage procedure.
           '.Data storage procedures ?Q2 and ?03 may not be used
           to store or change data value significance.)  This
           card, the QPREC card,  follows immediately after the
           agency card and contains only the letters QPREC, coded
           in the first five columns. Only one QPREC card  is
           permitted in a data storage deck, and it applies to
           all data stored in that particular run.

           To distinguish between significant' and non-significant
           zeros in values without decimal points,  the letter "I"
           is entered in place of all non-significant zeros.

           Examples 1 and 2 show typical storage decks for 701
           and ?04 storage procedures in which the digits  that
           are not significant are indicated by the letter Z.

           EXAMPLE 1

           STORING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           USING THE ?C1 STORAGE PROCEDURE
01234
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901
5
23456789012345 .
7START
! ?ci
EXAMPLE TEST
QPREC
: AOOOOI
7601030007
7601030008
7601030009
760103001Q
0 1
12345678901234567

00010100012 00011350012
00010100Z12 OOQ11350Z12
0001010ZZ12 0001135ZZ12
000101ZZZ12 000113ZZZ12
2 3 4
390123456789012345678901

31506100014
31506100Z14
3150610ZZ14
315061ZZZ14
5
23456789012345.
7 8
.4567890
7777 A
S
6
6
6
6
7 8
. 4567890
                               WQ
                               J-2

-------
         This first example illustrates the use of the ?01
         storage procedure when indicating data value
         significance.   Four significant digits will be stored
         for the time 0007.  For the times 0008,  C009, and
         OC10,  three,  two,  and one significant digits will be
         stored,  respectively. Note the use of the QPREC card.
         Remember that  with ?01 data entry, the 11-character
         parametric field includes five digits representing the
         parameter code,  four digits representing the parameter
         value,  a "1" or  a "0" indicating the sign of the
         exponent, and  a  one digit exponent.   A maximum of four
         non-zero digits  can be stored using the ?01 storage
         procedure.

         EXAMPLE 2

         STORING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
         USING THE ?04  STORAGE PROCEDURE
0        1         2         3         4         5        7     8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...456739:

?START
?04
AC,A=EXAMPLE,UK=TEST,
QPREC
SC,AOOOO1,"601090007,?10,10,PI 1,35,P31506,1000,
SC,AOOOO1,7601090008,P10,1Z,P11,4Z,P31506, 100Z,
SC,AOOOO1,7601090009,P10,1ZZ,P11,4ZZ,P31506,10ZZ,
SC,AOCOO1,7601090010,P10,5Z,P11,6ZZ,P31506,1ZZZ,
0        1         2         3         4      '   5    '    7     3
1234567390123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...456-891
         This second example illustrates the use of the ?04
         storage procedure when indicating data value
         significance.  For the time 0009, one significant
         digit will be stored for parameters 10 and 11, and two
         significant digits will be stored for parameter 31506.
         Note the use of the QPREC card. The maximum number of
         non-zero digits that can be stored using the ?04
         storage procedure is six.
                             WQ
                             J-3

-------
CHANGING PARAMETRIC DATA USING SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           The procedures described in: Chapter DE for changing
           parametric data are used when the updated values are
           to be stored with their significance indicated.  The
           only changes to the procedures are the inclusion of a
           QPREC card immediately following the agency card, and
           the use of the letter "Z" in place of the non-
           significant zeros for the new values.  This procedure
           may be used regardless of whether the old values were
           stored with or without significance indicators.

           EXAMPLE 3

           CHANGING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           USING THE ?01 STORAGE PROCEDURE
  01         2         3         4         578
  1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...4567390

  ?START
  ?01    '
  14AGNFS9        SECRET  NAME OF USER                      9999  A
  QPREC
     070001                                                       S
        780715      003103Z  02 004005   00                      C6
  0        1         2         3         4         5        7     8  I
  1234567890123456739012345678901234567890123456789012345...4567390  i
                               WQ
                               J-4

-------
           EXAMPLE 4

           CHANGING DATA WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           USING THE  ?34 STORAGE PROCEDURE
  I         i          2         3         4         5        7
  12 3-4 5 6"c;:::3436"39C123456'390 123456739 01234567S90 12345. ..45673:

  7START
  ?C4
  AC, A=14AGNFS9, UK = SECRET, ruSER = NAME Or USER,
  CPREC
  sc,:-::;i,7sc7i5,?c3io,3z,?C400,.5,
  113456-3?:i23456-39012345678901234567890123456739012345...456739:
           Exarr.pies three and four illustrate the procedures for
           changing parametric data values using significance
           indicators.   In both examples,  a value of 30 will be
           stored for•parameter 310,  with only one significant
           digit.  Because the predefined decimal placement for
           parameter, code 310 is XXXXXX.X, this particular value
           would have been stored as "30" and printed as "30.0"
           had standard procedures been used.
DELETING PARAMETRIC DATA HAVING SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS STORED
           Either the ?01 or ?04 storage procedure may be used to
           delete parametric data that have been stored with
           significance indicators.   The procedures used are
           identical to those described in Chapter DE, Section 4.

           It is not necessary to use a QPREC card when deleting
           data, regardless of how they were stored or which
           deletion procedure is used.
                               WQ
                               J-5

-------
RETRIEVING DATA STORED WITH SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
           Storage of parametric values with significance
           indicators impacts only raw data tabulations obtained
           using the retrieval program RET.  Neither raw data
           retrieved using other STORET retrieval programs nor
           any calculated values will be affected. Data stored
           with significance indicators are retrieved as part of
           the standard RET output and may be interspersed with
           data stored using standard procedures.

           There are two ways that data stored with significance
           indicators differ in printed output from data stored
           using standard procedures:

           1.  Data stored using a deck that contains a QPREC
           card will be printed out at retrieval time with
           exactly the same number of decimal places as the
           stored value, regardless of the predefined decimal
           placement for that parameter and regardless of the
           value assigned to the DR keyword, if used.

           2.  Where the letter "Z" was stored in place of non-
           significant zeros at data entry, the letter "0" will
           print.  In most print chains, the letter "0" will be
           fatter or -ore square than the numeric zero "0" used
           for significant zeros.

           In cases where all zeros in a parameter value .are
           significant, and the number of decimal places stored
           is the same as that specified for data stored without
           significance indicators, printed values of.data scored
           with and without significance indicators will be
           indistinauishable.
EXAMPLE 5                  •

SAMPLE RET RETRIEVAL,  SHOWING DATA STORED WITH
SIGNIFICANCE INDICATORS
                                                          AND WITHOUT
           Retrieve data stored at
           station ABC099NM under
           agency EXAMPLE for
           parameters -10 and 11
           (water temperature),
           400 (pH), 31506 (total
           col iforms),  and
           70300 (residue).
                               PGM=RET,PURP=10436/EPA,
                               A=EXAMPLE,S=ASC099NM,
                               P=10,P=11,P=40Q,
                               P=315C6,?=7030C,
                               3D=76,ED=7306,
                               SHIFT,
                               WQ
                               J-6

-------
STORET RET
AoCu 3 3.SM
3 3 j 7 3 u . u
S
IEVAL C
^77 07
24U J1MAP.VL.ANO
.iCciTH ATLANTIC
?CTOMAC
EXAMPLE 7auol
•,'ulj :E£T DE
GATE TIME
r

KOM
TO
7a/ui/'jl
" '}/
7s/
•j
/ j /
' 5/
7o/
7a/
70/
'•j -/ -2
•j 2 / j 2
./..'.
U/31
.•I/Li
u 2 / 
ijo jCu 5
'Jvl
00
0 0
uO
Uui,
•j u 0
5
5
OOO 3
GOu
5
73/o3/u4 15 G
-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
                                                       O

                                                       z
                                                       O
        PART
         WQ
 WATER QUALITY FILE
        INDEX
        WQ-IND

-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
        PART
         WQ
 WATER QUALITY FILE
        INDEX
       WQ-IND

-------
                        USING THIS INDEX


This index reflects the contents of the Water Quality File (WQF)
Part of the STORET User Handbook.  The pagination following the
primary and secondary (indented) terms consists of an alphabetic
designation of the chapter (FS, DE, or RET) in which the term is
found, followed by a colon, followed by one or more pairs

                      chapter      page

                         t           t

                       Hill  :  ill-!!!!
                             section

of hyphenated numbers which refer to the section and page within
the chapter.  An A prefixed to the left number of an hyphenated
pair indicates a reference to an appendix within the indicated
chapter.  References following a WQ designation refer to a WQF
appendix.  The abbreviations used for the chapter or appendix
designations correspond to the tabs and text as follows:

       Index          Brown
    Designation        Tab         	Text	

        FS            WQ-FS        File Structure Chapter

        DE            WQ-DE        Data Entry Chapter

        RET           WQ-RET       Retrieval Chapter

        WQ          APPENDICES     Appendices to the WQF Part

Special characters such as percent signs (%), question marks (?),
equal signs ( = ), and plus or minus signs (+_) appear before
letters in the alphabetic sequence; numbers follow letters in the
alphabetic sequence.
                             WQ-IND
                               2

-------
                              INDEX
%TILEnT keyword, RET:7-35
7START card
   data storage control card, DE:3-18,4-4,4-5
?01 card
   fixed form storage procedure, DE:4-4
   station location information storage, DE:3-18
   storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
?02 card
   use with DIP storage, DE:4-4,4-7
?03 card
   use with DIP storage, DE:4-5,4-15
?04 card
   storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
   use with WQGSTOR storage, DE:4-5,4-23
A card, DE:A2-1
   (see also Agency card)
A keyword, RET:4-13
AC card
   description of fields in, DE:4-24
ADDM keyword, RET:7-21
Advanced keywords (see Retrieval keywords)
Agency card
   description of fields in, DE:3-2
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
   use with storing parametric data, DE:4-3
   use with storing station location information, DE:3-18
Agency code
   changing, DE:3-20
   listing of valid, RET:4-14,4-77
   retrieving by, RET:4-13,4-39
Agency/station file (ASF), FS:3-3
AGGR keyword, RET:4-79
Aggregated subareas, RET:7-185
Aggregating data, RET:4-79,6-25
ALLPARM program
   description of, RET:6-17
   sample output, RET:3-5,6-18
ANC keyword, RET:4-75
Archived data
   class of, DE:3-18
   retrieving by, RET:4-45
ARCLASS keyword, RET:4-45
Area file (AREAFLE), FS:3-5
AREA keyword, RET:4-31
Area-shaded maps, RET:7-7,7-91
   examples of, RET:7-96
ASA99 keyword, RET:7-185
                             WQ-IND
                               3

-------
AT keyword, RET:7-21
Automatic station list (see NOPAR program)
AUXFILE
   creating an, RET:7-201
   definition, RET:7-199
   keyword, RET:7-199
   record format, RET:7-207
Auxiliary File  (see LOG program)
AUXSYM keyword, RET:7-197
B keyword, RET:4-13
BASE keyword, RET:6-35
Basin codes
   listing of, WQ:D-1
   retrieving by, RET:4-29
BD keyword, RET:4-57
BEGIN keyword, RET:7-17
BG keyword, RET:4-61
EOT keyword, RET:4-71
Bottom samples
   changing, DE:4-41,4-43
   deleting, DE:4-53,4-55
   retrieving by, RET:4-71
   Storing, DE:4-8,4-18,4-26,4-34
BS keyword, RET:4-29
BT keyword, RET:4-59
CALCOMP plotting symbols  (see Plotting  symbols)
CF  (see Hits file)
Change maps  (see Trend maps)
Changing
    agency card  information, DE:3-20
    agency code, DE:3-20
    basin codes, DE:3-28
    descriptive  paragraph  information, DE:3-30
    latitude/longitude card  information,  DE:3-24
    location description information, DE:3-29
    major/minor  basin information, DE:3-28
    parametric data  (see Parametric data)
    RMI information, DE:3-26
    station card information, DE:3-23
    station codes, DE:3-23
    station location information,  DE:3-20,3-35
    station type information, DE:3-22
    station types, DE:3-22
CKNO keyword, RET:7-217
CKWDTH keyword, RET:7-217
CLR keyword, RET:6-73
CO  keyword, RET:4-27
                              WQ-IND
                                4

-------
Composite sample
   definition, FS:2-1
Composite values
   changing, DE:4-39
   retrieving, RET:4-73,4-75
   storing via procedure ?01, DE:4-32,4-35
   storing via procedure ?02, DE:4-11
   storing via procedure ?03, DE:4-18
   storing via procedure ?04, DE:4-76
   with NOPAR program, RET:7-161
Computer sequence number, FS:3-2
COMSCL keyword, RET:7-57
CONLEV keyword, RET:7-85
CONN keyword, RET:7-47
Continuation card (see Parametric data storage cards)
Contour mapping keywords, RET:7-73
Contour maps
   fineness of lines in, RET:7-75
   number of. thin lines, RET: 7-81
   (see also MSP program)
Control cards
   data entry  (see 7START card and ?0n cards)
   NOPAR program, RET:7-145,7-155
CONV keyword, RET:7-265
Convert a stored value, RET:4-53
County codes
   listing of, WQ:C-3
   retrieving by, RET:4-27,4-37
CSIZE keyword, RET:7-191
D card  (see Parametric data storage cards)
D keyword, RET:4-69
Data  (D) card  (see Parametric data storage cards)
Data  entry error messages, DE:A3-1
Data  files
   agency/station file (ASF), FS:3-3
   area file  (AREAFLE), FS:3-5
   data base  file, FS:3-7
   error file, FS:3-7
   further computational file (FCF), FS:3-6
   hits file,  FS:3-6
   illustration, FS:3-1
   index files, FS:3-2
   latitude and longitude  file  (LATF),  FS:3-2
   mask library file  (MASK), FS:3-5
   master station file (MSF), FS:3-4
   MOD  files,  FS:3-6
   relative station pointer file  (RSPF),  FS:3-5
   river mile  index file  (RMIF),  FS:3-4
   state and  county file  (STCOF), FS:3-3
   transient  files, FS:3-6
                              WQ-IND
                                5

-------
Data selection keywords
   listing of, RET:4-47
Data value significance, WQ:J-1
   (see also Significance indicators)
Date checking, DE:4-3,4-24
Date groupings
   BG keyword, RET:4-61
   DG keyword, RET:6-25
   EG keyword, RET:4-61
   VD keyword, RET:6-35
Decimal input storage procedure
   (see Storage procedures, types ?02 and ?03)
Decimal point placement
   for MEAN program, RET:6-43
   for NOPAR program, RET:7-162
   for RET program, RET:6-15
Default values, RET:1-4
Deleting
   parametric data (see Parametric data)
   station location information, DE:3-31,3-35
DELM keyword, RET:7-22
Depth
   changing sample, DE:4-39
   changing station, DE:3-35 \
   retrieving by, RET:4-67,4-69
   storing of station, DE:3-8,3-19
   storing sample, DE:4-8,4-11,4-18,4-26
Descriptive paragraph cards
   changing information in, DE:3-30
   deleting information in, DE:3-32
   description of fields in, DE:3-15
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
DG keyword, RET:6-25,7-271
DIP storage (see Storage procedures, types ?02 and ?03)
DIPMS program, FS:3-9;
Dissolved oxygen saturation calculation
   with ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
   with MEAN program, RET:6-47
   with MSP program, RET:7-15
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
DISTRIBUTE program, FS:3-8
DM keyword, RET:6-43
DR keyword, RET:6-15
DSROC keyword, RET:4-73
EARLY keyword, RET:7-111
ED keyword, RET:4-57
EDITB program, FS:3-9
EG keyword, RET:4-61
Equating parameters, RET:5-9
Error file, FS:3-7
                             WQ-IND
                               6

-------
Error messages
   data entry, DE:A3-1
   MSP program, RET:A7-17
   NOPAR program, RET:A7-18
   REG program, RET:A7-9
   retrieval, RET:A7-1
ERROR program, FS:3-10
ET keyword, RET:4-59
Examples of
   data storage (see Parametric data)
   retrievals  (see individual keyword descriptions!
EXTRACT keyword, RET:4-41
FACT keyword, RET:6-57
FCF (Further Computational File)
   definition, RET:5-1,7-221, FS:3-6
   suppress creation of, RET:5-7
   types of records in, RET:7-224
   (see also MORE record formats)
Files (see Data files)
Fineness, of contour maps, RET:7-75
Fixed field storage procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?01)
Fixed form input procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?01)
FLEX keyword, RET:7-87
Free-form storage input (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
Further Computational File (see FCF)
GDIP program, FS:3-9
General retrieval keywords
   advanced, RET:5-1
   data selection, RET:4-47
   introduction to , RET:4-1
   listing of, RET:4-2
   print control, RET:4-81
   retrieval identification, RET:4-3
   station identification, RET:4-9
   summary of, table, RET:A2-1,A2-4
Glossary, WQ:A-1
Grab sample
   definition, FS:2-1
   retrieving, RET:4-73
   storing via ?01 procedure, DE:4-32
   storing via ?02 procedure, DE:4-10
   storing via ?03 procedure, DE:4-17
   storing via ?04 procedure, DE:4-27
GRAPHNO keyword, RET:7-99
                             WQ-IND
                               7

-------
Grouping
   data retrieved, RET:4-61
   data values on maps, RET:7-93
   retrieved stations, RET:4-79
   stations with MSP, RET:7-19
GROUPS keyword, RET:7-93
GROUPSB keyword, RET:7-93
GROUPSQ keyword, RET:7-93
HEAD keyword, RET:4-87
Header card
   0, DE:3-7
      (see also Latitude/longitude)
   1, DE:3-9
      (see also River mile index cards)
   2, DE:3-11
      (see also River mile index cards)
   3, DE:3-12
      (see also Major/minor basin card)
   4, DE:3-14
      (see also Location description card)
   5, DE:3-15
      (see also Descriptive paragraph  cards)
Help data sets
   index, DE:A1-1, RET:A1-1
Hits file, FS:3-6
   creating a, RET:5-3
   definition, RET:5-1
HV keyword
   with MEAN program, RET:6-23
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
   with STAND program, RET:6-79
Hydrologic index  (see River mileages)
INCR keyword, RET:7-63
INDEX program
   description of, RET:6-87
   sample output, RET:3-10,6-88
Inputting data (see Storage procedures)
Instruction
   definition, FS:5-1, RET:l-2,2-2
Intensive surveys, WQ:G-1
   retrieving data, WQ:G-3
   storing data, WQ:G-2
INVENT,  INV120 programs
   description of, RET:6-5
   keywords  special to, RET:6-3
   sample output, RET:3-3,6-6,6-10
IS keyword,  WQ:G-5
                             WQ-IND
                                8

-------
Keyword
   definition, FS:5-1, RET:l-2
Keyword summary
   alphabetical descriptions, RET:A3-1
   by retrieval program, table, RET:6-2,A2-1
   data selection, RET:4-47
   INVENT, INV120 programs, RET:6-3
   LOG program, RET:6-63,7-171
   MEAN program, RET:6-19,7-267
   MSP program, RET:7-3
   NOPAR program, RET:7-145
   PLOT program, RET:6-53
   REG program, RET:7-113
   RET program, RET:6-11,7-219
   STAND program, RET:6-75
   station identification, RET:4-9
L keyword, RET:4-17
LABEL keyword, RET:7-67
LATE keyword, RET:7-111
Latitude and longitude
   changing, DE:3-24,3-35
   deleting, DE:3-32
   description of card fields, DE:3-7
   file (LATF), FS:3-2
   indicating precision of, DE:3-8
   MSP contour maps, RET:7-89
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
   retrieval by, RET:4-17
   storing, DE:3-7,3-18
LAT1, LAT2 keywords, RET:7-89
LD keyword, RET:4-67
LEFT keyword, RET:7-33
Legends (see Titling)
LH1, LH2 keywords
   with MEAN program, RET:6-45
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
LINEAR keyword, RET:7-55
Linear regressions
   REG program, RET:7-115
Linear transformation of values, RET:6-85
LINMIL keyword, RET:7-59
LINSTA keyword, RET:7-59
LL1, LL2 keywords
   with MEAN program, RET:6-45
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
LOAD keyword
   with MEAN program, RET:6-39
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
                             WQ-IND
                                9

-------
Loadings
   with MEAN program, RET:6-39
   with MSP program, RET:7-15
LOG program
   auxiliary file keywords, RET:7-174,7-195
   composition keywords, RET:187
   creating an auxfile, RET:7-201
   description of, RET:6-65,7-173
   keywords special to, RET:6-63,7-171
   overlay keywords, RET:7-174,7-181
   sample output, RET:3-8,6-66,7-174,7-212
   station labeling keyword, RET:7-175
   station screening keyword, RET:7-173,7-175
   tag station locations, RET:6-73
Location description card
   changing information in, DE:3-29,3-35
   description of fields in, DE:3-14
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
Locked data
   freeing of, RET:4-77
   storing, DE:3-2
LOG keyword
   with MEAN program, RET:6-41
   with MSP program, RET:7-55
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
Logarithms (see LOG keyword)
LONG1, LONG2 keywords, RET:7-89
Low limits, high limits (see LV, HV keywords)
Low value, high value  (see LL1, LH1 keywords)
LT=I keyword, RET:4-17
LT=NORET keyword, RET:7-179
LV keyword
   with MEAN program, RET:6-23
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
   with STAND program, RET:6-79
M+nS keyword, RET:7-35
Major river basin codes, WQ:D-1
   changing, DE:3-28
   storing, DE:3-12,3-18
Major/minor basin card
   description of fields in, DE:3-12
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
Manual station list (see NOPAR program)
Maps
   LOG program, RET:6-65,7-173
   MSP program, RET:7-7
Mask
   library file (MASK), FS:3-5
   retrieving by, RET:4-33,4-41
MASK keyword, RET:4-33
                             WQ-IND
                               10

-------
Master station file (MSF), FS:3-4
MAX keyword, RET:7-35
MEAN keyword, RET:7-15
MEAN program
   acceptable ranges of values, RET:6-45
   aggregating data, RET:6-25
   assign date groupings, RET:6-25,6-35
   description of, RET:6-21,7-269
   DO saturation calculation, RET:6-47
   exclude values from calculations, RET:6-23
   keywords special to, RET:6-19,7-267
   loadings, RET:6-39
   output on tape or disk, RET:7-269
   sample output, RET:3-6,6-22
   sorting data with, RET:6-27
   statistical functions, RET:6-37
   un-ionized ammonia calculation, RET:6-49
MEAN=n keyword, RET:7-35
Message to plotter operator, RET:7-189
Mileage-linear plots, RET:7-7,7-59
MIN keyword, RET:7-35
Minor river basin codes, WQ:D-1
MOD file, FS:3-6
MODEL keyword, RET:7-39
Monitoring process, the, DE:1-1, FS:2-1
MORE keyword, RET:7-223
MORE record formats
   MORE=SAS, RET:7-243
   MORE=1, RET:7-262
   MORE=2, RET:7-255
   MORE=3, RET:7-249
   MORE=4, RET:7-235
   MORE=5, RET:7-227
MSP program
   area-shaded mapping keywords, RET:7-91
   contour mapping keywords, RET:7-73
   data specification keywords, RET:7-29
   description of, RET:7-7
   general mapping keywords, RET:7-65
   grouping stations, RET:7-19
   keywords special to, RET:7-3
   loadings, RET:7-15
   plotting symbols, RET:7-36,7-79,7-99
   plotting with, RET:7-7
   point-plotted mapping keywords, RET:7-91
   program control keywords, RET:7-11
   required keywords, RET:7-9,7-13,7-32
   sample output, RET:3-13
   save output of, RET:7-27
   scale control keywords, RET:7-51
   specifying river mileages, RET:7-21
   statistical functions, RET:7-35,7-71
   suppress printing of station listing, RET-.7-49
                             WQ-IND
                               11

-------
MSP program (continued)
   trend maps, RET:7-107
   x-axis keywords, RET:7-59,7-61,7-63
   y-axis keywords, RET:7-33,7-39,7-55,7-57
MSPARMS keyword, RET:7-13
Mud samples (see Bottom samples)
MUL keyword, RET:7-35
Multiple station dip input, DE:4-15
Network, monitoring, establishing a, DE:1-1
NMIN keyword, RET:7-69
NOBOX keyword, RET:7-177
NOCONN keyword, RET:7-47
NOCOUN keyword, RET:6-69
NOLIST keyword, RET:7-49
NOPAR control cards
   description of, RET:7-155
NOPAR program
   automatic station list, RET:7-147
   control cards, RET:7-145,7-155
   description of, RET:7-147.
   keywords special to, RET:7-145
   manual station list, RET:7-147
   required keywords, RET:7-153
   sample output, RET:3-15
   selected station and frequency file, RET:7-150,7-159
   station mask file, RET:7-151,7-159
   station retrieval file, RET:7-151,7-159
NOPARCDS keyword, RET:7-153
NOPAREND keyword, RET:7-153
NOPLOT keyword, RET:6-61
NOPOLAUX keyword, RET:7-199
NOPOLPLT keyword, RET:6-71
NORET keyword, RET:5-7
NOSELECT keyword, RET:5-5
NOSTATE keyword, RET:7-183
NOTRMK keyword, RET:7-45
NOTU keyword, RET:4-39
NOVERLAY keyword, RET:7-183
NUMLITE keyword, RET:7-81
ONEORG keyword, RET:7-213
ONLYU keyword, RET:4-39
OT file
   format of records in, RET:7-271
   output of MEAN program, RET:7-269
OUT keyword, RET:7-271
Overlays  (see LOG program)
                             WQ-IND
                                12

-------
P card (see Parametric data storage cards)
P keyword, RET:4-49
P=n keyword, RET:7-143
Parameter code keyword, RET:4-49
Parameter codes
   converting values of, RET:4-53
   edit check values, WQ:B-3
   equating, RET:5-9
   listing by group, WQ:B-1
   most popular, WQ:B-3
   obtain listings of, WQ:B-2
   requesting a new one, WQ:B-3
   retrieving by, RET:4-49
   weather related, WQ:B-16
Parametric data
   changing already stored, DE:4-39
   changing via ?01 procedure, DE:4-42
   changing via ?04 procedure, DE:4-40
   definition, FS:2-2
   deleting, DE:4-44
   deleting all, DE:4-46
   deleting entire samples  (?01), DE:4-50
   deleting entire samples  (?04), DE:4-48
   deleting selected values (?01), DE:4-54
   deleting selected values (?04), DE:4-52
   deleting station location and, DE:4-45
   example of changing  (?01), DE:4-43
   example of changing  (?04), DE:4-41
   example of deleting all, DE:4-47
   example of deleting entire samples  (?01), DE:4-51
   example of deleting entire samples  (?04), DE:4-49
   example of deleting selected values (?01), DE:4-55
   example of deleting selected values (?04), DE:4-53
   example of deleting station location and, DE:4-45
   example of storing  (?01), DE:4-38
   example of storing  (?02), DE:4-13
   example of storing  (?03), DE:4-21
   example of storing  (?04), DE:4-30
   exclude from calculations, RET:6-23
   initial storing of, DE:4-7
   retrieving, RET:4-49
   retrieving by conditions of, RET:7-43
   retrieving by range of  value, RET:4-55
   retrieving by sample date, RET:4-57,4-61
   retrieving by sample time, RET:4-59
   retrieving significance  indicators, WQ-.J-6
   storing significance indicators, WQ:J-2
   storing via  ?01 procedure, DE:4-31
   storing via  ?02 procedure, DE:4-7
   storing via  ?03 procedure, DE:4-15
   storing via  ?04 procedure, DE:4-23
   types  of,  FS:2-3
                             WQ-IND
                                13

-------
Parametric data record
   uniqueness of, DE:4-1, FS:2-4
Parametric data storage cards
   AC card (?04), DE:4-24
   continuation card (?04), DE:4-29
   continuation D card (?02), DE:4-12
   continuation D card (?03), DE:4-20
   continuation P card (?02), DE:4-9
   continuation P card (?03), DE:4-16
   data (D) card (?02), DE:4-10
   data (D) card (?03), DE:4-17
   parameter (P) card  (?02), DE:4-8
   parameter (P) card  (?03), DE:4-16
   parametric data card  (6 card) (?01), DE:4-32
   SC card (?04), DE:4-25
PARF keyword, RET:4-53
PARONLY keyword, RET:4-51
PARU keyword, RET:4-53
Percentile (%TILEnT) keyword, RET:7-35
PGM keyword,  RET:4-5
PHV keyword,  RET:4-55
Pi keyword, RET:7-43
PLOT keyword
   with MSP program, RET:7-31
   with REG program, RET:7-135
PLOT program
   description of, RET:6-55
   DO saturation calculation, RET:6-55
   keywords special to, RET:6-53
   sample output, RET:3-7,6-56
   scale of plot, RET:6-59
   size of plot, RET:6-57
   un-ionized ammonia  calculation, RET:6-55
PLOTMSG keyword, RET:7-189
Plotting symbols
   %TILEnT keyword, RET:7-36
   area-shaded maps,'"RET: 7-99
   AUXSYM keyword, RET:7-197,7-205
   CALCOMP plotting symbols, table, RET:7-101
   contour maps, RET:7-79
   GRAPHNO keyword, RET:7-99
   MAX, MIN,  MUL keywords, RET:7-36
   MEAN, M+nS keywords, RET:7-36
   PLOT program, RET:6-57
   point-plotted maps, RET:7-99
   POINTS keyword, RET:7-79
   REG program, RET:7-119
   trend maps,  RET:7-107,7-112
   with LOG program, RET:7-197
   with MSP program, RET:7-36,7-79,7-99
PLV keyword,  RET:4-55
PM keyword, RET:5-9
Point-plotted maps, RET:7-91
POINTS keyword, RET:7-79
                             WQ-IND
                               14

-------
Polygon retrievals, RET:4-17
   MSP contour maps, RET:7-87,7-89
POST keyword, RET:7-77
Precision codes, DE:3-8
Primary station code
   storing, DE:3-5
   retrieving, RET:4-13
Print control keywords
   discussion of, RET:4-82
   listing of, RET:4-81
Priority pollutants, RET:4-41
PRMI keyword, RET:4-89
PRT keyword, RET:4-83
PRV keyword, RET:4-55
PSA keyword, RET:6-7,6-81
PSI keyword, RET:6-81
PSO keyword, RET:6-81
PUNCH program
   description of, RET:6-91
   sample output, RET:3-12,6-92
PURP keyword, RET:4-7
   required retrieval keyword, RET:2-5
   typical values, RET:A4-1
PVS keyword, RET:6-81
QPREC card
   storing significance indicators, WQ:J-1
QUALITY keyword, RET:7-141
QUALMAP keyword, RET:7-25
R keyword, RET:4-63
RANGCHK program, FS:3-10
Raw data
   plotting of, RET:7-77
   retrievals, RET:6-13,6-17
REG program
   description of, RET:7-115
   keywords special to, RET:7-113
   plotting symbols, RET:7-119
   quality standard line, RET:7-141
   regression analyses, RET:7-115
   required keywords, RET:7-113,7-133,7-135
   sample output, RET:3-14,7-122,7-126,7-129
REGPARMS keyword, RET:7-133
Regression analyses
   REG program, RET:7-115
Relative station pointer file (RSPF), FS:3-5
Relative station position, FS:3-2
                             WQ-IND
                               15

-------
Remark codes
   EPA, RET:4-63
   retrieving by, RET:4-63,7-45
   table, DE:4-37
   USGS, RET:A6-1
   USGS and MSP, RET:7-45
Required keywords
   by retrieval program, table, RET:A2-1
   with MSP program, RET:7-9,7-13
   with NOPAR program, RET:7-153
   with REG program, RET:7-113,7-133,7-135
RES keyword, RET:7-75
Restrictors, RET:4-11
   (see also Station restriction keywords)
RET program
   description of, RET:6-13,7-221
   keywords special to, RET:6-11,7-219
   MORE= capability, RET:7-223
   retrieving data stored with significance  indicators, WQ:J-6
   sample output, RET:3-4,6-14, WQ:J-7
Retrieval error messages, RET:A7-1
Retrieval identification keywords
   listing of, RET:4-3
Retrieval keywords
   advanced general, RET:5-1
   examples of use  (see  individual keyword descriptions)
   general, RET:4-1
   program-specific  (see individual program)
   (see also General retrieval keywords)
Retrieval output
   print layout diagram, RET:4-82
   station header information, RET:2-9
Retrieval programs
   advanced, list of, RET:7-1
   ALLPARM, RET:6-17
   basic, list of, RET:6-1
   INDEX, RET:6-87
   INVENT,  INV120, RET:6-3
   LOG  (advanced functions), RET:7-171
   LOG  (basic functions), RET:6-63
   MEAN  (advanced functions),  RET:7-267
   MEAN  (basic functions), RET:6-19
   MSP, RET:7-3
   NOPAR, RET:7-145
   PLOT, RET:6-53
   PUNCH, RET:6-91
   REG, RET:7-113
   RET  (advanced functions), RET:7-219
   RET  (basic functions), RET:6-11
   RETRIV,  FS:3-11
   SCAN, FS:3-11
   STA, RET:6-89
                              WQ-IND
                                16

-------
Retrieval programs (continued)
   STAND, RET:6-75
   summary of, RET:2-4
   types of, FS:5-3
Retrieval request
   flow through STORET, FS:5-5,5-6
   how to build a, RET:2-2
   steps in building a, FS:5-2, RET:2-3
   structure of a, FS:5-1
RETRIV program, FS:3-11
RIGHT keyword, RET:7-33
River basin codes, WQ:D-1
River mile index
   definition, DE:2-1, FS:2-3
   (see also River mileages)
River mile index cards
   format of fields in, DE:3-9,3-ll
   indicating levels in, DE:3-10,3-11
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
River mile index file  (RMIF), FS:3-4
River mileages
   changing, DE:3-26,3-35
   deleting, DE:3-32
   printing, RET:4-89
   retrieving by, RET:4-21
   specifying, RET:7-21
   storing, DE:3-9,3-11,3-18
RMI card (see River mile index cards)
RMI keyword, RET:4-21
RMK keyword, RET:7-45
S card, DE:A2-1
   (see also Station card)
S keyword, RET:4-13
Sample depth
   retrieving by, RET:4-67
   specifying units of, RET:4-69
   storing, 4-3,4-8,4-11,4-18,4-26,4-32
SAMSCL keyword, RET:7-57
SAMSTA keyword, RET:7-19
SAS statistical package, RET:7-243
   MORE=, RET:7-223,7-243
SAVE keyword, RET:7-27
SAVEOUT keyword, RET:7-27
SC card
   description of fields in, DE:4-25
SC keyword, RET:6-59
Scale control
   with LOG program, RET:6-67
   with MSP program, RET:7-51
                             WQ-IND
                                17

-------
SCALE keyword
   with LOG program, RET:6-67,7-193
   with MSP program, RET:7-53
SCAN program, FS:3-11
Secondary station code, DE:3-5
   changing, DE-.3-23
SEG keyword, RET:7-41
SELECT keyword, RET:5-3
Selected station and frequency file (see NOPAR program)
Selectors, RET:4-11
   (see also Station selection keywords)
Sewage treatment plants
   sampling sites, WQ:E-1
SF keyword, RET:6-37
Shade maps, RET:7-7,7-91
   examples of, RET:7-96
Significance indicators, WQ:J-1
   changing, WQ:J-4
   deleting, WQ:J-5
   retrieving, WQ:J-6
   storing, WQ:J-2
SHIFT keyword, RET:4-85
Single station DIP input, DE:4-7
SKPLESS keyword, RET:7-83
SOMSP file format, RET:7-27
SORT keyword, RET:6-27
SP keyword, RET:6-9
ST keyword, RET:4-35
STA program
   description of, RET:6-89
   sample output, RET:3-11,6-90
STAND program
   compare values with limits, RET:6-79
   description of, RET:6-77
   keywords special to, RET:6-75
   linear transformations, RET:6-85
   sample output, RET:3-9,6-78
   specifying output format of, RET:6-81
START keyword, RET:7-61
STAT keyword, RET:7-71
State and county file (STCOF), FS:3-3
State codes
   listing of, WQ:C-1
   retrieving by, RET:4-27,4-35,4-37
   storing, DE:3-6,3-18
Station
   definition, FS:2-1
   deleting from STORET, DE:3-31
   identifying within a retrieval request, FS:5-7
   plot locations of, RET:6-65
   retrieving by, RET:4-13
   retrieving by masks of, RET:4-33,4-41
   ways to identify, DE:2-1
                             WQ-IND
                               18

-------
Station card
   description of fields in, DE:3-5
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
Station codes
   changing, DE:3-23
   retrieving by, RET:4-13,6-89
   storing,  DE:3-5
Station header information
   description of, RET:2-9
   shifting of, RET:4-85
Station identification keywords
   description of, RET:4-10
   listing of, RET:4-9
Station linear plots, RET:7-7,7-59
Station location information
   changing, DE:3-20
   coding examples, DE:3-33
   definition, FS:2-2
   deleting, DE:3-31
   initial storing of, DE:3-17
   types of, FS:2-2
Station location storage cards
   agency (A) card, DE:3-2
   descriptive paragraph (5) cards, DE:3-15
   formats of, DE:3-1
   latitude/longitude  (0) card, DE:3-7
   location description  (4) card, DE:3-14
   major/minor basin  (3) card, DE:3-12
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
   river mile index  (1 and 2) cards, DE:3-9
   station  (S) card, DE:3-5
   station type  (T) card, DE:3-4
   types Of, DE:2-4, FS:4-2
Station mask file  (see NOPAR program)
Station restriction keywords
   advanced restrictors, RET:5-3,5-5,5-7
   listing of, RET:4-9
   selection logic employed, FS:5-7, RET:4-11
Station retrieval file  (see NOPAR program)
Station selection keywords
   listing of, RET:4-9
   selection logic employed, FS:5-7, RET:4-11
Station selection strategies, RET-.4-11, 4-12
Station type card
   description of fields in, DE:3-4
   record layout form, DE:A2-1
Station type codes, WQ:F-1
   changing, DE:3-22
   storing, DE:3-4,3-18
   retrieving by, RET:4-41
Statistical functions, RET:6-37,7-7,7-35,7-71
                             WQ-IND
                               19

-------
Statistics
   plotting of, RET:7-7,7-35
   REG program, RET:7-117
   using SAS and MORE=, RET:7-243
STC keyword, RET:4-27
STCNTY keyword, RET:4-37
STOPMSP keyword, RET:7-13
STOPREC keyword, RET:7-215
STOPREG keyword, RET:7-133
Storage procedures
   decimal input, DE:4-4,4-5,4-7,4-15, FS:4-3
   fixed field, DE:4-4,4-31, FS:4-2
   significance indicators, WQ:J-2
   type ?01, DE:4-4,4-31, FS:4-2
   type ?02, DE:4-4,4-7, FS:4-3
   type ?03, DE:4-5,4-15, FS:4-3
   type ?04, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
   types of, DE:4-4, FS:4-2
   use by function, figure, FS:4-3
   variable field, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
   WQGSTOR, DE:4-5,4-23, FS:4-4
Storage programs
   DIPMS, FS-.3-9
   DISTRIBUTE, FS:3-8
   EDITB, FS:3-9
   ERROR, FS:3-10
   GDIP, FS:3-9
   list Of, FS:3-8
   RANGCHK, FS:3-10
   UPDATE, FS:3-10
   WQGSTOR, FS:3-10
Storage request
   flow of a,  figure,  FS:4-5
   processing  of a, DE:4-5, FS:4-4
   structure of a, FS:4-1
STORET help data sets  (see Help data  sets)
Storing a new  station, DE:3-17
   example, DE:3-33
Storing parametric data  (see Parametric data)
Stream loadings  (see Loadings)
STREAMS keyword, RET:6-73
STRTREC keyword, RET:7-215
Suppress plotting of
   box around  plot, RET:7-177
   contour map data, RET:7-77,7-93
   county boundaries,  RET:6-69
   data outside of polygon, RET:7-87
   data with trend maps, RET:7-105
   miscoded stations,  RET:7-179
   polygon outline, RET:6-71
   specified parameters, RET:6-61
   state, county boundaries, RET:7-183
   stations on mileage-linear  plots,  RET:7-22
                             WQ-IND
                                20

-------
Suppress plotting of (continued)
   thin contour lines,  RET:7-83
Suppress printing of
   individual station summaries, RET:6-9
   MEAN-generated calculations, RET:7-271
   MSP-generated computations, RET:7-27
   NOPAR raw data listing, RET:7-161
   raw data values,  RET:4-83
   station header information, RET:4-83
   station input listing, RET:7-49
SYM keyword, RET:6-57
SYMANG keyword, RET:7-103
SYMSIZE keyword, RET:7-103
Syntax rules for retrievals, RET:1-2
T card, DE:A2-1
   (see also Station type card)
TAGS keyword, RET:6-73
Temperature conversions
   ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
   MEAN program, RET:6-21
Terminal major/minor basin, DE:3-9
Terminology used in Handbook, DE:2-3,4-2
TIME keyword, RET:7-137
Titling
   LOG AUXFILE plots, RET:7-197
   LOG, MSP plots, RET:7-5,7-191
   MSP maps, RET:7-65
   retrievals, RET:4-87
TLAT keyword, RET:7-191
TLONG keyword, RET:7-191
TPLOT keyword, RET:7-107
Trend maps, RET:7-107
   example of, RET:7-109
TRNDNLY keyword, RET:7-105
TS keyword, RET:6-85
U keyword, RET:4-39
UD keyword, RET:4-67
UK keyword, RET:4-77
Un-ionized ammonia calculation
   with ALLPARM program, RET:6-17
   with MEAN program, RET:6-49
   with MSP program, RET:7-15
   with PLOT program, RET:6-55
UPDATE program, FS:3-10
                             WQ-IND
                                21

-------
Variable date groupings, RET:6-35
Variable format input procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
VD keyword, RET:6-35
WQF processing programs, FS:3-8
WQGSTOR program, FS:3-10
WQGSTOR storage procedure (see Storage procedures, type ?04)
XMAX keyword, RET:7-139
YMAX keyword, RET:7-139
ZOOM keyword, RET:7-89
0 card, DE:3-7
1 card, DE:3-9
2 card, DE:3-11
208 areas
   retrieving by, RET:4-31
3 card, DE:3-12
4 card, DE:3-14
5 card, DE:3-15
6 card, DE:4-32
7 card, RET:4-21
8 card, RET:4-22
9 card, RET:4-23
                             WQ-IND
                               22

-------
        STORET USER HANDBOOK
                PART
                 FK
           FISH KILL FILE
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
       WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460

-------
            STORET USER HANDBOOK
                    PART
                     FK
               FISH KILL FILE
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes
how to retrieve data from the Fish Kill File, the
STORET data file which contains information on
pollution-caused fish kills which have occurred
within the United States.
    U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter

 FK-1

 FK-2

 FK-3
Appendix

   A
      Subject

INTRODUCTION

REPORTING FISH KILL DATA

RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
3.1  The FKF Retrieval Procedure
3.2  The FKF Control Statements
3.3  Retrieval Examples


      Subject

POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND
SEVERITY CODES
Page

 1-1

 2-1

 3-1
 3-1
 3-2
 3-8


 Page


 A-l
                               FK

-------
STORE! USER HANDBOOK
        PART
         FK
   FISH KILL FILE
       CHAPTER
        FK-1
    INTRODUCTION
          FK

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              FK-1
                          INTRODUCTION
The STORET Fish Kill File contains information on pollution-
caused fish kills that have occurred within the United States as
a result of a variety of industrial, municipal, agricultural, and
transportation-related operations.  The fish kills are identified
by the body of water in which they occurred, by the identified
source of the pollution which caused the kill, by the duration
and severity of the kill, and by the estimated quantity and type
of fish killed.

Information on pollution-caused fish kills has been collected
since 1960 through the combined voluntary efforts of private
individuals; state fish and game, health, and conservation
officers; and water pollution control officials at the state and
Federal levels.  All fish kill reports are reviewed and evaluated
by the Environmental Protection Agency in Washington, D.C.  Once
entered into the Fish Kill File, this information is used to
compile an annual fish kill report, which is published and
disseminated to the general public by EPA.

Data within the Fish Kill File are also used to provide input to
various water pollution control programs, including comprehensive
river basin planning and water quality monitoring and
surveillance.  The data provide a measure of the effects of water
pollution, as well as a means of identifying specific waterways
subject to either one-time or recurrent pollution problems.

The following two chapters describe, respectively, how fish kill
data are reported, and how fish kill data can be retrieved.
                               FK
                               1-1

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
          PART
           FK
     FISH KILL FILE
         CHAPTER
          FK-2
REPORTING FISH KILL DATA
           FK

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              FK-2
                    REPORTING FISH KILL DATA
A fish kill is usually first noticed by a fisherman, camper, or
sportsman, who as an interested and concerned private citizen,
reports the kill to a warden or other state official.  In most
instances, the state agency sends trained investigators to
identify the cause and size of the kill.  These specialists may
request the help of Environmental Protection Agency field
personnel to assist in on-site investigations, or to make
laboratory analyses of dead fish tissue samples.  When water
pollution is determined or suspected to be the cause, the state
agency submits a report of the kill to EPA, using the EPA Form
#7500 shown in Figure 2-1.

Supplies of the fish kill report form are available at various
state agencies, such as game and fish departments or commissions,
water pollution control boards, or departments of conservation,
natural resources, or environmental protection.  Complete
instructions on completing these forms are available at the
locations which have the forms.  Completed reports are sent
directly to EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C.  Personnel from
EPA review these forms, and enter the reported fish kill data
into the STORET Fish Kill File.  Fish kill data can then be
retrieved by EPA regional offices and state agencies utilizing
the retrieval procedures described in Chapter 3.
                               FK
                               2-1

-------
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF WATER PLANNING AND STANDARDS
WASHINGTON. D.C. 20460
REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED
FISH KILL
IA. LOCATION (Stream, Lake, Ocean, etc; Latitude-LongltudeJ
B. NEAREST TOWN AND COUNTY

C. STATE

Form Approved OMB No. /58-R0036
FOROWP USE ONLY


2. DATE OF KILL
3. TYPE OF WATER
[7J FRESH [~| SALT [JJ ESTUARY
4. POLLUTION SOURCE-TYPE OF OPERATION.
A. AGRICULTURAL OPER-
ATIONS
Q POISONS (Pesticides, etc;
| | FERTILIZERS
[~~] MANURE DRAINAGE, ENSI-
	 LAGE LIQUORS. OR FEED
LOT OPERATIONS
r~\ HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT
AND CONTAINERS
B. INDUSTRIAL OPERATIONS
|~1 MINING
| 1 CHEMICALS
1 1 FOOD AND KIN-
— ORED PRODUCTS
Q] TEXTILES
Q OTHER:
D. TRANSPORTATION OPERATIONS
Q RAIL Q TRUCK Q BARGE OR
n PIPE- n AIR BOAT
	 LINE
("71 METALS
| | PETROLEUM
1 t PAPER AND ALLIED
	 PRODUCTS
Q7J RUBBER AND PLASTICS
C. MUNICIPAL OPERA-
TIONS
| ] SEWERAGE SYSTEM
| | REFUSE DISPOSAL
[7J WATER SYSTEM
p j SWIMMING POOL
Q POWER (Public Service)
Q PEST CONTROL
E. CONSTRUCTION OR OTHER
[7J CONSTRUCTION
Q OTHER:
F.
Q UNKNOWN
G. SPECIFIC POLLUTANT OR FACTOR CHANGING WATER CHARACTERISTICS
(Name ol chemical, thermal discharge, etc.)
5. TYPE OF FISH KILL 6. EST. NO. KIL
GAME %
NON-GAME % 8. EXTENT OF A
,00 % A. M,L|LOF
COMMERCIAL %
-ED 7. SEVERITY
Q] TOTAL Q] HEAVY Q] MOD. | | LIGHT
REA AFFECTED 9. DURATION OF CRITICAL EFFECT
B. ACRES OF A. DAYS B. HOURS
LAKE
10. ADDITIONAL REMARKS (Include effects on other than marine lilt, e.g., shell/lsh, waterfowl, ale)
11. REPORTING OFFICIAL 12. AGEI
JCY MAILING ADDRESS 13. DATE OF
REPORT

INSTRUCTIONS: Upon completion fold card to show proper address and staple or tape long
           edge together.
                      FIGURE 2-1

     REPORT OF POLLUTION-CAUSED FISH  KILL
                           FK
                           2-2

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
          PART
           FK
     FISH KILL FILE
         CHAPTER
          FK-3
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
           FK

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              FK-3
                    RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA
STORET users may retrieve data from the Fish Kill File (FKF)
utilizing a retrieval procedure provided by STORET User
Assistance personnel.  Retrieval requests may be submitted via
either a keyboard type terminal or a remote job entry (RJE)
terminal, with output returned to the terminal or routed to a
high speed printer at the computer center for subsequent delivery
to the user.  The following paragraphs describe this retrieval
process in more detail.

3.1  THE FKF RETRIEVAL PROCEDURE

The STORET help data set named FKRETRV contains the job control
language (JCL) statements needed to submit any retrieval request
to the Fish Kill File.  A listing of this data set as of the time
of publication of this document is shown in Figure 3-1.  The JCL
statements of this data set are subject to change from time to
time; consequently, users should always utilize this data set
(which will always contain the current, correct version), as
opposed to using a previously saved copy of the data set.

To build an FKF retrieval, users need to specify the appropriate
control statements required in two places of the data set (lines
400 and 900 of the version shown in Figure 3-1).  First,
following the //RETRV.CARDF DD * JCL statement can be one or more
fish kill control statements, which have a 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 coded
in column one.  The uses and formats of these control statements
are described in detail in section 3.2.  Second, following the
//LIST.CDF DD * JCL statement, the user may specify an
alphanumeric expression which will appear as the title of the
output generated by the retrieval.

The Terminal Procedures chapter (WQ-TERM) in Part WQ describes in
detail how to submit retrieval requests using a terminal, and how
to retrieve output generated by the requests.

All of these changes to the data set can be performed easily and
quickly via the editing facility offered by the WCC computer
services vendor.
                               FK
                               3-1

-------
  100    // EXEC.FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER',
  200    //  VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
  300    //RETRV.CARDF DD *              ';.
  400    USER-SUPPLIED INPUT
  500    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
  600    SORT FIELDS=(2,?,CH,A)
  700    /*
  800    //LIST.CDF DD *
  900    USER-SUPPLIED TITLING INFORMATION
  1000   /*
                            FIGURE  3-1

              THE STORET HELP DATA  SET  NAMED FKRETRV


3.2  THE FKF  CONTROL STATEMENTS

In building FKF retrievals, users  may  select from five  FKF
control statements or cards, which retrieve fish kill data
according to  the following retrieval  criteria:


          Control Statement     Retrieves By

                   2             State,  Major/Minor Basin Codes
                   3             State,  City Codes
                   4             State  Codes
                   5             Major/Minor Basin Codes
                   6             Period-Of-Record, Pollution Cause
                                      Codes, State Codes

The formats of these FKF control statements are detailed on the
following pages.
                                 FK
                                 3-2

-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 2  (2 CARD)
 123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x12345678"x
 2STMAMI
column 1
columns 2-3
columns 4-5
columns 6-7
Card Type Code

The number '2', signifying that  fish  kill
data are to be retrieved according  to the
state and major/minor basin codes specified.
This code is required.

State Code (ST)

One of the two-digit numerical Federal
Information Processing Standards (FTPS)
state codes indicating the desired  state or
state equivalent for which fish  kill  data
are to be retrieved.  These codes are listed
in Appendix C to the WQF Part.   If  this
field is left blank, fish kill data on all
states will be retrieved, unless a  major
basin code is specified.  A leading zero
must be specified.

Major Basin Code (MA)

One of the two-digit numerical major  river
basin codes (as defined by EPA and  as listed
in Appendix D to the WQF Part) for  which
fish kill data are  to be retrieved.  If  this
field is left blank, fish kill data will be
retrieved according to the state code
specified, if any.  A leading zero  must  be
specified.

Minor Basin Code (MI)

One of the two-digit numerical minor  river
basin codes (as defined by EPA and  as listed
in Appendix D to the WQF Part) for  which
fish kill data are  to be retrieved.  This
field can be specified only  if the  major
basin code field is specified.   If  this
field is left blank, fish kill data will  be
retrieved for all minor basins within the
major basin specified.  A leading zero must
be specified.
                                FK
                                3-3

-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT  3  (3  CARD)
123456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789x123456789x123456789X
3STCITY#STCITy#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY|STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#STCITY#
column 1
columns  2-3,
 9-10, 16-17,
23-24, 30-31,
37-38, 44-45,
51-52, 58-59,
65-66, 72-73
columns  4-8,
11-15, 18-22,
25-29, 32-36,
39-43, 46-50,
53-57, 60-64,
67-71, 74-78
Card Type Code

The number  '3', signifying  that fish kill
data are to be retrieved  according to the
state and city codes  specified.   This code
is required.

State Code  (ST)

From one to eleven of the two-digit numerical
Federal Information Processing Standards
(FIPS) state codes indicating the desired
state or states for which fish kill data are
to be retrieved.  These codes are listed
in Appendix C to  the  WQF  Part.  If no state
code is specified, fish kill  data on all
states will be retrieved, and printed in
state alphabetic  order.   Leading zeros must
be specified.  If multiple  state codes are
specified,  they must  be specified in
ascending state code  order.

City Code (CITY#)

From one to eleven of the five-digit numerical
city codes  indicating the desired city or
cities for  which  fish kill  data are to be
retrieved.  A copy of the City Master Directory
containing  the thousands  of  codes
established for U.S.   cities  is maintained
at EPA Headquarters in Washington, D.C.   A
city code must be specified  for each state
code specified.   Leading  zeros must be
specified.  A city code can  be specified
only if a corresponding state code is
specified in the  immediately  preceding two
columns.  Multiple city codes for each state
code must be specified in ascending city
code order  within state code.
                                FK
                                3-4

-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 4 (4 CARD)
column 1             Card Type Code

                     The number '4', indicating that fish kill data
                     are to be retrieved according to the state
                     code(s) specified.  This code is required.

columns  2-3,        State Code (ST)
  4-5,   6-7,
  8-9, 10-11,        From one to 39 two-digit numerical Federal
12-13, 14-15,        Information Processing Standards (FIPS)
                     state codes indicating the desired state or
                     states for which fish kill data are to be
                     retrieved.  These codes are listed in
68-69, 70-71,        Appendix C to the WQF Part.  If no state
72-73, 74-75,        code is specified, fish kill data on all
76-77, 78-79         states will be retrieved, printed in
                     alphabetic order by state.  Leading zeros
                     must be specified.  If multiple state codes
                     are specified, they must be specified in
                     ascending state code order.
                               FK
                               3-5

-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 5  (5 -CARD)
 123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789x123456789xl23456789xl23456789xl23456789x
 5 MAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMIMAMI
column 1
columns  2-3,
  6-7, 10-11,
14-15, 18-19,
54-55, 58-59,
62-63, 66-67,
70-71, 74-75
columns  4-5,
  8-9, 12-13,
16-17, 20-21,
56-57, 60-61,
64-65, 68-69,
72-73, 76-77
Card Type Code

The number '5', indicating  that  fish  kill
data are to be retrieved according  to the
major or major/minor basin  codes specified.
This code is required.

Major Basin Code  (MA)

From one to nineteen two-digit numerical
major river basin codes  (as defined by
EPA and as listed in Appendix D  to  the
WQF Part) for which fish kill data  are
to be retrieved.  If multiple major
basin codes are specified,  they  must
be specified in ascending major  basin
code sequence.  Leading  zeros must  be
specified.  If no major  basin code  is
specified, fish kill data from all  major
basins will be retrieved, and printed in
ascending major basin  code  order.

Minor Basin Code  (MI)

From one to nineteen two-digit numerical
minor river basin codes  (as defined by EPA
and as listed  in Appendix D to the  WQF Part)
for which fish kill data are to  be  retrieved,
If no minor basin code is specified for a
specified major basin  code, fish kill data
will be retrieved for  all minor  river basins
within the major  river basin.  A minor basin
code can be specified  only  if a
corresponding major basin code  is specified
in the immediately preceding two columns.
If multiple minor basin  codes are specified
for a single major basin code  (i.e.,  a major
basin code is  repeated), they must  be
specified in ascending minor basin  code
sequence.  Leading zeros must be specified.
                                FK
                                3-6

-------
THE FKF CONTROL STATEMENT 6 (6 CARD)
6BY EY
PCPCPCPCPCPCPCPCPCPC
STSTSTSTSTSTSTSTSTST
column 1
columns 2-3
columns 5-6
columns 12-31
columns 37-56
            Card Type Code

            The number  '6', indicating that fish kill
            data are to be retrieved according to the
            years, pollution cause codes, and/or state
            codes specified.  This code  is required.

            Beginning Year (BY)

            The last two digits of the beginning year for
            which fish kill data are to  be retrieved.
            Data will be retrieved beginning with
            January 1 of the specified year.  This  field
            must be coded.  Note that column 4 is blank.

            Ending Year (EY)

            The last two digits of the ending year  for
            which fish kill data are to  be retrieved.
            Data will be retrieved through December  31  of
            the specified year.  This field must be  coded,

            Pollution Cause Codes  (PC)

            A string of up to ten  two-digit numerical
            pollution cause codes  for which fish kill
            data are to be retrieved.  The codes may be
            specified in any order.  The string must
            begin in column 12 and must  not contain  any
            embedded blanks.  If no pollution cause
            codes are specified, all fish kill data  will
            be retrieved regardless of pollution cause.
            A list of pollution cause codes is provided
            as an appendix to this part.

            State Codes (ST)

            A string of up to ten  two-digit numerical
            state codes for which  fish kill data are to
            be retrieved.  The string must begin in
            column,37, with no embedded  blanks.  If  no
            state codes are specified, fish kill data
            will be retrieved for  all states.  Leading
            zeros must be specified.  A  listing of  state
            codes is provided in Appendix C, WQF Part.
                                FK
                                3-7

-------
3.3  RETRIEVAL EXAMPLES

The following retrieval examples illustrate the use of several of
the FKF control cards with the STORET help data set named
FKRETRV.   In each example, the listing of the.FKRETRV data set is
followed by a page of the output produced by the retrieval.

Although much of the information contained within the retrieval
output should be self-explanatory,  some may not be to those
unfamiliar with fish kill data.  Cause codes and severity codes
are explained in the appendix to this part.  Values listed under
the Area Affected column are expressed in miles (M) or acres (A);
and the duration of the kill is expressed in days (DA) or hours
(HR) .

Included in each FKF retrieval output are 1) a listing of the
pollution cause codes (which appears on a separate page at the
beginning of the report), 2) a summary count of the number of
kills reported (which appears on a single line at the end of the
report, and 3) a summary of all kills reported which consisted of
more than 100,000 fish (which appears at the end of the report).
                               FK
                               3-8

-------
EXAMPLE  1

Retrieve all  available  fish kill data  for the State  of  Ohio (FTPS
code  39).
A copy  of  the modified  FKRETRV data  set  used to retrieve this
data  is shown below.  The following three pages show  several pages
of the  output generated by this retrieval.
   lOu    // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
   200    //  VOL=OSKAM1,PRIMT=A
   300    //RETRV.CARDF DD *
   400    439
   bOO    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
   bOO     SORT  FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
   700    /*
   BOO    //LIST.CDF DD *
   900    RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 4 CARD
   1000   /*
                                  FK
                                  3-9

-------
HAJCR KILLS — 100,000 OE CVES
LAKE OR STREAK
*** *
LICKING RIVER
SANDUSKY RIVER
U EH HURON RIVER
GREATER KIAfll RI
PORTAGE RIVER
NUSKINGUn RIVER
KOPP CR
BEND FK CR
GREAT BIABI R
BASSIE CR
RAtAB CR
ELANCHARD R1VEB
LAKE EBIE
GRAND R
LAKE ERIE
LAKE ERIE
BAUB EE R
TEN BILE CR
BAUBEE RIVER
SCIOTO B
GREAT BIABI R
GREAT BIABI RIVE
CRANE CBEEK
CBANBEBBY CR
BLANCHABD R
SASDUSKY RIVER
SANDUSKY R
GB BIABI R
LITTLE CREEK
HDL BR PORTAGE R
I SALT CREEK
NcAl. Ob IN

LICKING CO
SANDUSKY CO
HURCN CO
BUTLER CO
OTTAWA CO
BUSK1NGU.1 CO
AUGLA12E CO
II £L SO NT CO
BUTLEH CO
JSEENE CO
HANCOCK CU
HANCOCK CO
LAKE CO
LAKE CO
LAKE CO
LAKi. CO
LUCAS CO
LUCAS CO
BAIUON CO
BONTGOBEHY CC
HEW BIABI
OTTAWA CO
PUT BAB CO
PUT NAB CU
SANDUSKY CO
SANDUSKY CO
SHELBY CO
UNION
WOOD COUNTY
ZANESVILLE 0
STATc

OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
0.1 10
OHIO
OHIC
OHIC
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
OHIO
OHIO
OHIO
OHIC
YEAR

1 9 b 7 ,
'96b
196d
1 *bb
1 Jt>u
1 9b6
1 900
1975
1972
197b
197?
'97a
1 965
' 1977
1972
1972
197o
1971
197J
19b5
197U
1971
1964
1965
1972
197B
1965
197U
1977
1962
1969
1960
N LI a D E I-. OF
f ISH

J Ou ,
1«4,
250,
195,
319,
1 j 7 t
'ob.
1 12,
U5.
l,07d,
J 1 7

2,SHO]
1,2«5,
bib.
376,
27b,
261,
12,
05,
36,
2B ,
33,
300,
179,

7b3
5o5
U2b
130
092
Obb
-j tb
oOt,
OH7
750
39U
37k
559
099
UoO
000
651
U18
322
07b
9bO
968
390
1 19
522
246
171
d03
061
389
>.PtoATlCJ

HETALJ
FC.Lt
?ETBOLi.Ua
CHEB1CALS
CTi:EEi IS[;UblIilAL
PAPER phODUCTJ
UhKNOWN
JEiiaAJi. SYSTEM
t-EFUsi. UIS?CJAL
TBUCK 1 hAN SPORT A'iiUN
KCCD PnOUOCTS
SiittiA.IE SYS1E.1
PC.EK
CnEniCA I.S
POI.ER
PC'.ES
PETBCLtUn
SE.EBAUE SYSIEB
SEWERAGE SYSTEB
SEWERAui: SYSTEB
CCBBINATION
FOOD PRODUCTS
CTHEB OPERATIONS
FCOD PRODUCTS
SEWERAGE SYSIEB
SEWEhAJE SYSTEB
SEWERAJt SYSTtfl
UNKNOWN
PIPELINE TRANSPORTATION
BINING
                   FIGURE  3-2a

              OUTPUT FROM  EXAMPLE 1
                       FK
                      3-10

-------
RETRIEVING PISH KILL DATS VIA THE u CAEO
BIVEB OR LAKE
OHIO
GB MIABI R
LT BEAB CR
IB JOHN HOLE CR
WOLF CBEEK
GREATER BIABI BI
SPUING DITCH
BIAHI BIVEB
niANI GIVES
HOLES CREEK
GBEATEB HIABI BI
BUSKISGUI1 RIVEB
ALLEN BUN
BUSKINGUB R
TR-BIG OLIVE Cl
HUSKINGUB a
KCFOS1NG RIVER
WHETSTONE CR
INDIGO CB
TB-N BB KOKOSING
TBIB W BRANCH
KCKOSING RIVEB
THORN GUN
WHETSTCNE CREEK
BIG RUN CHEEK
nUSKINGUFI BIVE6
LICKING RIVER
CHAPS RUN
BUSKINGU.l I!
THCBESON BUN
flAHTLETT RUN
WAKATOBIKA CR
WASATOBIKA CB
EACCOON CREEK
GREAT BIABI RIVE
BABREL 3UN
1 FK L BIAfll RIV
PANTHER CREEK
EUFPALO CR
1 BR CUCK CR
E FK DUCK CR
U FK DUCK CR
DUCK CREEK
TR-N FK BUFFALO
HUI-ON FIVER
NCEWALK CHtEK
CBJNE CREEK
PORTAGE HIVER
CITY OR TOWN

BCNTGOBERY CO
BONTGOBEBY CO
RCNTGOBtlflY CO
SCNTGOBEBY CO
BCNTGOBERY CO
BCNTGOfliiBY CO
BCNTGOrtEBY CO
BCNTGOBEBJ CO
BCNTGOBERY CO
BONTGOBEBY CO
flOEGAN COUNTY
BORGAN CO
BORGAN CO
nORGAN CO
BOEGAN CO
BORROW CO
BORROW CO
BOEBCW CO
BORROW CO
BORROW CO
SORROW COUNTY
BT GILIAD
BT G1LEAD
BU SKIN GUM CO
BUSKINGUB CO
BUSK1NGUB CO
BUSKINGUn CO
nusKiNGUn co
KUSKINGUH CO
BUSK1NGUB CO
flU SKIN GUM CO
BUSKlNliUa CO
NEkARK
NEW BIAB1
NEH flILFOHD
NKti VIENNA
NEWTOUN
NOELE CO
NOELE CO
NOBLE CO
NOPLE CO
NOBLE COUNTY
NOHU CO
NOR WALK
NORWALK 0
OTTAWA CO
OTTAWA COUNTY
HM

12
8
8
3
9
7
7
E
6
7
10
11
10
4
10
12
7
2
5
10
b
U
9
7
9
9
3
8
7
10
a
Q
6
7
5
9
9
9
10
9
8
9
y
9
6
9
4
A1
C.E

29
ie
1 1
18
23
19
26
20
15
31
13
04
27
23
oe
i 1
oe
22
23
01
1 1
01
04
13
13
02
25
20
23
oe
OK
12
14
13
1«
0!
29
1C
01
28
23
OS
26
13
20
1C
; 1
YY

78
78
69
69
67
67
65
65
67
67
69
71
71
77
73
65
78
75
77
71
69
62
63
65
65
69
71
71
71
73
74
76
63
t>4
62
62
6 1
73
73
71
71
65
78
61
60
65
b9
CAUSE 	 TYPE 	
CODE *GABE tNON-GABE

12 -
50 -
31
90 -
90 -
31 -
31
J5 -
90 -
90 -
26 -
25 -
90 -
25 -
90 -
13 -
13 -
11'-
90 -
90 -
13 -
90 -
31 c-0> SOi
50 -
21 -
90 -
28
90 -
21 -
28 -
31 -
31 -
24 5* 951
27 U 99S
28 5> 95»
28 1 J » bj%
•to - y n \
21
21 -
21 -
21 -
31
25 -
28 3 » 9o»
50 30» 70»
22 -
26 -
-OB.1EECIAL tSTIBAThD
'1SH LOSS (*| FISH KILLED

13
6,687
60
U
30,213
20
1,420
11,250
30
3
8.000
1,295
1,000
215
11
',2ob
0,775
18
90
3
2, 33
0
2,52
37
1, JU
US
-
1)5.1=09
Ib, 741
300
25
20
150
7,odn,')bO
eoo
juV 13,bb9
2» 260
40
2,235
-U,b78
2^4
b94
4 , ^ != 2
!\ AJ.JOO

^7S,-,b8
Ub
SEVERITY AREA D 8
l| (21 (3] (4) AFFECTED A S

4 _ -
-
_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_
_
-
4 _ _
- - -
..
,4 _ -
-
-
-
•4 t-.l
J -
_
-
-
-
-
-

- -
-
-. .."
I*
3 j.r -
3 j"
j
-
-
-
_
-
-
- "
- "
-

                              FIGURE  3-2b

                         OUTPUT FROM  EXAMPLE 1
                                  FK
                                 3-11

-------
     	 NUflBER Of FISH KILL REPORTS	1968-1967*
       STATES         JAN   MB   BAR  APR   HAY  JU»   JUL   AUG   SEP   OCT   »OV   DEC  TC1AL

   OHIO                   29   28    29   U2   123  169   211   215   220   119   55    20  1300

   *••• TOTALS              29   28    29   U2   123  109   211   215   220   119   55    20  1300

   •DATA FSOfl JUNE THRU DECEN8EH, I960 HAS BEEN EICLUDED.










TABLi  9—FISH KILL GBOUPING BY SIZE — 1S67

  NUHBER  OF FISH                 TOTAL           BEPOBTED         FISH KILLED
KILLED BY  SIZE GBCUP             BEPOBTS      NC . OF  BEPOB1S     NO.  OF FISH

     1  -   1,000                     78E             788               171,811
  1,000 -  10,000                     270             270               942,601
 10,000 -  100,000                    129             129             4,118,100
100,000 -  1,000,000                   2S               29             6,976,899
       >=1,000,000                      5                5            15,673,255
     UKKNOWN                          79               18                15,012

**TOTAL                             1,300           1,239            27,897,678
                                 FIGURE 3-2c

                          OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 1
                                     FK
                                    3-12

-------
EXAMPLE  2

Retrieve all  fish kill data  for the State  of  Ohio that occurred
from  1974  through 1976.

The FKRETRV data sets below  illustrate the use of the 6  card to
retrieve fish kill data  by date of kill.   A page of the  output
generated  by  this retrieval  appears on the next page. Note  that
the kills  are listed alphabetically by county.
   lUU    // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NwQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
   200    //  VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
   3UO    //RETRV.CARDF UD *
   4UU    b74 7b                           3y
   5UU    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
   bUO     SOKT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
   70U    /*
   600    //LIST.CDF DU *
   9UU    RETRIEVING FISH KILL .DATA VIA THE 6 CARD
   1UOO   /*
                                 FK
                                3-13

-------
RETRIEVING F ISH K 1
R 1 Vf R OR L AKE
OHIO
LT THREE-PILE CR
FLAT ROCK CR
S1I PILE CR
1R-RA1TLESMKE C
OTTAWA R
RILE1 CR
SI> PILE CR
1RIB L RILEV CR
BLACK CR
•SKTABULA R
PILL CR
PCCOLGAL PR
MJCKING R
FOLR MILE CR
KOPP CR
PIAPI ERIE CAKAl
PIAP1 ERIE CANAL
AUGLAUE R
•UGLAIZE R
TRIB WHEEL IKG CR
CAP1INA CR
BEND FORK CR
BEND FK CR
STERLING RLN
FOUR PILE CR
GREAT (MAPI R
GREAT PKPI R
GREAT P1AHI R
GREAT PKPI R
CICK! CR
GREAT PIAPI R
GREAT MIAMI R
GREAT PKPI R
TRIB PILL CK
UILLCU PL*
ANDERSON Ct
TREACLE CR
BUCK CR'
LT PIAPI R
BUCK CR
BUCK CR
PUO RUN
IT PKPI R
LI P1AHI R
LT H1AH1 R
PAD P
IR-LT HUM R
LL CAIA VIA THE 6
C 1 T 1 OR TOWN

AOAPS CO
WARREN CD
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CO
ALLEN CC
ASHIABULA CC
ASMABULA co
ASHIABULA CO
ATHENS CO
ATHENS CC
ATHENS CO
AUGLAI2E CO
ALCLMZE CO
AUGIAI2E CO
AUGLAI2E CO
AUGLAI2E CO
BELPONT CO
BELPONT CO
BELPON1 CO
BELPONT CO
BROUN CO
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CC
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CO
BUTLER CO
6LTLER CO
BLUER CC
BUTLER CO
BLTLER CC
BUTLER CO
CARROLL CO
CHAPPAlGN CO
CHAMPAIGN CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLASK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CLARK CO
CARC
1
PP

1
5
«
6
t
7
7
2
6
5
4
e
e
2
6
C
e
t
s
*
7
7
1]
9
S
1C
12
7
4
2
S
S
11
4
e
7
3
6
11
1C
6
t
<;
7
12
7


AT 1
00

06
07
05
22
25
ie
12
04
OS
IS
24
OS
07
11
23
21
31
II
2C
IS
2C
OS
IS
09
13
13
2P
22
21
22
1 3
1C
07
17
OS
17

2C
02
It
12
04
02
12
04
2S
1C

»1

76
76
76
76
76
74
74
75
74
75
76
76
75
74
75
75
75
75
76
75
75
74
74
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
75
75
74
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
7 *
75
75
76

CODE >GAPE 1KCN-GII-E

35 -
12
26 -
31
31
31
90 -
42
so-
il
31 -
11
21
50 -
90 -
90 -
90 -
31 -
90 -
42
21 - -
31 -
31
90 -
31
26
90 -
32
32
26 -
32
32 -
26
42 -
25
13
13
90
9C -
SO
90
90 -
25
25 -
12
31
13

CCI'f'tSClAL ESTIMATED 5
FISH 1055(11 MSt KHLfC 111

22
968
*75
11.9B2
M9
•34
745
3
2C1
4.176
160
• • 4,37?
2\
4.135
112.966
172
5,S««
3,7*3
2S|
33
239
15
10
in
^,746
e?9
9
1.C7P.C47
IP. 141
5
»38
S.t36
f»P
76
19
2PO
64.676
150
JOO
120
?CO
4?
1
51
3,345
fi.217
5.P43

2H3H4) AFFECTED A

.
,
_
.
_
.
-
4 - •
.
.
-
-
4
_
.
-
-
-
_
«
-
-
_
.
_
-
_
- - -
-
.
_
-
...
_
4
_
.
-
-
_
...
4
-
.
-
-
•

K

_
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
•
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
.-
*
-
-

     FIGURE 3-3

OUTPUT FROM EXAMPLE 2
         FK
        3-14

-------
EXAMPLE  3

Retrieve fish kill data  for the Kentucky  River minor  basin within
the Ohio River major basin.

The copy of  the FKRETRV  data set below  shows the use  of  the 5
card to  retrieve fish kill  data via river basins.  A  page of the
output generated by this retrieval is shown on the next  page.
   100    // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CM.EPANSH.NwQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER',
   200    //  VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
   300    //RETRV.CARDF DO *
   400    b0514
   500    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
   bOO     SORT FIELDS=(2,/,CH,A)
   700    /*
   bOO    //LIST.CDF DD *
   9UO    RETRIEVING FISH KILL  DATA VIA THE 5 CARD
   1000   /*
                                 FK
                                3-15

-------
RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA VIA THE 5 CAFD
BIVER UR LAKE
KENTUCKY
OLD FIELD BRANCH
YELLOU CB
YELLOW CR
IELLOU CR
nUDDI BR C LT XI
RANDCOCK CREEK
SEXTON CH
COLLINS FK
HEfiRIBGTOH LA
CASCNS CR
FABfl FOND
F HOODS FAGH PD
BEBRINGTON LA
OUENS BR
nUHCTS CR
UUBTS CR
BID FK KI R
FLACKEI CR
HID PR-KENTUCKY
JESSAniNE CB
TR-HABBONDS CR
TB-H FK ELKHORN
KI CERESEARCH PD
yilLGBEEN LA
SILVEB CBEEK
COLLINS FORK
HOBSE E GOOSE CR
BIG GOOSE CREEK
BED BIBD RIVEB
BOfSE CREEK
L/BIG GOOSE CR
BED BIBD BIVEB
SBITON CB
LT SEXTON CR
GOOSE CB
BULLSKIN CBEEK
LITTLE GOOSE CB
STEVENS CBEEK
SBOOTH CR
BED BIBD BIVEB
SEXTON CBEEK
SBITON CBEEK
B1IGIHG POBK CB
ST ASAPH CR
ST AS1PH CBEEK
LEATBEBWOOD CB
CITY OR TOliN
BEAR BRANCH
BELL
BELL
BELL
CABPBEU.SBUBG
CLABK COUNTY
CLAY t; OWSLEY C
CLAY
LANViLLE
FABLER
FBANKFOET
FRANKLIN CO
GARRABD
HAZARD
HYDEN
HICEN
HYDEN
HYDEN
HYDEN
JESS AH IKE CO
L1UHENCEBURG
LEXINGTON
LEXINGTON
HADISON
BADISON CO
BA8CHESTEB
flANCHESTEB
MANCHESTER
IUNCHESTEB
BANCUESTER
BANCHESTEB
BANCHESTEB
BANCdESTEB
BANCUESTEB
nAHCUESTEB
BABCHESTEB
IUBCHBSTEB KY
OVENTON
PBBIUUB
BOABK
SEXTON
SEXTON
STABDPOBD
STANFOBD
STANFOBD
SENTZ
DATE
fin CD YY
J
9
9
9
4
5
10
10
d
6
5
7
1
4
5
5
u
7
11
8
6
B
5
5
11
e
7
11
7
9
10
6
7
8
9
5
12
7
11
6
6
7
5
9
a
6
01
23
22
20
01
20
0«
03
08
10
20
02
3C
1J
26
07
oa
19
-
21
22
02
05
OS
17
12
29
02
21
16
11
03
Of
09
ie
30
1«
20
01
16
09
02
28
11
22
01
7U
72
72
72
78
70
72
72
7tf
75
78
7d
72
76
76
11
78
78
68
71
78
77
78
72
71
66
66
69
62
62
61
61
71
76
78
61
60
69
78
67
71
71
69
73
71
78
CAUSE
CODE
90
it
20
20
13
28
21
21
50
21
90
90
90
25
25 ,
90
02
21
21
26
27
26
11
90
31
21
21
21
50
21
21
28
21
90
90
21
21
22
21
90
21
21
01
31
11
21
	 TYPi 	 COHHEBCIAL
*GABE »»ON-GAnE FISH LOSS(t)
-
-
50J
-
-
-
U
-
50*
-
-
11
-
-
-
-
OOJ
-
2*
51
1001
-
-
101
10«
-
201
101
51
121
5*
3*
00»
-
151
75%
7*
-
5*
201
501
10«
-

-
-
501
-
-
-
99*
-
-
-
-
991
-
-
100*
100%
601
-
8«l
95*
-
-
-
90S
90S
-
201
801
101
70*
95*
97*
60*
-
20*
25*
93*
-
95*
80S
50*
90*
-
100*
-
-
-
_
-
-
-
-
50 %
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10*
-
-
-
-
-
_
-
60S
10*
85*
18*
_
-
-
-
65S
25S
23 S
-
-
-
25*
-
-

ESIlHATtD SEVEB1TY AREA U
USH KILLED (1)(2| |3)(4) AFFECTED A
2
15
10
25
1,bOO 1
• -
19,395
25
400 U
1
25 U
<*00 3
20
1.286 2
-
1
200 3
2.8U1I 3
1
<*
6,965 2
9,602 2
000 3
300
30,598 1
2
0,500 2
2
1
2,000 3
3
2
46,592 2
0,286 1
200 3
3
1
29,001 1
5,610 1
-
0
10,000 1
29,203 1
10,005 2
6,506 2
1,287 1
2n
15B
15H
1311
IB
2B
20n
1«
1A
6B
21
5A
-
IB
2B
2B
10B
2B
60
1B
2B
IB
31
-
28
3B
-
17B
1B
-
SB
2B
8B
IB
2B
IB
3(1
11B
6B
3B
IB
10B
15B
2B
1fl
IB
2
-
2
-
-
-
2
-
-
-
-
1
-
1
-
1
1
1
-
2
-
~
2
2
-
5
0
1
10
-
2
1
-
1
1
5
3
1
1
2
6
2
1

H
U
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
-
~
-
-
-
-
—
7
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
_
_
-
5

                              FIGURE 3-4

                        OUTPUT  FROM EXAMPLE 3
                                  FK
                                 3-16

-------
EXAMPLE 4

The  two FKRETRV data  sets below illustrate the  use of  the 2 and
cards  to retrieve fish  kill data by basin within state and by
city code within state.
  100    // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1
  200    //  VOL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
  300    //RETRV.CARDF DD *
  400    23905
  500    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
  bOO     SORT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
  700    /*
  000    //LIST.CDF  DD *
  900    RETRIEVING  FISH KILL DATA VIA THE  2 CARD
  1000   /*
   100    // EXEC FKSTORET,DSNME='CN.EPANSH.NWQS.CURRENT.FISHKILL.MASTER1,
   20U    //  VGL=OSRAM1,PRINT=A
   300    //RETRV.CARDF DD *
   400    339U2346
   500    //SORT.SYSIN DD *
   bOO     SORT FIELDS=(2,7,CH,A)
   7UO    /*
   bOO    //LIST.CDF DD *
   900    RETRIEVING FISH KILL DATA  VIA THE 3 CARD
   1000   /*
                                   FK
                                  3-17

-------
          STORET USER HANDBOOK
                  PART
                   FK
             FISH KILL FILE
                APPENDIX
                    A
POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND SEVERITY CODES
                   FK

-------
APPENDIX A:  POLLUTION SOURCE CODES AND SEVERITY CODES
The values printed in the Cause Code column of FKF .retrieval
output relate to the type of operation that produced the
pollution leading to the fish kill, as opposed to the specific
pollutant which is the agent or factor directly responsible for
the kill.  The codes for these types of pollution source
operations,  and their appropriate subcategories, follow:

      10  AGRICULTURAL OPERATIONS

          11  Poisons (pesticides)
          12  Fertilizers
          13  Manure Drainage, Ensilage Liquors, Feed Lot Drainage
          14  Handling of Equipment and Containers

      20  INDUSTRIAL OPERATIONS

          21  Mining
          22  Food and Kindred Products
          23  Paper and Allied Products
          24  Chemicals
          25  Petroleum
          26  Metals
          27  Combinations
          28  Other (e.g., sand and gravel washing, logging)

      30  MUNICIPAL OPERATIONS

          31  Sewerage Systems
          32  Refuse Disposal
          33  Water Systems
          34  Swimming Pools
          35  Power

      40  TRANSPORATION OPERATIONS

          41  Rail
          42  Truck
          43  Barge or Boat
          44  Pipelines

      50  CONSTRUCTION OR OTHER OPERATIONS

      90  UNKNOWN OPERATIONS
                               FK
                               A-l

-------
Severity codes range from one to four,  with one signifying a
complete kill, two a heavy kill, three a moderate kill, and four
a light kill.

          Severity Code         Severity of Kill

               1                complete
               2                heavy
               3                moderate
               4                light
                               FK
                               A-2

-------
                                                              m
       STORET USER HANDBOOK
                PART
                 EF
            EFFLUENT  DATA
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
       WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460

-------
            STORET USER HANDBOOK
                    PART
                     EF
                EFFLUENT DATA
This part of the STORET User Handbook describes the
storage and retrieval of point source effluent data,
    U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           WASHINGTON, D.C. 20460

-------
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter                     Subject

 EF-1            INTRODUCTION

 EF-2            STORING EFFLUENT DATA
                 2.1  Agency Codes
                 2.2  Station Codes
                 2.3  Storing Effluent Stations
                 2.4  Storing Effluent Data

 EF-3            RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA                  3-1
                 3.1  Retrieving Effluent Data Via the
                      STORET Retrieval Programs            3-1
                 3.2  Retrieving Effluent Data Via a
                      STORET Command Procedure             3-4
                               EF

-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
        PART
         EF
    EFFLUENT DATA
       CHAPTER
        EF-1
    INTRODUCTION
         EF

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              EF-1
                          INTRODUCTION
The STORET station type codes (see Appendix F, Part WQ) provide
the STORET user with a range of categories that can be assigned
stations when storing water related data.  These codes provide
the capability of selectively restricting a retrieval to the type
of data required.  One of these station type codes, PIPE, is for
effluent data, either municipal or industrial, and for either
partially treated, treated, or raw effluent.  This level 1
station type code and the other level 2, 3, and 4 station type
codes are completely adequate when monitoring is conducted at the
pipe level or within a plant to determine the make-up of the
discharge.  (The codes were not sufficient when monitoring was
conducted in order to determine compliance with a permit issued
to the facility.  In this case, the user of the system must know
the permit conditions established by the permit.  The STORET
system was not designed to store permit conditions.)

The STORET Water Quality File (WQF) was modified in order for
users to store and retrieve both permit conditions (loads and
concentrations) and actual values for the monitoring of effluent
data.  These modifications allow the user to utilize the full
capabilities of the WQF when storing and retrieving effluent
data, as well as the additional capabilities documented in this
Part.

It is suggested that self-monitoring data and compliance
monitoring data be separated within the STORET system.  In order
to accomplish this, we suggest that two agency codes be assigned
to the user, one for use with self-monitoring data only, the
other for exclusive use with compliance monitoring data.

The remaining two chapters within this Part describe how to store
and retrieve effluent data into and from STORET.
                               EF
                               1-1

-------
STORET USER HANDBOOK
        PART
         EF
    EFFLUENT DATA
       CHAPTER
        EF-2
STORING EFFLUENT DATA
         EF

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              EF-2
                      STORING EFFLUENT DATA
This chapter describes the procedures and methods available to
store effluent stations and effluent parametric data into the
WQF.

2.1  AGENCY CODES

All effluent data stored within the WQF must be stored under an
agency code assigned by EPA specifically for the storage of
effluent data.  Effluent data are not to be stored under agency
codes used for the storage and retrieval of water quality data.
Contact STORET User Assistance for further information on the
assignment of effluent data agency codes.

2.2  STATION CODES

Stations stored using effluent data agency codes must use valid
NPDES (National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System) numbers
as primary station numbers.  Each station will have the capacity
to store data for up to 999 discharges.  Storage procedures for
new stations for these special effluent data agency codes are the
same as for regular water quality stations except that the prime
station number must be a nine character valid NPDES number.  This
nine character number consists of a two character alpha Federal
Information Processing Standards  (FIPS) state code abbreviation,
followed by a six digit, unstructured sequence number, followed
by a one character check digit.  There is a pre-edit check on the
check digit.  Secondary station numbers may be used to facilitate
retrieval of the parametric data, but may not be used to store
parametric data because of the internal structuring that would
preclude identification of the pipe number.

To store facilities that have not had an NPDES number assigned to
them, the primary station number must begin with the letters  'EF'
followed by a seven digit number.  There will be no pre-edit
check on the one character check digit.  When the facilities
designated by the  'EF1 convention receive NPDES numbers, STORET
User Assistance will transfer all the data from a station stored
with the above  'EF' convention to a newly stored station with the
NPDES number as the primary station number.  The old station will
then be deleted.  The user will be responsible for storing the
new station before the transfer of data takes place.
                               EF
                               2-1

-------
2.3  STORING EFFLUENT STATIONS

The storage of effluent stations utilizes the same standard
coding procedures used to store water quality stations, as
described in the Data Entry chapter of the WQF part of this
Handbook.  Also, the same nine station location storage cards are
used to store effluent station data.  Except for the agency (A)
card, the station (S) card, the major/minor basin (3) card, and
the location description (4) card, the formats of these cards are
identical to the formats used to store water quality data, as
described in detail in the Data Entry chapter referenced above.

Descriptions of the fields of the station location storage cards
are given below.  An asterisk (*) beside a field in the A, S, 3,
and 4 cards indicates coding which is used only for the storage
of effluent stations.  Note that the 3 and 4 cards contain the
facility address, receiving stream, and facility name in the
fields usually reserved for the major basin name, minor basin
name, and location name.  Note also that the words 'RECVG STRM'
are required to begin the field usually reserved for the major
basin name.

Only one state code, one county code, one latitude/longitude, one
RMI, and one station type code will be allowed per facility,
regardless of the number of discharges (pipes).  Special
parameters have been set up to store 1972 SIC codes at the
discharge level.  Parameters 74100, 74101, 74102 and 74103 will
be used to store codes for SICs 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
Parameter 74100 is the primary SIC code.

An effluent station must be stored prior to storing data at the
station.  A station and its data may not be stored either in the
same job or in the same update cycle performed weekly by STORET
personnel.  (Each weekend, STORET personnel run an update program
which updates the WQF data base by processing all data submitted
during the week to delete, add, or change data in the WQF.)

The following station location storage cards (and fields within
those cards) are mandatory or optional as shown below when
storing a new effluent station into the WQF.

Required Cards                  Optional Cards

A  Agency Card                  1  RMI Card
T  Station Type Card            2  RMI Card
S  Station Card                 5  Descriptive Paragraph Card(s)
0  Lat/Long Card
3  Maj/Min Basin Card
4  Location Description Card
                               EF
                              2-2

-------
Required Fields - A Card
columns
 1-8
  16

17-24
74-77
78-79

  80
   field
   agency code
   effluent data
   code
   unlocking key
   lock after
   control  code

   card type code
remarks
must be a valid
effluent data
agency code
must be an N
9999 preferred
blank for station
and data storage
must be an A
It is strongly recommended that columns 25-61 be completed as
this information is often helpful to STORET User Assistance
personnel when attempting to assist a user with storage questions
or problems.
Required Fields - T Card
columns
 1-78
  80
   field
   station type code
   card type code
Required Fields - S Card
columns
 4-18
68-69
70-72
78-79

  80

Required Fields -
   field
   primary station
   code
   state code
   county code
   control code

   card type code

0 Card
columns
 7-13
14-21
  28
  29
30-32
  80
   field
   latitude
   longitude
   PC (precision code)
   D  (depth code)
   total depth
   card type code
remarks
must be a T
remarks
the 9-character
NPDES number, or
EF followed by a
7-digit number
must be NS for initial
station storage
must be an S
remarks
defaults to 4
defaults to F
defaults to 000
must be a zero
                               EF
                              2-3

-------
Required Fields - 3 Card

columns              field                 remarks
 4-27   *            station location      facility location
                     major basin name      address
28-67   *            station location      the words RECVG
                     minor basin name      STRM followed by
                                           the name of the
                                           receiving stream
68-69                major basin code
70-71                minor basin code
72-73                sub basin code
  80                 card type code        must be a 3

The state name which was previously required on the former 3 card
is no longer required, as the state name is now automatically
generated by the system.

Required Fields - 4 Card

columns              field                 remarks
 4-51   *            location of site      facility name
  80                 card type code        must be a 4
The RMI cards (1 and 2 cards) and the Descriptive Paragraph Card
(5 card) are optional cards with the storage of an effluent data
station, and have no fields which need to be specially coded for
effluent data.  Appendix 2 to the WQ-DE (Data Entry) chapter to
the WQF part contains a copy of EPA Form 7500-24, the STORET WQF
station location storage cards.  The above asterisked fields
denote fields which are coded differently for the storage of
effluent data.
                               EF
                              2-4

-------
2.4  STORING EFFLUENT DATA

There are two ways that effluent parametric data can be coded for
entry into the WQF.  These are the ?01 and ?04 storage
procedures, which are also used to store water quality data into
the WQF.  In both procedures, the agency and stations must be
identified.

The ?01 type of storage procedure (or fixed-form procedure)
employs a fixed-field or standard card format.  The cards used to
code this procedure are a 7START card, a ?01 card, a fixed-format
agency card, a station card, and one or more parametric data
cards.

The ?04 storage procedure (or WQGSTOR procedure) employs a
variable or free-form card format.  The cards used to code this
procedure are a 7START card, a ?04 card, an agency card (using
either a fixed-format or a variable format), and one or more SC
cards which identify the stations, dates, times, depths,
parameters and values.

2.4.1  USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE TO STORE EFFLUENT DATA

          Cards Used:

                     ?START
                     ?01
                     A Card
                     S Card
                     Parametric Data Card(s)  (6 Card)

          The fixed-form input procedure is used to code effluent
          parametric data via a standard input procedure
          utilizing a fixed-field card format.  The 6 card is
          used to code the values of effluent parameters sampled,
          and up to five parameter codes and associated values
          can be coded on a single card.  An agency card (A card)
          and a station card  (S card) precede these parametric
          data cards in a parametric data storage deck.

          The format of the parametric data card is as  follows:
                               EF
                               2-5

-------
The Parametric Data Card (6 Card)
columns 1-3
columns 4-6
columns 7-12
columns 13-16
column 17
column 18
Sort No.

This field may be used to assign a sequence
number to each of the parametric data cards.
Any alphanumeric value may be specified;
leading zeros must be provided.  This field
is optional.

Sample Depth

This field is used to store the depth at
which the sample was taken.  An F (for feet)
or an M (for meters) must be coded in column
62 of the preceding A card.  If sample depth
is not to be recorded this field may be left
blank.

Ending Date

The six-digit ending date of sample
collection is coded in year, month,  day
order.  All codes must be numeric, and
leading zeros must be coded.

Time

The time of sample collection is coded in
the military 24-hr time system format.  This
field is optional.

Type of Sample

Code either a C for permit conditions or V
for actual values.

Composite Value Type

The following composite value type codes are
permissible when storing effluent data:
                     I
                     J
                     K
                     M
                     P
                     Q
                     R
           -Average concentration
           -Minimum concentration
           -Maximum concentration
           -Average loading
           -Minimum loading
           -Maximum loading
           -number of exceptions (stored as
            an alphanumeric field - maximum
            of 5 characters)
                               EF
                              2-6

-------
columns 19-23
column 24
columns 31-35,
        43-47,
        55-59,
    and 67-71
columns 36-39,
        48-51,
        60-63,
    and 72-75
columns 40-41,
        52-53,
        64-65,
    and 76-77
                     W
           -Frequency of analysis (stored as
            an alphanumeric field - maximum
            of 5 characters)
           -Type of sample (see column 17)
Beginning Date

The five-digit beginning date of sample
collection is coded in year, month, day
order.  All codes must be numeric, and
leading zeros must be coded.  Only the last
digit of the year is used to code the year.

Composite Value Indicator

Code the letter C, which indicates that a
composite sample is being stored, and that
the previous field is not a parameter code.

Parameter Code

These fields are used to specify the five-
digit codes of the parameters being coded.
All codes must be numeric and leading zeros
must be coded.  A complete list of the
parameter codes defined within STORET is
referenced within Appendix B to the WQF
part.

Parameter Value

These fields are used to specify the values
associated with the parameter codes specified
in the immediately preceding 5 columns.  The
first non-zero digit of the parameter value
is to be placed in the left-most column of
the field, regardless of the magnitude of
the value.  (For instance, values of 0.006,
0.6 and 60 would all be coded as 6000.)

Exponent

The location of the decimal point in the
parameter value field is assumed to lie
just to the left of the first significant
digit and the exponent field is used to
denote its proper placement.  The numeric
values coded in this field place the decimal
point in its proper location, as follows:
                               EF
                              2-7

-------
columns 42,
        54,
        66,
    and 78
column 79
column 80
The left column of this field is used to
specify the direction of movement of the
decimal point.  A code of 0 (zero) indicates
that the decimal point is either correct in
its assumed position, or is to be moved to
the left; a code of 1 (one) indicates that
the decimal point is to be moved to the
right for correct decimal placement.

The right column of this field is used to
control the extent of movement of the
decimal point.  Any numeric code (0-9) is
valid.

The correct exponent code for the parameter
values of 0.006, 0.6, and 60 are,
respectively, 02, 00, and 12.

Rmks.  (Remarks)

These fields are used to assign a one-
character alphabetic remark code to further
define the parameter values.  The standard
STORET remark codes and their corresponding
definitions are given in Table 4-2 of the
Data Entry chapter, WQ  Part.  This field is
optional and may be left blank.

Bottom Depth

Code with the number 1 if depth indicated in
columns 4-6 is bottom depth.  Otherwise
leave blank.

Card Type Code

Code the number 6.
                               EF
                              2-8

-------
2.4.1.1  EXAMPLE OF USING THE ?01 PROCEDURE FOR STORING
         EFFLUENT DATA

          The following cards will store permit conditions for a
          previously stored station for parameters 560 and 74056.
          The samples are grab taken one/day.  This information
          is coded on data cards 1 and 2 (GR and 1/1
          respectively).  Data card 3 shows storage for minimum
          concentration(J coded in column 18) values of .5 and 50
          for parameters 560 and 74056 respectively.  Data cards
          4 and- 5 show storages of average and maximum
          concentrations.  The beginning and ending dates are
          identical (740101).
0 1
2
3 4 5
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234.
7START
AGENCYCD
EF1234567
740101
740101
740101
740101
740101

NSECRET

CW40101C
CT40101C
CJ40101C
CI40101C
CK40101C

-

00560GR 74056GR
005601/1 740561/1
00560500000 74056500012
00560700000 74056200013
00560100011 74056400013
012345
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234.
7 8
. .78901234567890

9999 A
0101 S
6
6
6
6
6
7 8
. .78901234567890
                                EF
                               2-9

-------
2.4.2  USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE FOR STORING EFFLUENT DATA

          Cards Used:

                     ?START
                     ?04
                     AC Card or an A Card
                     SC Card(s)

          The variable format input procedure utilizes an AC
          agency card or a standard A card and one or more SC
          storage cards.  These cards may be used to code the
          values of effluent parameters sampled under varying
          sampling methods and conditions, and up to 100
          parameter codes and associated values can be stored for
          any given sample.

          Data items appearing in and after column four of the AC
          and SC cards are coded in free form format, with commas
          - and no intervening blanks - separating the fields.  A
          comma must be coded after the last field on the card.

          The formats of the control cards used for WQGSTOR input
          via the ?04 storage procedure are as follows:
                               EF
                              2-10

-------
The Agency Card (AC Card), Free-form Format
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
field 5
field 6
Card Type Code

The letters AC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.

A=agency-code,

Agency-code is the one-to-eight alphanumeric
agency code followed by a comma.

UK=unlocking-key,

Unlocking-key is the one-to-eight
alphanumeric code assigned to the user
storing the data, which must be accurately
specified before any information can be
stored for the respective stations.  This
field must be followed by a comma.

USER=user-name,

User-name is a one-to-fifty-four
alphanumeric description of the user storing
the data, including his name, location,
agency, telephone number and any other
relevant information.  Embedded blanks are
permitted.  This field must be followed by a
comma.

Validity check (NDC)

This field is applicable only for changing
or deleting previously-stored data.  The
letters NDC may be coded to indicate that
the date fields are not to be checked for
validity.  This option is provided in order
to change or delete values whose dates are
invalid.  This option applies only to data
stored prior to date edit checking.
(Editing on the date field has existed since
1972.)  If a validity check is to be
performed, this field is not coded.  The
field must be followed by a comma.

NPDES,
                     This special keyword must be coded to
                     indicate the storage of effluent data.
                     keyword must be followed by a comma.
                                        The
                               EF
                              2-11

-------
The Storage Card (SC Card)

This card is used to code the remaining information to be coded
in a ?04 WQGSTOR storage procedure:  the station code, dates,
depths,  parameters and parameter values, and other pertinent
information.  All fields are separated by commas.  This card
follows either the AC agency card or the standard A card.

If more than one data card is required to record all data for a
given sample, the data may be coded on the card up to column 80.
Remaining data are then coded on a second card, and as many other
continuation cards, as required.  Up to 100 parameters and
associated values can be specified in one set of SC and
continuation cards.

The length and content of the fields on the SC card are variable,
and depend upon storage requirements, the manner in which
parameter values were recorded, and other such variables.  The
fields of the SC card must be arranged and coded in the following
sequence:
field 1
field 2
field 3
field 4
Card Type Code

The letters SC must be coded in columns 1
and 2, followed by a comma in column 3.
                  i

Station Code

The twelve-digit effluent station code which
consists of the nine-digit NPDES number for
the station followed by a three-digit
discharge ID number.  This code is followed
by a comma.

Beginning Date and Time

The date on which the sample was taken, or
in the case of a composite sample, the
beginning date the sample was collected.
The date must be in the format:

           yymmddtttt, where yy is the year,
           mm the month, dd the day, and
           tttt the time in hours and
           minutes.  Time is optional.  The
           field is followed by a comma.

Ending Date and Time

This field is coded only for composite data,
and is of the format yymmddtttt as described
above, followed by a comma.  The ending date
                               EF
                               2-12

-------
                     may be identical to the beginning date for
                     actual values,  but must be identical to the
                     beginning date for permit condition values.
                     Beginning and ending times, if used, must be
                     identical for permit conditions.
field 5              Depth
                     The depth at which the sample was taken,
                     expressed in the format
                                 M
                                 B
                                 MB
                                 V
                                 MV
XXX,  where M, B, V, MV, and MB
      are all optional, but only
      one may be specified, and
      where XXX is the depth.
                     The permissible values for depth are:

                     DXXX       depth value XXX is in feet
                     DMXXX      depth value XXX is in meters
                     DBXXX      XXX is bottom depth value in feet
                     DMBXXX     XXX is bottom depth value in meters
                     DVXXX      XXX is the depth, in feet, for a
                                vertically integrated sample
                     DMVXXX     XXX is the depth, in meters, for a
                                vertically integrated sample

                     The field must be followed by a comma.

field 6              Composite Value Type

                     The following composite value type codes are
                     permissible when storing effluent data:

                     I          -Average concentration
                     J          -Minimum concentration
                     K          -Maximum concentration
                     M          -Average loading
                     P          -Minimum loading
                     Q          -Maximum loading
                     R          -number of exceptions  (stored as
                                 an alphanumeric field -  maximum
                                 of 5 characters)
                     T          -Frequency of analysis (stored as
                                 an alphanumeric field -  maximum
                                 of 5 characters)
                     W          -Type of sample  (see field  8)

                     If coded, the field must be followed by a
                     comma.
                               EF
                               2-13

-------
field 7              Space/Time Composite
                     For the storage of effluent data, valid
                     values for this field are. C for permit
                     conditions and V for actual values.  If
                     omitted, this field defaults to V.

                     If coded, the field must be followed by a
                     comma.

field 8              Sample Type

                     For the storage of effluent data with a
                     composite value type of W (see field 6), the
                     valid sample type values are:

                     CT         samples were collected
                                continuously
                     GR         samples are individual grab
                                samples
                     WK         samples were collected weekly
                     .01-24      a composite sample collected
                                over the number of hours specified
                     CP         a composite sample

                     If coded, the field must be followed by a comma,

field 9              Parameter Code

                     This field is used to specify the parameter
                     code whose value is to be stored.  The field
                     is coded in the format

                                  PXXXXX   which stores the
                                           parameter XXXXX with
                                           the next field (data
                                           item) as its value.
                                           Leading zeros need
                                           not be coded.

                     As many pairs of this field and the next
                     field may be coded as required.  A comma
                     must follow each code specified.  A complete
                     list of the STORET parameter codes is
                     referenced within Appendix B to the WQF
                     Part.
                               EF
                              2-14

-------
field 10             Parameter Value
                     This field is used to specify the value to
                     be stored for the parameter code specified
                     in the preceding field.  If a remark code is
                     used, it must be the last character in the
                     value.  Remark codes are defined in Table
                     4-2 of the Data Entry chapter, WQ  Part.

                     Parameter values may be designated via
                     either fixed point or floating point
                     numerical notation.  The general expression
                     for the format of the data field is:

                                .XXXXXXXXXXX ESPP

                     where
                       1)  The designation  .XXXXXXXXXXX represents
                           a fixed point number or the mantissa of
                           a floating point number which may include
                           from one to eleven digits plus a decimal
                           point.  The decimal point may occur in
                           any position or be omitted.  When
                           floating point notation is used the
                           decimal point is assumed to be
                           immediately to the left of the first
                           numerical digit or the position
                           indicated.

                       2)  The blank constitutes an exponent
                           separator.  Its use is optional.

                       3)  The designation S indicates the sign of
                           the exponent.  It may be coded plus ( + ),
                           minus  (-), or left blank.  A plus code
                           will cause the decimal point to be
                           moved to the right, a minus code will
                           cause  it to be moved to the left, and
                           a blank will maintain the  indicated
                           position.  Use of the exponent sign (E)
                           is optional.  If a code is not provided
                           the exponent is assumed to be positive.
                              \
                       4)  The designation PP represents the value
                           of the exponent.  Two numerical digits
                           must be coded if floating point notation
                           is used.  This code controls the extent
                           of movement of the decimal point from
                           the indicated position.

                      (For  example, correct  codes for  the numbers
                      5,  7.5, 0.1, and 98,500 are 5, 7.5, 0.1 or
                               EF
                               2-15

-------
                     l.OE-01,  and 98500 or 9.85E04 or 9.85 E04 or
                     9.85E+04, respectively.)

                     As many pairs of this field and the
                     preceding field may be coded as required.  A
                     special code of NA (for not applicable) may
                     be specified for the storage of individual
                     values of parameters.

                     A comma must follow each value specified.

Continuation Card

          If all of the parameter values cannot be coded on a
          single SC Card, a continuation card may be used.  The
          last character coded on the SC card must be a comma, as
          a parameter value cannot be split and continued onto a
          continuation card.  The continuation card has no
          special fields or codes; coding of parameter values may
          begin in column one, and proceed as above.  The last
          character that must be coded on a continuation card is
          a comma.

Abbreviated SC Card

          When coding multiple SC cards within a single storage
          run for identical stations, dates, times, and depths
          (fields 2 through 5),-a '$' may be coded in their
          stead, which automatically assumes the codes of these
          fields as specified in the preceding fully-coded SC
          card.  The last SC card in the following example
          illustrates the use of this SC card coding shortcut.
                               EF
                              2-16

-------
2.4.2.1  EXAMPLE OF USING THE ?04 PROCEDURE FOR STORING EFFLUENT
         DATA
  012345           8
  1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...7890

  AC,A=EXAMPLE2,UK=TEST,NPDES,
  SC,NC0000001001,750201,750201,I,C,P310,50,P350,30,
  SC,NC0000001002,750201,750301,I,V,PC310,20,P350,30,
  SC,NC0000001002,750201,750301,W,C,P310,1/1,PD400,
  SC,$,W,C,P310,GR,
  012345           8
  1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345...7890
          The first line contains the variable format agency card
          where 'NPDES1, indicates that the cards following it
          are to be stored as effluent data.  (An A card, with an
          N coded in column 16, could be used instead of an AC
          card.)

          The second line contains the values for NPDES station
          NC0000001 which will be stored as pipe 001 with the
          beginning date of 750201.  The date is repeated so that
          the permit conditions will print before the actual
          values.  STORET software sorts by final date on
          sophisticated composite data.  The  'I1 indicates an
          average concentration, and the 'C'  indicates a permit
          condition.   'P310,50' indicates that the value for
          permit condition-average concentration for parameter
          310 is 50.   'P350,30' will store 30 as the permit
          condition-average concentration for parameter 350.

          The third line is an example of actual values for
          average concentration for the date  period between
          750201 and 750301 which  includes data beginning with
          750201, up to, but not including, the last date.  This
          was done to  conform with present NPDES convention.
          'PC310,20' indicates a change for the previously stored
          value for parameter 310  to a value  of 20.

          The fourth line shows that alphanumeric data  '1/1' may
          be stored and indicates  how an individual parameter may
          be deleted;  i.e., PD400  will delete the frequency of
                               EF
                               2-17

-------
analysis-permit condition for parameter 400 for samples
with a date range of 750201 through 750301.

The last line illustrates a coding shortcut for SC
cards.  This card assumes the station and dates coded
in line four.
                     EF
                    2-18

-------
  STORET USER HANDBOOK
          PART
           EF
      EFFLUENT DATA
         CHAPTER
          EF-3
RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA
           EF

-------
                             CHAPTER
                              EF-3
                    RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA
3.1  RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA VIA THE STORET RETRIEVAL PROGRAMS

All of the retrieval capabilities available to retrieve Water
Quality File data from STORET are also available to retrieve
effluent data from STORET.  In addition, the RET and ALLPARM
retrieval programs have been modified to print the following
information when retrieving effluent data:

        - the composite value type field with two
          letter codes

        - the discharge (pipe).number

        - special values such as NA

        - alphanumeric type data for number of
          exceptions and frequency of analysis, etc.

3.1.1  KEYWORDS SPECIAL TO RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA

          The following keywords apply only to retrieving
          effluent data from STORET; they do not apply to
          retrieving water quality data from STORET.

          The ANC keyword.  The ANC keyword may be set equal to
          any combination of valid effluent data composite value
          codes, as listed and described in the preceding
          chapter.  For example, 'ANC=IP,' will retrieve the
          average concentration and minimum loading values for
          the requested parameters.

          The LIMITS keyword.  This keyword, which has no value,
          causes the printing of 'conditions only1 values.
          (These are depicted on effluent data retrievals as
          CP(O.) An example of the output obtained with
          'LIMITS,' specified is shown below.

          The ACTUAL keyword.  This keyword, which also has no
          value, causes the printing of actual values.  (These
          are depicted on effluent data retrievals as CP(V).}

          The default print, if neither LIMITS nor ACTUAL is
          specified, consists of the conditions followed by the
          actual values, by pipe, for the facilities specified.
          An example of this default print is shown below.
                               EF
                              3-1

-------
3.1.2  EXAMPLES OF RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA USING THE RET PROGRAM
          Retrieve permit conditions
          stored for parameter 10
          (Water temperature),300
          (dissolved oxygen,  301
          (dissolved oxygen saturation)
          310 (BOD), and 400 (pH) for
          all pipes in station
          (facility) NC0003301.
PGM=RET,PURP=3 0 5B/STA,
A=EFNC,S=NC0003301,
P=10,P=300,P=301,P=310,
P=400,LIMITS,SHIFT,
STORE!' RETRIEVAL DATE 7*/lu/2u
NC00033ul Bl63oOOO 326500015 1761
36 U3 lu.U 07* 37 4U.U 5
WESTERN ELECTRIC CO
37061NC
GREENSBORO 03U003
RbCVG STRM - LITTLE ALAMANCE CR-GUIL WTP
EFNC 751230
uy»9 FEET DEPTH CLASS 00
00010 00300 00301
DATE TIME DEPTH WATER DO DO
FROM OF TEMP SATUR
TO DAY FEET CENT MG/L PERCENT
75/02/13 P101
CP(C)- LC
HC
' FA
ST
75/02/13
P102
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
P103
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
Plo4
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13














/TYPA/IND/NTRTMT/OUTFL/PIPE

00310
BOD
5 DAY
MG/L


20.0
1/7
CP



20.0
i/7
CP



20. U
1/7
CP



20.0
1/7
CP


00400
PH

SU

6.00
9.00
1/7
CP


6.00
9.00
i/7
CP


6.00
y.oo
1/7
CP


6.00
9.00
1/7
CP

                               EF
                              3-2

-------
Retrieve both actual values
and permit conditions for
parameters 10, 300, 301,
310, and 400 for all pipes
in facility NC0003301.
PGM=RET,PURP=305B/STA,
A=EFNC,S=NC0003301,
P=10,P=300,P=301,P=310,
P=400,SHIFT,
STOKE!' RETRIEVAL LATt 7a/lu/20
NCUUOJ301 BlbJdOUO
Jb U3 lU.u 079 37 40. U b
WESTER ELECTRIC CO
37ubluC
32bbOOOlb 17bl











GREENSBORO U3UDU3
HECVG STRM - LITTLE ALAMANCE
EFNC 75123U
0*99 FEET DEPTH CLASS OU
OUU10
DATE TIME DEPTH WATER .
FROM OF TEMP
TO UAY FEET CENT
78/01/01 PU14
CP(V)- HC 33. U
7o/01/01
75/02/13 PlOl
CP(C)- LC
HC
FA
ST
75/02/13
7b/u5/0l P1U1
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/05/Ul
75/06/01 PlUl
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/06/01
7S/U7/U1 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/U7/UJ.
75/uy/Ul PlUl
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
7b/U9/01
7b/lU/01 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/10/01
7b/ll/01 P101
CP(V)- AC
LC
HC
75/11/01

CK-GUIL WTP


/TYPA/IND/NTRTMT/OUTFL/PIPE

003UO 00301
DO DO
SATUR
MG/L PERCENT

10. fa








b.4
7.tt
a.o


7.5
7.2
7. a


7.6
7.3
7.b


8.0
7.0
10.4


8.4
7.8
y.o


9.5
8.b
10.6



00310
BOD
5 DAY
MG/L

1.5



20.0
1/7
CP


1.0
0.1
2.b


0.9
0.2
1.3


1.6
0.3
4.9


1.2
0.1
3.5


1.2
0.9
1.5


3.0
1.4
5.8



00400
PH

SU

7.90


6.00
9.00
1/7
CP


7.10
6.90
7.20


7.20
6.90
7.30


7.10
6.90
7.10


7.10
6.70
7.30


7.10
6.90
7.40


6.90
6.60
7.10

1
                     EF
                     3-3

-------
3.2  RETRIEVING EFFLUENT DATA VIA A STORET COMMAND PROCEDURE

The STORET command procedure named EFFRPT may also be used to
obtain output reports on effluent data stored within the WQF.
This procedure prompts the user for the information required to
perform the retrieval, such as the agency code, facility
identification, pipe numbers, and dates.

The procedure offers four report alternatives:

            - option 0 gives a summary of violations by
              facility,

            - option 1 gives a summary of violations by
              pipe,

            - option 2, the default option, gives a
              tabulation of all data available for
              parameters in violation only, and

            - option 3 gives a tabulation, for each
              facility specified in the retrieval, by
              discharge pipe number and by reporting date
              within pipe number of all parametric
              effluent data and permit conditions.  (This
              print option provides the maximum amount of
              output of the four options.)

(A reply of 'HELP1 to the 'PRINT OPTION (0-3)?' prompt within the
command procedure lists these four output options.)

Examples of the reports generated by the procedure's four print
options are provided below.
                               EF
                              3-4

-------
3.2.1   EXAMPLE  OF EFFRPT OUTPUT  USING  OPTION 0
   *• STCEBT EPKLUtNr REDOUT

  scooajjM WSSI:-:KN SLECTHC cc


   GiiANl) TOTALS
PKIHT CP1I0.1:0               RUN DA'i

           IJTALJ:  UNkEi'lLI PAfcflS:



                 UNKtfli) PAhllS:
05

VIOLATIONS:
3.2.2  EXAMPLE  OF EFFRPT OUTPUT  USING OPTION 1
• « :iTl)|.-i: SFFL'JENl ;:£?C-bl PRiM Ct>TlON:1
NCOOJ3301 UESTtRK ELEC'inil. CJ
MC0003JU' .ESIEtN SiLjICTIUl. L'C,
SC0033J01 .ESTtRH ELE-'TilC CO
IICOOOJJ}' riEoTlSB Ei.eC1hlC CO
NC00033)' JiSTiii.:! ELSCTi.IC Cf.
GRAND ."( TALS
PiPt
PlPE
P1P£
PIPS
ror

oiv
102
10J
IQl
ILS:

li-Jl, DATS: 7V1J/'JO
iJHnfPij PABMS
UNutplJ PAfc.lS
UHKhPi'u PAK.1S
UNBLPTD PAtnS
UNiihpTJ PAh^J
UNktFiJ PAhrlS
J VlCLiTlCKS
J5 VlULA'liChb
1U VIOLAriCKS
jb VIOLA11CNS
1^1 VIOLATIONS
Ul VIOLA11CNS
0
71
1
7
""
tiu
                                     EF
                                    3-5

-------
 3.2.3    EXAMPLE  OF  EFFRPT  OUTPUT  USING  OPTION   2
  ** STCRET EFFLUENT REPORT
                                       NC0003301   PRINT OPTIPN:2
                                                                                      RUN Dull :  79/1 C/05
FACILITY NC0003301   WESTERN ELECTRIC CO

   DISCHARGE PIPE NO. 102

     REPORTING DATE: 75C5C1
  PARAMETER
    CODE
00310     BOD    PUT COND
 •> OAT    MG/L   DHR VALS
00530   RESIDUE  PHI COND
TOT  NFLT  MG/L   DHR VALS
31616   FEC COLI  PHI COND
HFH-FCBR /100ML  DHK VALS
     REPORTING DATE: 750601
  PARAMETER
    CODE
00310     BOD
 5 DAY    MG/L
PMT  CONO
DHR  VALS
00530   RESIDUE   PMT COND
TOT  NFLT  MG/L   DMR VALS
31616   FEC COLI  PHI COND
HFM-FCBR /100ML   DMR VALS
     REPORTING DATE: 750701
  PARAMETER
    CODE
                  CONCENTRATION
              LON       AVE      HIGH
             155.0


               ISO
321.0


  240
                                20.0
                               465.C
 45
320
                                 NO REPORTED DATA
                 CONCENTRATION
              LOW       AVE      HIGH
             245.0


               140
497.0


  175
          20.0
         640.0
 45
260
                                 NO REPORTED DATA
                 CONCENTRATION
              LON       AVE      HIGH
                                                              LOW
                              LfcAblNl-
                                 «VE
HIGH   N/X   F/A   S/l

             1/V   Cf


             1/7   CP


             I/3C   CR
                                                                   NO REPORTED D«1A
                              LOAD INC,
                                 AVE
HIGI.   N/X   F/A   S/T

             1/7   CP


             1/7   Cl'


             1/3;-  GR
                                                                   NO REPORTED DATA
1 VIOL«IIDN(S)


I VIULM1DNIS)


? VULMICNtS)
1  VI PL » 110M S)


1  VIOLIUUN(S)


?  VICLM10MS)
                              LOCOING
                        LOW       AVE
                                                                               HIGH   N/X   ^/H   S/T
                                                        EF
                                                      3-6

-------
 3.2.4   EXAMPLE OF  EFFRPT  OUTPUT  USING  OPTION  3
     STDREI  EFFLUENT  REPORT
                            EFNC
                                     NC0003301   PRIN1  UPIIPN:3
                                                                                 RUN DATE: 79/1C/05
FACILITY NC&0033C1   WIS1ERN ELECTRIC  CO

   DISCHARGE  PIPE NO.  1C2

    REPORTING DATt: 75G501
PARAMETER
CODE
00310
5 DAY
004CO
00500
TOTAL
005 3C
TOT NFL1
00625
N
50050
FLDK
BOO
MG/L
PH
SU
RESIDUE
MG/L
RESIDUE
MG/L
10T KJEL
MG/L
CONDUIT
MGD
PMT
OMR
PMT
OMR
PMT
OMR
PMT
DMR
PMT
DMF.
PMT
DMR
COSD
VALS
CONO
VALS
CONO
VALS
COND
VALS
CUND
VALS
COND
VALS
CONCENTRATION
LOW AVE HIGH
20.0
155. C 321.0 <>t5.(.
6.00 -- 9. CO
7.00 7.BC P.50
«9C 613 69r
180 2«0 320
2.200 «.2GO 5.2CC
C.08G
0.013 0.03* O.D53
31616   FEC  CPLI PMT COND
MFM-FCBK /100ML  OMR VALS
    REPORTING DATE: 75G601
  PARAMETER
    CODE
                                                                 IdADlNl
                                                           LOW      AVt
                                                                           HIGH   N/X   F/A   S/l

                                                                                        1/7   CP


                                                                                        1/7   Cf-
00310
 b  DAY
         BOO
         MG/L
          PH
          SU
PNT CUND
OMR VALS
               PMT COND
               OIF VALS
                               NO REPORTED DATA
                               CONCENTRATION
                            LOU       AVE
                                                                NO Kf rOKTLl. L1ATA
                                                                                       1/1   Gi-


                                                                                       l/30  GK
                                                                                                  1 VIUK110NIS)
                                                                                                  1  VIDLtllUNIS)
                                                                 LO.'OING
                                    117.V
         2C/.0
        640.0
             6.00
             7.JO
         9.CO
7.50      7.BO
HIGH   N/X  F/A   S/T

            1/7  CP


            1/7  CP
                                                                                                  ? VI OL/. llGNti)
                                                                                                   VIOL»11UN(S)
                                                    EF
                                                   3-7

-------